Building Brands Fit For The Future


March 19th, 2012

Over the years, many individuals and companies have extolled the virtues of building brands in pharma, and have proposed different processes and approaches to building emotional benefits on top of functional benefits to create Brand Essences, Brand Wheels, Onions and Footprints.  Whilst historically these have been powerful tools in bringing pharma marketing to embrace ‘brand’, and are still essential in the overall thinking, it’s time for a debate about whether the traditional brand development process is dead.

The traditional model explored by most companies to date has sought to drive an emotional benefit from the functional attributes in context with goals of treatment.  Whichever model is used – and in truth they are all variations on a theme – they are founded in consumer marketing folklore where the end benefit is ‘how the end user feels’: the emotional benefit.  This appears outdated in our pharma future, which is focused on delivering value for each stakeholder, whether prescriber, patient, policymaker or payer.

Our past approach of looking at a brand as an augmented product no longer suffices in any health system where the drivers of choice are value based Health Outcomes in an environment of Sustainable Healthcare.

We have to accept that our world is directed by some key overarching principles: how does my drug help to meet unmet medical needs, how a drug better meets existing needs, expands access and enhances patient outcomes.

Concurrently, our traditional audience has also shifted away from the prescriber (especially the physician) towards the patient (normally in the form of the patient associations) and the payer. The demands here are not about ‘how I feel emotionally’, but instead about a value and economic justification of drug use for each of our stakeholders with a far greater emphasis on patient (Healthy Outcomes) and payer (Sustainable Healthcare).

That is not to say that Brand is to be regarded as a ‘dirty word’ in pharma.  On the contrary,  it has never been more important.

Ben Osborn, Commercial Portfolio Lead Europe, Oncology at Pfizer puts it aptly: “Unless we reach a point in time where decisions are purely made on clinical data in a robotic manner and such decisions rigorously enforced, then the psychological and emotional parts of the mind will continue to influence decisions. The smart marketers will realise that the brand needs to evolve and communicate clearly the value that the brand delivers to all stakeholders from payers and patients to prescribers.

“Brand development often starts too late in the drug development process and as such important insights and views from scientists and clinicians are often missed. Brand development should be planned from an early stage in the drug’s lifecycle and can appropriately be used to develop the clinical trial programme alongside very scientific and clinical data.”

The role of the brand is critical moving forward – but the way we view it, how we create it, and how we use and communicate it will be very different.  We must adapt our thinking to fit our industry, and not slavishly follow our marketing colleagues in fast moving consumer goods.

The Way We View Brand

A brand is a set of perceptions and images that represent a company, product or service. Whilst many people refer to a brand as a logo, tagline or audio jingle, it is actually much larger.  A brand is the essence or promise of what will be delivered or experienced.

Janis Clayton, VP and General Manager for UK & Ireland for Shire’s Human Genetic Therapies Business Unit, says that this point is often missed in pharma.

“Brand development often seems to focus too much on pantones, visual imagery and straplines rather than the long-term, sustainable vision of how the brand needs to develop with the needs/demands of a changing market.  There also appears to be little if any understanding of ‘brand equity’, with every new brand/product manager wanting to change the image as part of making their own personal mark.  A brand needs to reflect the quality, reliability and value of the product and a long-term, patent-life view needs to be taken.”

This promise of what will be delivered or experienced remains as true today as it did in the past – just, in pharma today, it is a completely different promise.

“Any marketer who has ever thought ‘the drug will sell itself’ is deluded and missing a major component of the human mind,” says Ben Osborn.  “Appealing to both the rational and emotional elements when marketing continues to be important in the pharma industry, but the degree to which each of these is considered and how they are communicated to the wide range of stakeholders has undoubtedly evolved in recent years, and will continue to do so.”

Thinking about our brand conveying some sort of purely high level emotional – some may even say ‘fluffy’ – benefit is no longer relevant.  Instead we must view it as the value it brings to the healthcare system.  It should convey the end benefits with a human, and hence more emotive, context relevant to the needs of our individual stakeholders.

Of course this human element can only be motivating, meaningful and differentiating if we truly understand the goals and needs of our stakeholders.  Trying to create a brand proposition that works everywhere and for everyone is as dead as the proverbial dodo.  There is no way today that any new brand can satisfy the needs of everyone (unless we have a drug that represents a real seed-change in treatment in an area of clear unmet medical need, e.g. a CURE for cancer) and as such we must view our brand in the way it will add value to a segment or segments, and not attempt to be ‘jack of all trades and master of none’ – so often the apparent goal of pharma marketers.

Paul Navarre, Vice-President Ophthalmology EAME at Allergan does see some merit in applying fmcg brand development processes in pharma, especially in being clear about the target.

“Pharma is very similar [to fmcg], but the environment is different, the constraints are different.  There is still a lot of conservatism, it is old-fashioned.  Compliance is the new excuse companies and marketers will take.  The confusion comes also from a lack of clarity on defining the target: patients versus physicians.”

Janis Clayton agrees: “The Pharma industry is often too insular and does not look outside to the approaches of other industries as often as it could.  I appreciate that in ‘ethical pharma’ we don’t advertise direct to patients and that we operate in a heavily regulated and restricted environment, but this seems even more reason to learn from all successful marketing campaigns, whatever the product/industry and learn how to apply what has worked well (and not to apply what hasn’t!).

“Much of this also requires a strong understanding of market segmentation which is also not a strength I have seen within the pharma industry, as you have to understand which target group you are aiming to appeal to with your particular brand.  Perhaps this is the bigger challenge.”

In the same way as Pot Noodle does not appeal to everyone who eats, but does ‘owns’ students (as my children at University will testify), our drug will not deliver value to every management situation but can be orientated to meet the distinct needs in certain particular ones.

And in the future that will be the defining moment for our BRAND.

A Future View of Creating a Brand

If we accept that brand is now much more about framing our drug in context with the desired end-benefits of treatment relevant to the individual stakeholder within the framework of Healthy Outcomes and Sustainable Healthcare, then how we create it must change commensurately.

No longer can it be about emotion, but it must be emotive.  No more fluffy promises and pictures of ‘happy patients’, but more about what it allows the healthcare system to do or achieve differently and the consequential value that this delivers, with a human context.  Of course, if stakeholders (our customers) do not see or experience value then they reserve the right to revert to lowest cost!

We must accept that payers are demanding more and more information on a drug’s safety and efficacy and more frequently require information on a drug’s cost-effectiveness compared to alternative treatments, whilst patients who are more health-literate need persuasive arguments to use effective medication and, increasingly, to pay for it.

All too often we hear the reaction to a basic target product profile setting out the efficacy, tolerability and safety, as David Digby, Director Global Marketing at Eisai states: “This profile is not exactly what we need for building a successful brand.  The evidence that has been developed doesn’t seem to address the needs of the segments that we should be trying to win based on the product’s potential and the commercially attractive unmet need in the market.

“This seems to be a result of the clinical trials having focused on standard clinical end-points, rather than those most pertinent to these target segments.  But I guess we will just have to work with what we have.”

A product that is designed to meet the needs of everybody ends up meeting nobody’s needs specifically, and the ‘efficacy-safety-tolerability’ approach to product development frequently results in a product with little scope for differentiation and in addition, it leads to less than ideal, generalist forecasts which may become obsolete shortly after launch.

I am not advocating an approach that focuses our brand on adding value to specific segments to the detriment of our labelling. Of course we must strive for the most appropriate label to meet our long term vision and commercial objective, but, as we all know, label does not equate to use. The label should be as wide as our trials and data allow. The brand should be focused on the segments where it adds most value.

Brand building must start during the product development phase – ideally in Phase 2b or 3 latest – and not when the product makes it to market. We must examine the multiple layers of our brand and ensure that the clinical development and registration trial data drive out the real value for each and all of our stakeholders.

It starts with our molecule but aims to build a pharmaceutical brand as soon as the likely TPP is created by designing Phase 3 clinical trials to deliver the endpoints to support messages that are differentiating and compelling in the patient segments you have identified as both attractive and suitable for your brand replacing product-led clinical development with market-facing brand development.

Another fundamental shift in our thinking and a marked difference from consumer marketing is that the brand in pharma should not be created by marketing, no matter how good their skills or the process advocated by their agencies and consultancies.  Brand creation for pharma must be the preserve of the cross-functional and multi-disciplinary team: only by embracing this approach can we genuinely address how our brand drives from the evidence base to how it helps stakeholders achieve something differently. And this and only this will define how successful our brand will be.

Our Onions and Wheels should be replaced by a brand process designed for pharma by pharma, and not one plagiarised from consumer marketing.

How We Use Brand and Communicate it

Having spent many valuable resources in developing brands, historically it all comes down to the campaign – do we like the pictures?

No!  As media has proliferated in the consumer world with the advent of multiple channels and delivery systems so our world in Pharma is changing.  No more huge sales forces, detail aids with graphs, tables and diagrams, and creative executions centred on smiling patients – but a multi-media, multi-platform approach.

As Ernst & Young set out in Pharma 3.0, the future is about how we embrace change and all that comes with it from vastly increased use of technology to disseminate information to multiple stakeholders; innovation in terms of how we engage with stakeholders; adapting to the challenges of working with payers and patients; and orientating all our communication around the critical drivers of Managing Patient Outcomes, Expanding Access and Meeting Unmet Medical Needs.

Those who hide behind regulations or absence of guidance from the regulatory bodies are in danger of ‘missing the boat’.  We must be prepared for the day when we will be communicating our brands to our customers via totally new devices and media that we must ensure are consistent with our brand.

Fit for the Future?

In my view is that the traditional brand development process is well and truly dead – but brands remain critical for pharma into the foreseeable future.

My manifesto for future pharma brand development is as follows:

  • Our desire to communicate at an emotional level has been replaced by the need to communicate at an emotive one.
  • Expressing emotional benefits has been superseded by the need to express benefits in a more human way.
  • Brand is no longer about an augmented product, but about demonstrating value to each and every stakeholder in context with what our drug brands allow them to achieve differently.
  • Brands are to be created by cross-functional teams not by marketing alone; they cannot focus on nebulous benefits at an individual clinician level.  They must embrace demonstrating (with an appropriate evidence base build-up during the development phases) how they deliver enhanced and measureable patient outcomes, access and meet unmet or unsatisfied medical needs to deliver against the agendas of our stakeholders, namely, Healthy Outcomes and Sustainable Healthcare.

About the author

Chris Marks is Partner and Brand Services Principal at the MSI Consultancy

Small Pharma: What does the future hold for the small, specialised Pharma Company?


March 13th, 2012

We are all aware that Big Pharma has been seeking to successfully re-invent the way it does business. A commercial model less exposed to the substantial revenue decline of megabrands at patent loss, with more productive R&D and that considers the increasing demands of regulators, payers and end users, appears to be the answer.

One strategy has been investing in brands for specialist orphan and rare disease markets. Research showed that in 2009 Big Pharma accounted for 43% of all orphan drug approvals (Frost and Sullivan, Orphan and Rare Diseases, Life Science Leader, October 2010), almost twice the volume of a few years previously.  Additional research by Braun et al in 2010 cited that in the US an increasing number of the new molecular entities (NMEs) approved by the FDA each year are in the orphan drug category – approximately 30% of NME approvals.

2010 also saw new standalone R&D Units by GSK and Pfizer, dedicated solely to the development and commercialisation of medicines for rare diseases.  And it’s not just about R&D; Big Pharma continues to buy its way in, for example the $20.1 billion acquisition of Genzyme in April 2011 by Sanofi-Aventis.

Why the interest?  Despite smaller overall revenues, these markets offer a highly lucrative environment in which Big Pharma can diversify corporate risk.  Lower investment in clinical development, infrastructure and marketing expenditure means better profitability. Companies can readily invest in several of these brands simultaneously, spreading corporate risk from one or two blockbusters across different brands and markets.

For those of us already working hard in these smaller more specialist markets, what are the implications of this move?

There are two likely scenarios; the first is the potential for partnership. Big Pharma offers an opportunity to bring in expertise, resource and otherwise unavailable capabilities. Consider how Amicus Therapeutics and their lead therapy Amigal, a novel therapy for the ultra-orphan Fabry’s disease has benefited from their alliance with GSK, with the second phase III study announced in September 2011.

However, in the majority of cases, having Big Pharma in the marketplace is more likely to be as a new, highly skilled and well-resourced competitor – scenario two.

We are going to focus on scenario two – what a European team should consider when facing a new Big Pharma competitor.

Undoubtedly, new competitors will have a significant impact on the market. For continued success you and your local operating companies (LOCs) need to understand how opportunities across your different markets might change, what new challenges arise and what you’ll need to do to remain competitive.

It is very likely that your new Big Pharma competitor will be well resourced, with cash, advanced organisational skills and geographic scope. Therefore, to be successful in this changed environment, you’ll have to ensure you and local affiliates all work smarter, together. You’ll need to make the most of your assets, the freedom and flexibility of your less centralised small Pharma network and your market expertise. You all need to be confident that you’re doing the right things and doing those things right.

Here are three questions to consider:

1.    How can we ensure that we’ll not be caught out by any changes resulting from a new competitor entering our markets?

2.    As marketers, what can we do better to ensure that in this changed world we’re still activating those customers that drive our business?

3.    Given comparatively less resources, what can we do to make sure we’re getting the most from our spend?

1. How can we ensure that we’ll not be caught out by any changes resulting from a new competitor entering our markets?

The dynamics of our markets will unquestionably change.

We must evaluate the reaction to this new competitor in each of our markets and understand the implications for our European strategy. How will our customers’ attitudes change? What strategies and tactics will this new competitor use to win, and use against us?

Only once we are confident of what is likely to happen across our markets, can we test how well our strategy will perform. We can then identify our competitive priorities and where necessary, adjust our strategies to be future-proof.

Most organisations have good competitive intelligence in the forms of facts, figures and historic analysis. However, in this situation looking at history and current performance doesn’t help – we need to try to predict the most likely future. One way to do that is by ‘War- Gaming’.

War-Gaming, is a role playing workshop, where you become your competition. By stepping into their shoes, your team together with your affiliates develop an informed prediction of the most likely reaction of the market, the competitors’ own brand strategy and their most likely counter strategy against you.

With this insight, you are able to pressure test your current intentions and uncover what (if any) changes you might need to make.

Additionally, everyone gains valuable insight into the workings, thinking and priorities of your most important competitors.

2. As marketers, what can we do better to ensure that in this changed world we’re still activating those customers that drive our business?

In many orphan markets, the numbers of prescribing customers, potential or actual, can be quite small. However, the number of people (stakeholders) who impact the use of the medicine can be far more complex and vary by market.

Given the increased importance of optimising our defence against any newcomer, we need to ensure we really understand the true drivers among that diverse range of stakeholders and the implications for use of an orphan drug, namely the barriers, positive drivers, true needs and what really activates those customers to drive our business.

How can we ensure that our market research is delivering the insight we need?

1.            Clearly define the critical business issue you need to address, confirm or reject market ‘truths’ and identify any knowledge gaps against an initial hypothesis

2.            Ensure research objectives are clear, appropriate and focused. Challenge and agree the methodology to maximise results

3.            Involve affiliates throughout the process to ensure buy-in to the findings and help keep this small specialist audience onside

4.            During fieldwork, ensure focus on the key research questions and as often as possible attend qualitative research in person

5.            Make sure the debrief answers ALL your questions

Why spend money on research if it isn’t going to help drive business, ensure buy in and provide practical output?

3. Given comparatively less resources, what can we do to ensure we’re getting the most from our spend?

We need to know that given our limited resources the budget is really working and working as hard as possible.

This can be done in two steps:

1.            Be entirely clear on the barriers to growth and our priority commercial challenges

2.            Develop a transparent and realistic view on our return on investment (ROI)

Both are closely linked. Through your planning process, build a detailed picture of the barriers to growth, the levers to drive change and thus your commercial challenges; you can then focus on ROI there.

Getting ROI right requires a detailed and objective understanding of where revenue can be generated and is currently lost. This can be done using a tool such as the Patient Flow, which enables us to identify where we can drive business growth and the behaviour changes needed to drive sales.

Once we know the changes in behaviour required, we can define SMART tactical objectives and prioritise the marketing and sales activities needed to deliver them. By being clear on where we will drive growth, we can clearly link the prioritised activities to the commercial uplift.

ROI analysis often fails because it is based on marketing plans where activities have no clear link to outcomes or the opportunities in the market.

In summary, Big Pharma is moving into smaller more specialist markets so you’ll need to have a well prepared plan in place. It’s essential for both the EU team and the local affiliates to be confident that you are all doing the right things, and doing them right. We propose you start by considering 3 different areas:

1.         Make sure you’re confident there will be no surprises in the future, you have a consensus view and that you and your strategies are well prepared for the most likely eventualities

2.         Gain as much advantage through your marketing effort as you can by ensuring you activate those customers that drive your business

3.         And ensure you are doing it right. Check that your budget is working as hard as it can by linking any investment directly to your major sales drivers and opportunities.

About the author

Michael Craig is an Associate Partner at the MSI Consultancy, with a particular interest in orphan and specialist healthcare.

Using The Corporate Brand In Pharma: Rebuilding The ‘House Of Brands’


March 13th, 2012

In many markets – especially consumer markets – the corporate brand can add significant value and values to the portfolio of product brands and franchises.  Yet in pharma it plays little or no role, other than in communication with and to financial markets – when it comes to the brand that clinicians, payers and patients see, it is almost always about the product brand.  The corporate brand has little equity with these key audiences.

And yet the pharma market is one which is traditionally steeped in the values of heritage and trust.  Surely, as product differentials become ever smaller as competition increases, the corporate brand could be a powerful extra dimension to building competitive advantage.  Is this another area where our industry should sit up and take some learning from our fmcg colleagues?

In the last decade, corporate brands have become very strong drivers of financial value for corporations.  Corporate brands in themselves have become valuable assets on the company balance sheet, with market values very often much beyond book value.

Look at the value attributed to the corporate brand in the Interbrand ‘2011 Ranking of the Top 100 Brands’: at number one was Coca-Cola with a brand asset value of nearly $72bn; Google was fourth with a value of over $55bn; and Apple ranked eighth at almost $34bn.

Where are the big healthcare brands?  The only one in the Top 100 is Johnson and Johnson, ranked at no 85 with a value of £4bn – below the likes of Tiffany & Co, Adobe and Barclays.

Although the pharmaceutical industry has had some major product brand successes – think Prozac, Botox and Viagra – demonstrating the integration of strong product branding into everyday practice, what about the image of the companies themselves?

Does the corporate brand in pharmaceuticals have no value?  Obviously not – but it is not a vehicle that we, as an industry, have focused on in the past.  Is it time to change this thinking?

Brand Architecture

Before we start the debate about the role of the corporate brand in pharma, let’s start with an understanding of how brand architectures are used in other markets, particularly consumer markets.

Think of the brand architecture as its family tree or hierarchy.  It is how an organisation organises the various named entities within its portfolio, and how they relate to each other.  Ideally, the brand architecture is simple, with no more than two levels: corporate and sub-brands.  In fact, brand or sub-brand is the type of architecture most often used.  It takes a number of forms, each of which will include one or some of the following.

Corporate Brand

The Corporate brand is the brand bearing the company name.  It is always the highest in a brand hierarchy.  Examples are Sony, Apple, Nestlé, Colgate and L’Oreal.  It is the dominant, highest level brand in the hierarchy.

Master Brand

A master brand is the brand that covers ‘ranges’, and is a brand that can extend into more than one product category.  It sits in the space between the corporate brand (if it is used at all) and the sub-brand.  Examples include Listerine (a complete range of mouthwashes from Johnson & Johnson), McVities (the range of biscuits from United Biscuits) and Fairy (the range of cleaning products from Procter & Gamble); note that none of these overtly references the corporate brand.

Sub-brand

A sub-brand is a new brand that is combined with a corporate/master brand in the brand identity system.  The sub-brand can make the corporate brand more vital and relevant to a new consumer segment or within a new product category.  Examples are Nescafé (Coffee from Nestlé) and Total (Dental hygiene range from Colgate).

Product brand

A product brand is a product or service made distinctive by its positioning relative to the competition and by its own personality.  Brands represent the tangible and intangible benefits provided by a product which can be identified with the entire customer experience.  A brand includes all the assets critical to delivering and communicating that experience: the name, the design, the advertising, the product, the distribution channel, the reputation.

Endorsed Brand

An endorsed brand is the primary name the consumer is intended to use to refer to a product.  It is a brand that is endorsed by the parent or corporate brand in the brand identity system.  The parent brand is also identified with the product; however, the endorsed brand is given much greater visual weight than the parent brand.  In this situation, the corporate or parent brand lends credibility or assurance to the endorsed brand without overpowering it with its own associations.  Examples include Dasani, the water brand from Coca-Cola; and famously, immediately post the take-over, Skoda was endorsed by the new parent, VW.

The House of Brands

The pharma industry is at a decisive point of change, as competition increases and product brands’ patent lifecycles get ever shorter.  So I would argue that now is the time to revisit the relationship of our product brands with our longer-lasting corporate brands.

For years, pharma companies have followed the ‘house of brands’ strategy, focusing resources almost exclusively on building awareness and trust in product brands, often at the expense of the corporate brand. The result is that many consumers don’t even know the company that makes their daily prescriptions, as many corporations have discovered.

Yet pharmaceutical product brands don’t stay in the limelight for long.  The patent framework within which the industry functions begs the question: what will be around in 15 or 20 years’ time?  To find the answer, you could ask yourself which of the product brands from 20 years ago are still relevant today.  The one long term constant is the corporate entity behind the product (albeit that these have also evolved).  So, investment in and management of the corporate brand is essential.

Of course there are potential pitfalls in devoting more resources to developing corporate pharma brands.  What is the impact on the corporate brand if a product causes significant adverse events – if that product carried the corporate brand prominently, what would be the impact on other product brands in the company’s portfolio bearing the corporate brand – would they be damaged by more explicit association?  Think Vioxx.  (But it happens anyway – look at the MSD share price.)

If there was a production failure, what would be the impact on the corporate brand?  Think Cerezyme and Genzyme.

What if your products and services do not fit together under one brand promise, personality and position?  Think about the role of Novartis (branded pharmaceuticals) and its subsidiary Sandoz (primarily generics and biosimilars) – actually a good example of the use of the corporate brand in our industry.

The problem is that corporate branding is a long-term project, in an industry that sees product sales peak and peter out in less than a decade.  To build a corporate brand is time consuming. There’s what you say, then how consistently you say it and for how long.  You have to be a fantastic company for at least five to ten years before people believe it – and you can lose that reputation in 30 seconds.

Corporate branding is a serious undertaking which entails more skills and activities than just an updated glossy marketing facade with empty jargon.

The Advantages of a Strong Corporate Brand

I sense that these potential pitfalls have been the things which have held back the pharma industry from giving its corporate brands a stronger role.  Yet there are undoubted benefits from doing this, especially in an ever more rapidly changing marketplace.

A strong brand is no less or more than the face of the business strategy, hence portraying what the corporation aims at doing and what it wants to be known for in the market place.  Think of HSBC, which has successfully implemented a stringent corporate branding strategy.  They employ the same common expression throughout the globe with a simple advertising strategy based on the line ‘The world’s local bank’.  This creative platform enables the corporation to bridge between many cultural differences, and to portray many faces of the same strategy.

A strong corporate branding strategy can add significant value in terms of helping the entire corporation and the management team to implement the long-term vision, create unique positions in the marketplace of the company and its brands, and not the least unlock the leadership potential within the organisation.  Hence such a strategy can enable the corporation to further leverage on its tangible and non-tangible assets leading to Branding Excellence throughout the corporation.

It also creates simplicity, as it always will stand on top of the brand portfolio as the ultimate identifier of the corporation.  P&G has notoriously been known for a multi-brand strategy and yet again, the corporate brand P&G is still what encapsulates all activities by the company.

Depending on the business strategy (and the potential need for more than a one-brand architecture in the case of P&G which markets many different brands under their umbrella), a corporate brand can very often assist the corporation and the management to focus in on the core vision and values.  Once this overall platform has been established and implemented, it serves as a great stepping stone for revisiting any other brands in the corporation’s portfolio, to adopt a new approach and look at the various brand identities.

A strong corporate brand instils trust and loyalty – extremely important qualities in the pharmaceutical industry.  Such confidence can help propel a company through uncertain times.  However, keeping product brands at an arm’s length from the corporate brand (and the other products in its house) ensures a cushion should one product falter.

It is also about building and maintaining strong perceptions in the minds of customers.  This takes time to establish and many resources to keep.

Meeting New Commercial Needs

Our industry has recently experienced considerable M&A activity, downsizing, integration and diversification of portfolios.  In the coming years, with patent expiry and loss of exclusivity on a number of the blockbuster brands that drove revenue streams in previous decades, end users will demand more targeted therapies.

I believe this has led to a significant change in the role that brand can and does play within our space, whether it be strengthening the product brand proposition or bringing the corporate brand into play for the first time.  The role that brand plays at both a product and corporate level is rapidly changing to meet the needs of the newer commercial models.

It is up to those leading the pharmaceuticals companies to challenge the current brand model.  The focus can no longer be solely on promoting product brands through a ‘house of brands’ approach.  Rather, industry leaders should use brands – all brands (corporate, product, category) – in a smarter way.  And, in some cases, this may involve industry leaders changing their respective brand models altogether.

Some of them will be inclined to shy away from exploring alternative brand models due to the risk associated with linking the corporate name to the products.  But the proliferation and acceleration of traditional media, combined with the instantaneous consumer dialogue of digital/social media outlets, is making our world and our industry increasingly transparent.

As such, the separation between product and manufacturer can no longer be artificially maintained.  It is important for industry leaders to recognise this and understand that they can benefit from a more confident and assertive approach – one that elevates the role of the corporate brand and capitalises on the upside gains and loyalty that such an approach can create.

The life of the Enterprise

The founder of Sony, Akio Morita, once said: “I have always believed that the company name is the life of an enterprise. It carries responsibility and guarantees the quality of the product.”  The core value of a brand is derived from its ability to drive demand, loyalty, retention and purchasing power.  Therefore, a strong and well-balanced corporate brand orchestrated throughout the corporation by a passionate CEO and his team can lead to very successful and sustainable financial results.

In recognising corporate brand value as a strategic business and financial asset, leaders in pharma will be able to drive demand, loyalty, retention and purchasing power for their respective organisations – all of which will subsequently translate into the measurement of a balance sheet asset, earnings and shareholder value.

Let me finish by asking you some questions to enable you to assess the value of your current brands, and what role your corporate brand should play in the mix:

How can your corporate brand create value for your organisation and its shareholders?

Does your corporate brand promise match your long-term business strategy?

Has your commercial model changed significantly in the last three to five years?  Does your brand model properly align to any change in your commercial model?

Are you maximising the revenue potential of your product, portfolio, and corporate brands?

Are your people (employees) fully engaged with your corporate brand?  Do they live the brand?

How you answer these questions – not in words but in actions – will go a long way in determining whether we lead the inevitable evolution of our industry, or lag behind.  To avoid falling back, it seems inevitable that the corporate brand must play a bigger role in our industry.  Now is the time to be brave, show confidence and once again learn from fmcg.

The Author

Chris Marks is Partner and Brand Services Principal at The MSI Consultancy Ltd.

Seeing The Return of Brand Optimisation, or Put Another Way ‘How Do You Eat An Elephant…?’


March 13th, 2012

Brand managers have to invest a huge amount of time every year preparing brand plans – but all too often they have to do this without really knowing what actually drives the business or what really worked last time. Sometimes this is about a lack of market insight – but more often it’s due to not having the time efficient tools to rapidly frame the strategic implications of the information they have, or quantify what to do about it.

In addition, it is common practice for financial targets to be set from on high and marketers then propose how they intend to spend this budget to get there. The problem is that in reality the plan then rarely bears a direct relation to the forecast. If the target changes, the plan rarely does. Marketers just do their best given what they know, which if they don’t know specifically what drives the business, does not give them much confidence in their plan when it comes under scrutiny.

Then comes the plan review sessions with senior management. In these sessions senior managers get to throw tough questions at brand managers, who they know have little way of knowing what their plans will actually deliver. How do they know this?  Well they have all been there before themselves.  So history repeats itself with nobody really having the accurate information to forecast the returns of marketing.  And of course they don’t want to admit they have no idea – a bit like ‘the emperor has no clothes’ analogy – but ‘the plan has no clothes’.

So is this seemingly haphazard approach just the problem that as marketers we have to accept, or is there a different approach? Understanding the returns of marketing has long been seen as the elephant in the room’. Something so huge that most don’t dare to even conceive how they might take it on. Others have tried and tell stories of data analysis that equate to trying to boil the ocean. But, anyone who knows the old adage about ‘how you eat an elephant’, knows that to make it manageable you have to break it into bite size chunks!

So how do we do this? Fortunately, something has changed since your boss’s boss was a marketer…technology! There are now simple online software tools we can use to help us, that break this complex and seemingly ‘elephant sized’ process into bite size chunks. The tools available mirror a tried and tested ROI thinking process that we have used in the industry for a few years now, but take out the grind and calculation pains of doing it. As illustrated below in this end output showing the returns by activity.

However, before we discuss these tools, let’s first dispel the myth that you need cartloads of data to undertake effective resource optimization. In practice, you probably hold more information in your head about your brands than you give yourself credit for. Working out how to catch a ball doesn’t require calculus, because you can rely on learnt intuition. Likewise, putting your money where you’ll get the biggest bang for your buck doesn’t always require lots of data or the building of some huge mathematical ROI model. By breaking down the link between what you spend and what you earn into bite size chunks, you can make reasonable estimates that give you good visibility of possible resource misallocations in your plan. Later on your market research manager or an agency can validate this. So having no data to hand is a bad excuse for not checking whether your plan is going to get you where you want to be going.

Here are five bite size chunks to help you eat that elephant…

1.    Focus on the REAL opportunity

2.    Concentrate on the REAL CSFs

3.    Check that your tactical objectives are truly SMART

4.    Ensure your Market Research Manager is actively tracking the KPIs that really matter

5.    Make sure you are spending the right amount on the right initiatives

Chunk 1 – Focus on the REAL opportunity

Here we use the patient flow to identify where there is a need or opportunity for marketing intervention and look at the scope for increasing the volume or value of patients.  This gives us an accurate forecast of what share of the market we could expect for our brands, resulting in a much more accurate overview of where the real opportunities exist for growing our business.

Chunk 2: Concentrate on the REAL CSFs?

The key to this chunk is to have a view on where revenue is most likely to be generated and what are the barriers of growth that need to be overcome. A question you need to ask yourself is ‘what are the critical things that need to happen to overcome these bottlenecks and drive growth?’ While we all like an easy life, in reality they are unlikely to be exactly the same factors as you identified last year. In marketing if it ain’t broke…it soon will be. So play one step ahead rather than sitting back and hoping that things will stay the same.

For example, a few years ago Plavix (clopidogrel) had exhausted the % of scripts for suitable patients they could win over from just using Aspirin for reducing the risk of restenosis in post-stent patients. Looking at patient volume drivers, they appeared to have reached the maximum potential. However, when we looked at patient value drivers, we found a very different story. Patients were being put on Plavix by the cardiologist and then, once back in the community; GPs gave them the much cheaper Aspirin, rather than a repeat Rx! So even while EU Guidelines suggested 10 months on clopidogrel post-stent, the reality in many EU countries was more like 1-2 months. Plavix had a hidden opportunity to increase the segments sales value by at least 5 times through the CSF of “Getting GPs to comply with EU 10 month duration guidelines”.

To check whether you are concentrating on the right CSFs for your brand you need to build a patient flow model.

The patient flow should reflect revenues for today and identify where the opportunities for growth are:

  1. Where there are bottlenecks in patients flowing into Sales (e.g. only 10% of diagnosed patients getting a Rx), or value per patient e.g. improving compliance)
  2. The relative % uplift possible in the planning period e.g. it may not be possible to significantly impact bottlenecks higher up the patient flow, such as % of patients consulting a doctor

Chunk 3: Ensure your tactical objectives are truly SMART?

SMART tactical objectives are one of those things we all know about but often don’t actually apply. In the context of planning the acronym should really stand for:

Specific to stakeholder
To check this put your CSFs in the middle of a blank sheet of paper and mind map who the key stakeholders are that need to be influenced to achieve your CSFs. Now for each stakeholder, map out what needs to be achieved with them, e.g. GPs issuing repeat Plavix prescriptions for 10 months.

Measurable over the year (KPIs)
How will you measure your progress (e.g. % GPs reporting to prescribe Plavix for 10 months)? You need to check that your objective can be

  1. Measured at the end of the year
  2. Tracked during the year (Key Performance Indicator KPI) to let you know whether you are on track, while you can still do something about it

Point 2 is normally the more challenging and may require a proxy indicator that tells you in advance if you are on track. For example, it will take 10 months for GPs who have changed their prescribing habits to reach 10 months of compliance, to be able to say they are now prescribing according to EU guidelines. So how do you know if you are on track in the meantime? You need a KPI. For example: ‘% of GPs who recognise why Plavix’s benefits over Aspirin make a difference for post-stent patients’ would be a first indicator of a change in attitude.

Achievable within the planning period
The time it takes to achieve growth differs by the type of activity you are undertaking. A general rule of thumb is that the higher up the patient flow you go the longer it takes for the changes to follow through. For example, you can realistically within a year increase GPs repeat scripts if you already have a large GP sales force and guidelines to work with (e.g. in the case of Plavix). However, if you identified that only 10% of patients who medically should get a stent (and then Plavix thereafter) are actually getting one, it would take a long time to change this e.g. partnerships with stent manufacturers, facilitation of guidelines etc. Therefore, to increase the patient pool might take years before you bear the fruits of your labour.

So be realistic about what is achievable within the planning period you are looking at.

Relevant to the CSF
Remember, all tactical objectives should stem from a CSF. If not then we need to think what is its strategic purpose? Don’t create unnecessary work for yourself but focus on doing a few things and doing them well.

You also need to consider timings and know if you are on track or not as you go along.  Ask yourself, ‘What will you have achieved by when?’ The tactical objective should state the objective within a specific time eg a 12-month period. The KPIs that tell you are on track in the interval should also have levels in mind for set review points –these should usually be undertaken quarterly.

Chunk 4: Ensure your Market Research Manager is actively tracking the KPIs that really matter

We all get very used to tracking the same data month after month and reassure ourselves that some of it must being doing some good. After all, you show those same graphs to everyone and everyone else shows you theirs, so there must be something in it. If this sounds all too familiar, then you are probably suffering from a ‘comfort in numbers’ problem. However be warned, this is the same reason that lemmings will all run off a cliff together!

The bad news is that different brands are at different stages in the product lifecycle and have different CSFs and tactical objectives; therefore they should be tracking completely different things. You may be measuring what feels like everything but are you doing anything with it? Or, are you on irrelevant data overload? Are you tracking what really matters for your tactical objectives? If you are unsure about the answer, here is a quick check to do:

List out all your tactical objectives and write down how you will measure each of them, as well as the KPIs you also need to track during the year.  Now ask your Market Research Manager to look into which of these they are tracking for you and subsequently, what other superfluous data they are also tracking for you. Then, when they come back to tell you that they are only tracking half of what actually matters, ask them to cut any superfluous data that doesn’t relate to your tactical objectives and your plan, and spend the savings on measuring things that do matter. Suddenly you’ll find yourself looking at a dashboard of data you need, rather than reams of ‘might one day be useful’ data. This will do wonders for your time management, as well as reduce the number of graphs in your presentations.  And even better still, involve your Market Research Manager in helping to set the KPIs in the first place.

Chunk 5: Make sure you are spending the right amount on the right initiatives

Our first chunk gave you a rule of thumb view of misalignment and how to improve resource allocation. However, true optimization requires a more sophisticated approach that’s made much easier if you’ve been measuring what matters. With the right historical tracking, you can reliably estimate the impact your initiatives are having, as illustrated below:

By this point you are probably really starting to see that having a tool to do all the calculations for you is very worthwhile for making this process time-efficient and thus likely to happen in practice.

So, in summary, if we make a concerted effort to break down our ‘elephant’ into smaller, bite size chunks as illustrated above, we can make the planning process a much more accurate and scientific process with an infinitely better outcome.  Rather than relying on our gut instinct ignoring the ‘elephant in the room’ where we might be avoiding an obvious problem or risk no one wants to discuss just because it has always been addressed in that way. Furthermore, now the ‘joined up planning’ tools exist to do this for you what’s stopping you from realising the dream of generations of marketers and actually seeing the returns of your marketing efforts. Oh, and since you were thinking it…don’t worry they do generally look good in pharma but could always look even better and accelerate growth!

About the author

Alex Blyth is Managing Director of Cello Business Sciences.

Interactive Article – Building Brands Fit For The Future


November 28th, 2011

MSI Have published the first of a series of interactive articles – Building Brands Fit For The Future. This was originally published in print in the October edition of Pharmafocus but this interactive edition includes a video introduction and wrap-up from the author, Chris Marks, along with a side-bar article and additional video contributions from industry luminaries.

Using eChannels to lever in a focus on ROI


July 27th, 2011

The rise of e-channels in pharmaceutical marketing have given rise to a renewed focus on tracking effectiveness – because these are perceived to be a part of the marketing mix which is easily measured.  As a result, those responsible for e-channels are often to be found leading the way in driving forward ROI tracking.

But there is no value in simply tracking one channel when you have nothing else to compare it to.  How do you know whether to put more, or fewer, resources into that one channel than into another, if you don’t know what those other channels are delivering.

There has been much study into the add-on value that e-channels bring to a pharma marketing set-up, but increasingly the biggest effect they are having is to shine a spotlight on the inadequate ROI tracking right across the piece.  They have brought in a higher level of awareness of the need to track everything in order to monitor the effectiveness both of each individual channel, and of the whole.

It is interesting how much we at MSI are finding ourselves brought into an organisation as a result of a perceived need to build effectiveness monitoring processes for these new e-channels – then finding that task extended into improving ROI measurement in traditional, offline channels as well.

If e-channels have done nothing else, they have levered in a focus on more effective ROI measurement, which can only be a good thing for the whole of pharma marketing.

Measuring the Gaps

I would like to illustrate this by introducing you to a real-life case study where this happened.  Their situation is far from unique, and many of the learnings and models which we took away will surely have resonance with many other companies in the industry.

We were called in by a significant player in the industry, and one which has a range of brands in different therapeutic areas.  Like many, they had asked for help because they knew they had a measurement problem, and their perception was that this problem was in the new e-channels, presumably because they assumed that effective measurement was already happening in the more traditional areas of marketing.

Experience tells us that our first task should always be to ascertain the real extent and scope of the need, rather than how it is perceived by the in-house team, who with the best will in the world, may not be able to see the wood for the trees.  So we set about looking at areas where the measurement itself was insufficient, but also at how well they were using what information they did have to make decisions.

Perhaps we shouldn’t be surprised by this, but the e-channels didn’t have a huge gap on the measurement side, although there were weaknesses in how they were using that information.  But the biggest measurement gaps were in HELMs (Health Economics Liaison Managers), MSL (Medical Science Liaison) and Med-Ed, although interestingly both HELMs and Med-Ed were making the best of the information they did have.

But in fact no single area was well covered off, and so the task quickly widened from looking at e-channels to creating a training deck which would help the team understand how they could improve their business planning and tracking to improve business performance.

Putting the Intelligence into Business

The relationship between business intelligence teams and teams of marketers is crucial here.  Traditionally the latter has regarded the former as mere information gatherers.  We figured out that they needed to be more than that, and we set about making them ‘Business Performance Champions’.  This use of language reflects an important difference: rather than just gathering information, they would become people who could use that information to help make the right decisions.

Three things needed to happen before we could make this work.  First, the business intelligence people needed to understand the marketing strategy side behind decision-making, which meant upskilling them.

Secondly, we had to give them the tools to do the job, which meant software which would enable them to properly analyse different scenarios and alternative resource allocation, using the information they had gathered.

But perhaps the biggest challenge was the cultural one.  Unfortunately, there is a tendency amongst marketers to regard business intelligence people as number-crunchers, and as such they don’t hold much sway in the marketing arena.  They are not seen as understanding the decisions; pharma tends to exist in a very two-dimensional world, where marketers do the thinking, and analysts do the numbers.

Once again we can learn from the business world outside pharma here.  The really successful people in top businesses are basically business minds.  They have both eyes open, whereas too often in pharma, the marketers have the left eye open and the business intelligence people have the right eye open.  To be a business performance champion you need both eyes open.

It sounds simple, but it’s not.  This is a significant cultural change for everyone, and that is not a ‘one hit’ task, it takes time.  It is all very well providing business intelligence people with the knowledge they needed to be performance champions, but that doesn’t overcome the frequent lack of confidence when it comes to sitting in a meeting with marketers, who often have a sales background, and are therefore generally articulate and persuasive people.

By contrast – and I accept this is a generalisation – business intelligence people often went into that field because they are most comfortable with numbers and analysis.  This can mean that in a group situation, the dynamic sometimes works against them.  Inevitably, decisions are made on the basis of who sounds most convincing.

So we set about trying to get the business intelligence people to puff their chests out a little bit and be more confident – and to persuade marketers to accept that and listen.  And that is quite a big cultural change!

The Tools for the Job

Getting the two teams to accept the need for better measurement and work together to drive business performance was one thing; providing them with the processes and tools to do it was quite another.  Essentially we had to guide both teams how to quantify the returns of different strategies and Critical Success Factors (CSFs); then we had to develop SMART tactical objectives to realise those opportunities; and then track and optimise the campaigns.

To make sense of this, we broke down the plan into key areas for excellence, so that we could identify the gaps against what might be termed best practice.  We came up with six of these key areas for excellence, and identified what best practice looked like in each:

  1. Review the previous plan: Planning should start with a review and learning from the last plan, and include metrics quantifying where you are against where you can realistically go.
  2. Track what is relevant to CSFs: The plan should quantify strategic objectives you realistically want to achieve, as well as what channels and KPIs will help you get there.
  3. Tactical objectives: Use SMART tactical objectives that link CSFs to key programmes in a measurable way.
  4. Tracking: Consistent tracking, and acting on key metrics using champion-advised approach, with key review points.
  5. Reporting and analysis tools: Consistent, simple reporting tools should show the returns of different CSFs, tactical objectives and key programmes – to show what’s working.
  6. Outputs for decision-making and optimisation: The plan needs to provide a business case showing the returns of different CSFs, tactical objectives and key programmes – and that they are optimal.

One of the major problems we discovered when comparing actual practice against best practice revolved around the CSFs.  The company was struggling with these, because they often had CSFs which were overlapping each other, so they couldn’t kill one thing and put resource into another, because they were all interlinked.

Often too they were working up and down the patient flow with each CSF – it wasn’t linked to a specific point in the patient flow  This meant that they had kept the same CSFs in place for four year, because no-one could argue to kill any of them off.

The other major issue was that they had no way of putting SMART tactical objectives in place.  Because all they were really using were the sales and market share numbers – which of course can be influenced by all sorts of factors – they didn’t actually know whether their marketing strategy was performing well or badly.

This is not uncommon, and the imperative here is to understand the SMART tactical objectives so that you can break down the ‘elephant’ and see just the bit that is relevant to the programmes you are running, without interference from other, external factors.

From all of this we developed what we called the ‘Circle of Success for Tracking and Planning’, which showed in a graphic way the circular nature of what we were trying to achieve (figure 1).

Figure One

Success Gates

Of course, it is unrealistic to change from a situation where there are so many gaps to one where best practice is being carried out across the board, and so we came up with a system to identify the priority areas for action.  For each of the five boxes in the Circle of Success, we identified a number of ‘Success Gates’ – lists of things which needed to be done to achieve success in each box.

So, for example, the box called ‘Identify CSFs and channel Focus’ had four actions: putting an underlying forecast in place, quantifying the impact of external environmental factors, estimating the potential marketing uplift and identifying CSFs.  For each action, we gave a traffic light colour: green meant best practice was being achieved (there weren’t many of these); amber was an 80% ‘good enough’ (for now; and red was where urgent action was required.

This we were able to agree what was an acceptable level of success in year one, year two, and so on, until all the Success Gate flags were green.  It’s important to set realistic targets within a particular timescale, if you try and do everything immediately you are doomed to failure.  In this way, you can work out the important things which you absolutely must do from day one.

Robust Metrics

Having put together a pre-defined metrics guide and conducted a gap analysis, we ended up focussing on five channels that the company really needed to drill down on – and only one of these was an e-channel.

It is interesting that the whole project started with a perception that the e-channels were not being properly tracked, and that in the end 80% of what we looked at were offline channels.  This is a key lesson: traditional channels need to learn from the closer concentration in e-channels on tracking and performance.

The new online channels have come along with their natural and intuitive focus on measurement – but these are in essence simply extra marketing channels, and it is pretty pointless putting all that effort into measuring ROI on the e-channels if you cannot compare their effectiveness with other parts of the marketing mix.  And to do that, you need robust metrics in place across the board.

The concept of Business Performance Champions has worked well, because the concentration of tracking does need to be driven internally, and no-one is in a better position to do that than business intelligence people, who have both the data and the objective overview in a way that the marketers who are delivering the channels do not.

It is certainly not simple to achieve that, though, as there is often a significant gap in understanding and even respect between the two.  Over time, the type of people pharma recruits into business intelligence roles needs to change, so that they have a greater understanding of strategy, and a greater confidence to champion business performance.

But in the meantime, as we have demonstrated, it is possible to shift the culture and make it happen in existing organisational models, provided the focus is there, the processes are robust, and the people undertaking the task have the right tools to do the job.

It may have taken new e-channels to highlight the shortcomings in tracking marketing effectiveness in our industry – but the basic underlying cause of the problem is not new.  Online marketing may not the panacea for pharma – but if it shines the spotlight on measurement right across the marketing mix, it will certainly have had a positive effect.

About The Author

Alex Blyth is a Managing Consultant and Head of Marketing Sciences

Oringally published in Pharmafocus, May 2011

Building innovation into marketing


July 27th, 2011

Translating invention into commercial reality

Innovation has always played an important part in the Pharma industry. Since the Darzi report stated that the healthcare system in the UK has a legal requirement to encourage innovation, innovation has become even more of a hot topic. What are the challenges in developing innovative ideas and driving innovation into Pharma marketing? And what are the skills required to meet and overcome those challenges and achieve successful and sustainable market access for new, innovative therapies?

So What is Innovation?

There are many definitions of innovation. At its most basic level innovation is simply the implementation of new ideas. In fact ‘innovation’ is often confused with creativity.

A good explanation of the difference between the two comes from Theodore Levitt, an American economist and professor at Harvard Business School.

“CREATIVITY is thinking up new things. INNOVATION is doing new things”.

Take for example the use of social media. Whilst its use as a part of the healthcare media mix it is not a new idea.  Johnson &Johnson has innovated in utilising a range of new media to achieve marketing objectives across a range of its healthcare brands.

  • In Attention Deficit Hyperactivity Disorder (ADHD) the company sponsors a  Facebook® Page to build awareness of adults with ADHD called, ‘ADHD Allies™’.
  • And the ADHD Moms™ Facebook Page for mothers of children with ADHD which has attracted more than 8,000 fans since its launch.
  • Then there is the “J&J Health Channel” on YouTube which provides educational videos for a range of relevant conditions again including ADHD www.youtube.com/user/JNJhealth that has over 2000 subscribers with over 200,000 channel views and nearly 2 million upload views in only 2 years.

The IBM personal computer was an innovation that changed both the computer industry and society’s attitude to computers. Yet the IBM personal computer contained no new ‘inventions’; indeed the team creating it were charged with taking ‘off-the-shelf’ components already available and bringing them together in an inexpensive and user-friendly way which was above all suitable for home use.

Focussed Innovation

A good start point for innovation is to focus thinking on the key challenges, opportunities and problems facing our brands; gaining a clear understanding of the issues and what needs to be changed.

An example of this focussed innovation is the new bladeless Air Multiplier fan from Dyson, which developed out of a defect in the ‘Airblade’, the energy-efficient hand drier launched in 2006. Despite its jet-like exhaust, engineers noticed that the Airblade was actually trapping a large amount of air inside. Curious about this failure they questioned what could be done with this trapped high-speed air and, using an airfoil-shaped ramp they succeeded in amplifying the airflow 15 times, creating a smooth, powerful airflow, with no need for fast-spinning blades.

Barriers to innovation

However, many organisations are not great at innovation. Too often ‘rules’ are conformed to too rigidly, seriously limiting the motivation to do things differently. Just how often do we hear the words, “But that’s the way things are”? Those charged with coming up with improving the way the organisation works often fear their suggestions will be seen as wrong, impractical or too ‘off-the-wall’, perhaps because those in positions of authority are too quick to criticise, make instant judgements, and above all lack vision.

All too often companies look at new ideas through the lens of what has been done before and look to the future in the context of what has gone before, using existing assumptions and models as the starting point. The result is often a series of incremental improvements to existing products or processes, simply trying to refine or rehash old ideas, but more efficiently.

In the words of Rosabeth Moss Kanter, American business speaker and consultant,

Mindless habitual behaviour is the enemy of innovation’.

The process of innovation

The innovation process can be seen has having three distinct stages: invention, translation and commercialisation. This three-stage concept was first outlined by Bruce D Merrifield, US Assistant Secretary of Commerce, in a speech entitled ‘Forces of change affecting high technology industries’ as long ago as 1986:

1.         Invention

The starting point in building innovation into marketing – the invention stage – is to identify and isolate specific ideas, which could be used to address our identified brand challenges however outlandish they may seem, irrespective of whether they might work or not. This can be done in a group setting, in a workshop or ‘brainstorming’ session. Valuable fuel for developing ideas comes from looking at case studies to explore what others have done when addressing similar challenges. Scavenging ideas, learning from others success and failure, both inside and outside healthcare can work well:

“Keep on looking for novel ideas that others have used successfully. Your idea has to be original only in its adaptation to the problem you are working on” Thomas Edison

Specific creative thinking tools such as “reversal” or “random stimulus” can also add real value in triggering ideas

The aim is to generate a wide range of ideas. In the initial stages it is crucial not to get mired in the precise detail of any ideas suggested, nor to be overly judgemental.

The next stage is to isolate the key ideas with sufficient promise to develop further. If there are still too many, apply simple screening rules such as rejecting those that will take too long to implement (say more than a year), and select only those deemed to be ‘innovative’.

2.         Translation /idea building

‘A new idea is delicate. It can be killed by a sneer or a yawn; it can be stabbed to death by a joke, or worried to death by a frown on the right person’s brow’, wrote Charles H Brower in Advertising Age.

“Green housing” helps protect delicate ‘seedling’ ideas, just as a greenhouse protects young plants from the elements, allowing them to grow. The idea behind green housing is to develop and adapt the idea to address the business challenge to make it workable while not being critical or identifying what is wrong. It is therefore vital to suspend judgement until the principle of the idea is fully understood.

Key now is to drive out the essence of the idea by considering what it is trying to achieve, what are the essential components, how the concept can be built on, and what barriers need to be overcome to translate the idea into commercial reality?  Above all, it is about ambition – just what can be achieved by the idea?

Take for example the idea for Risk-sharing programmes for payers. The aim of these programmes is to provide reassurance to payers that their investment in a drug will deliver clinical outcomes plus encourage prescribers to use the product.   They key components would be clinical success criteria, a refund element if success were not achieved, defined timescales, process and legal contracts as required.

3.         Commercialisation or Prototype development

Then think through the detail and consider how an idea could be implemented – the commercialisation stage. The aim is to develop a commercial prototype that translates the idea into what it would look like in practice. It is important still to suspend judgement at this stage, and particularly crucial not to judge whether the idea is affordable or sufficient implementation resource is available. Consider who will be involved (customers and internal personnel), how long the idea/process will take to set up, and what resources, capabilities and competencies will be required.  Also important is to consider what customers’ reaction is likely to be.

In developing a prototype the checklist should consider:

  • What is the objective?
  • Who is this aimed at?
  • How will it work (e.g. inputs/outputs, monitoring etc)?
  • Who needs to be involved (internally, externally, and for approval)?
  • How long to set it up?
  • What resources are needed (financial, human)?
  • What are the anticipated results?

For the Risk-sharing example above, developing the prototype is all about the detail of the idea. When such a scheme was developed for once yearly bisphosphonates for treating Osteoporosis in Germany this involved putting in place

  • Tracking of patients using the product
  • Measurement systems to track the number of fractures which occurred on treatment
  • Reimbursing the insurer for drug costs in patients where fractures occurred during the first year of treatment

In conclusion

Using this three-stage process of Invention, idea building, and prototype development it will become clear which ideas are the most interesting, are the best fit with the product/company ambition and offer the best ROI, both locally and for global development. The process also identifies the support and process required to make it happen and keep the idea on track, resulting in a pilotable offering to take forward to the market.

The American historian William Pollard once said that ’Learning and innovation go hand in hand. The arrogance of success is to think that what you did yesterday will be sufficient for tomorrow.’

Translating innovation into practice

  1. Identify the brand challenges/barriers or opportunities to which you would most like to apply focused innovation
  2. Gain a clear understanding of the issues – the better you understand the problems the easier it is to develop the answers
  3. Collect ideas like a magpie:
  • Look at how others have addressed similar challenges,
  • Bring together brains from marketing, sales, medical etc to provide multiple perspectives
  • Maximise the brainpower in the room using creative thinking techniques
  1. Collect ideas which offer potential and develop them
  2. Build a detailed prototype of what the idea will look like in practise.

About The Author

Gerard Doherty is a Managing Consultant.

Originally published in PM Europe, July 2011

What exactly does excellence look like?


July 27th, 2011

Many organisations have put in place or are considering ‘marketing excellence’ programs to help drive performance. The key challenge for companies is to prepare marketers for the future rather than just focusing on their current needs or god forbid the past. So what will ‘excellence’ demand going forward?

I am going to be a little controversial given our experience in recent years in developing, executing and seeing the end product of marketing excellence programmes.

Many organisations are still using a series of templates, generally PowerPoint as no one seems to have time to read written documents these days, as the way to ensure marketing is excellent across brands, business units and countries. However, as the smart marketing managers are recognising, their marketing teams are getting very adept at completing templates but they are not actually achieving the ‘excellence’ in marketing that is required. The necessary quality of thinking is just not there, and too often the end plan is no different from the way marketing within the organisation has always been done.

The more insightful companies that have recognised that templates are NOT the way forward, have assembled sets of tools and a logic structure to try to get true ‘insight’ by putting the customer at the centre of everything. From this base the hope is that excellent marketing strategies and plans can then be developed. However, this suffers from the inherent problem that if marketers and their bosses do not actually know what ‘excellent’ is, then the end product can still be lacking.

So what is going to drive success in the future healthcare environments and as a consequence what does ‘excellence’ look like?

Getting off to a strong start

There is now evidence to suggest that sales at the end of Q3 after product launch predict sales at Q20 (5 years post launch) and consequently peak sales Source: INSEAD.  Plus the quicker you get to market the greater period you have to maximise peak sales. Interestingly, what the analysis also shows is that the post launch trajectory is not about being first to market or being the best molecule.

An important element in achieving ‘excellence’ comes from the R&D and commercial divisions working together effectively, a key element of which is to manage thought leader segments to shape the future for the molecule, generating insight for market development, the evidence base for the product and its future positioning. This is a critical area in creating ‘value’ (see later) and developing competitive advantage.

Then there is effective management of market access and market entry, including ensuring timely and acceptable pricing along with formulary approval post-launch.

Above all product launch is about developing and sustaining a momentum for the product. This means ensuring the customer’s initial use of the product is positive and provides a foundation on which to build. How you do this is by helping the clinician identify the right patient for the product and by managing their and the patient’s expectations appropriately.

Developing true customer insight

‘Insight’ is a buzz word at the moment, but what does it mean. The Oxford English Dictionary defines insight as “the capacity to gain an accurate and deep understanding of something”; whilst the Collins English Dictionary definiton states “the ability to perceive clearly or deeply; a penetrating and often sudden understanding, as of a complex situation or problem”.

From a marketing ‘excellence’ perspective this is about discovering or recognising some previously unknown, overlooked or unappreciated reasons behind why customers behave in a particular way, their motivations; that we can then utilise to drive change.

This requires real tenacity in getting under the skin of what we see and hear. It is about assimilating and interrogating data, facts and observations to tease out and really understand the underlying drivers. It is an iterative process that looks for and then tests new patterns and explanations that have not been previously recognised.

You know when you have generated true ‘insight’ because it is so obvious, with the benefit of hindsight, once you have reached the end of the process! Getting there is all about perspiration with a little inspiration. It is about having the eyes to see and the ability to really listen.

Delivering ‘value’

The terms ‘value’ and ‘value proposition’ are being used more and more in healthcare marketing these days. The problem is that many people see the ‘value proposition’ as purely part of market access and specifically the pricing and reimbursement package pre-launch.

The challenge for marketers and what is excellence moving forward is to demonstrate value to a number of different and diverse stakeholders over the whole life cycle of the brand, not least as value means very different things to different people.

To payers it is all about the economic benefits of treating whole populations, and hence drug cost. In the UK the intent to move to Value-Based Pricing is all about improving NHS patients’ access to effective and innovative drugs.  Value for the UK Government includes impact on ‘burden of illness’ (the seriousness of the condition – including severity, and threat to life – after treatment with current best practice) and ‘therapeutic innovation and improvement’ (the scale of clinical benefit provided by the medicine, beyond current best practice). Also important are non-health benefits, such as impacts on time spent with carers. The value-based pricing assessment is intended to yield a price range that represents the value of a new medicine to the NHS.

To healthcare professionals it is more about treating the individual patient, but within the local operating environment. It is all about the medical or therapeutic benefits of the treatment. However, even then ‘value’ will differ across the healthcare professional spectrum. For specialists there will be a strong bias to evidence-based decision making with a dose of personal experience and practice, the extent depending on the specialty. So ‘value’ for the specialist is going to be driven by the strength and depth of the clinical evidence. For the generalist it is more about patient recognition and the ‘value’ comes from the medical benefits plus the practicalities of managing the patient over the course of treatment.

For the patient ‘value’ is different again. Here it is about outcomes, focused around the patient / caregiver benefits (pain, anxiety, social /emotional well-being, functioning, ability to work, etc).

The challenge for the marketer is that the relative or perceived ‘value’ of a product will change over the life cycle, given changes in the competitive set e.g. brand leaders going off patent and new entrants that offer greater benefit. Hence life cycle management takes on a different dimension. Rather then just managing label or indication extension, the marketer needs to continue to develop perceptions and the evidence of acceptable ‘value’.

Focus

In project meetings with senior managers we regularly hear the same thing: “we try to do too much”. With the necessary change in business models, away from pure sales force numbers and share of voice, there is a natural tendency to try to cover all the bases in case we miss something important. But then marketers end up with little focus and no clear direction; like headless chickens rushing round doing lots of things and achieving little.

Resource – time, people and money – is increasingly stretched as our businesses become more efficient and more effective in order to operate effectively and profitably in the new healthcare environment.

Consequently there is an increasing need to reduce the number of ‘things’ we do without compromising achievement of ever more challenging objectives. That means we have to be confident of what really drives success for our brands.

‘Excellence’ is about identifying what we ‘have to do’ and what we ‘want to do’. Anything else is a just a waste of resource.

The challenge is having the clarity to recognise what is important and what is not, and the courage to let go of what we might be comfortable and familiar with and not just repeatedly do the things we have always done.

Conclusion

If you want to define marketing ‘excellence’ in the immediate future according to different elements of bringing the product to market and maximising success, then it is all about:

  1. Maximising speed of market entry
  2. Effectively managing the thought leader base across the life cycle of the product
  3. Ensuring timely and acceptable pricing along with formulary approval post-launch
  4. Generating true customer ‘insight’ that allows you to understand underlying motivations and drive change
  5. Helping the clinician identify the right patient for the product and managing their and the patient’s expectations appropriately
  6. Delivering value, based on that insight to a wide range of stakeholders across the life cycle of the brand – customer ‘value’ management

But you know what, marketing ‘excellence’ is really all about identifying and then executing what we ‘have to do’ and what we ‘want to do’ and ignoring the rest.

About The Author

Dr Paul Stuart-Kregor is Director at The MSI Consultancy.

Originally published in PM Europe, June 2011

How market access has changed from being a necessary evil to giving you competitive advantage


May 4th, 2011

Although the words ‘market access’ have become much more commonplace in our working lives, the new clarity of its importance and the acceptance that market access is a necessary pre-requisite for success, seemed superfluous and therefore has not been totally embraced by everyone working in the brand team.  In fact, some marketers are happy to let the market access teams get on with their jobs, without getting involved in the detail and without considering the ongoing benefits to the brand.

It seems that although marketers know that if access to market has not been considered then their products stand little or no chance of any success, they might not seek to completely understand what it is, how their market access colleagues are going about doing it and more importantly how market access initiatives can help in driving the brand – how does everyone, in fact, sing from the same hymn sheet? How could a synergistic relationship between marketing teams and their market access colleagues potentially be exploited by the marketing team and provide them with an opportunity to achieve that common driver of success, brand differentiation?

In the past, market access was generally viewed by marketing teams as a totally separate activity, which allowed them to subsequently ‘get on with the real job’ of persuading clinicians to prefer and prescribe our brands.  It was seen as a ‘one-off’ activity that was relevant only at the start of the brand lifecycle, which provided clinicians with the permission they needed to enable them to prescribe our brand.  The responsibility to develop and communicate necessary information to the budget holding customers “the payers’ was often given to the public affairs or separate market access team, completely independently from the marketing team.

Health Economics/QUALYs/burden of illness models etc are all part of the market access language and this complex terminology can serve to reinforce the “otherness” of what the market access team does and is quite alien to those working in marketing (who subsequently need to go away and use it).  This does not therefore facilitate collaborative working nor the understanding of the processes each have to go through and the impact of each processes the other function, all of which need to be made clear and understandable to ensure the best possible success and outcome for the brand.  In short, to deal with market access challenges, marketing and market access specialists have to invest time and effort to understand the others language and processes to ensure the overall brand strategy is joined up.

There is a very powerful argument for closer alignment between marketing and market access, given the impact the terms of market access can have on the ability prescribers have to prescribe our drugs and in fact we should probably have been working more closely with our market access colleagues much earlier too.

So, how do we engage more closely and understand the impact of each other’s process on each other?  Firstly, marketing teams need to know the complexities of what market access is about and how it fits in marketing terms.  I.e. we need to understand that market access is about ensuring the data we have is packaged in the right way and communicated to the right customer groups at the right time.  Understanding the requirements of the different stakeholders (the payers) who are involved in approving your brand will help you develop the right messages that will improve its ultimate success.

Add to that value-based-pricing which will start by 2014 where drug prices will be set according to the value of medicines provided (drugs that demonstrate innovation and provide solutions for unmet needs which impact patients most) plus the move to GP Consortia with 80% of budgets being controlled by GP commissioners, and we can now see how essential and important of a collaborative approach between you and your market access colleagues will become – There needs to be a consistency when talking to different customer groups to have a successful brand.

So how do we do that?

Simply put, what we need to do is have a common approach to firstly recognise and then understand how to integrate market access activities into our mainstream marketing and develop a collaborative approach with all departments working in tandem by undertaking a four-stage process:

Identifying stakeholders

It is essential that we gain a common view across the team of who the key market access customers are, particularly given the changing environment within the NHS.  Who makes the decisions on prescribing?  Who are the primary care commissioning purchasers/gatekeepers? What do we have to do in order to get closer to and communicate with these new prescribers? Who makes the decisions in the changing NHS, the primary care commissioners who have the money or secondary care specialists who hold the clinical knowledge?

Identifying the key stakeholders from an external point of view holds the key to success.  The patient and prescriber are the easy bit, but who the payers/budget holders are needs to be mapped very clearly and for some companies this might be more challenging.

This poses different challenges depending on the organisation. For example, for a company like Novo Nordisk, focussed on the single therapy area of diabetes, the market access team will have developed an in depth knowledge of their key therapy area and its stakeholders built over years of interactions in the area.  For a company seeking to service 4-5 different therapy areas the market access team focus will be much more diluted across many more customers, potentially necessitating a greater contribution to market access initiatives by sales and marketing personnel. Therefore thorough stakeholder mapping to identify who these key stakeholder groups are and who in the organisation should “own” each customer you need to communicate with is essential.

So, to whom do we need to clarify and communicate the economic value of the product?  As well as our traditional customers, who are these influencers, budget holders and policy makers?  We must look more widely at who our key opinion leaders (KOLs) are within the changing NHS and have a clear identification of who our ‘customers’ are and a thorough understanding of their needs.  These may include Commissioners, Prescribing Advisors, Heads of Medicines Management, NICE Implementation Leads to name but a few.  Adding additional impact and highlighting the need for market access and marketing to become more closely aligned will be the payers who will be separated out from the traditional PCTs and with the advent of GP Commissioning and GP Consortia, where some of our traditional clinical customers i.e. the GP are also becoming the commissioners.

The maps are changing with the payer and prescriber becoming much less separate and the need for single consistent messages to all stakeholders being crucial in this fragmented market.  Mapping may need to be undertaken at a much more local level, for example to primary care commissioning groups and input from market access and marketing will be crucial to get a clear understanding and avoid duplication of effort.

Identifying goals and objectives

The next step is to identify and understand the goals and objectives of each of your market access stakeholders.  You need to understand what the payer wants to purchase and what their motivations are and what is important to them.  This means considering outcomes beyond the QUALYs etc required to gain NICE approval, to understand where your brand could fit on the political agenda of the local commissioning group.

And although important, it is not just about demonstrating cost effectiveness of the product.  If you are a Primary Care Commissioning Group, you may be more interested in those companies providing added value to your local services.   Success will come, where companies identify and then demonstrate improvements for a local population that weren’t there before, allowing the new organisation to demonstrate the value they have added for the local population or help to support the priorities of the local health providers, rather than just selling their drugs.

A good example of this is Fresenius Medical Care, who operates dialysis services in partnership with the UK and run 53 clinics in the UK and Ireland, providing regular dialysis treatment for over 3500 NHS patients.  Rather than selling dialysis drugs they contract to provide the management of dialysis needs for patients in the local area. For the commissioner this can avoid the need to develop an infrastructure of clinics with staff and premises in a time of limited budgets.

Develop the optimal value proposition for the brand

The third step in the process is to look to develop the optimal value proposition of your brand.  Companies need to ensure that they are aligned with the move by the start of 2014 to Value Based Commissioning, where the three aims outlined in the Department of Health consultation paper are summarised as: better access for patients to drugs, more innovative drugs and better value to the NHS.

What are the unmet needs your brand addresses? What do you provide that is truly innovative. What does the commissioner want to buy?  To do this we need to highlight the impact of illness that amplifies the value of the brand.

Increasingly this necessitates looking from the patient point of view.   If the value based proposition (VBP) of the brand is based on the impact of the disease on the patient, it could attract a premium.  For example, if you have a drug that has a specific impact on the patient and there is an unmet need, the Government intends to pay a premium under the value based pricing system from 2014.  Therefore, the patient voice will be very important and we need to think of ways to raise the profile of the therapy area and conditions our brands treat effectively, where appropriate.  We need to add value that is worthwhile, not just a nice to have and clearly identify a logical tie in between the service you are providing and the drug. This is not just about breaking down barriers but increasing the value of your offering.

Novartis who produce Lucentis (ranibizumab) for treating patients with wet AMD developed a scheme where if patients required more than the 6 doses their evidence suggested (in contrast to the 14 doses in accordance with NICE TA 155), the company would reimburse the drug costs associated with additional further injections reimbursed by the company.  This Ranibizumab Reimbursement Scheme clearly demonstrates how companies and the NHS can work together to ensure that patients prescribed drugs such as Lucentis receive the best possible support whilst providing cost-effective care within a managed budget.  Novartis demonstrated their commitment to patients and confidence to prescribers that their drug works whilst containing unforeseen costs.

Implementation and communication

The final step is to ensure that communication to the key market access stakeholders (purchaser, prescriber and even the patient) is closely aligned, particularly given their increasing geographical proximity.

Knowing what your customer looks like and wants to hear and then making sure that within your organisation everyone is communicating to the key stakeholder groups with the same messages is the key to success.  This moves away from the small, super-specialist market access group talking to NICE whilst the sales force talks to prescribers with different messages.  This internal alignment within your organisation means that you are interacting with primary care organisations at a disease level and everyone makes sure everyone is communicating to the key market access stakeholders with the same messages.

So, in summary Pharma companies need to:

  • Think about how market access and marketing need to work closely together to both remove barriers to prescribing and build a strong case to allow prescribers access to their brands
  • Understand that the approach might now be more fragmented than in the past and therefore the need to work together is even more important to clearly define how your brand meets the aims and objectives set out by the Government and NHS
  • Ensure that your organisation is clearly aligned alongside the needs of all your stakeholder groups
  • Remember great brands are based on a brand vision, which is consistent across time and customers. Communicating consistent value to payers and prescribers is the necessary starting point to building a great brand

About The Author

Gerard Doherty is Managing Consultant

Originally published in Pharmafocus, April 2011 as “Integrate: marketing and market access must come together”

Cello Group plc Partner Appointment


April 18th, 2011

Cello Group plc (AIM: CLL, “Cello” or “the Group”) is pleased to announce the immediate appointment of Jon Bircher as as a Cello Partner. This appointment reflects Jon’s strong personal contribution to MSI, and also the reputation he holds amongst his peers. This reward is not only designed to recognise the primary role Jon has made to MSI but also his contribution to the group strategy, both by virtue of economic impact and also his overall management capabilities. Jon becomes one of 27 partners within the Cello Group

Cello’s Partnership scheme is one of the key ways in which they differentiate themselves from other International Marketing Services organisations, and is a key way for senior people within the businesses to get more involved and contribute at a Cello level.

Cello Group plc Senior Appointment


April 18th, 2011

Cello Group plc (AIM: CLL, “Cello” or “the Group”) is pleased to announce the appointment of Stephen Highley as Group Corporate Development Director, reporting to the Board of Cello.

Stephen Highley was one of the three founders of MSI, which was acquired by Cello in 2007 and which is now the Group’s primary pharmaceutical consulting business. He has spent the majority of his career in the pharmaceutical sector, working on a wide range of strategic and marketing related issues for major pharmaceutical clients. He has worked closely with the Board of Cello on the preparation and execution of the group’s healthcare strategy, most recently including the acquisition of MedErgy HealthGroup Inc. in March 2011.

Mark Scott, Chief Executive of Cello, commented,

“I wish to congratulate Stephen on his new role. Cello is committed to strengthening its position as a leading global service supplier to the pharmaceutical and broader healthcare sector and Stephen will bring both his detailed sector knowledge and huge energy to fulfilling this strategy.”

red kite to merge with The MSI Consultancy as a result of Cello Group acquisition


April 13th, 2011

Cello Group Plc announces the acquisition of red kite consulting group, enabling a merger of red kite with The MSI Consultancy, which is already a part of the Cello Group.

The integrated MSI organisation will bring under one roof a team of 20 with expertise in strategy and bespoke consulting, vision and strategy implementation, brand building and execution, launch and organisational effectiveness.

With a leadership team drawn from both organisations, the new group will be headed jointly by managing partners Jon Bircher and Jonathan Dancer.

Jon Bircher said, “This integration harnesses the shared values, philosophy and approach of both organisations.

“Strong business relationships and tailored expert personal consulting solutions will continue to be at the heart of what we offer.  The entire team is grounded in a solid knowledge of the industry, and every team member has the perspective and expertise to work alongside clients to enable them to deliver their objectives.”

Jonathan Dancer added, ”We are really excited to be working with our colleagues from MSI  as part of a larger business with global reach and tremendous range.  Current clients of both organisations will be able to access a wider diversity of consulting talent, offerings and services, delivered by project teams that draw on an even wider base of expertise.”

The MSI Consultancy offers bespoke consultancy, strategic research, and training and development for companies across the pharmaceutical and healthcare industry at local, European and global levels.

red kite consulting group is a specialist healthcare consultancy with expertise in management consulting, business intelligence, market access and transformational leadership development.  The organisation is also the Pharmaceutical Marketing Society’s partner in delivering the PriMe Marketing Training Programme.

Jon Bircher added, “The coming together of these two complementary businesses is another important step towards our mid-term growth plans to double the size of the team and triple our revenues over the next three years.  This further enhances our position as a major global strategic healthcare consultancy.”

Cello Group is a leading global insight and strategic marketing group operating in over 70 countries, with a particular focus on the pharmaceutical and healthcare sectors.  The group has offices in London, New York and Beijing, as well as a client-led presence on the US West Coast

Feeling The Heat, Anticipating The Competition


March 15th, 2011

Jon Bircher argues that successful pharma companies need to develop a foresight into competitor strategies and activities if they are to develop robust strategies themselves.

“Conquerors estimate before the war begins, and they consider everything; the defeated also estimate before the war, but they do not consider everything.  Estimating completely creates victory; estimating incompletely causes failure.  When we look at it from this point of view, it is very obvious who will win the war.”

So wrote Sun Tzu, the ancient Chinese military strategist, often quoted in the context of business – with good reason, because in our increasingly competitive marketplace, being successful requires the same kind of strategic discipline.

What is particularly apt about this quote is the ‘estimating completely’ bit.  In pharma marketing terms, this is about understanding as much as I can about what your competitors could do in the future in order to make your strategy as robust as possible.  Most marketers realise the importance of gaining insight into their competitors, but translating today’s insight into future foresight, is much more revealing; helping us interpret what competitors could do.

The shift within pharma to more specialised markets highlights the need for companies to bring brands to market swiftly, with a keen eye on the landscape, including possible competitors.  At the same time, the EMEA has been quoted as wanting to encourage greater competition within the sector to improve innovation, quality, value and diversity of treatments available for patients – whilst applying scrutiny to strategies that are deemed as ‘anti-competitive’.  So pre-empting the competition needs to be done in an appropriate anti-trust context.  (see sidebar)

It is clear that in most situations we face competitors; but whereas in the past more specialist areas have been less competitive than the big primary care markets, we are now seeing the same level of competition in those areas too.  This also translates into biotechnology with more companies becoming proficient, plus companies such as Pfizer highlighting their desire to be market leaders in this field.  We are increasingly working with companies facing a significant competitive threat in orphan and rare disease markets, where traditionally only a few small companies played.

So competition is stronger than it has ever been, and in many ways that is very healthy.  From a customer perspective it helps keep drug budgets under control, it provides greater innovation in the system, and on the whole it provides patients with access to better medicines.

As with all planning, gaining true competitive foresight requires a circular process.  Using competitive foresight to adapt your strategies will cause the competition to make their move, to which you will need adapt – and so it never stands still.

Knowing Your Competitor

In an ideal world, you would spend enough time looking at all your competitors in detail.  You would consider everybody in the market or who is planning to enter and try to gain an understanding of them all.  However, this is often not viable.  So who are our core competitors?

Keep it simple; first, the market leader.  Understanding what they do to maintain that position, and seeing how they drive, challenge and alter the market itself.

Secondly, consider the fastest growing competitor, what are they doing to grow and how are they changing the market dynamic?  What are they doing differently that is driving success?

Thirdly, are there new competitors entering the market?  What is their likely strategy and how are they shaping the market?

Finally, look at companies which are strategically significant, or have strategically significant products.  They may not be obvious competitors but they will have similar goals to you, making them a disproportionately bigger threat.

Although we often recognise that there is a need for competitive analysis, many companies have no formal way of collecting the data.  They rely on past experiences, or assumptions that are made internally, coupled with gut feel.  However if we want to win the fight we need to gather data in a systematic way, with the goal of using it to decode competitors’ future strategies.  This is a big task, so the data needs to be utilised effectively, otherwise it simply becomes an information-gathering exercise – which is a little pointless.

The trick is to turn data into insight, and translate this into foresight.  Insights are those deep, penetrating things that you didn’t previously understand that helps you consider how to do business differently,  whereas foresight is understanding the implications of those nuggets for the future.

Understand Your Competitor

To understand your competitor, there are probably four ‘buckets’ of insight you need to grab which inter-relate with each other to provide you with the foresight you need to consider their strategies moving forward.

The four areas to understand are:

  • The ambition of the company
  • Their organisational views of the world
  • Their current strategy
  • What they are good at

Your competitor’s ambition will be central in influencing how they go about developing their strategy, and how they will react to competitors’ (i.e. your) moves.

Some questions you may want to consider include: what are their financial goals; short-term and long-term?  This will tell you whether they are going for absolute market growth or whether they are actually trying to gain as much profit from this product as they can.

What are their beliefs and values?  What current pressures are they under?  These will help you understand their hot buttons if you threaten them – and equally, the areas where you could go unnoticed or comfortably co-exist.

What is their attitude to risk?  Understanding that, and how they react to competition, is a pretty good indicator of how they might react to your own strategies.

Decoding a company’s goals and ambitions for the future is critical, because it ultimately helps you formulate the most appropriate strategy yourself.  Can you peaceful co-exist, and do you want to?  If not it helps you understand the consequences; if your competitor has a product which is important to them strategically and emotionally, tackling them head-on will require a completely different approach and skillset.

The second thing you need to understand is their organisational view of the world.  How do they understand the marketplace; how do they understand themselves?  If they have a particular view of the way the market works, then you may be able to work out a strategy where you don’t need to take them on head-on, so they won’t see you coming.

If, for example, their view of the world is that the whole ‘patient voice piece’ is simply irrelevant, and therefore they spend all their time and energy on the physician, you may be able to create a strategy which is about leveraging the patient’s voice, whilst going relatively unnoticed.  You get to see the opportunities by looking at their blind-spots in their view of the world.

Identifying this view of the world is relatively straightforward.  How does your competitor talk about its marketplace and the trends of the future?  How does it communicate about itself, about its future, about the opportunities that exist?  Where is it investing its energy and its resources?  How historically has the competition leveraged their offering?  How emotionally attached does it appear to be to this marketplace or this patient population?

Next comes their current strategy; understanding this will help you understand the strategy for the future.  Generally pharma marketers are pretty good at understanding the core components of our direct competitor’s strategy; we are less good at considering it in the context of the overall company.

There are lots of indicators of a company or product strategy.  For example, chief executives like to stand up and tell people about how clever their strategy is, what they are doing, and how they are approaching it.

Is your competitor aiming for growth through focused knowledge and energy in a certain therapy area or technology?  Are they diversifying their portfolio and managing risk that way?  If their strategy is about  becoming the number one bio-pharmaceutical company, what implications does that have on their future strategy?  Are they going to be the key specialist in rare diseases?  Are they going to be the number one in personalised medicine?

When considering the most appropriate strategy for your business unit or brand you must also consider the tier below.  What are the implications at business unit level?  If they are a company that has a broad strategy of diversification, but one particular business unit has real focus within a therapy area, what pressures does that put the business unit under, and what does their strategy look like moving forward?

The final part in the jigsaw is to understand what your competitors are good at.  You can consider a lot of different things at a whole company level, from the products they promote, their marketing capabilities, their distribution network, their clinical trial programme, their corporate management, or their financial positioning down to the tactical level around their sales teams and marketing materials.

This helps you understand how capable the company is at achieving its overall ambition – and the possible areas of danger.  If you go up against a company that has a fantastic, proactive legal department which will take on anybody who tries to challenge their patent or their position in the marketplace, you have to recognise the degree of risk involved.

This is a quick look at the different areas to find competitive insight.  You now need to look at those four buckets together, play them out decoding the competitor’s future strategy so as to optimise your own.

Generating Fresh Foresight

One of the best (and most interactive) ways of decoding strategy is through some kind of simulation – we use competitor rooms.  These can be run in many different ways depending on your challenge, but essentially they involve playing out different scenarios and different competitors.  They should use all the insight that you have gathered, internal knowledge and perspectives in order to get under the competitors skin and generate genuine foresight.

In a given situation, how will this competitor react to our move?  If we generate an aggressive market growth strategy what are the reactions, the implications?  What are the likely moves from competitor A and competitor B when we implement a new segment-based approach?

Interaction is important.  These sessions act as a ‘test bed’ for what could happen in reality, whether simulating competitor reactions to your strategic moves or simulating changes from a competitor, all will help you understand the strategic options available and their implications.

This then helps you decide the best strategy to put in place; for example, it may be, because of new competitive foresight, that you find a way to go unnoticed.  Your price-based strategy can work alongside their innovation and clinical-based strategy.  It’s not the space they own, it’s not the space they compete in, and you go unnoticed.

Equally, it is important to understand how they will defend when you make a threatening move.  What level of provocation will your attack cause, and therefore what is their likely retaliation?

If a company is really comfortable with its current approach, and it appears to be working for them, they are going to be pretty reluctant to change it.  However, if you hit them in a place where they are sensitive, or vulnerable, you might move them out of that comfort zone and take them on head-to-head when you didn’t need to.

The idea of this whole exercise is not about just getting loads of granularity around the competition for the sake of it; it’s actually about making sure your own strategy is as good as it possibly can be, robust enough and with the right components, built on your learnings from a competitive perspective.

And only when you have this level of understanding can you ‘estimate completely’ and ensure the strategy you build is as future proof as it possibly can be

Sidebar

With an increasing emphasis on regulation around competition, should the pharma industry be nervous about trying to gain foresight in to their competitors’ likely behaviour?  It is true that there is a nervousness about anti-trust laws, especially when it comes to primary competitive intelligence – employing people or organisations to speak to specific individuals.

It is important to point out that competitive analysis and competitive intelligence should not about breaking the law. Competitive intelligence is an ethical and legal business practice, as opposed to industrial espionage which is illegal. In the context of this article it is also not about formulating strategies that conflict with the anti-competitive laws.  It is certainly not about predatory pricing or illegal trade restrictions or M&A deals.

What it is about is understanding and anticipating your competitors in such a way that you optimise your own strategy and approach.  So in the context of ‘competition is healthy’ – because it keeps the market alive and keeps innovation happening – we need to understand more about our competitors to optimise our own approach.  And in optimising our approach, they will inevitably optimise theirs.

The one thing you can rely on is that in a market with more than one product, the approach and strategy of one company will be influenced by the other player or players in the market, and each will react to the competition’s moves.  So the whole interplay between the competition is in part what brings about better access to medicines, better pricing and better innovation.

In other words, having an insight into what your competitors are doing doesn’t lead to the stifling of competition, rather it provides future foresight that actually enhances the competition and potentially  ups everyone’s game.

About The Author

Jon Bircher is a Managing Partner

Originally published in Pharmafocus as “Anticipating the Competition”, March 2011

How to Turn Around a Flagging Brand: A Real Life Case Study


March 8th, 2011

The glamour end of pharma marketing is undoubtedly around the launch of a new product.  Everyone is excited and optimistic, you certainly hope that what you are launching represents a step forward in treatment, and that clinicians will be intrigued and eager to try your new medicine.  Much gets written about how to make the launch a success, and rightly, because a solid platform for growth is crucial to achieving a return on the investment made in getting the drug to market.

For most marketers, of course, the more routine activity revolves around keeping that launch momentum going.  You can’t achieve that return in months, you needs several years of strong sales to succeed.  So what do you do if your product, even after a strong launch, starts to falter?  What should you do to arrest a slowdown in growth?  In short, how do you turnaround a flagging brand?

This is not an academic question.  With decreasing points of differentiation and increasing competition, this is a situation which pharma marketers will face more and more.  Of course, each case will be different; but there will be some common factors, and hence there are lessons we can learn from any given example.

So I’d like to introduce to you a real life case study, which in the interests of discretion I am going to call Brand X.  The name doesn’t matter; the case study provides an illuminating insight into the value of a strategic, hypothesis-driven, investigative approach to research over more traditional, broad market research – and the lessons that can be learnt in how pharma uses research to drive decision making.

Brand X was a new treatment for a specific type of cancer launched in a European market, and which 18 months post-launch was showing the symptoms of sub-optimal strategy and execution, both in terms of flattening growth and a high variance in the success that reps were experiencing.

Turning around a situation like this requires knowledge and insight into what is happening, why the brand is faltering, from which a strategy can be developed that will tackle the genuine issues, not just the ones which senior management’s ‘gut feeling’ says are causing the problems.  The difference, as we will see, can be significant.

So there are four stages to this kind of task.  First, we had to diagnose the issues holding back Brand X.  Then, we had to develop strategies to overcome those challenges.  Next comes the need to value the strategy uplift that is possible and the resource commitment required.  Finally, it is vital to present an evidence-based business case and ensure the seamless execution of the strategy.

Brand X had got their product to market a little quicker than a competitor’s product, but when the competitor did launch, they were better organised in coming to market.  So Brand X had the opportunity to be seen as first mover, but unless customers were both aware of them and had a positive view of them, they ran the danger of becoming the Betamax to their competitor’s VHS; and anyone over 40 will remember that although Betamax came first and was the better format, VHS achieved a critical mass and market ubiquity by putting effective marketing behind the product.

So what was going wrong?  The key to finding out was effective and insightful research.  Naturally, we started off with an internal workshop where we developed a number of hypotheses as to why the brand was flagging.  But that view was bound to be skewed, so we then went out into the field and attempted to validate those hypotheses by talking to current and former reps, urologists and key opinion leaders.

What became very clear was that the issues identified in the internal workshop were not validated by the field research, and that issues that senior management thought were holding the brand back did not seem to be the same ones that customers regarded as important.

Senior management seemed convinced that the failings were down to two main issues: ineffective execution in the field, and price.  Through the research, we were able to disprove some of the potential issues, for example value per patient not being maximised, compliance issues or simply not getting first patients on the product.

In the end the research uncovered a raft of key issues to address, and we categorised them into four sections: product  perception, organisation, market and strategy & execution.  This approach gave us a whole shopping list of factors to tackle.  Some of the organisational issues were particularly telling, and in many cases it was these which had not been identified internally.

Insufficient centrally-driven activity, poor communications, a too short-term mindset and a lack of investment in becoming a ‘urologists’ company’ all pointed to some key failings which had little to do with rep performance itself – giving the lie to the MD’s initial assertion that “the problem is in the field!”

That said, there were some issues with the product itself.  Not fatal ones, but ones which required a different approach in order to play to the product’s real strengths.

One perceived disadvantage is that Brand X has a more regular depot.  Because of this, the only urologists who liked Brand X were those who liked to see certain types of patients more regularly anyway – others saw it as an unnecessary strain on resources in the surgery and an inconvenience for the patient, who is reminded of their cancer monthly.  The answer to this is to identify the kind of patients who need to be seen monthly, such as newly-diagnosed patients requiring more advice, or anxious patients requiring more support, as well as those who visit the surgery more regularly for  other treatments.  Equally, identifying doctors who are more holistic-type treaters, the kind of doctors who like to keep a close eye on their patients anyway.  In this way, you start to turn a perceived inconvenience into a competitive advantage.

Conversely, one of what the company saw as the product’s big advantage – that it could be used straight away without the need for pre-treatment agents – turned out not to be much of an advantage, simply because the health system in Brand X’s market moved so slowly in any case.  So selling to this supposed advantage was not going to be effective.

So if the product itself was neither the cause of flagging sales nor presenting a particular point of competitive differentiation, what of the market?  This is a market where not much had changed in a long time, so doctors’ choice was amongst products which were pretty much all the same.  It became clear that they were most likely to use the one sold by the rep they liked most.

This meant that the company had to own the reps who owned the relationships, and particularly those who had existing relationships with high prescribers.  This would require consistent and continuous contact, and support for training, seminars and congresses.  In this way, relationships could then be leveraged to get business with new clients.

Again, the research had identified a potential problem in achieving this: because of limited investment and a lack of consistent effort, the company was not viewed as a urology partner, driven by poor geographical coverage of reps, frequently changing personnel both in the front line and at HQ, and the absence of a centrally-driven strategy.

As a company, they were failing to gain traction.  They were not seen as a long-term partner, but rather as people who were there to make a quick buck – that phrase was actually used, unprompted, by one of the urologists the research targeted.  And that rather suggested that the whole culture of the organisation was awry, something which inevitably had not come out in the internal workshop!

Lack of communication aggravated the problem.  The reps felt ignored and unrecognised, in truth they didn’t really believe in the product proposition and especially not in their company – a situation not helped by the fact that two sales managers had been fired within 18 months, again focusing on the symptom of the underlying problems in the organisations attitude to investment in the area and lacking a credible proposition in the market.

A study of the adoption ladder backed up the fact that an unmotivated sales force was not performing.  Nearly 30% of doctors visited were not able to remember the product (!), and then 50% of doctors who did try the product in a small number of patients did not end up using again.  A lot of that was down to the reps not getting them to try the product with the right patients.  In essence, it was being used as a last resort, and it is hard to win in that situation.  Being positioned as last resort means that when your product is used, it’s probably not going to work.

So a key task was to get the drug prescribed for the right kind of patients, playing to its strengths, so that doctors would see the benefit of using it.  The company had been obsessed with pushing benefits such as the fact there was no need for multi-therapy, price, and the reputation of the company; but the research showed that these were either of little importance, or not areas in which Brand X could effectively compete.  By concentrating on control, the level and speed of testosterone reduction, and the good side effect profile, the company would be able to present compelling arguments which actually mattered to the clinicians in certain patient management situations. They could win a valuable segment if they would only give-up trying to change behaviours to win the whole market off an attribute that was of little significance in most situations.

Perhaps the most serious shortcoming that the research identified was a lack of investment, which meant that resources were being stretched too thinly to build relationships that could deliver.  Although this had been a fundamental weakness which had allowed a competitor to muscle in on the market, it wasn’t necessarily simply a question of throwing new resource, but rather of marshalling what resources could be afforded more effectively on the segment they were credible to win in.

We recommended targeting urologists who wanted to ‘make a difference’ to patients, who should be seen more frequently anyway, by giving them rapid control of the disease. Recommendations included building regional centres of excellence (we called them ‘strongholds’), where Brand X could make itself impenetrable to the competition.  Built around KOLs who would support the brand, these specialist strongholds could then be used as a base to ‘fight out’ of into other hospitals.

Coupled with this was the recommendation to allow investment to be correctly directed locally around a global agreed positioning strategy. Included in this was to create Regional Development Directors, who would have the autonomy and the authority to make sweeping changes locally.  This way, if  something out of the ordinary was required in the field, rather than the normal delay while the investment decision went right back up the chain, it could be made quickly by someone holding a local kitty to support the stronghold.

The lesson here for any pharma marketer is that you should never assume that your hypothesis about why a brand is flagging are correct.  In Brand X’s case, the original hypothesis was that the price was too high, and therefore competition was causing them to struggle.  Whilst there were some elements of truth in that, it was missing the vital truth: the corporate strategy was undermining the business.

Serious organisational issues can be missed in the early months of launch when you have no competition, however once competitor did come along the brand’s success was compromised.  Their survival had been due to lack of competition, which had blinded the company to ongoing failings.

At the very top level there was a need for some serious investment, to get solid structures in place, and a constant viable strategy – which they needed to keep to – which played to the strengths of the product, and recognised that they couldn’t have every patient.

All of this only became clear because we challenged the company’s own hypotheses, and then tested and validated them with quality research.  Trying to put together an action plan to turn around a brand without having that kind of insight into the issues is a sure-fire route to failure – without objective evidence you would just be another voice in a room.

Too often decision making in pharma is driven by hunches, wishful thinking or just plain guesswork.  It doesn’t need to be like this; the best decisions are always taken on the basis of testing those hunches, gaining fresh insight and letting the evidence decide.

About The Author

Alex Blyth is a Managing Consultant and Head of Marketing Sciences.

Originally published in Pharmafocus, February 2011

Brand Creation for the 21st Century


January 31st, 2011

The changes that have occurred within Pharma in the recent past, such as:

  • increasing challenges to demonstrate real, value added differentiation at a clinical level
  • dramatic changes in what we need to provide to create value propositions for the payers
  • the spread of information technology and social networking sites that have revolutionised patient involvement in therapeutic decisions

are likely to pale into insignificance in contrast to the current most important trend in marketing for the 21st Century – involving customers in what they want, i.e. ‘co-creating with your customers’.

Not because everything has to or will be co-created in the future, but because tapping into the collective experiences, skills and ingenuity of hundreds of millions of customers around the world is a complete departure from the inward looking, producer-versus-customer innovation model so common to corporations worldwide.

Have you ever sat in on or observed a focus group where you have thought to yourself that the respondents are bored or trying to give answers that they think you want to hear? Not a criticism of respondents per se, but it highlights a real need to look at how we have historically have gone about brand, concept and message, creation and testing and represents a real challenge to how relevant are our current methods.

Traditionally, the process for brand development has been for the marketing team (at a global, regional or local level), the medical and sales teams, the advertising agency and the brand consultancy to be closeted in a darkened room in a workshop environment, striving to create the complete strategic brand, with a view to undertaking extensive market research to collaborate their thoughts.

We develop what we think customers want to hear, the value we think they want, to put together an offering and then, and only then, expose it to our customers in the hope that they will like what we offer them!

Is this approach as relevant as it was in the past?  The changing environment facing our market today would suggest that we must look further and act differently if we are going to create the compelling brand propositions we need to maximise the success of our products.

In the next decade brands must adapt or die. We need a more collaborative, adaptive and continuous approach to building and sustaining our brands – one that is based at a minimum on the core co-creation principle of doing things with people not at them.

What might be an appropriate definition of this co-creation phenomenon: “The principle of creating goods, services and experiences with the direct and active involvement of experienced and creative customers, tapping into their intellectual capital, giving them a direct say in the positioning, innovation and communication of brands, to produce more profitable products that customers want to buy”.

Although it is not appropriate within the Pharma industry that our customers (either patients or physicians) should be actively involved in R&D – they can play a vital role in the development of the brand, the messages and the creative execution.

Co-creation is founded on three key tenets:

1. Constant customer involvement throughout the entire marketing planning and brand communications process, i.e. maintaining a continuous dialogue with customers; harnessing their ideas and opinions to develop better communications and adapting to their changing needs and tastes in real-time.

2. A continuous process, with no end points as the communication is constantly building and evolving.

3. Creating communities and constantly communicating with them, online and offline.

The co-creation of value

The notion of marketing as a facilitator and ‘structurer’ of the mutual creation of value is gaining credence. The customer should always be a co-creator of value.

Together, the company and customer create value through customised, co-produced offerings. The co-creation of value is a desirable goal as it can assist firms in highlighting the customer’s point of view and in improving the front-end process of identifying customers’ needs and wants.

Looking at the world of consumer marketing, which is often the fore-runner of what will be adopted by the pharmaceuticals industry in time, there is significant agreement that the Top 5 Brand Development and Communication Trends can be summarised as follows:

Substituting the word “physician” when you read “consumer” helps to paint what the picture might look like for Pharma.

1. The Power of Word of Mouth

The majority of purchase decisions are influenced in some way by word of mouth recommendation making word of mouth marketing amongst the most powerful brand communications tool. But it’s also hard to manage; it is out of your control and in the hands, or rather the mouths of the consumer and most importantly you have to earn it. Your product/ communication/service delivery/experience needs to be valued or good otherwise word of mouth works equally effectively in a negative context.

Although we are being constantly bombarded by the premise that in the future everything we communicate to our customers will be through, via, in or at least some way involving social-networks, e-mail, SMS or some viral community, the first thing to remember is that studies are actually showing that the most influential word of mouth recommendation is offline.

In the UK Word of Mouth consultancy Keller Fay found 90% of brand based “word of mouth” occurs off-line, especially face-to-face. So whilst it’s tempting to think that viral and digital social media is the only way forward, we need to think more about WHAT will make consumers talk positively to their friends and within their communities on or off-line not the medium in which it is delivered.

The challenge for us in Pharma is to ask ‘what do we actually do to encourage word of mouth communication between Doctors’?  It is actually the sharing of great personal or patient experiences, and of course we have success stories in Detail Aids but we cannot rely on case studies written by us because that is all about us telling them. Imagine the power if Doctors could be encouraged to share their successes on a peer to peer basis?

2. The Power of Communities

The lesson here is that naturally occurring communities work best.  Brands will do better when they can add value to an existing community rather than companies spending large amounts of money trying to create one. The best place to look for communities is around consumer interests and passions occurring naturally on and off-line, but rarely around brands (with a few exceptions like car and motorbike brands).

Clearly, what pharmaceutical companies can do in social media is significantly restricted at present but the FDA has renewed interest in addressing Internet communications and has acknowledged the special nature of the Internet as a marketing tool and venue.  The Agency held a public hearing and solicited written comments from September 2009 to February 2010 and has made the issuance of a policy on social media a priority for 2010.  But until FDA issues formal guidelines or new regulations governing Internet communications, you should assume that the FDA will review any social media communications through existing FDA regulations but track warning and untitled letters to avoid the mistakes your peers make when they communicate through social media and pay attention:  the FDA’s Internet policy may emerge quickly over the next year or so.

There needs to be a catalyst for discussion; involvement is critical to creating brands worth talking about.

Whether it is Patient Associations or HCP Special Interest Groups – they exist but what do we do to earn their involvement?  It’s not about advocating loyalty (yet) but involvement, absolutely.

3. The Power of Involvement

Co-creation: is a great way to involve consumers in something they’re passionate about. Arguably Starbucks is one of the most successful brands in creating an on-line community through involvement. They claim to have 6 million fans and the magic of their involvement is in asking for product suggestions and improvements and then acting on them.

Rate and commentate: For consumers who don’t want to go to the effort of creating something, ‘rating’ comes a close second. Everyone loves to give feedback – rating and commentating systems are an easy way to invite involvement and sponsor sharing.

The Big Idea:  Think about the recent Microsoft advertising campaign of “I am a PC and Windows 7 was my idea”.

With these ads, Microsoft is telling users that they’ve listened to customers’ suggestions and used them in the design for Windows 7. As such, Windows 7 is the idea of the people – people like you and me.

Creating an ad campaign that speaks not only to the improvements, but tells us that they are a direct result of people’s feedback, is genius. The “My Idea” ads show regular, everyday people in regular, everyday settings taking credit for Windows 7 features. The guy in his bedroom talks about how he wished his PC could have snapping windows. The dad in his house wants all the computer equipment in his house to work together. These things are now features of Windows 7, and thus, their ideas. The idea is to show that normal people influenced the design of the product, which should make it exactly what people want.

4. The Power of Emotions

It’s never been more important to engage the emotions.

In reality consumers are not sitting around waiting to hear from you; they are being bombarded with around 35,000 messages a day, it’s stressful! With so much information and messaging around, we tend to sift out the messages we want to hear and gravitate to things that make us feel good.  So it’s important that messages are re-framed as understanding and recognising us as individuals and potentially gives them something to talk about, with your brand at the centre of the discussion.

5. The Power of Story Telling

However, none of these creative opportunities are possible unless we get the brand story straight. While the connections, channels and ways customers engage with brands have come full-circle; the principles of brand haven’t changed. Brands still need to stand for something, have a purpose, a passion and a point of view.

Brand disciplines are borne from within and need to be aligned to the brand value; otherwise everything else is, at best, creating awareness and at worst a waste of money, time and energy.

Applied to Pharmaceuticals

In this globally driven, regulatory-focused marketplace, more reliance than ever is being placed on the scientific integrity of a brand, leading the industry to ensure they communicate more credibly at every front.

From developing a unique nomenclature and lexicon to position the brand in clinical communications, to establishing visionary campaignability with long-term application, some companies are taking advantage of this shift in grounding professional value propositions by developing innovative ways of approaching branding. What could be more powerful than a Detail Aid and Message Cascade, even the Press Advertisement Campaign being one that is jointly created by HCPs and Patients and us?

A focus on core values is a primary requisite for the opportunity to create uniquely ownable and motivating language and visuals. These branding hallmarks are the most permanent public expressions of the brand’s character or personality – how it looks and feels, as well as its tone of voice. They are important contributors to overall brand equity that are inextricably linked to the brand for its lifetime. While they are certainly a significant component of advertising and promotion, they also live in venues where advertising and promotion do not; such as scientific conferences, on packaging and so on.

Into the future, if we are truly to build and sustain great brands with real value, in my opinion, and in no particular order, we must embrace:

  • Tapping into the collective experiences, skills and ingenuity of our customers around the world to change from the inward looking, producer-versus-customer innovation model so common to corporations worldwide
  • Requiring a more consensual and integrated approach based on co-creation with key stakeholders, less about telling people why they should want a brand and more understanding of how a brand fits as well as working within a flow of communication rather than trying to control the communication.
  • Spend the time to understand how and why our brand fits for and adds value to all stakeholders in their language and fits with their values with a focus on what is important for them not just for us
  • Involving our customers in determining how to position our brands
  • Getting our customers to help with the creation of our messages and advertising to tell real, powerful stories that they want to hear
  • Create a powerful word-of-mouth environment that encourages customers to openly exchange views and opinions (as allowed)
  • Listening to our customers views on how to improve and enhance our brands and communication through the encouragement of feedback
  • Doing it all repeatedly so that you are continuously adapting to their changing needs and aspirations

This is a long way from sitting in a room in the HQ building and then exploring YOUR ideas with potentially bored and over-researched customers – are you ready for the future of branding in the 21st Century?

About the author

Chris Marks is Brand Services Principal

Originally published as “Co-creation: the future of marketing” in Pharmafocus, January 2011

Managing the Franchise – Part 2 (Local)


December 22nd, 2010

Commercial managers who are responsible for a number of brands face a constant challenge in choosing where across the franchise or portfolio to invest limited human and financial resources.  How can these choices be optimised?

As we know, the franchise can take a number of forms: the traditional therapy area portfolio with a number of constituent products; a brand with a number of indications each requiring resource; or, at a local level, the mature product portfolio where we need to decide on level of investment and support.

In this article, Paul Stuart-Kregor outlines some of the thinking required to effectively manage the franchise at a local level, including:

  • Taking advantage of the move to more ‘total healthcare solutions to help deliver shared customer and franchise goals
  • Adding true value by helping to develop better patient care pathways and so meet our customers agenda through our franchise commitment
  • Working with purchasers who are increasingly looking at the use of our portfolio of drugs on a more macro basis.

Considerations for success

In the previous article, published in the October issue of Pharmafocus, general principles to managing the franchise were identified, which apply equally at global and local level.  It is helpful to review these key principles again, before we look in more depth at those issues relating specifically to the franchise at a local level.

1.         Brand prioritisation

Resources must be allocated to the strongest and highest performing assets. This entails detailed analysis of customer targets, brand relevance, and the brands’ impact on business results to identify which are stars and which should be pruned. For a detailed ‘how to’ approach see my earlier article.

2.         Build, protect, and leverage brand assets to maximise the value of the portfolio

Once the portfolio is tightened, the remaining brands should be assessed for short-term and long-term growth opportunities. Brand managers must proactively manage their brands and determine the extent to which the brands can be extended organically or “lent out” to grow new products or services.

3.         Establish and empower a portfolio ‘manager’

Most businesses lack the management structures, systems, or processes to effectively manage a franchise or brand portfolio strategy. What’s needed is a dedicated brand portfolio manager. At the very least, a ‘brand steward’ can help address the marketing effectiveness conundrum. This individual can manage and monitor the portfolio’s performance (including individual brands’ contributions to the business), better understand what the company is actually spending in aggregate on brand and marketing support, and offer knowledgeable insights to guide resource allocation decisions.

Effectively managed, your franchise or brand portfolio has the potential to wield significant power as a vehicle for driving business growth. Combining a sound strategy with best practices in brand management will help ensure that the value of the portfolio, rather than simply the number of brands within it, grows over time.

Six of the ways in which portfolio management at a local level enhances growth are:

  • Clear prioritisation of future focus
  • Prioritisation by brand and product
  • Concentration of spend on priority opportunities, brands and products
  • Operational cost savings through simplified business
  • Disposal of brand assets which don’t fit clearly within the portfolio
  • Gap filling by product development and/or acquisition

Opportunities

Most healthcare systems in the world are currently undergoing fundamental change as the relevant stakeholders battle with the challenge of increasing demand for healthcare balanced against a need for financial restraint.

The good news is that the focus in many markets is likely to be more on total ‘healthcare’ system efficiency. In the UK we have started to see the merging of social and healthcare budgets to avoid the potential for savings in one area being lost as the expenditure is from another budget.

Following the publication of the NHS White Paper, we will see even more extensive changes to the NHS.  Service provision and commissioning is being pushed out to Primary care, or the community, in many markets as well as non-traditional providers being considered as alternatives to the existing structure; diagnosis, treatment and management pathways are being completely rebuilt.

The importance of the various healthcare technology assessment functions will increase as healthcare systems seek short term cost savings in the face of both short term but also longer term pressures. However, as we have seen recently in the UK with the change in attitude to treatments for Alzheimer’s a more holistic view to disease management will potentially become the norm.

The advent of approaches such as the “Joint Working” initiative is potentially going to revolutionise the relationship between Pharma and the NHS. NHS stakeholders are reaching out to Pharma in an unprecedented way; moving from an adversarial stance to “real” co-operation. There is much common ground which presents the potential for some serious win-wins.

Pharma is being seen as having the skill set and resources to assist the NHS to reach its objectives providing huge opportunities to help shape this new environment. Already Pharma is seen as a partner in early diagnosis and screening (e.g. cardiovascular disease) and a partner in developing and monitoring adherence to guidelines (e.g. anticoagulant use) as well as providing value added initiatives such as patient education programmes.

Traditionally ‘added value’ has been about providing services which have been hard to link to tangible business performance. Now by realising synergies with our customers and our franchises by demonstrating commitment to a therapeutic category there is real potential for business gain. Of course by adding value through education and services but more importantly in helping to design and provide end to end management solutions. For example in the case of the development of a new care pathway, industry provided strategic planning expertise and support by facilitating clinician engagement and developing skills in relevant stakeholder groups.

At local as opposed to global level we can make the most of the customer interface in managing our franchise. We may also build brand equity within patient and healthcare provider communities which will pay dividends for the existing and, if we take a more medium term view, the future portfolio.

The therapy area franchise

A number of companies have focussed their activities in a relatively narrow range of therapeutic categories e.g. Galderma in dermatology and NovoNordisk in diabetes, thus demonstrating a long-term commitment to the management and effective treatment of patients. This has provided benefits through developing and maintaining longstanding relationships with key stakeholders and developing stronger reputations in their respective areas of focus than some of their competitors.

There is no doubt this has driven product preference where differences are marginal. Better products will always win but being able to leverage relationships and heritage is a strong defence when there is not a lot to choose between offerings.

However, traditionally this has all been about driving usage and preference but what this new environment now provides is the platform to engage with customers in service redesign. If we are ‘trusted’ then we are in a strong position to work with our customers in partnership in helping to build more efficient and effective patient pathways that could provide benefits both to the customer and to established brands through more effective use.

The outcome of the redesign will depend on the customer’s agenda. It may be about cost, it may be about efficiency (and hence cost per treated patient) or it may be focussed on helping to develop the new commissioning process, albeit the details of this are still up in the air.

There always has been a shared agenda in ensuring prescribed products are used effectively. The environment now is much more conducive to working together to achieve that but on a far broader basis than just prescribing the most cost effective treatment. We have seen effective examples of this in a number of chronic diseases and long term conditions.

Where we have a number of products and expertise in a particular therapy area we should be looking to maximise the benefit from our customers interactions across the healthcare delivery system to build a true franchise with our customers, where we help them achieve their goals and as a consequence help to meet our commercial objectives.

Mature products

An increasing number of companies have realised that the long ‘tail’ of mature and relatively non-promoted products present a significant profit maximisation opportunity.

Medicines management have begun to realise that older drugs ‘tick a lot of boxes’. They are generally cheaper than newer products and have a long track record and strong heritage so any problems are well known and managed accordingly. Physicians trust these brands and are comfortable with how and when to use them and what to do should they encounter any safety or tolerability issues.

We have long moved away from the view that ‘better is best’. The population approach to the prescribing of statins admirably demonstrates that in some instances and for some situations ’80% is good enough’. That way more people can be treated for less, improving outcomes across a wider population, which is what modern healthcare systems are all about.

So managing the mature product mix may well appear like traditional portfolio management, but we need to consider how we choose to identify where and how we focus.

We are starting to see basket dealing of drugs become of interest to some:

“Basketing proposals are welcome if drugs are on the formulary. I would entertain an approach of a discounted basket of drugs which are a key focus for us. We could in turn partner in maximising cost effective use of other drugs in the portfolio” PCT procurement lead

But this quote from Medicine Management demonstrates that these key purchasers are now willing to go further than that. Pharma can potentially offer a range of cost-effective solutions to financially challenged PCT’s (e.g. equalisation deals, franchise, population based). We could look at helping to drive use of certain of our drugs to reduce costs elsewhere in the health system (e.g. methotrexate in rheumatoid arthritis rather than the more expensive disease modifying drugs).

Consequently, when we come to prioritise the medicines in our mature portfolio for sure we will look at their importance (‘low’, ‘strategic’, ‘financially’) and their future (‘under threat’, ‘resilient’, ‘potential upside’) but we also need to consider the scope for action (‘low’, ‘medium’, ‘high’) in a far wider context.

We now see that the ‘Scope for action’ is far broader than ever before. We need to look at the whole patient care pathway to see if there are opportunities to meet our customer’s agenda through more active marketing of one or a number of products. There should be a distinct shift away from purely selling commodities, rather to offering solutions to problems. And not only at the clinician end as we may be able to facilitate moves towards more diagnosis and treatment in the community setting to win large pharmacy deals

Using the key principles of portfolio management, while considering the value of an ability to create real synergies will provide us with a richer range of options:

This will then lead to a range of options from ‘strategic imperatives’ to other more ‘opportunistic’ ones.

In conclusion

In the past franchise management at a local level for the most part has involved a product-therapeutic category approach focusing on driving brand preference and usage for major promoted products.

The healthcare environment, particularly in the UK, is now more conducive to wider ranging involvement of healthcare companies in helping our customers achieve their health provision goals.

When it comes to franchise management, this provides any healthcare company a wider range of options for establishing and developing a true therapy area franchise centred on our promoted products, where we address the customers wider agenda and achieve both parties objectives.

The mature brand portfolio should not be ignored either. Increasingly customers are looking for cost effective whole care solutions. The range of products in that ‘tail’ provides great opportunities to enhance the interaction with key customers and thus drive commercial gains.

The Author

Dr Paul Stuart-Kregor is Director

Originally published as “Take a mature approach to relationships with customers”, in Pharmafocus, December 2010

What’s The Plan?


November 30th, 2010

Planning should be a more circular process. In this article, Jon Bircher argues that we must regularly challenge, refresh and refine our view of the world in which we compete to ensure that our planning is as robust as possible. Jon discusses how a circular planning approach can help marketers be more proactive, more innovative and have greater foresight in ensuring that their plans work in the real world, focusing on a few of the key elements that could help make the process a success.

Circular not linear

As senior managers and marketers we all understand the value of planning, whether strategic or tactical. At its most basic, planning is about understanding where we are, where we want to be and how we will get there. But plans cannot be written in stone, they need to live and breathe, they need to be implemented, challenged and revised. With this need for continued (circular) input and refinement, we have observed a discrepancy between what planning should be and what planning is.

We do not live in a static world; markets are dynamic by nature, they change, and they evolve. Planning, in order to be effective, should therefore aspire to be more ‘circular’ than ‘linear’. Plans can then be iterative; as we discover how our actions influence the market, the customer and the competition; adapting our plans accordingly.

Internal pressures and constraints often mean that planning timelines are not ideal. Processes and templates can override the thinking which they are supposed to stimulate distracting us from the real purpose of planning- to deliver something robust, competitive and sustainable for our organisation or brand.

Developing a more circular approach to planning is vital when bringing together the wider cross-functional team. Plans which have a life engage teams better and ensure a willingness to learn and adapt the plan based on new and relevant understanding.

As a consultancy we have a unique opportunity to work with many of the top pharmaceutical companies (from embedding planning processes to pressure testing brand plans). Having been on the ‘client’ side we also understand the challenges and frustrations that come with organisational planning.

From these experiences we are able to offer some practical observations about what appears to work and what appears to get in the way of a circular approach to planning. Often only simple tweaks in approach are required to make something dead and outdated live and breathe.

Stifled by PowerPoint

Increasingly the desire for consistency means that companies demand a comprehensive deck of PowerPoint slides to represent the ‘plan’. Having reviewed many organisations’ templates and plans it is clear that slide decks can often run to more than 100 slides of ‘information’. Working with brand teams it is also clear that these processes (and the templates) can end up driving the plan rather than the thinking behind them. The quality of thinking suffers, creativity is stifled and the wider brand team become disengaged and disillusioned, seeing planning as nothing more than a ‘template filling’ exercise.

On the whole marketers’ motivations are in the right place, genuinely wanting to deliver the best for their brands. But to move towards a more engaging and iterative approach to planning, where as the year unfolds we are flexible and are able to adapt our strategy and subsequent activities, we need to re-think our approach to the phrase ‘planning cycle’.

What can we do better?

Based on our observations there are things that can be done more often to encourage good circular planning.

Clearly we need to be less driven by templates. Rather than focusing on quantity of information we should concentrate on quality of thinking. If senior management require you to fill in a comprehensive slide deck then develop a working document for the core team – a more manageable, slimmed-down version focused on the critical insights and the key strategic thrusts.

We should not allow team members to become disillusioned, causing planning fatigue and ultimately lack of ownership. We should instead reprioritise where planning fits in organisational importance.  Set out to engage the full brand team throughout the development of the plan, its ongoing review and adaptation. Organise exciting and creative workshops, giving people work to prepare and actions to take away. Try to focus on the critical business issues, find consensus, and force prioritisation. That way we can build on what has been done previously, develop the best plan possible based on current knowledge and ensure the whole start set out on a  journey of constant, circular planning.

It is also vital to ensure that the same level of commitment and emphasis is applied at all stages of plan development and its evolution. For example we often see teams’ spending all their time and energy on situational analysis and then getting fatigued by the time they get to tactical planning.

Accountability within planning is critical.  Help the team to clearly understand their role throughout the year, the skills they bring and their individual responsibility for identifying, anticipating and meeting customers’ needs.

Cause and effect

One of the consistent themes in working with clients through the planning process is their assumption that they are working in isolation. That may seem strange at first, given that companies go through extensive situational analysis as part of their annual planning – reviewing customers, competition and market dynamics.  However to truly move beyond working in isolation we need to remember that everything we do has an impact on our customers, competitors and the market itself.

Equally planning must be a continual and fluid process. We need to put regular opportunities in place for challenging our thinking, learning from the future, developing contingencies and adapting our plan as the year progresses.

There are many tools that help us do this but the simplest is to make sure that the plan is not simply a yearly tick box exercise but becomes a ‘living and breathing’ practice. This is as simple as scheduling monthly reviews for people to bring new learnings to the table, discussing as a team the impact these have on the plan.

Ian Wilson was famously quoted as saying that: “The main dilemma in business is developing a robust strategy which accounts for the future when all our knowledge is based in the past!” When we initially develop a plan, we should build something which is as robust as possible at that point in time. However in order to stay ahead of the game, we need to constantly learn, adapt and be flexible.

Iterative planning

Once again based on our exposure to different organisations here are some thoughts on how to make planning more iterative

Allocate time on a monthly basis to constantly check, challenge and refine your plan, your strategy and activities. This could be as simple as 1 hour sessions individually or with the team. We need to ask what is working, what is not working, what lessons we are learning and where the gaps are. Learning from the future requires the whole team, a natural route for further engagement.

Develop ‘indicators of the future.’ Identify the competitive and market indicators that you need to track, research and measure. This will help you understand what is changing versus your core assumptions. Track the activities that you have put in place and ascertain the impact that they have had on the dynamics of the market. Recognise that each activity will impact your marketplace: don’t just measure ROI, measure market reaction.

Consider using workshop-based processes such as scenario learning and competitor rooms to pressure-test your thinking and consider competitive response.  These can be run every 6 months and are great catalysts for engaging the team in the thinking, allowing you to ensure a more future-proof strategy.

Whose role is marketing anyway?

If Barwell and others are correct and marketing is a “customer focused philosophy, not a system or organised structure” and if marketing is “founded on the belief that profitable sales can only be achieved by identifying and anticipating customers’ needs and desires” then it is everyone’s job, as part of the wider brand team, to ‘market’ our brands.

Therefore, not only do we need to engage people in the vision and strategy for the brand (or organisation) but we must also invest in helping them understand the marketing tools and processes used to develop creative thinking, generate insight and build robust plans. The most cohesive and engaging brand plans are built in companies where the wider team has a good commercial marketing mindset, where everyone understands the value of marketing, and where everyone sees planning as fundamental in getting close to our customers and making a difference with the medicines we are selling.

Investing in people’s commercial capabilities has an additional benefit in aiding overall engagement across the team. This means that plans tend to be challenged and thought through more effectively, planning workshops are energising, proactive and creative, and the final plan is more valuable, more believable and, ultimately, implementable.

We have seen small changes have a great impact. For example, setting up training interventions (e.g.  ’Marketing for non-marketers’), focusing individuals’ and departments’ skills appropriately throughout the planning cycle, and providing clear accountability for aspects of the plan and its iterations (e.g. tracking competitors or KOL opinion). A simple but effective approach is to start every planning workshop or update meeting with a piece of marketing training, introducing new tools, or demonstrating best practice approaches.

The best chance of success

The critical question is do we believe planning should be circular in nature rather than linear, static and annual? Should planning help us feed in new information and help us modify the plan itself?

In observing many companies and in working with numerous brand teams my recommendation would be to create a more iterative approach. This involves more creativity in terms of attitude and style, more pragmatism around process (you may still need to complete the 100 slides required corporately) and more focused (monthly) strategy reviews. But it essentially means that as a team you genuinely have a living and breathing plan, which is flexible to the dynamics of your market.

Teams that get it right also appear to have fun along the way. They come up with interesting and creative ideas and are more than willing to stop doing things which are ineffective. They also have the confidence to know that, even though no-one can precisely predict the future, a circular approach provides the best chance of delivering a robust, competitive and sustainable plan. And ultimately the best chance of success.

Top tips to a more circular approach to planning

  • Make your plan genuinely ‘live and breathe’ – it should not be set in stone. Feel free to learn and adapt as you take on board new learning
  • Set up monthly workshops to review new learning
  • Engage everyone in the development and evaluation of the plan
  • Let your collective thinking lead the plan not the templates
  • Pressure test the plan regularly using scenarios of the future
  • Regularly consider your competitors’ response and build appropriate contingencies
  • Remain focused – don’t let the templates distract you from the core issues you need to deal with and need to be good at
  • Set up trackers to help you understand the impact of your activities – what works and doesn’t work and how the market reacts

About The Author

Jon Bircher is Head of Bespoke Consulting.

Originally published in Pharmaceutical Marketing, November 2010

Breaking Free – Circular processes will liberate your brand planning


November 10th, 2010

What’s the plan?

Planning should be a more circular process. In this article, Jon Bircher argues that we must regularly challenge, refresh and refine our view of the world in which we compete to ensure that our planning is as robust as possible. Jon discusses how a circular planning approach can help marketers be more proactive, more innovative and have greater foresight in ensuring that their plans work in the real world, focusing on a few of the key elements that could help make the process a success.

Circular not linear

As senior managers and marketers we all understand the value of planning, whether strategic or tactical. At its most basic, planning is about understanding where we are, where we want to be and how we will get there. But plans cannot be written in stone, they need to live and breathe, they need to be implemented, challenged and revised. With this need for continued (circular) input and refinement, we have observed a discrepancy between what planning should be and what planning is.

We do not live in a static world; markets are dynamic by nature, they change, and they evolve. Planning, in order to be effective, should therefore aspire to be more ‘circular’ than ‘linear’. Plans can then be iterative; as we discover how our actions influence the market, the customer and the competition; adapting our plans accordingly.

Internal pressures and constraints often mean that planning timelines are not ideal. Processes and templates can override the thinking which they are supposed to stimulate distracting us from the real purpose of planning- to deliver something robust, competitive and sustainable for our organisation or brand.

Developing a more circular approach to planning is vital when bringing together the wider cross-functional team. Plans which have a life engage teams better and ensure a willingness to learn and adapt the plan based on new and relevant understanding.

As a consultancy we have a unique opportunity to work with many of the top pharmaceutical companies (from embedding planning processes to pressure testing brand plans). Having been on the ‘client’ side we also understand the challenges and frustrations that come with organisational planning.

From these experiences we are able to offer some practical observations about what appears to work and what appears to get in the way of a circular approach to planning. Often only simple tweaks in approach are required to make something dead and outdated live and breathe.

Stifled by PowerPoint

Increasingly the desire for consistency means that companies demand a comprehensive deck of PowerPoint slides to represent the ‘plan’. Having reviewed many organisations’ templates and plans it is clear that slide decks can often run to more than 100 slides of ‘information’. Working with brand teams it is also clear that these processes (and the templates) can end up driving the plan rather than the thinking behind them. The quality of thinking suffers, creativity is stifled and the wider brand team become disengaged and disillusioned, seeing planning as nothing more than a ‘template filling’ exercise.

On the whole marketers’ motivations are in the right place, genuinely wanting to deliver the best for their brands. But to move towards a more engaging and iterative approach to planning, where as the year unfolds we are flexible and are able to adapt our strategy and subsequent activities, we need to re-think our approach to the phrase ‘planning cycle’.

What can we do better?

Based on our observations there are things that can be done more often to encourage good circular planning.

Clearly we need to be less driven by templates. Rather than focusing on quantity of information we should concentrate on quality of thinking. If senior management require you to fill in a comprehensive slide deck then develop a working document for the core team – a more manageable, slimmed-down version focused on the critical insights and the key strategic thrusts.

We should not allow team members to become disillusioned, causing planning fatigue and ultimately lack of ownership. We should instead reprioritise where planning fits in organisational importance.  Set out to engage the full brand team throughout the development of the plan, its ongoing review and adaptation. Organise exciting and creative workshops, giving people work to prepare and actions to take away. Try to focus on the critical business issues, find consensus, and force prioritisation. That way we can build on what has been done previously, develop the best plan possible based on current knowledge and ensure the whole start set out on a  journey of constant, circular planning.

It is also vital to ensure that the same level of commitment and emphasis is applied at all stages of plan development and its evolution. For example we often see teams’ spending all their time and energy on situational analysis and then getting fatigued by the time they get to tactical planning.

Accountability within planning is critical.  Help the team to clearly understand their role throughout the year, the skills they bring and their individual responsibility for identifying, anticipating and meeting customers’ needs.

Cause and effect

One of the consistent themes in working with clients through the planning process is their assumption that they are working in isolation. That may seem strange at first, given that companies go through extensive situational analysis as part of their annual planning – reviewing customers, competition and market dynamics.  However to truly move beyond working in isolation we need to remember that everything we do has an impact on our customers, competitors and the market itself.

Equally planning must be a continual and fluid process. We need to put regular opportunities in place for challenging our thinking, learning from the future, developing contingencies and adapting our plan as the year progresses.

There are many tools that help us do this but the simplest is to make sure that the plan is not simply a yearly tick box exercise but becomes a ‘living and breathing’ practice. This is as simple as scheduling monthly reviews for people to bring new learnings to the table, discussing as a team the impact these have on the plan.

Ian Wilson was famously quoted as saying that: “The main dilemma in business is developing a robust strategy which accounts for the future when all our knowledge is based in the past!” When we initially develop a plan, we should build something which is as robust as possible at that point in time. However in order to stay ahead of the game, we need to constantly learn, adapt and be flexible.

Iterative planning

Once again based on our exposure to different organisations here are some thoughts on how to make planning more iterative

Allocate time on a monthly basis to constantly check, challenge and refine your plan, your strategy and activities. This could be as simple as 1 hour sessions individually or with the team. We need to ask what is working, what is not working, what lessons we are learning and where the gaps are. Learning from the future requires the whole team, a natural route for further engagement.

Develop ‘indicators of the future.’ Identify the competitive and market indicators that you need to track, research and measure. This will help you understand what is changing versus your core assumptions. Track the activities that you have put in place and ascertain the impact that they have had on the dynamics of the market. Recognise that each activity will impact your marketplace: don’t just measure ROI, measure market reaction.

Consider using workshop-based processes such as scenario learning and competitor rooms to pressure-test your thinking and consider competitive response.  These can be run every 6 months and are great catalysts for engaging the team in the thinking, allowing you to ensure a more future-proof strategy.

Whose role is marketing anyway?

If Barwell and others are correct and marketing is a “customer focused philosophy, not a system or organised structure” and if marketing is “founded on the belief that profitable sales can only be achieved by identifying and anticipating customers’ needs and desires” then it is everyone’s job, as part of the wider brand team, to ‘market’ our brands.

Therefore, not only do we need to engage people in the vision and strategy for the brand (or organisation) but we must also invest in helping them understand the marketing tools and processes used to develop creative thinking, generate insight and build robust plans. The most cohesive and engaging brand plans are built in companies where the wider team has a good commercial marketing mindset, where everyone understands the value of marketing, and where everyone sees planning as fundamental in getting close to our customers and making a difference with the medicines we are selling.

Investing in people’s commercial capabilities has an additional benefit in aiding overall engagement across the team. This means that plans tend to be challenged and thought through more effectively, planning workshops are energising, proactive and creative, and the final plan is more valuable, more believable and, ultimately, implementable.

We have seen small changes have a great impact. For example, setting up training interventions (e.g.  ’Marketing for non-marketers’), focusing individuals’ and departments’ skills appropriately throughout the planning cycle, and providing clear accountability for aspects of the plan and its iterations (e.g. tracking competitors or KOL opinion). A simple but effective approach is to start every planning workshop or update meeting with a piece of marketing training, introducing new tools, or demonstrating best practice approaches.

The best chance of success

The critical question is do we believe planning should be circular in nature rather than linear, static and annual? Should planning help us feed in new information and help us modify the plan itself?

In observing many companies and in working with numerous brand teams my recommendation would be to create a more iterative approach. This involves more creativity in terms of attitude and style, more pragmatism around process (you may still need to complete the 100 slides required corporately) and more focused (monthly) strategy reviews. But it essentially means that as a team you genuinely have a living and breathing plan, which is flexible to the dynamics of your market.

Teams that get it right also appear to have fun along the way. They come up with interesting and creative ideas and are more than willing to stop doing things which are ineffective. They also have the confidence to know that, even though no-one can precisely predict the future, a circular approach provides the best chance of delivering a robust, competitive and sustainable plan. And ultimately the best chance of success.

Top tips to a more circular approach to planning

  • Make your plan genuinely ‘live and breathe’ – it should not be set in stone. Feel free to learn and adapt as you take on board new learning
  • Set up monthly workshops to review new learning
  • Engage everyone in the development and evaluation of the plan
  • Let your collective thinking lead the plan not the templates
  • Pressure test the plan regularly using scenarios of the future
  • Regularly consider your competitors’ response and build appropriate contingencies
  • Remain focused – don’t let the templates distract you from the core issues you need to deal with and need to be good at
  • Set up trackers to help you understand the impact of your activities – what works and doesn’t work and how the market reacts

The Author

Jon Bircher is Head of Bespoke Consulting at The MSI Consultancy Limited

Originally published in Pharmaceutical Marketing 2010

Managing the Franchise – Part I (Global)


November 1st, 2010

Commercial managers who are responsible for a number of brands face a constant challenge in choosing where across the franchise or portfolio to invest limited human and financial resources. How can these choices be optimised?

The franchise can take a number of forms: the traditional therapy area portfolio with a number of constituent products; a brand with a number of indications each requiring resource; or, at a global level, a single brand with a number of local markets each one competing for investment and support.

In this article, Paul Stuart-Kregor outlines some of the skills required to effectively manage the franchise at a global level, including:

  • The use of key marketing tools to help optimise investment into each individual brand
  • Identifying the considerations beyond revenue that may impact which elements of the franchise are supported
  • Optimising the whole franchise whilst accounting for portfolio objectives and potential synergies between individual brands

Learning from other industries
Various studies have shown that branded consumer businesses generate up to 90% of their profits from fewer than 20% of their brands. This suggests that many companies, pharmaceuticals included, are missing an opportunity to gain both more efficiency and effectiveness from their brand portfolios.

What’s required goes beyond the de rigueur brand rationalisation. A better solution is to look more comprehensively and strategically at the portfolio of brands as a whole or within distinct franchises and to set up a system for managing the brand assets in those groupings as true portfolios. A cohesive brand portfolio strategy will help guide the processes by which brand assets are most effectively created, deployed, and managed — at the same time, supporting both top- and bottom-line business growth.

The idea is to create value by optimising brand assets to meet marketplace needs while recognising internal operating realities. In the consumer world, value is created when relationships among brands are better managed to avoid conflicts and overlaps, and by striking a better balance between category (where relevant) and product brands and extensions. Optimal value is created when waste and inefficiencies are reduced, so brand building is more cost-effective, with fewer and stronger brands getting the support they merit.

Most critically, a well-orchestrated franchise or brand portfolio strategy needs to be fully integrated with the company’s business model, tying in with such economic factors as pricing and profit policies (e.g. PPRS in the UK Pharma market), manufacturing scale, and distribution policies.

Getting there requires marketers to adopt a more ‘investor-like’ mindset in managing their brand assets. Like investors, they must first build the asset base, then protect it, and finally seek to further leverage these assets for growth. To safeguard them requires balancing the dual tensions of near-term profit-and-loss demands with the creation of long-term asset value. Too many fail at these responsibilities, allowing their brands to be overextended (damaging their equity) or overprotecting them (stifling equity growth). And the complexities only increase when it’s a portfolio of brands that comprises the asset pool.

What’s the relevance to Pharma?
With pharmaceutical companies changing their business model from a few blockbusters to a wider portfolio of relatively smaller brand assets, the need for franchise or portfolio based thinking has to increase; added to which, many Pharma companies are now realising that their ‘tail’ of non-promoted or ‘mature’ brands is a significant source of profit.

These two extremes tend to play out at a global level on the one hand and a local or regional level on the other. This article focuses primarily on the global level and a follow up article will address the local/regional level.

Considerations for Success
However, no matter what level you are operating at there are three considerations for success:

1. Prioritise your brands
Resources must be allocated to the strongest and highest performing assets. This entails detailed analysis of customer targets, brand relevance, and the brands’ impact on business results to identify which are stars and which should be pruned. By identifying and nurturing the stars and eliminating underperformers, companies will ensure their investments are helping to drive top- and bottom-line growth. How to prioritise is covered in more detail later in this article.

2. Build, protect, and leverage brand assets to maximise the value of the portfolio
Once the portfolio is tightened, the remaining brands should be assessed for short-term and long-term growth opportunities. Brand managers must proactively manage their brands and determine the extent to which the brands can be extended organically or “lent out” to grow new products or services. Overprotection is just as dangerous as overextension; left underleveraged, brands will under-perform as a driver of organisational growth. Striking the appropriate balance is critical.

3. Establish and empower a portfolio manager
Most businesses lack the management structures, systems, or processes to effectively manage a franchise or brand portfolio strategy. What’s needed is a dedicated brand portfolio manager — a role that may nominally fall to the most senior-level marketing officer to juggle amongst myriad other responsibilities, and hence may well not get the attention it deserves. At the very least, a ‘brand steward’ can help address the marketing effectiveness conundrum. This individual can manage and monitor the portfolio’s performance (including individual brands’ contributions to the business), better understand what the company is actually spending in aggregate on brand and marketing support, and offer knowledgeable insights to guide resource allocation decisions.

Effectively managed, your franchise or brand portfolio has the potential to wield significant power as a vehicle for driving business growth. Combining a sound strategy with best practices in brand management will help ensure that the value of the portfolio, rather than simply the number of brands within it, grows over time.

Six of the ways in which portfolio management at a global level enhances growth are:

  • Clear prioritisation of future focus by major market
  • Prioritisation by brand and product
  • Concentration of spend on priority markets, brands and products
  • Operational cost savings through simplified business
  • Disposal of brand assets which don’t fit clearly within the portfolio
  • Gap filling by product development and/or acquisition

So, how do you prioritise your pharmaceutical brands?
We are all familiar with the classic portfolio tools (BCG Matrix, McKinsey / GE Matrix; its more friendly version the Directional Policy Matrix (DPM)) but there are some real drawbacks to these as tools. Like a company balance sheet, they represent snapshots of the situation; they are often associated with prescriptive solutions to the situations that emerge; they seldom, if ever reflect the interaction of several product or therapy based strategies embarked upon or considered by the company applying the model; the criteria by which opportunities and capabilities are assessed are often very limited and the models are often aimed at top management decisions, and are not able to be effectively used in a consistent manner by other managers within the organisation.

Added to which the use of portfolio planning matrices has been shown empirically to harm businesses not help them – firms that used BCG had a lower return on capital (probably because BCG assumes market share equals profits); firms whose decisions were consistent with these portfolio planning methods lost market value.

What is needed, particularly in the pharmaceutical industry, is a model that attempts to project, over the life cycle of the product, annual cost and revenue streams as the basis for an evaluation of the rate of return from investing in that product, a Portfolio Asset Assessment (PAA).

A well prepared PAA should be transparent and involve by markets of key importance:

  • Identifying and projecting the product life cycle annual treatment prevalence for a disease state;
  • Identifying and projecting the current direct costs of treating patients in that disease state (medical and pharmacy costs);
  • Identifying and projecting patient switching scenarios over the product life cycle;
  • Identifying and projecting development costs, reimbursement and sales and advertising costs; and
  • Identifying and projecting sales revenues

While this may appear daunting in black and white, the process is less onerous than it looks. Data is often a challenge, but there are usually surrogates that can be used where actual country data is missing. Analogues of other brands in similar markets can provide good fuel to help pressure test assumptions, which are inevitable given the ‘future focussed’ nature of this assessment.

How this is developed and the financial ‘output’ required will vary by organisation. Use of Net Present Value calculations may be mandatory, but recognise that these do not by themselves help you decide between options.

Once the ‘financial’ picture and the expected commercial value is clear, there is then a need to look at the wider picture, namely the overall business strategy and how each brand can work to help achieve that.

There are a number of ways of doing this, but our preferred approach is an objective scoring model.

The essence of the model is to judge each of the components against a defined (and agreed) set of criteria that go beyond the commercial. An example of this may be:

  1. Reward (to the company – the financial piece)
  2. Business Strategy Fit
  3. Strategic Leverage (ability of the product to leverage the company resources and skills)
  4. Probability of Commercial Success

By using a wider set of criteria, each clearly defined and tied into the overall business strategy, it is far easier to see which brands within a franchise, which markets for a particular brand and even which franchises should receive what level of the company’s finite resources.
And which markets, brands or franchises are less critical, and perhaps should be ignored or divested also becomes clearer.

It is all too easy to assume that just because a brand, a franchise or a brand in a particular market is making money that we should continue to support it; just because a pharmaceutical brand is still delivering revenue after patent expiry does not mean it is worth maintaining.

Any brand asset uses finite resources, be that people, manufacturing capacity, supply chain space or marketing budget. We need to be more astute about which assets we choose to maintain and those we choose to divest or kill.

Maximizing the value of the portfolio
This is all about balance – finding the optimal mix between risk and return, maintenance versus growth and short-term versus long-term within the franchise. While it is always attractive to assume you can achieve the maximal possible result over time, experience suggests that this is rarely achieved for a number of different reasons, some within our control and some not. Given as a global franchise manager you will not have direct control over much of the implementation of your franchise strategy, it is safe to assume that the franchise overall will not potentially fall short of the absolute maximum.

So what are we looking for in maximising the value of the portfolio?

Clearly over and above what the individual components can deliver (as per their PAA) synergies spring to mind. Within each of the asset assessments to what extent the individual brand can add to or support the franchise should have been included, in ‘Strategic Leverage’ for example.

A number of scenarios need to be built where we consider how we can potentially ‘punch above our weight’ by making use of common situations across brands.

One approach could be to use the patient flow by brand to identify where and why bottlenecks to potential brand growth are occurring. In brand planning mode this enables marketing solutions those brand bottlenecks to be identified and where to spend marketing budget for disproportionate impact to achieve your desired behavioural objectives.

In franchise management mode you are looking for common problems for a number of brands where one solution can address both bottlenecks or where one of the brands can open closed doors for another. While we are not often able to market baskets of brands per se, there is no doubt we may be able use one marketing solution to facilitate penetration of more than one brand if we consider a common customer for example.

As well as identifying activities that will most efficiently drive brand value, the patient flow is also useful to assess the potential benefit from market expansion activities. This is critical to maximising your franchise in the long term, and by amortising the costs across a number of brands may be more likely to gain approval and funding.

The franchise manager
Using these approaches is key if the franchise manager is to have the fuel for strategic thinking.

More importantly it is key that this role is recognised as critical to the organisation’s success and to not just add to an already busy individual’s responsibilities.

In conclusion
With pharmaceutical companies changing their business model from a few blockbusters to a wider portfolio of relatively smaller brand assets, the need for franchise or portfolio based thinking has to increase.

While quite a challenge at a global level there is no doubt that there is a need to prioritise brand assets and then build, protect, and leverage those brand assets to maximise the value of the portfolio.

Without the right processes and the right people to do this, it is all too easy to manage brands as a series of individual and independent assets and not gain full value from synergies and economies of scale.

How to manage the ‘mature’ brands in a local portfolio will be addressed separately in our future article.

The Author

Dr Paul Stuart-Kregor is Director of The MSI Consultancy.

Originally published in Pharmafocus, October 2010

READY TO LAUNCH? A COUNTDOWN TO SUCCESS


September 10th, 2010

When NASA launches a rocket, most of the hard work is already done.  The flight itself is relatively short, yet months and years of preparation have gone into making sure it takes off with the right trajectory and the flight is successful.

A good analogy, then for the launch of a pharmaceutical product.  Various research has shown that on average there are just six months post-launch to make a new product successful – and that period is halved for launches in chronic or specialist fields.  The trajectory you establish in those first weeks of your product’s flight will essentially define the long-term success of your brand.  A sobering thought.

As overall pharmaceutical growth is reducing, there is more and more pressure on launches, and they are ever-more challenging in today’s market conditions.  There is an increasing concern over risk, with more rigorous studies and more pharmacovigilance required.  At the same time, there are more hurdles to reimbursement, with a greater requirement for health outcomes and to demonstrate value

On top of this, many companies are now investing in growth areas such as biopharmaceuticals, specialist pharmaceuticals and, increasingly, rare diseases and genetic disorders, that often require different approaches to launch.

The challenges and investment in bringing a brand to market and the high failure rates in the period of discovery to launch, puts the six month time window for defining your sales trajectory into clear perspective.

There is no ‘off the shelf’ launch template to guarantee your success but there are some guiding principles that can be applied to your individual company, brand and market situation.  We have outlined ten simple things that you should be considering in the period before launch.  Think of them as a countdown to success…

10… Allow Enough Time

Given these challenges and the tiny period to set your sales trajectory – it is vital to allow yourself enough time pre-launch: a full 2½ to 3 years is desperately needed.

Often when a product is in market, you don’t have the time to step back and thoroughly assess the market drivers and understand the challenge.  Make sure you give yourself appropriate thinking time before launch; this is the opportunity to set the direction of travel.

Getting the best product label requires doing the right clinical trials which meet the unmet needs of all key customers, to developing relationships which will help you prepare the market.

You should also be starting lifecycle planning.  You need to know where you product is going, and start the relevant trials long before you have launched.  Roche as a company is very good at thinking through and developing a true lifecycle strategy, using multiple trials to investigate how products such as Avastin can be used in many different ways.  This has given a second and third bite at that crucial six month trajectory.

9… Build The Right Team

It is all about consistency: your goal should be to retain the same people on the brand from pre-launch through to launch, something which is actually quite rare.  Pick people who you believe will add value, last the course, and keep them focused and motivated.

Ideally the team should be run by an experienced project manager – or at least a marketer with a particularly strong project management skillset.  Leading a successful launch team requires managing a whole host of different processes and cross functional teams – including marketing and market access, manufacturing, supply chain, medical and regulatory.

Obviously the team leader needs to be commercially savvy, but more than that it is about making sure the launch team works well together, is going in the right direction, key milestones are hit and is fully engaged in the plan and in the brand.

It is important to share organisational learning, to keep lessons learnt within the corporate memory.  Novartis did this well when transferring learning from the successful launch of Glivec to help the success of brands such as Lucentis.

8… Create The Right Global:Local Dynamic

As more organisations are being lead through Global or European structures, this is a relationship which needs to be established early.  Clarity on boundaries, roles and responsibilities, and communication are critical to avoid getting bogged down in internal issues and maximise time on market and customer facing activities.

Be proactive and take the opportunity to input early.  Affiliates often sit waiting for a global plan, thus missing an opportunity to engage with and shape the activities of the global team – something the global team actually wants.

You need to look for opportunities to flex.  There will be core elements to the global plan, but there will also need to be flexibility, depending on the market requirement.

A good and well-known, example of this is Lipitor.  Of course there was a constancy and an organisational momentum behind the strong message about lowering cholesterol, but how that was communicated was flexed at a local level, and even when a local market required a different brand name or visual to meet local market needs the overall consistency and essence of the Lipitor brand was not lost.

7… Assure Reimbursement And Access

You can do nothing if you don’t get reimbursed in some way, so this is obviously critical.  You need to think about trial design: are you engaging internally with the right people in R&D and Health Outcomes?  Are you working with countries with similar challenges, learning from each other and avoiding repetition?  What other options are you assessing?  How can you leverage value-based pricing?  Have you looked at risk-sharing?  Have you looked at packaging the product up with other offerings around it?

Reimbursement doesn’t necessarily have to be for a whole population of patients with a particular disease; it could be for a particular segment, based on work you have done around segmentation and positioning where particular patients derive more benefit.

6… Develop Deep Customer And Market Insight

You need to know who drives the market, how decisions are made, and exactly what your customers need.  Be prepared to take action based on what you hear from customers in research – don’t just ignore it because it doesn’t fit with your product profile.

Get under the skin of the emotional as well as the functional, and that includes your payer or policy-maker, whoever they may be.

Engage with a strong research agency and ensure you gain genuine insight which allows you do something differently as a result, but also don’t under-estimate the power of less formal KOL conversations, clinic visits or ’chats’ with customers.

Finally, spend time understanding the trends, events, customers and competitors which are moulding and shaping your marketplace and ultimately influencing the success of your brand

5… Build A Robust Strategy

This is about converting genuine insight into organisational foresight.  Use your deep customer insight, market knowledge and understanding of current trends to develop future scenarios with which you can interact, and from which you can learn; then thoroughly develop your strategy to make sure it is as robust as possible.  This requires an organisation being prepared to learn, adapt, challenge think and come up with strategic options which are hopefully a little more creative.

This, of course, requires time, but provides you with a plan which can adapt to market or environmental events, rather than a static and reactive plan that has little foresight.

4… Get The Positioning Right

You need to build a positioning which is credible, adds real value and which ultimately differentiates you, plus is sustainable from day one.   It must also have organisational belief.

This is about using your deep insights with creative segmentation, making sure you consider the emotional, functional and price-based benefits to develop real clarity and power around your position..

Your positioning should relate to your segmentation and customers’ needs, encompass your brand values, and link into your long-term vision and strategy including market access.

This is not just about speaking to patients or physicians – it is speaking consistently to all customers.  You might use slightly differently messages and emphasis, but there must be common ground, a common position.

Lilly’ Cialis was a good example of the strength of good positioning.  Launching into an ED market dominated by Viagra, which was hugely known and highly successful, Lilly were able to build their positioning around ‘Le Weekend’, giving patients their sex lives back for a period of time, and when they chose.  Although the actual differentiating benefit was relatively small, they owned the emotional space in patients’ and physicians’ minds.  It allowed them to challenge for market leadership.

3… Shape The Market

We have discussed shaping the product and the organisation; we also need to shape the market.

Market shaping is all about paving the way for your brand, driven by the gap between today’s market insights and where the market needs to be for a successful launch.  This requires multiple activities, from KOL advocacy to working with patient organisations, governments, clinical trialists, and so on.

Importantly, though, we need to choose the right advocates, and these may not be the most obvious.  Think carefully around your criteria for an advocate.  You should research carefully before making that choice, a step many people miss out.  Who really influences?  Who do people listen to?  Who do they take advice from?  Is it different in the online space?  Who are the influencers of the future?

It is important to ensure that market shaping is in line with your customer and market mindsets; all too often companies are accused of trying to ‘create’ new medical conditions such as ‘restless legs’ and ‘cardio metabolic syndrome’.  But there are good examples, like the work Pfizer initially did around Viagra which understood that ‘impotence’ restricted potential, was viewed as shameful and was not being actively treated; but that ‘Erectile Dysfunction’ described a medical condition which was not the patient’s fault, and was in line with their market and customer insights

2… Develop A Consistent Balanced Scorecard And KPIs

To maintain credibility with management you must be able consistently to show progress towards your goals, and that means having KPIs linked to your strategic drivers and operational plans.  This entails agreeing internally what success looks like which gives you the ability to communicate and show progress, building excitement and momentum, both pre-launch and through the launch period itself.

At the time of agreeing the KPIs, you need to pressure-test them, just as you did your strategy.  And don’t simply take the most obvious ones, there is no standard approach to launch success.  They will be operationally specific, therapy area specific, product specific; for example, the markers of success for a specialist biotechnology drug and a big primary care blockbuster will be very different.

1… Develop Internal Motivation And Excitement

Traditionally excitement around the launch was focused on the sales force, but this is no longer the case: it’s about the whole mix of people.  Recruit, train up and invest in the right people, making sure they have the right capabilities.  Ask yourself: what do we need to deal with and what do we need to be good at?  Let that define who are the right people to achieve what you are trying to achieve.

Particularly key is that anyone who could have contact with customers, even by phone, is completely engaged, trained and supported.  Ensure they understand the strategy and are motivated by the KPIs.

Above all, engage people as early as possible in these ten areas, not simply by handing out a ‘launch plan’ at a launch conference weeks before entering the market.

Take-Off!

Although we have only scratched the surface, these principles are a useful guide to assessing where you need to focus your time, energy and effort.  Having prepared the way, you then need to make sure your messages fit with your strategy and with your positioning; make sure you are targeting the right physicians or the right patients based on your segmentation; make sure you have the right value proposition for your different audiences; make sure that your sales teams have the right training and materials  and are motivated, that they understand what it is that you are trying to deliver.

Make sure you have contingencies in place based on different futures unfolding, and that you are tracking the different things in the marketplace that are challenging your success, ensuring the competition can’t pull apart what you are doing.

You have a tiny amount of time to set the trajectory for your launch.  If you follow these ten steps, you can better ensure that at the time of launch, that trajectory is as steep as possible.

The Authors

Jon Bircher is a Head of Bespoke Consulting and Joanna Potts a Senior Consultant at The MSI Consultancy.

Originally published in Pharmafocus, September 2010

David and Goliath


August 27th, 2010

A large figure standing over a smaller figureAs big pharma desperately seeks to re-invent the way it does business, one interesting outcome has been the increasing attention paid to more specialist markets. This has even been in evidence in the smallest possible orphan and rare disease markets, such as rarer oncology, genetic disorders, immunology and infectious disease.

Earlier this year both GSK and Pfizer announced the formation of new standalone R&D units dedicated solely to the development and commercialisation of medicines for rare diseases.

Big pharma’s interest in the sector is not just restricted to building R&D capability, however. Making acquisitions and forming partnerships are also rife: in March, Abbott Laboratories announced its acquisition of Facet Biotech, to access therapies for multiple sclerosis and multiple myeloma, while in December 2009 Pfizer signed a deal for the worldwide rights for Protalix’s therapy for the ultra-orphan Gaucher’s Disease.

But why the interest in these specialist markets? Despite the smaller overall cash opportunity, these markets offer big pharma a potentially highly lucrative environment in which to diversify corporate risk. Lower investment in clinical development, infrastructure and marketing expenditure means not only significantly greater profits, but also that companies can afford to invest in several of these brands simultaneously. This allows them to spread the corporate revenue risk away from one or two blockbusters and across different brands and markets.

For those of us already working hard in these more specialist markets, what are the implications of the encroachment from big pharma?

Big fish, little pond
There are two likely scenarios. The first, for the lucky ones, is the potential for partnership. This new big pharma strategy offers a major opportunity to bring in expertise, resource and capabilities that would not be available otherwise. This is what occurred in the case of GSK’s 2009 alliances with Prosensa to fight Duchenne Muscular Dystrophy and with Genmab for Arzerra (ofatumumab) in the area of refractory follicular non-Hodgkin’s lymphoma.

However, in the majority of cases, a second scenario is more likely: that the advent of big pharma in the marketplace will represent a new, highly-skilled and well-resourced competitor for smaller companies.

Rather than focusing on the first scenario of developing partnerships and alliances, I am going to look at what we need to consider when, as David, we face the big pharma Goliath. To continue to be successful you will need to understand how the opportunities change, what new challenges arise and what you need to do in order to remain competitive.

You might not thank me for reminding you that it is very likely that your new big pharma competitor’s substantial resources will extend not just to cash, but also to organisational skills and expertise.

It will be unlikely that smaller companies will be able to match big pharma in terms of resources, it will be essential to work smarter to ensure success. You need to be confident that you’re doing the right things and that, crucially, you are doing those things well.

There are three crucial points to consider. Firstly, we must ensure that we will not be caught out by any changes resulting from a new competitor entering the market. Then, in the changed environment, we need to understand what, as a marketer, we can do better to ensure we’re still accessing those customers that drive our business. Finally, given our limited resources, we must ask what we can do to make sure we’re getting the most from our spend by doing the right things and doing them right.

The changing market
The first thing we need to ensure is that we are not caught out by any changes resulting from a new competitor entering the market.

Unquestionably, on entry of a new competitor, the competitive dynamics of the market will change. In light of this understanding, how can we guarantee that we are well prepared?

Essentially, we must evaluate the market’s reaction to this new competitor; specifically the implications for how our customers’ attitudes might be affected. What strategies and tactics will our new competitor use to win, and use against us? Only once we are confident of what is likely to happen in our market can we test how well our strategy will perform, identify our internal competitive priorities and then, where necessary, adjust these strategies to be future proof.

Many organisations have good competitive intelligence in the forms of facts, figures and historical analysis. However, in this situation, looking at history and current performance doesn’t help. Instead, we need to predict the future as best we can. One way to do that is through ‘war gaming’.

War gaming is the name given to a role-playing workshop, during which participants play the role of their competitors. Stepping into the other side’s shoes allows participants to develop an informed prediction of the competitors’ most likely strategy, as well as prepare for the market’s likely reaction. The team also gains valuable insight into the workings, thinking and priorities of its most important competitors. Armed with this insight, war gamers are able to pressure test their current intentions, which can then guide any changes the team might need to make.

Customer retention
As a marketer, what can we do better to ensure that, in this changed world, we’re still activating those customers that drive our business?

One answer to this question is to optimise segmentation, positioning and tailored messaging, through which smaller companies can gain a competitive advantage even if they are less well resourced.

However, segmentation and positioning tend to rely on generic market research, which doesn’t have the required level of insight, meaning that the result is frequently of poor quality.

Creating better positioning requires a real insight into customers’ attitudes, beliefs and motivations, as well as a deep understanding of real customer language. To achieve this demands implementing one of our most useful (and often underrated) marketing tools – truly insightful customer research.

To ensure that market research is delivering the required level of insight, there are several key steps:

  1. Define clearly the critical business issue you need to address and formulate a hypothetical answer. You can then confirm or reject market truths and identify any knowledge gaps against your initial hypothesis
  2. Ensure research objectives are clear, appropriate and focused. Challenge and agree the methodology to avoid any unclear results
  3. During fieldwork, ensure you keep focused on the key research questions and, as often as possible, attend qualitative research in person
  4. Make sure that when you assess the research diagnosis, the team has the capability and resource to meet the challenges identified.

Using limited resources
Given our limited resources, what can we do to make sure we’re getting the most from our spend by doing the right things and doing them right?

Ensuring the budget is working hard and producing the maximum possible impact can be done in two steps: establishing clarity about the barriers to growth and the commercial challenges that are of the highest priority, and creating and maintaining a transparent and realistic view on return on investment (RoI).

Usually RoI analysis fails because it is being used on marketing plans that have been created in a rush and in which the activities and outcomes are not clearly linked to the opportunities in the market.

However, it is possible to analyse RoI successfully by using the two steps described above. Through the planning process it should be possible to build a detailed picture of the barriers to growth. Once this has been achieved, you will be able to identify your commercial challenges and which levers are able to drive change. This then allows you to focus on RoI.

Executing plan implementation to optimise RoI requires a detailed understanding of where revenue can be generated and is currently lost. This can be done easily by using a tool such as the Patient Flow, which maps the total market opportunity to actual brand value, enabling us to identify where we can drive business growth efficiently and helping us to uncover the behaviour changes needed to drive increased sales.

Once the necessary behavioural changes have been identified, the next step is to define which tactical objectives and priority marketing and sales activities will be needed. Using a measurable scale of tactical objectives (such as the SMART objectives) will create a connection between the activities where investment is being made, the cost allocated to these activities, the priority behaviour change and the commercial uplift.

Next steps
As noted above, given the increasing infiltration of big pharma into specialist markets, if smaller companies are not in a position to use their resources and skills in partnership, it is essential that they have a well prepared defence in place to enable them to survive instead.

Critically, smaller companies must ensure they are well prepared for the most likely eventualities in the marketplace, and that their strategies reflect this. This will help the companies avoid the nasty surprise of being caught out by any changes in the market.

Ensure that segmentation and positioning is based on meaningful market research insights. This will then activate those customers that drive the business, allowing companies to gain the greatest competitive advantage possible through their communications.

Finally, companies much check that their spending is working as hard as it can by linking investment in activities directly to major sales drivers and opportunities.

These tips for success will prepare any small company for the increasing changes to the competitive landscape in the specialised and orphan drug market.

The Author


Michael Craig is a senior commercial strategy consultant at the MSI Consultancy.

Originally published in Pharmaceutical Marketing August 2010.

Managing a Co-Promotion


June 16th, 2010

Well now we know. The dust has settled at Westminster, and, for the time being at least, the age of ‘blockbuster’ Government majorities is over, and a new era of collaboration and coalition is dawning. Whether the coalition which emerges from all of this (I am writing this less than a week after the election) survives and thrives remains to be seen.

Perhaps our politicians should be learning from the pharma industry, as they seek to come to terms with the new order, because the era of the blockbuster – the equivalent of a thumping Commons majority – has been on the wane for some time. Instead, those who are bringing new brands to market are increasingly resorting to co-promotion arrangements.

Licensing deals are expected to account for more than a third of revenue for the top 20 pharma companies by 2012 – up from just 17.5% in 2002.

The motivations for this are clear: the molecule owner is seeking to share commercial risk and exploit their partner’s therapy area experience; the partner gets to maintain a presence in the key therapy area.

When a co-promotion works, it brings all sorts of benefits: maximised share of voice through the promotional impact of a larger sales force, with that increased sales force capacity ensuring a successful launch; reduced initial promotional costs through sharing marketing responsibility; boosting sales force expertise in a new market by working alongside a more experienced marketer; and sharing the promotional investment risk of entering a new market.

And yet, it is estimated that 60 per cent of co-promotion alliances fail within five years, as defined by a failure to achieve the revenues expected by the partners at the start of the collaboration, which then leads to each partnering company viewing the agreement as ineffective.

Clearly there are some specific challenges to making a co-promotion work. The prospective partner has to be attracted to the deal in the first place, which can mean a relatively low profit share being offered to the molecule owner. Obviously, there will be an element of reliance on the more experienced partner in the market to drive the promotional strategy. And last but certainly not least comes the challenge of integrating and managing two essentially separate sales forces.

Given that the industry is set to see many more of these co-promotion and licensing deals, it is vital that we learn how to manage them effectively. There are some core skills and competencies which need to be developed to make it work, encompassing branding (to develop a shared vision), people management (to enable conflict resolution) and negotiating skills (to ensure a fair deal for each partner).

A Shared Vision

One driver of success commonly identified by participants in successful partnership is the development at the outset of a shared team vision for the partnership. This can provide a clear understanding of what success will look like for each participant, and also for the partnership.

As a general rule, it is differences in company culture which lead to the biggest points of potential tension. If one culture is slow-moving and the other rapid, for example, or, one takes a more scientific approach and the other a more commercial approach, then unless these differences are addressed, the partnership could be headed for failure.

To avoid this requires common goals and objectives for the co-promotion brand team working in the local market. It also demands that the partners align their ways of working on each topic where there is interaction between the two companies, as far as is achievable given the constraints imposed by the rest of each partners business, before they implement the co-promotion.

It is likely that the co-promotion will support a global brand with a global brand vision. To complement this brand vision, the local co-promotion team could well develop a team vision setting out what the goals of the local team are, based on insights about the individuals within the team and the organisations they work for. The components of the brand and team visions will be the same, but the focus of the team vision will be those who work within the team and the wider audience across each partner company

The two key words there are ‘goals’ and ‘insight’. If these can be brought together to create something which is sustainable, credible, differentiating, motivating and meaningful, then a powerful team vision will emerge.

That means establishing early on the scope of each partner’s aspirations for the alliance, in both a quantitative way, answering the question ‘how big?’ and a qualitative way, defining how significant the aspirations, and how the hoped-for success of the brand will alter the organisation for which individual team members work. It is a question of agreeing not just what the partnership can be, but what the partners want it to be to meet each individual company’s goals.

Insight is important because it allows each partner to understand their own and their partner’s thinking, how each will look at the market opportunity, and what each party’s strategy really is.

Out of this should come a set of core values, which are the active words which reflect the shared team vision, and which both partners wish to associate with the team over time. Crucially, these need to be demonstrated not just in the brand vision, but also in the tone of voice and style of all communications associated with it.

Getting The Structure Right

Guaranteeing a harmonious co-promotion team at the start of the agreement may be impossible, but taking the time at the outset to design the processes which will facilitate collaborative working and help efficient decision making is likely to pay dividends for the team in the long term. Putting in place conflict resolution procedures often serves as a good way of avoiding conflict in the first place; the development of a team charter setting out how individuals should work within the team acts to limit the frustrations which could poison the effective working of the team..

To determine what the team structure might look like, it is necessary to think about a number of factors, including the key activities and outputs that the joint team will be expected to deliver, which of these will be delivered collaboratively and which exclusively within one of the partners, and what overall behaviours will assist in that delivery.

A good starting point is to allocate the key tasks and outputs which have been identified in the co-promotion’s marketing plan by discipline. So, for example, the strategic plan and the marketing communications plan will need to be undertaken by the Marketing function; Phase IV and KOL management by the Medical function; customer management and targeting by the Sales function; tracking and monitoring, along with ad hoc research by the Business Intelligence function; AE reporting and licence renewals by the Regulatory function; and so on.

Once you have identified these functional responsibilities, you can now start to create a structure where it is explicit whether each activity will be the responsibility of one partner (and if so, which one), or a shared responsibility. This way there is no room left for doubt about who is responsible for what, and thus far fewer opportunities for conflict further down the line.

It is important here to think about the informal structure as well as the formal structure. Often, informal contact plays a big part in oiling the wheels of success for partnerships, but if you don’t think about how that informal contact will work in advance, you risk losing control of the situation, with the possibility of conflict, misunderstanding, or worse.

So a structure and protocols need to be put in place that cover communication, approval and sign off procedures, conflict resolution and reward and recognition.

Negotiating A Solution

“In business you don’t get what you deserve, you get what you negotiate” – wise, if slightly clichéd, words from the negotiating guru, Chester L. Karrass. But it has some resonance here, because the initial negotiations to set up the joint venture are vital if it is to be long-lived. After all, it will only flourish if both partners feel that they are getting something out of it.

Experience suggests that these first negotiations can be tricky, as each side comes to the table with a relatively fixed idea of what the co-promotion will look like. But it’s worth remembering that however committed the other party appears to be to their position, they would not be involved in negotiating if they were not willing to consider moving towards an agreement.

Preparation is the key here, and each party should enter the negotiations having identified and prioritised areas that need to be agreed under a local contract. It is important to have examined the likely position of the potential partner, as well as identified their underlying interests. Such negotiations often break down either because a lack of confidence leads to concessions being given away too quickly and/or easily, or because an inflexible position is adopted, which focuses on the party’s own wants, rather than on achieving an outcome which is a genuine win:win.

12 Steps To Clarity

If open communication is vital to a successful partnership, then clarity is the underlying foundation to this. To make a co-promotion work, you must develop an action plan which sets out clearly the responsibilities within the partnership (i.e. who does what), the key deliverables, and the timing.

With this in mind, let me close by suggesting 12 questions which you should be confident you can answer in order to manage successfully a co-promotion:

  1. Do you have a shared vision, values and strategy for the brand?
  2. Have you aligned your financial and market share goals and milestones?
  3. Have you identified the investment requirements and budgets by year, and agreed the percentage splits between partner companies?
  4. Have you undertaken joint strategic and operational planning, including approval processes and an implementation plan?
  5. Have you aligned the operating teams across the various functional disciplines?
  6. Have you agreed whether individual companies will have any independent operating freedom within the joint venture, and if so, are you clear in which areas, under what circumstances, and to what budget level?
  7. Have you aligned the sales teams and territories; established reporting systems; clarified how ETMS and CRM information will be exchanged; agreed sales KPIs?
  8. Have the sales teams been trained, and their language aligned?
  9. Are contract terms watertight? Are roles and responsibilities clear? Is authority – by discipline and overall –sufficiently clear?
  10. Have inter-company communications channels been set up, including establishing a co-promotion ‘dictionary’?
  11. Are financial and reporting procedures aligned?
  12. Have processes for arbitration and conflict resolution been put in place

Managing A Co-Promotion: Some Dos and Don’ts

Do:

  • Agree in advance:
    • The contribution of each party to promotional and market access programme, and why
    • The competencies and skills each partner will provide
    • Individual measures of success, and contribution to the overall programme
  • Define and agree clearly the parameters for negotiation
  • Define at the outset timelines and deadlines for process, and identify interdependencies
  • Identify and outline scenarios, contingencies and triggers
  • Define what is outside the scope of the agreement

Don’t:

  • Allow ambiguity in the ownership of the agreement
  • Indulge in opportunistic conversations – keep communications within the scope of the agreement
  • Allow egos to get in the way, especially if this leads to ignoring customer needs
  • Hoard information

The Author

Gerard Doherty is Managing Consultant at The MSI Consultancy.

Originally published in PM (Pharmaceutical Marketing), June 2010

MSI is BHBIA certified


May 21st, 2010

We are pleased to announce that as of May 2010 all members of the MSI research team have been certified under the the latest ABPI/BHBIA adverse events guidelines.

These guideline ensure that details of any adverse events mentioned during research as properly fed back to the pharma company and/or regulatory authorities using the MHRA’s ‘yellow card’ system.

A copy of the current guidelines can be found here

Rare Diseases Part II


May 13th, 2010

SKILLS AND TOOLS FOR THE ORD MARKETER – ARE YOU ARMED FOR SUCCESS?

Introduction

In our previous article, published in last month’s issue of Pharmafocus we discussed why as a pharmaceutical marketer you are likely to market an orphan or rare disease brand during your career, an area that most of will find unfamiliar.

We highlighted that orphan and rare disease (ORD) brands are an increasingly important part of Pharma companies’ portfolios because, with lower commercialisation costs in these less competitive and highly motivated markets with significant unmet needs, they offer a less risky and more attractive solution to broadening the revenue base.

However, despite being attractive in some ways, these markets offer distinct challenges when compared to more mainstream areas of Pharma marketing:

1. Orphan and rare disease markets by their nature are small, and given the few occasions when a small, highly specialist group of clinicians actually get the opportunity to prescribe your brand, it becomes all the more essential that you are their preferred option. Particularly as there isn’t much opportunity available if you aren’t.

2. The diversity and level of clinical and market information available is very different in ORD markets.

For instance given the severity of most ORDs, many clinical trials conducted use less robust methodology (e.g. RCTs can be unethical given survival rates) and have to be accepted as best practice. This often makes clinical comparisons difficult resulting in a lack of consistency in therapeutic management.

And when conducting market research, given the small number of target customers, that have probably been interviewed several times already, it becomes much harder to obtain unbiased insight. As a result, commercial decisions can become more of an artform!

3. Also, disease management tends to be inconsistent and fragmented, as ORDs are rare and many clinicians will be unaware of either how to diagnose appropriately or of any referral infrastructure. For many patients this results in delays to diagnosis and treatment.

4. Finally, a key barrier for all brands regardless of market is access to product, usually because of formulary or distribution challenges. For ORD brands, which tend to have very high unit costs, access is even more challenging. Access decisions are often made on a case by case basis, each requiring their own business proposition, which makes it a constant battle to convince the different influencers involved in the decision. Imagine going through a formulary process everytime you wanted to get a patient on your drug!

So the ORD marketer must ensure that their brand is always front of mind, using diverse and limited information in a market which is likely to be underdeveloped, whilst overcoming significant access barriers.

So how does the successful ORD marketer address these challenges?

To be successful, ORD marketers need an open mind to approaching things slightly differently.

To entrench the brand as the preferred choice on those few occasions that the small number patients will receive a therapy, the ORD marketer must own the relationships in the key centres and prevent the competition building better rapport or stronger relationships. Unlike other more mainstream brands, if you don’t win with these KOL prescribers there really is nowhere else to get the business.

In addition to building the rapport, the brand will not be the preferred choice unless the ORD marketer can clearly communicate a significant value over other therapeutic options. Not just to the prescribers, but also to those holding the purse strings involved in the case by case assessment. The good news here is that given a lack of clinical concensus, and the more personal nature of these markets, there is a better opportunity to build value for a brand through the non clinical aspects, particularly from support services and positive relationships.

Another area in which the ORD marketer has to be skilled is in overcoming the diverse and limited data. Because of the limited but very dynamic nature of the clinical data in the market, an ORD marketer will need to be a knowledgable and creative scientist who is on top of the most recent and relevant clinical information as customers will expect materials to include the most current abstracts. And in addition, to get the most from the very small market research sample, ORD marketers need to consider creative and innovative ways of gaining market insight. For example, have you ever considered video interviews including tours of the clinic?

Finally a likely priority for the ORD marketer will be improving patient diagnosis and referral by supporting the development of a disease management infrastructure. This is usually managed through a mututally beneficial partnership with both KOLs and NHS managers. So unlike their more mainstream colleagues, the ORD marketer needs to understand that brand success and the allocation of their resources requires a very different emphasis when compared to more classical Pharma marketing.

The small disease management community, although sceptical will be much more likely to want to work in partnership, so to gain their trust and maximise the benefit for the brand, the ORD marketer (and the ORD organisation) must have the expertise, skills and confidence to negotiate with NHS infrastructure builders, as well as understand where they will get the most return for supporting clinicians.

How do they do this?

For the ORD Marketer to ensure success for their brand, they need to approach several key areas in a different way.
• Increasing and making the most of customer intimacy
• Maximising the increased value of the non-clinical benefits associated with the brand
• Having an efficient organisation in which individuals have the breadth of skills to match the diverse audience

Increasing and making the most of customer intimacy
For all pharmaceutical brands we need a clear picture of our key customers behaviours and drivers. But given the critical importance of each individual prescriber in ORD markets, the ORD marketer needs to generate a much deeper understanding of what it is that drives individuals, ie their personal motivations and aspirations.

Why do we need this information?

So we can ensure that our medical marketing and sales activities, conversations and support are all aligned, fulfilling both ours and our customers’ goals. In so doing, you are sure to create an unassailable relationship, a true partnership, and crowd out the competitors – retaining that essential first place.

We probably already have a reasonable level of information on our key centres and our KOLs, but there is always room for improvement. So how can we do that?

We need a very detailed picture of the market which combines quantitative metrics such as centre sales performance, a picture of where referrals are coming from, and current clinical trial / Investigator Initiated Research (IIS) involvement etc.

In addition we need to overlay individual qualitative aspects of the accounts, such as the level of influence of the KOL, the aspirations of the centre and what is behind any prescribing barriers.

This picture helps us prioritise where and who we are going to work with, as well as identifying what we should be doing with them. We would usually leave this level of detail and customer management to the local rep, however given the increased importance of each customer, the whole organisation becomes responsible for ensuring this is optimised and implemented.

Maximising the increased value of the non-clinical benefits associated with the brand

As with all Pharma markets, we need to align our most valuable product benefits with clinicians and fundholders key needs so they are motivated to choose our brand over any other options. But the difference here is the value and importance of aspects of our brand other than simple claims of clinical efficacy.

Less consensus on clinical superiority and the increased customer intimacy of ORD markets, offers a greater opportunity for ORD marketers to use these non-clinical benefits of their brands.

Building the benefits of strong longer term personal relationships, demonstrated commitment to making the disease management easier and relevant financial support, over and above simple clinical efficacy messages will increase the customers’ emotional attachment to the brand and help to provide a rationale for much higher product costs.

To do this we really need to acquire a detailed understanding of what goes on in the minds of the clinicians or fundholders when they are choosing what to do with appropriate patients. What are their motivations behind selecting our brand and what are their perceptions of the competitive benefits of different therapeutic options? Are there specific attributes that they are looking for from a product, over and above the usual requirements of efficacy, safety and tolerability?

Then it becomes a question, once we understand the product differences, of what services or support we could offer to improve the competitive perception of our brand? For instance, do we need a dedicated nurse team to provide support at initiation, or even potentially specialist skills to initiate? Should we be financing extra clinician time in the clinics to help the specialist centres increase their capacity for the increasing volume of patients?

Finally we need to wrap these benefits together in a compelling and motivating story and provide it to our small and expert community in a conversation and tone as individually tailored to their needs and their role as possible. Should we really spend so much on producing beautiful Detail Aids or could the money be used more profitably supporting a group of Registrars attending and presenting at a European congress?

Having an efficient organisation in which individuals have the breadth of skills to match the diverse audience
For most marketers, being involved in defining the relevant structure of the organisation for the brand is unlikely to be a major part of the job role. However, in ORD there is generally more scope to input into the decision around having the right capabilities.

With the different market challenges and a necessarily small organisation serving a diverse group of customers, the balance of skills that individuals in the teams require is different to the more classic secondary care sales approach. The team you have will need to be able to do it all: being expert in the most advanced clinical science with a Professor one minute then selling health economic value to Commissioners the next. And with a critical emphasis on owning the relationships in the key centres, there needs to be demonstrable commitment to developing a long term partnership across the whole team. So the level of turnover seen in more mainstream sales teams would not be suitable for ORD teams.

To understand what capabilities would be most suitable for the success of the brand we need to overlay our brand aspirations and priorities on our customer needs whilst also taking into account the most likely future of the market.

We will already be clear on the aspirations and priorities of our brands, and should be very clear on the critical customer needs, so what we then need to understand are the implications of the most likely future on the right organisation. By using scenario planning we can uncover the key themes of potential futures and draw enough of a picture to understand what skills we need to build to continue to succeed.

A checklist to guide where we need to focus

In light of these key areas of success, chances are we can clearly see distinct areas for improvement, a useful check is asking “Am I entirely confident that…
We fully understand, in detai,l the internal dynamics, team aspirations and motivators within each of our key centres.
We are totally clear on what really motivates each of our KOLs, e.g. IISs, leading the development of shared care or writing national guidelines and concensus, congress trips or maybe speaking internationally, plus have aligned our strategies and activities to ensure that we support them in this.
We are communicating the most compelling value for our brand, using not just the usual competitive clinical data statements, but also clearly communicating our commitment to the development and evolution of the disease area, through all of the other services and projects that we currently support.
We have built the most efficient infrastructure with the right balance of capabilities to suit our priorities and customer needs, now and in the most likely future.

Summary and Conclusion

With an increasing number of organisations choosing to market profitable ORD brands, it is likely that you will at some stage have to work in this highly specialist area.

Because of the small and specialist nature of the market it becomes even more essential for ORD brands to be entrenched front of mind at the moment of prescribing because there is limited room for No.2. And in addition with inconsistent and fragmented clinical management it is likely that developing the disease infrastructure in partnership with KOLs and NHS managers will be a priority.

So to deliver brand success as an ORD marketer you will require a broader personal expertise, confidence in your clinical knowledge, a willingness to be involved creatively in the wider commercial aspects of the brand and a desire to be managing across the internal teams. Good Luck!

The Author

Michael Craig is a Consultant at the MSI Consultancy.

Originally published in Pharmafocus, January 2010

Soft Skills for the Commercial Manager


May 13th, 2010

The healthcare industry is changing. In Pharma, the new rising commercial leaders, business unit heads, marketing managers, have both business and team responsibility. Change is a given, the time frame for which the organisation is vulnerable is up for grabs!

What are the core skills needed to retain drive behind business objectives and manage a team in this new changing landscape?

Time for change

So, why is change on the agenda? The current drug development and commercialisation model is simply not working is the answer. New medicines discovery and approval is down; generic competition is fiercer than ever, and blockbusters are a rarity. Our industry is entering a new health landscape, and its success will be determined by how well risks are navigated and opportunities created and seized.

One way to survive the changing environment is through mergers and acquisitions. Companies go through the pain and challenge of mergers and acquisition with the vision that the larger merged organisation will be able to generate more value than the separate entities.

Whilst in many cases there is a positive impact on factors such as revenue growth and product pipelines, surveys suggest that M&A frequently impact negatively on operational excellence initiatives, information technology systems and infrastructure, culture and understanding, and, most critically, staff morale and performance.

Marketing leaders have their skills tested to new limits whilst an organisation morphs and adapts for survival within this changed environment. The skills required to drive the commercial success of the brands through a cross functional team of skilled individuals during change takes on a new dimension. The team needs nurture, adjustments need to be made, and team dynamics need re-evaluating before focus can be restored.

However, irrespective of internal pressure and change, it is paramount that the organisation regains its focus; with minimal impact on business objectives and deliverables in order to fulfil commitments to patients and customers and remain competitive. At this point in time, the threat to success is not the competition, the products, or the market; it is our people.

What is it about change?

Change is necessary, yet nothing is as upsetting to your people as change. Change can generate uncertainty, confusion and even a sense of loss; principally emotional responses that need to be treated with sensitivity and understanding.

From a business perspective, this has a significant knock on effect, creating the potential to cause dramatic loss of focus, falling quality and decreased productivity, which can take deep hold and not release its grip until individuals have moved through their ‘change curve’, which, if left to their own devices can take any length of time.

The change curve, a behavioural model of group and individual reactions, describes a number of stages moving from satisfaction; denial, resistance, exploration, hope and finally commitment. This tool in itself provides marketing leaders with valuable insight and a way of tracking how people are feeling and once diagnosed appropriate support and guidance can then be offered.

The obvious problem is that during times of change, the preoccupation with internal and personal politics, the consequent falling productivity and missed deadlines all have a detrimental impact; exposing our business and making it vulnerable.

It is a known fact that in the competitive environment that is the pharmaceutical industry, we thrive on companies going through any type of change. Why? Because we know their eye is off the ball and we have an opportunity to step in and take advantage. The longer a company takes to regroup the better for the competition – our feast continues until order is restored.

It is not surprising, therefore, that change creates opportunity for others; our business plans are implemented through our people; without the focus of our people on the business, objectives are left unmet and achieving our commercial goals undone.

Mark Sanborn, an internationally renowned leadership development speaker, succinctly states “Your success in life isn’t based on your ability to simply change. It is based on your ability to change faster than your competition, customers and business.

The role of the marketing leader is therefore not to prevent problems or even slow the regularity of change, instead it is to focus on accelerating the individuals within the team to accept, adapt and commit to it. The ability to work together as a team and quickly tackle any and all situations, or decide not to, is your ultimate competitive advantage. The quicker a team can re-form, align and work together towards clear objectives the less time we are vulnerable as an organisation.

Balance of heart and mind

The key aim of any commercial manager, be they business unit head, marketing manager, or general manager is to improve the performance of the organisation. This means not just focusing on the figures. Successful marketing management involves recognition of not just the price and product but also strategic analysis, contingencies, risk, delivery, strong customer and suppliers relationships and getting the right people on board to deliver the business plan objectives.

Despite a likelihood of proven business acumen and significant commercial success, managers may not have the required level of people management skills, such as change leadership, team development, conflict resolution etc  to overcome situations where this change, whether internal or external, impacts the team’s ability to deliver against the plan objectives.

Every manager has a level of man management skill. To be commercially successful you have to collaborate, influence and negotiate with people irrespective of managing a team yourself.

However, how polished are these skills? How confident are you that new commercial leaders have the breadth of skills needed to drive teams to function optimally during times of change? Will change, whether it is new process, new thinking or new behaviours; gain results and be adopted quickly and effectively?

Whose role is it anyway?

Individuals within a team hold the responsibility to do their best, which is different for every person and depends on a wide variety of factors (health, maturity, stability, experience, personality, motivation, etc).

In addition to commercial direction, the responsibility for managing, leading, developing and inspiring the team resides with their manager. The marketing leader’s role is to facilitate and enable each member of the team individually from an objective standpoint and measure their performance against specific business deliverables.

This is a complex role; one which we need to ensure we are not scared of but instead treat like the ocean; with the respect it deserves; because to get this wrong jeopardises the future success of the organisation.

In order to overcome fear we need to understand it. Look at the role from every angle and appreciate the connections between leadership, commercial management and people management and understand how that relates to the business plan deliverables. Through change people need a constant; the anchor point for every individual is the plan.

Adapting to and accepting the change?

Firstly, it is important to clearly establish the nature of the change for the team. If the team is newly formed then the requirements start at a different point from say an experienced team facing loss of exclusivity on a product.

Once the team position has been established, the leaders have to then decide which ‘people management’ skills need to be adopted on top of the ‘business management’ skills to address the scale and nature of the issue.

Leading teams through change

Change leadership is defined as the strong, visible and aligned leadership of the end-to-end of the implementation process. The business plan therefore, roots every individual and gives common purpose during times of change.

Whatever the change or changes you are trying to implement with your team, the change has to start with you. Evaluate how this change may impact the plan. Will it mean less resource? Does the change mean you have acquired more products within your therapy area and now your resource is spread thinly? Do tasks need to be redeployed and you need buy-in from your team to take on extra responsibilities? Does the team need to expand or get smaller? How do you ensure that everyone is still doing a thorough job?

The role of the leader is to provide a strong ‘vision’ of where the organisation/business needs to get to and what that will look like when you get there. Taking steps to bring the team with you along the way is key to keeping the business plan on track and making your ‘vision’ a reality that others will want to be a part of.

Communication is key. Communicate, model and reinforce on an ongoing, committed basis the change you want to see in others. As a leader of a cross functional team it is imperative that this can translate across roles and functions e.g. marketing, medical, sales, public relations, training, clinical research etc and bring the plan to life for all involved.

Understanding of how the process of change impacts on performance can be advantageous when planning; especially as during the transition state, performance and productivity undoubtedly plummets. Knowing and understanding this and preparing for it during the business planning phase can help you minimise risk.

Leadership – which style suits your team and goals

Leadership style is the manner and approach of providing direction, implementing plans, and motivating people. Kurt Lewin (1939) led a group of researchers to identify different styles of leadership. This early study has been very influential and established three major leadership styles;

Authoritarian or autocratic; when leaders tell their employees what they want done and how they want it accomplished, without getting the advice of their followers.

Participative or democratic; the leader including one or more employees in the decision making process (determining what to do and how to do it). However, the leader maintains the final decision making authority.

Delegative or Free Reign; in this style, the leader allows the employees to make the decisions. However, the leader is still responsible for the decisions that are made.

Although good leaders use all three styles, with one of them normally dominant, bad leaders tend to stick with one. The implications of the change to the business will inevitably necessitate adaptation of your leadership style as the team goes through different phases of the change. For example if the team is at a point of fear or anger, a consequence could be paralysis of action, it may then be necessary to adopt a more authoritarian approach.

Through understanding the leadership style that you naturally display and that which would best suit your team at each phase; you can ensure that your leadership is followed and you build a high performing team.

Developing high performing teams

Change may have altered your team, you may have a new team, it may be a different size, occupy a different remit. An inclusion or exclusion of even one individual will give rise to a new dynamic which may necessitate reforming of boundaries through team building techniques.

This needs careful management. Our industry often suffers from ‘The Apollo Syndrome’ where teams of highly intelligent people often perform worse than teams made up of more mixed ability. So members will need to be managed and supported appropriately.

Development, either individual or team is a method to keep motivation and productivity high. What are the main criteria for development? I.e. who should be developed, why and how?  Do you develop everyone who asks for it or do you think more strategically; to meet the key strategic goals? Should it be used as reward or for retention purposes?

It is widely accepted that the 70:20:10 development philosophy is the best way to develop individuals: through on-the-job experience (70%); relationships, networking and feedback (20%); and formal training opportunities (10%).

The majority of development should ideally and can be achieved on the job, through stretching individuals while supporting them with constructive feedback and coaching. Something that requires sophisticated people management skill to perform successfully and although talked about at length within organisations is seldom executed well. As a leader do you have the necessary skills and knowledge to facilitate this process?

In conclusion

It is clear that people management skill and ability are inextricably linked to commercial success. Recognising the vulnerability of the business during change and understanding the process and tools to enable change to happen is critical. This equips leaders to make predictions of the pitfalls and opportunities relating to performance that are likely to impact on the plan and help marketing teams get back in the game following change. After all, our plans, our strategies our objectives are but words without the individuals who implement them.

It is crucial to ensure that leaders are confident to manage the complex and diverse reactions we humans have to change and restore calm and focus, using the business plan as an anchor point. We have all encountered someone during our career that we have referred to as being ‘not a people person’ and can recall the negative impact it had on us within our career development and ability to perform effectively. It is therefore safe to say that these skills do not come naturally to everyone. The process and techniques however can be learned and applied to any situation to ensure our teams are supported to put our values into action and make vision a reality.

The Author

Theodora Anastasi is a Consultant at The MSI Consultancy

Originally published in Pharmafocus,  February 2010

Brave New World


May 13th, 2010

Ask almost any pharmaceuticals marketer; or in fact marketers in any industry sector, where the future growth lays and the answer will be the BRIC countries; Brazil, Russia, India and China.

Of course we must continue to exploit the core opportunities that still exist in the established markets of the USA, Europe and Japan but with the traditional blockbuster-led market model largely broken, we need to look to new territories to continue the growth of the business, amongst other approaches.

The opportunities in BRIC are potentially huge. These four countries, combined, currently account for more than 40% of the world’s populations. Success will generate sustainable and optimal growth of both company assets and share prices.

Economically they will become increasingly significant. Goldman Sachs, who originally coined the acronym BRIC back in 2001, suggests that, by 2050 the combined economies of the BRIC bloc could eclipse the combined economies of the current richest countries of the world. China is now the second largest economy in the world.

The BRIC pharmaceutical markets are currently only valued at US$58.4 billion; significant, but collectively lower than the leading markets such as the USA and Japan.

Yet, according to Novartis, half of the world’s smokers and 75% of people with high blood pressure live in the emerging BRIC economies.  In the next decade, cancer rates are expected to climb 50% in emerging market countries and the incidence of obesity and diabetes is also predicted to rise substantially.

So the sheer potential of these emerging markets obviously makes them highly attractive.

As do the growth rates. In 2006 the emerging markets such as China, Russia, along with South Korea and Mexico grew by 81% compared to 5.7% for the US and the other nine biggest markets.  So much so that in 2008 GSK announced the development of a new division within the organisation solely responsible for sales to these emerging markets (http://www.forbes.com).

In the eyes of the pharmaceuticals marketer steeped in the history and techniques of pharmaceutical management applied in more Western cultures for decades, this bloc represents huge opportunities, with enormous populations without access to more sophisticated and clinically proven pharmaceuticals.

But there is potential danger in assuming that by putting the might of the Western pharmaceuticals industry behind it, we will be able to impose our mindset on markets and impose our medicines into those environments

Putting things in perspective

There are wide regional differences in expenditure levels within the individual BRIC markets; far more so than in developed countries where health systems have evolved to provide a more uniform level of coverage.

All four BRIC countries have a relatively wealthy urban population with a far greater spending power than their respective national average and this is where current sales of pharmaceuticals are concentrated. In the case of China and India, these urban populations have grown rapidly, and number in the hundreds of millions.

A key challenge for these countries is to extend this level of wealth to the rest of the population, in order that better levels of healthcare become affordable.

But this is evolution not revolution and change will be incremental. Short-term opportunities exist in meeting the health demands of the burgeoning middle classes, and future prospects are bright.

Our Challenge

As we seek to maximise the opportunities they present, we must challenge ourselves to think differently because these markets are different.

Pharma’s current model for the Brave New World appears to focus on accessing the affluent who can afford our products and treating them like ‘Old World’ consumers. But is this truly our future?

If we are to truly take full advantage we believe the only way to seize the opportunities is to re-evaluate how we engage with these different cultures, the “competition” and the infrastructure before we can even start the discussion about our products/brands?

What are some of the issues facing Pharma companies looking to break into these emerging markets?

Russia is a potentially vast market with a sizeable domestic generic industry, but local production of innovative drugs is negligible. In 2009, the Russian market for pharmaceuticals was estimated at around US$11.6 billion.  However, per capita spending was low; at US$82.   Although around 75% of the market is supplied by imports the market environment remains challenging for overseas companies.  Major problems reported include corruption, bureaucracy, and counterfeiting and poor data confidentiality.  Government officials and politicians often discriminate in favour of the domestic industry, and enforcement of existing rules is often weak.

India, with a population in excess of one billion people, there is a growing middle class with access to high quality healthcare. Conversely, in this geographically vast country plagued by natural disasters, the majority of the population is both rural and poor and Western style pharmaceuticals are not even a consideration for millions of people. India has an established domestic industry, responsible for around 8% of world pharmaceutical production. The larger domestic companies are striving to compete in the global market for both generics and original products. The market is dominated by low priced, domestically-produced generics and relatively low per capita expenditure on pharmaceuticals.

However it is not all doom and gloom.  In contrast, the pharmaceutical market in China looks set to grow even further in the short-term, with the establishment of an Essential Medicines System during the 2009-2011 period. The plan calls for an estimated 300-400 essential medicines to be made available at all public facilities, starting at the grassroots level. In 2009, the Chinese Government committed 850 billion Yuan (US$124 billion) to develop the country’s healthcare system over a three-year period. The plan is to create a solid platform for universal healthcare access for all by 2020. In China, pharmaceuticals are sold in hospitals and drugstores, and the healthcare reform plan will inevitably see access to pharmaceuticals increase, as it includes the construction of around 2,000 county level hospitals, so that each county will have at least one such facility, the construction of 29,000 township hospitals and upgrading of another 5,000.

But there is more to it than that

In order to satisfy our industry’s ambitions, simply focusing on the middle classes in urban communities and waiting for them to grow in sufficient numbers whilst looking to Governments to initiate the sort of healthcare system we would choose to work with, will neither meet our financial objectives nor fit within our timescales.

The Culture

For over 4000 years, medicine in China has been the preserve of Traditional Chinese Medicine (TCM). It is a part of the culture and we should not expect nor demand that this culture changes instantly. For example, Jia Wei Xiao Yao Wan, a Chinese herbal remedy created 600 years ago for the treatment of depression is known colloquially as ‘the happy pill’. Sound familiar?

So to start taking advantage of the Brave New World, it is essential that we consider the culture.  Key questions you need to begin asking include:

  1. What is the underlying medical culture in the country you are considering?
  2. What are the prevalent conditions? Remember in many countries, there is sometimes a negative perception of Western medicines for Western diseases.
  3. What alternatives to pharmaceuticals exist already? And for how long have they been entrenched in the culture?

For example – in India, whilst the use of toxic metals is perverse to our Western approach to medicine, Ayurvedic medicine has been practiced for over 3000 years and is still the most important form of medicine in the Indian subcontinent.

  1. To what extent is there an acceptance of pharmaceuticals? And if so, amongst whom?
  2. What is the belief set surrounding health and medicine in general?

Once we have considered the cultural differences, we need to consider the infrastructure of the market we are looking at including the geography, affordability, access to healthcare professionals etc

Also, whilst some emerging markets are clearly committed to improving logistical access, the significant challenge of simple affordability comes into play.  A single tablet of Prozac in China costs approximately 100 Yuan.  With up to 6% of the Chinese population estimated to suffer from depression the opportunities for marketing anti-depressants are could potentially be huge. However, in 2008, the average salary of employed Chinese urban citizens was 29,229 Yuan. Thus, a 30 day supply of medication would cost over 10% of the annual salary – so perhaps the opportunities are not quite as straightforward as they do on first sight.

So, reviewing what we know, what are the key challenges facing the pharmaceuticals industry in the emerging markets and how do we address them?

-         Supplying the right portfolio

Ensuring the right products are available to meet the needs of the specific disease priorities identified and supported by that country’s Government (local, regional and national) and that represent high growth opportunities. One obvious example here would be treatment of Hepatitis B Virus in China.

-         Getting the balance of distribution right

Making sure that the key, large cities, doctors and hospitals are not your only focus. The new growth opportunities lie in targeting those “second level” hospitals and making in-roads into the rural areas through community hospital promotion and such vehicles as China’s Essentials Medicines System. To access patients and consumers in these markets requires companies to understand and support coordinated efforts to create or strengthen developing health systems.

-         Getting the price right

Remember that most “patients” have easily accessed both culturally endorsed and cheaper alternatives (TCM, Ayurvedic etc) and have low disposable incomes. This puts pressure on us to think carefully about matching price with local demand, supported by the value proposition being right whilst being underpinned by the relationships with payers and Doctors in the key hospitals in the major cities.

-         Access to healthcare professionals/prescriptions

Quality service and excellent healthcare professionals are available in all of these emerging markets, however the challenge is getting patients to be able to present to them (need to explain why this is a problem – geography/culture/cost?)

Once we have overcome the cultural barriers, the infrastructure needs to be considered not just following our traditional market access model but incorporating the next tier for taking advantage of the Brave New World:

  1. Recognise and work with the challenge of access to treatment
  2. Work with Government where possible to drive provision of medicines that demonstrably add value in the areas of prime interest to the country
  3. Price according to the economic realities of the environment. Maybe, in time, the “Big Mac Index” might just become the “Statin Index”!

Conclusions

It would be a mistake to under-estimate the importance for the pharmaceutical industry of developing and scaling up innovative business models that are suited to emerging markets.

There appear to be three elements that meet the needs of lower income consumers in emerging markets:

Be culturally adept and aware

Establish a culture amongst the populous at large where Western pharmaceuticals are acceptable, embraced and supported. This will not occur overnight. Do not ignore the local competition and remember they are not just other pharmaceuticals companies.  They are the local alternatives established over thousands of years. Companies need to ensure that their products/services meet customer needs. Pharmaceutical companies expanding into emerging markets must critically examine their product offerings and portfolios for individual markets.

Take a new approach to understanding affordability

Engage and work with the Government authorities to build the appropriate access that recognises local cost models and environments. It is highly likely that product life cycles in BRIC and other emerging markets may be significantly longer but with a lower peak that we are used to and this should be borne in mind. The Doctors are qualified.  The challenge is getting people to access them and be able and willing to pay for the right drugs. Cost-cutting, volume-based business models, customer aggregation and other financing mechanisms will all help to improve affordability. Companies will have to implement innovative pricing schemes for emerging markets, without negatively impacting our Western markets.

Seek new means of achieving market penetration

Focus on the key cities and the urban conurbations with highest disposable income only as a start point. The great opportunity lies in the population at large but where the barriers of history are most likely to be evident. Beyond greater affordability, expanding access to low-income populations depends on improved distribution. Upfront investment by companies, Governments and non-Governmental agencies involved in the healthcare sector is vital. And, partnerships, between varieties of players who can help develop and deliver solutions, will be a key determinant of success.

Then, and only then, our traditional model of Doctor writes prescription, Patient gets pharmaceutical product might just work!

The Authors

Chris Marks is Brand Services Principal and Michael Craig is Senior Consultant at The MSI Consultancy.

Originally published in Pharmafocus, March 2010

A Model Organisation?


May 13th, 2010

Paul Stuart-Kregor goes in search of maximum organisational innovation.

The pharmaceutical market has changed out of all recognition over the past decade or two – and continues to change at an alarming rate.  So the pharma industry has had to be good at responding to that change, given that the environment in which it operates is in a constant state of flux, driven by political imperatives, technological advances and regulatory strictures.  By and large we have coped well with these constantly shifting sands.

However, one area in which the industry does not seem, as a rule, to have kept up with the pace of change is the way in which companies organise themselves.  Innovation has been the lifeblood of our industry but with R&D productivity decreasing we need to look at driving success in other ways.  To what extent have we introduced innovation into our business models – or do we tend to favour the ‘tinkering at the edges’ approach?

Historically, the traditional ‘blockbuster’ approach, with large sales forces and high promotional spend to achieve a high share of voice throughout the entire product lifecycle, worked well and delivered good profits.  This in turn led to the growth of ‘mega’ organisations with ever-increasing promotional muscle, and economies of scale realised through ‘mass marketing’.

However, not even the most nostalgic and change-averse marketer can claim that this model is relevant today.  We can now see that the organisation of marketing around product, brand, therapy or franchise marketing teams in silos, supported by functional specialists (market research, health economics, medical, etc) can lead to ivory tower thinking, divorced from reality and, worse still, from the customer – as well as a lack of synergy across brands and conflict for limited resources.

More importantly, there are a number of pressures which are driving the imperative for change, forcing companies to re-evaluate their business models.

Pressure For Change

External factors come into play here: the healthcare environment in pretty much every country is going through radical changes due to shifts in the social, economic and political climate, with the UK leading the way in some respects.  A major part of this has been the challenge of funding healthcare, which has resulted in the introduction of a number of new stakeholders and hurdles at local, national and supra-national levels, with a shared agenda of driving down prices and controlling costs.

Consequently the focus on accessing and influencing one type of customer, the prescriber, and influencing their perception of product performance is long gone.  Instead we must work with a wider customer base whose needs are broader and more diverse than having a (marginally) better product.

Within the industry, the productivity of R&D functions continues to decline, with fewer products coming to market.  ‘Blockbuster’ products are increasingly rare: in the 1990s, over 90 per cent of NCEs introduced had sales of less than $500m worldwide, and this situation is not likely to improve anytime soon, if ever.  Because of this, companies are changing their R&D strategy, with a greater focus on speciality product and niche market sectors such as oncology.

The complex task of building and supporting these specialist franchises in multiple therapy areas, while at the same time maintaining existing product portfolios, is forcing companies to significantly alter their cost bases to maintain profitability.  This inevitably means looking at the efficiency of the organisational model.

Because of all of this, the existing, traditional model is not working.  So what is the alternative?  Actually, there is no single solution; the right operating model has to be developed to fit each company’s market, portfolio and competitive situation.

The Principles Of Organisational Design

If we are to set about re-designing our organisations to make them fit for purpose, we must understand two things: the kind of competitive market in which we are operating (about which more later); and the basic principles of organisational design.

Different parts of an organisation play different roles in the creation of products and services, and their delivery to customers.  Mintzberg argued in the ground-breaking paper entitled ‘The Structuring of Organisations’ that any organisation consists of five basic parts:

  1. The Strategic Apex: the people charged with the overall responsibility for the leadership of the organisation.
  2. The Operating Core: the people who perform the day-to-day work which is directly related to the delivery of product/services to customers.
  3. The Middle Line: the middle managers who direct and supervise the operating core, linking day-to-day operations with the strategic goals as set by the apex.
  4. Support Staff: functions which support the organisation outside the normal operating flow of activities.
  5. Technostructures: the specialists/experts who design the systems and processes of the organisation that support the overall workings of the business.  Examples include product planning and forecasting experts, IT, R&D personnel, recruitment and training staff.

The organisational designer needs to understand and take into consideration the appropriate interaction of each of these elements when developing an operating model which best ‘fits’ an organisation’s needs.  All of which is fine – but if our aim is to achieve a customer-focussed organisational model, then surely the most important consideration should be the nature of the market in which we are trying to compete.

Customer Need At The Hub

Many businesses – and not just in the pharma industry – organise themselves in a way which is easiest for HR managers.  This can result in cosy, stale environments, when the driving force becomes internal convenience, not innovation.

If your model is going to be truly customer-focussed, then commercial and market needs should be at its hub.  Traditional marketing structures don’t always do this.  Organising marketing around product, brand, therapy area or franchise marketing teams, based in silos and supported by functional specialists, inevitably results in people in those functional specialisms leaving the marketing thinking to the marketers in that silo.  This suggests that they have nothing to contribute to understanding and meeting customer needs, which is patently nonsense, and an almost negligent waste of real customer knowledge and expertise.

I mentioned that there was no ‘one size fits all’ solution to reinventing the organisational model.  The approach you take has to depend on your market environment.  Most pharma companies now have to go far beyond influencing prescribers; acceptance must now be gained from a whole range of different stakeholders such as pharmacoeconomists and HTA bodies, regional gatekeepers, and local care networks.  Engaging with each of these stakeholders requires different skills, capabilities, roles and organisational structures to meet market needs and compete effectively.

Whilst every company’s situation is different, I would argue that there are four basic types of market sector, each of which will require a different approach to creating the organisational model (although they all share the imperative that customer needs should be at the centre of things).

Blockbuster: Typically centred on brands with a strong value proposition, in relatively uncomplicated and often primary care markets.  These are products with therapeutic benefit, patent protection and in some cases value added services.  Structurally, this category is typically characterised by large primary care field forces and significant promotional expenditures with most focus on driving physicians’ adoption.

Me too/generic market: This is where the blockbusters give way to an increasing number of similar products or generic alternatives.  Once the basic requirements for efficacy and safety have been satisfied, and there are many me-too competitors, the nature of competition focuses on exploiting small advantages, unique niches or segments where the product can differentiate itself from the competition. However, given the relatively slight differences between options, purchasers focus upon minimising the acquisition cost of treatment.  Focus is on who can achieve the lowest prices whilst reassuring customers that all other important factors are at least equal – so managing the cost base is the driving force.

Speciality Therapy Area: Products in this sector are typically prescribed by specialist physicians e.g. Oncologists, Gastroenterologists.  Smaller target audiences allow for greater focus, with more targeted sales and marketing activities. The need for large sales forces and significant promotional spend is reduced; it becomes more important to be at the forefront of scientific innovation, generating a steady stream of clinical data.  Medical and marketing interactions should be to inform and guide medical opinion. There are often multiple stakeholders in the purchasing and prescribing decision process which requires appropriate market access capability.  Competitive advantage comes through ‘thought leadership and shaping activities’ rather than dominating through advertising and promotion.

Rare and Orphan Disease Indications: Drugs in this sector are generally life-saving, address a significant unmet clinical need – and may be the only product available to treat a very rare condition.  Typically they are highly priced and are prescribed by a limited number of ultra specialists.  The model therefore needs to focus on key opinion leaders and patients, along with market access, which in this case is not limited to securing permission to prescribe but importantly includes sourcing the funds for these extremely expensive therapies.  Commercialisation of these products requires an integrated disease management approach, incorporating sales, marketing, medical and market access. Being first to market is critical.  Partnering with key centres to establish best treatment practices, risk sharing programmes is critical and involves the provision of bespoke solutions.

Common Success Factors

Each of these categories requires a different, bespoke approach, as the needs of each market are clearly very different.  But there are also some commonalities which will ensure that the organisational model is fit for purpose, a set of structural success factors which ensure that customer focus and innovation come to the fore.

One key factor is that marketing cannot just be left to the marketers – all functions need to be involved, which is why true multi-functional teams play a key role in many successful organisational models.  By involving non-marketers in the marketing process, you open it up from marketing communications to being more strategic.  Multi-functional teams don’t even have to be led by a marketer – it could be a medic.  A controversial suggestion to make in the pages of Pharmaceutical Marketing magazine, perhaps – but we must be ready to think innovatively.

The model organisation is one in which business plans – and marketing plans – are developed from a viewpoint of a vision for the future that is truly understood from both the corporate and the customer’s perspective – not just the marketing ‘pigeon-hole’.

It is one where clinical trial planning and evidence can be used at an early stage to provide segment-specific marketing information, and focus marketing resources where they will be most effective.

It is one where functional specialists, with their own perspective of the customer, contribute to building the whole picture of the customer and their needs.

Finally, it is one where everyone who has to implement the strategy is involved in its development – so that the organisation has the flexibility to adapt to those ever-changing market conditions.

The Author

Dr Paul Stuart-Kregor is Director of The MSI Consultancy.

Originally published in Pharmaceutical Marketing, February 2010

Innovation In Implementing The Brand – Avoiding The ‘Same-Old, Same-Old’


May 8th, 2010

Chris Marks says it’s time to adopt a fresh and innovative approach to communicating the brand.

For many years, the pharmaceutical industry has engaged with the concept of turning good products into great brands, developing strong core propositions which provide insight into the value that the brand can add to the customer. Unfortunately, too often that process is followed by resorting to the ‘same-old, same-old’ elements of the marketing mix in the ‘same-old, same-old’ way when it comes to implementation.

Why is it that we have managed to devote so much effort – successfully – into understanding the concept of brand, and yet we continue in many cases to fail to match that effort in the implementation phase?

It’s time for pharma marketers to bring the best of 21st century thinking into this part of the process, embracing new thinking, along with best practice from fmcg and other sectors. We need a fresh and innovative approach to brand communications, specifically tailored to the regulated pharmaceuticals market.

Through robust processes, many pharma companies have recognised the essential components of the brand – and thus the way it adds value. We know that Brand Positioning, Brand Personality and the Core Proposition all align to communicate the value – both functional and emotional – that our brand delivers against the understandings and insights we have into the goals, attitudes, behaviours and drivers of our customers.

If those components of the brand are combined well, the customer will be consistently provided with a succinct summary of what is different and compelling about the brand; moreover, the benefits provided by the brand will be clearly relevant to that customer and to real patient situations, both functionally and emotionally.

We seem to have adopted this modern thinking without too much trouble. No longer do we simply talk about the incremental functional benefit of one product being x% safer or more effective compared to another. We have realised that although the benefit may be statistically significant, it may also be of no interest or relevance to the customer.

We as an industry have become adept at getting the messages – both rational and emotional – in line with the prescriber’s own drivers, and we know that this is perhaps the single most effective way of amplifying how compelling the core proposition is.

Where does it all go wrong?

So far, so good. But after significant investment in time and resources to build the brand, and the compelling messages that communicate the benefits and value, the challenge becomes one of how we can implement the brand – and unfortunately that is where things start to fall apart.

There is frequently a mismatch between the insight and understanding gained in building the brand and the messages, and what comes next – the implementation. Too often at this stage, pharma marketers take the ’safe’ route of doing more of the same. This can be for a number of reasons (including laziness), but most often it is a question of playing safe and taking the route of apparently lowest risk: ‘if it ain’t broke, don’t fix it’.

I have to tell you at this stage that this strategy is in fact riddled with danger and risk.

At first glance, the traditional use of the marketing mix appears to be the least risky. That is simply wrong. It is in fact extremely hazardous, because low-risk can mean low initiative, and tends to excludes new thinking – and it is new thinking which is often the thing which allows a brand to break out from simply plodding along.

What do I mean by ‘plodding along’? The same-old things: Symposia, Journal Ads, Detail Aids, Speaker Programmes, CME, Publications, Patient Education Programmes, Advisory Boards and of course the Sales Team.

Maybe it’s because too many pharma marketers don’t know what works and what doesn’t, or perhaps don’t understand newer elements of the marketing mix. This would stem partly from a lack of understanding of how customers make their prescribing/purchasing decisions – in other words insight is important, as ever.

Is there an argument for adopting the ‘same-old’ in any situation? Only when the market is not changing is there an excuse at all for such a ’same-old’ approach – and there is not one part of the healthcare world where the market is standing still. So there is no argument for the ‘same-old’.

Pharma marketers shouldn’t approach this thinking that there has to be a very strong reason to change how they implement brand communications; rather, that there has to be a very strong reason not to change.

Thinking and Acting Differently

If the landscape if different, then the thinking has to be different, and you don’t have to look very far to see just how much that landscape has changed.

Let’s take a couple of examples: CME is no longer a part of the marketing mix, as it has moved to being a heavily scrutinised medical affairs budget item. Sales teams and traditional detailing are becoming less and less effective, and more and more physicians are either forced to or choose to deny access to sales representatives – as all the while the costs of maintaining a sales team rises.

So let’s apply our crystal ball to some of those elements of the marketing mix to see how we might introduce a fresh approach and innovative thinking.

The Sales Team
A recent Insead review suggested that the future of the marketing mix for pharmaceuticals would see decreasing use of the sales representative, print media and conferences, whilst the shift will be towards websites, call centres and eDetailing (to say nothing of the explosion in social media).

Although sales team detailing will for sure make up a big part of the mix over the next few years, it makes sense to look at alternatives that can take up the slack or off-set the risks.

Clearly, with the increasing rise in the power of the payer and policymakers, more and more of our marketing mix must be devoted to genuine account management – embracing these hitherto ‘devils incarnate’ as genuine customers with whom we must work proactively and in partnership.

That means diverting sales team resource into smaller numbers of national, regional and local health-economy account managers, with the support and infrastructure to deliver value for the customer and for the company – something that in the fmcg sector, the grocery industry embraced many years ago.

This is the future in pharmaceuticals and the sooner that it is acknowledged, the sooner we will look to develop a marketing mix tailored to account support.

Education Programmes and eLearning
Technology will have a huge impact on communications with physicians. Education and detailing will be the preserve of the internet, with or without sales rep support. It is likely that even then we will see a move away from the electronic detail to more learning resources for physicians, such as Key Opinion Leader educational programmes.

Today’s newly qualified physicians are growing up in a multi-media learning environment, and smart providers will deliver entertaining, easy-to-access learning that doctors can dip into at their leisure.

Each major disease area will have an online community of stakeholders (HCPs, carers, providers, patients) who will drive decision making in that therapy area. It is only a matter of time before the doctors, nurses, patients and payers discuss developments and how to get better outcomes in a therapy area online.

Detail Aids
As we have already seen, sales stories will be based on patient benefit rather than product features – that has to be at the core of the brand.

Mobile technology (SMS, podcasts via iPods and so on) will become the essential and effective channel for communicating with the busy physician. The evolution of smaller, more portable, interconnected plug-and-play devices is inexorable, potentially bringing substantial savings to the marketing budget.

There is one indisputable fact here: ROI for physician and patient (aka consumer) marketing is getting worse, whereas ROI for technology-enabled marketing is getting better.

The days of the glossy detail aid may be numbered; in the future, our physicians are more likely to learn about our brands through downloads in the comfort of their living room than through the sales representative going through data page-by-page. And the content will change far more frequently as well.

Increasingly decisions will be made not just about the data package and study results, but about the complete value-added package, the solution that a brand and company provides. As product differentials reduce and competition increases in a value-driven environment, our industry will be challenged to provide more education, support, and lifestyle assistance to a wider audience to ensure patients benefit fully from its product. The most cost-effective way to do this is via digital channels, where services are scalable and easily updated.

Journals will probably become downloads; print media may be a thing of the past for communication to physicians. We may be able to apply the moving image and voice-overs to Direct to Physician communication.

Patient Information Programmes
Amidst a crisis in national health care, patients say health (and related product) websites are as vital to their well-being as physical interactions with healthcare providers.

According to a recent study, individuals who use technology to gain an education into their conditions and potential solutions fall into two broad groups: the 80% who are highly engaged patients and take active roles in health management; and the 20% who lack the confidence to play an active role in their own health.

Meanwhile, consumers engage with healthcare social media for both rational and emotional reasons. The study found that the latter are primary, as many healthcare social media users want reassurance, support, and a sense of intimacy from people who are going through a similar experience.

Though also important, rational needs are secondary, as social media users are searching for ‘foundational information’ about their specific conditions and symptoms, information about drugs and supplements, and the latest health news.

More than branded or corporate destinations, third party health-related sites were cited as most important destinations for both social and editorial content. Furthermore, many people report mixed feelings about how pharmaceutical companies should participate in websites and social media, but most are open to some level of participation, as long as it is transparently disclosed.

Most consumers do feel that endorsements by government and non-profit organisations, such as the patient associations, the regulatory authorities and third-party watchdog groups, add credibility to social content.

If I am making a decision about my life, whether it’s a treatment for my medical condition or what new homes are available, I am more likely to search Google than consult with my doctor or estate agent. If I want more information, my next port of call are my LinkedIn, Facebook or Twitter contacts.

Advisory Boards
Thought leadership in pharmaceuticals will be created online, through blogs and social networks – and whatever may come next. Twitter is a KOL-cascade. In pharma it will not be long before thought leaders put forward their views, and their followers retweet them, and their followers retweet them and so on.

For more involved discussions we can expect comment on blogs or discussions in social networks. Medicine is a global field and advances in it are discussed at a global level.

Symposia and Publications
Already most of the major international symposia and publications are engaging with digital technology to provide the information, presentations, papers, abstracts etc via electronic downloads, and some have even gone so far as to encourage blogs and online forums to disseminate information. This can only continue, accelerated by a need to reduce travel costs and environmental impacts. It is difficult to envisage pharma marketers inviting customers to attend major international congresses lasting for more than a couple of years. The future will see international medical meetings occurring remotely and digitally.

What does all this mean for pharmaceutical brand teams?

While many in the finance, retail and most notably music and media industries have adapted their marketing mix to the challenges of the new millennium, pharma is still playing safe, plodding along doing the same-old implementation plans using the same-old mix elements.

I have illustrated some potential changes to the way in which the mix will need to be implemented, and the challenge for brand teams is to::

1. Stop looking only at individual affiliate-based programmes – work with colleagues around the world to determine communication platforms, messages, and how you want to deliver them. It is a global market now.

2. Empower interaction with your customers (physicians, payers, policy makers and patients) – and provide information, programmes and complete solutions that include your brands. But make sure that they are delivered via the most appropriate and convenient channel, with a feedback loop built-in.

3. Challenge the legal and regulatory blockages – work out how you are going to handle things such as adverse events, overcome the issue of what is non-promotion if you are asked or if physicians discuss data not included in your label.

4. Engage the new era – the vast majority of your future marketing investment is going to be spent in ways that you have never considered before. But remember, your customers are already there, and for far more than online surveys. Be prepared to listen to your customers, respond in a timely way, to be completely transparent and recognise that our marketing is becoming more about one-to-one communication than a one-size-fits-all.

5. Spend as much time in the future engaging with payers and policy makers and developing programmes and tools specifically tailored to their needs as you did with physicians in the past – they will control the destiny of your brands.

6. Remember that a brand is something the customer has a relationship with, and uses because they want to; they will determine the value that your brand adds based on the sum of all the characteristics, tangible and intangible, that makes your product differentiated or unique in their minds.

The Author

Chris Marks is Brand Services Principal at The MSI Consultancy.

Originally published in Pharmafocus, May 2010

Welcome to Wellbeing


April 26th, 2010

‘Health’, ‘Wellness’, ‘Vitality’, ‘Balance’…whatever you call it, Wellbeing is big business and represents a significant challenge for marketers building responsible relationships with customers and the societies around them.

For our second annual Cello Group Conference, we wanted to give you the opportunity to explore this territory further. ‘Welcome to Wellbeing’ – a viewpoint from which to survey the landscape of Health and Wellness.

Bringing a wide-angled approach to Wellbeing, we’ll visit topics including:

  • Understanding local attitudes to germs and hygiene across the globe with Kimberly Clarke and Leapfrog
  • Co-creating sexual health campaigns with healthcare professionals and Insight Research Group
  • Developing the UK Government’s ‘Change4Life’ anti-obesity campaign with 2CV
  • Different approaches to exploring mental health insight across Scotland and the North-West of England with Cello MRUK, Face and Leith
  • Fighting sleep deprivation with The MSI Consultancy

Your guides will be senior Cello practitioners and their clients from both public and private sectors, navigating through real cases and innovative ways of working within Wellbeing.

I’m also very pleased to announce that Professor Kate Pickett, of York University and Director of the Equality Trust, will be our keynote speaker. She will be introducing the concept of Societal Wellbeing (expanding on her influential bestseller, ‘The Spirit Level: Why More Equal Societies Almost Always Do Better’).

We hope you can join us in London on Tuesday 27th April. Held at the Wellcome Collection in Euston Road, the event will be easily accessible from public transport and free to attend. Registration will start at 10.30 and the day will finish at 16.00 (lunch included).

In return for your time, you’ll profit from a broader perspective on Wellbeing in its widest sense, and the chance to consider how to best position your brand and business for healthy growth into the future. I do hope you can attend.

Influencing the Regional Decision-Makers


April 12th, 2010

Sandwiched between the national policy makers and the local delivery Trusts are ten regional Strategic Health Authorities. The decisions they make have a big bearing on the pharmaceutical industry – so how should we be influencing those decisions? Gerard Doherty says that understanding their agenda is key.

In the shifting sands that is the NHS structure, one of the most difficult tasks for the pharmaceutical industry is that of identifying who is making the decisions, and more importantly finding ways to influence that decision making process.

Whilst the individual clinician – so long the focus of the industry’s sales and marketing efforts – still exerts some influence, there is now a whole raft of other bodies which in effect make most of the choices which will determine the success or otherwise of many of the pharma industry’s products. So getting the right messages in front of the right people is both complex and absolutely necessary.

We are now at the situation where we have three tiers involved in the process. At the national level are the policy makers. At the local level you have the bodies that we all interact with as much as possible, those closest to the patients themselves: the PCTs.

Since 2006, sandwiched in the middle, have been ten Strategic Health Authorities (SHAs), rationalised from the 28 which were first created in 2002. With a new statutory obligation on them to drive innovation in the NHS (see box), they have been much in the news.

But what is their purpose? What value are they to the industry? Why and when might we want to interact with them? And how should we go about doing this? Should we be taking the same approach as we do elsewhere in the NHS?

Essentially they are there to ensure that national policy is implemented on the ground. In addition, although there are many things that the PCTs can happily manage at a local level, some areas of the health service require a broader view.

The two key things which SHAs do that make them important for pharma are Mass Service Provision and, in particular, Area Specialist Commissioning. The former is about providing services which, by their nature, need to be organised at a regional level to ensure effective use of scarce NHS resources such as Dexa scanning for management of osteoporosis. It’s a question of economies of scale, keeping provision within a region, but not necessarily within a locality.

Regional or National Outlook?

The rather more important area for us is Area Specialist Commissioning. The ten SHAs have a specialist commissioning role across a raft of therapy areas, things like paediatric intensive care and children’s and young people’s oncology. And as we shall see, their role here is as much national as regional, so they play a big part in shaping policy.

The specialist commissioners are within the SHA; their job is service provision for those specialist areas, and they will dictate what that service provision looks like. Knowing how that commissioning cycle works, and what and who influences them, is key to influencing these important decisions. If you can reach and influence the right people, it is going to have a multiplying effect, which is much more effective and cost-efficient than trying to do this on a PCT by PCT basis.

There are 35 specialist commissioning areas, and one SHA will take the national lead in each. This means that the SHAs are de facto working on a national basis, albeit that they are individually regional bodies – in effect making common policy decisions and then ‘imposing’ these on a local level.

One of the big issues here is trying to eliminate health inequality – so-called ‘postcode prescribing’. The SHAs are trying to come to a consensus; so unless there is a really good reason, they won’t want to do anything different from everyone else. There will be occasions where individuals SHAs don’t buy into the national consensus, usually driven by geography or demography. But these are the exceptions rather than the rule, and overall the SHAs are driving towards equality of access in all regions.

From a pharma point of view, you could argue that this is making life a bit easier, because if we accept that knowing the market is crucial, it’s much easier to do this on a common basis. In effect the SHAs are implementing regional, super-regional and national policies, and that consistency simplifies matters.

So you wouldn’t expect necessarily to be driving different policies in each SHA; what you want to do is make sure there is a positive view of what you are doing across all SHAs –although you might focus on the one which has the responsibility and which is taking the national lead for your particular therapy area.

Pick Your Target

But even if we know that one SHA is taking the lead in a particular therapy area, we still need to know exactly who is making the key decisions – and just as importantly, who might influence that decision maker.

At first sight, the Specialist Commissioners are the obvious target, but in fact there are so many influencers who are better targeted, who are providing the Commissioners with the information and the evidence they need to take the commissioning decisions.

The Commissioners are the decision-makers; but they are not the experts. They may be making commissioning decisions in an area of medicine in which they are not specialists. And they are not going to take advice directly from the pharma companies, because they will view them as having a vested interest, and they couldn’t have an educated conversation with them.

In fact, the Commissioners are basing their decisions on the evidence they get from others (especially Public Health Consultants), so it makes sense that the biggest influence that pharma can have is to ensure that those influencers are armed with quality evidence.

In organisations which are taking decisions about the prioritisation of budgets, the role of patient associations are also significant. These are a very voluble way of getting things up the priority list. So you need to cultivate your patient group relationships, because they an influencer group taken seriously by the key people within the SHAs, as well as the public health professionals who are advising them.

Unless SHAs have the condition your drug is for high on their priority list, then you won’t succeed. Patient groups are lobbying for ‘their’ therapy area on a national level, although SHAs are of course interacting with patient groups in those areas where they are taking a national specialist lead, which is another reason for knowing the specific interests of each SHA.

Align Your Agenda

So within – and around – the SHA structure there are a number of different roles, each of which need to be approached in different ways, and with different messages, or at least difference emphasis of messages. But the overarching principle is align your agenda with theirs, and don’t try and sell too much – simply demonstrate how you are meeting their needs, you need to sell to their priorities.

SHAs approach budget planning in exactly the same way that we do in industry, and it’s useful to know their timetable. From June onwards, they are looking at the investment requirements and the priorities for the following year. By September, they have the first-cut investment plan, which is then debated and redrawn during the months leading up to December. The plan is approved in January, coming into effect with the new year in April. If SHAs are important for your own therapy area, then you need to think about whether you should be aligning your brand planning cycle with the SHA planning cycle.

Although some in-year budgeting on a reactive basis does happen (based on ‘exceptionality’ rules), you really must interact with this planning process way in advance, because they much prefer planned budgeting.

SHAs make much use of horizon scanning, looking at what is potentially going to impact on budgets. This is commissioned nationally, but the SHAs use it as an important resource, so it is equally important for pharma. If you can influence the horizon scanning process, it will indirectly influence the SHAs in the decisions that they make on a regional and national lead level.

You can’t influence the outcome of horizon scanning but you can affect the direction by providing information. Disclosure is a good idea, by all means give full information so that the conclusion of the horizon scanning is accurate; but then, make sure you know what the horizon scanning is saying, because that is the information that the SHA will be using to influence its own decisions. You need to link what you are saying to the SHAs to what they are reading in the horizon scanning reports.

SHA priorities are not just about cost, but they also consider delivery of therapies and all the other issues involved. So you need to be thinking about the other implications of your medicines – for example if they work in conjunction with other therapies or approaches. The SHA is there to take that overview of the bigger picture.

Pharma should be thinking not in terms of being a supplier of drugs, but as being one of a chain of suppliers of therapeutic solutions, which means understanding what our place is in that alongside others as well. Be aware that you are not the whole picture.

To influence the decisions being taken at SHA level, pharma needs to understand what their priorities are, and then make sure that the way it positions itself means that the pharma company is seen as having priorities which mirror them.

That means undertaking early dialogue with them – at a senior level – to ensure that you understand exactly what is going to be important to the SHA; and it also means early disclosure of information and in particular good quality evidence to help influence that prioritisation process.

But it also means making sure that your agenda is – and is seen to be – aligned with theirs. As with so many parts of the NHS, there is still an innate wariness about conflict of interest, and credibility is key. That means you must have a consistency of brand message – you can’t be saying different things to SHAs just because you think that will convince them that your priorities are aligned; you must be saying the same thing to NICE, SHA, PCTs and all other influencers.

And although there might be regional specifics, remember that there are only ten SHAs, so they will talk to each other and will be looking for consistency of policy.

Now that the SHA structure has settled, and given their new obligations such as innovation (which are not, as we have seen, backed up with significant amounts of extra money), the door is open for pharma to have an influence on the important commissioning decisions being taken at SHA level.

That means getting the message across to all sorts of people, both within the SHAs (directors, specialist commissioners) and external people and bodies which will have a big influence ion their decisions (public health consultants, patient groups, PCTs, horizon scanners, national policy makers).

Above all, it means building a consistent brand message which shows that your aims are aligned with their agenda. Despite the common suspicion of the industry, SHAs have realised that they have to work with the industry to achieve their aims. It’s now up to us to make sure we play their game to overcome that suspicion.

The Author

Gerard Doherty is a Managing Consultant at the MSI Consultancy Ltd.

Originally published in InPharm,  November 2009

Mapping the Future


April 12th, 2010

Jon Bircher turns cartographer as he suggests ways that Pharma marketers might map out the future, helping them find their way to more robust and innovative strategies.

‘Where do you see yourself in ten years’ time?’ A clichéd interview-type question that we are asked, and that we ask ourselves, repeatedly. Unsurprisingly, it’s one that we all find difficult to answer. We look at the future, we try to make the best decisions, but all we find is lots of uncertainty.

How do we decide what kind of career to pursue, when it’s not clear what industries will exist in ten years’ time? More fundamentally, how do we know what will be important to us then? Many things impact that: the life stage we are at; what has happened in our career; our financial situation; how the global recession actually pans out; all of these things may alter our values and aspirations. Who knows? In ten years’ time perhaps you will be off saving the last few orang-utans!

This uncertainty about the future is just as acute in business. The difference here is that senior managers are constantly being asked to build robust marketing strategies for a future we don’t know yet. This is exactly the dilemma of many Pharma marketers.

Just as early explorers set out across uncharted lands with little to guide them apart from a clear hypothesis and knowledge of the world they knew, the dilemma we face in business is that all of our knowledge is about the past, but the decisions we are making are about the future.

In business, we are faced with ‘mission-critical’ decisions all the time. You have a choice; you can do one of three things:

  1. You can let all the uncertainty freeze you into doing absolutely nothing, and just carry on as normal…
  2. You can delude yourself that you can see past all the uncertainty, and just carry on oblivious…
  3. Or, you can attempt to paint pictures of the future, so that you can learn from them and ensure that you have the best chance of making the right decision.

Personally I prefer option 3…

Painting pictures, or developing scenarios, is the best way of mapping what the future could look like, and then you can start to build strategies that would work in those futures.

If we are going to map the future, perhaps we should think about exactly what a map is? Personally, I like Wikipedia’s definition: a map is “a visual representation of an area, a symbolic depiction highlighting relationships between elements of that space, such as objects, regions and themes.”

A map is physical – something which we can touch, something that we can interact with, something tangible that we can interpret. How valuable would it be to have one of those for the future? The good news is that using scenarios, you can do just that. You will still have to interpret those pictures of the future, just as you would an Ordnance Survey but at least you won’t be setting out on your journey blind.

The scenarios you develop should be like a map is: tangible, plausible, describing relationships between different systems, customers, trends, market forces, regions, and so on.

So, how do we go about mapping a future world that doesn’t yet exist? Actually, the process is not so dissimilar to creating and interpreting a map; both can be broadly split into five sections.

1. Provide the Coordinates

The most important thing you do in developing a scenario is to isolate the key business question that you are asking (or key decision that you making). The challenge, if you leave it too open, is that created scenarios may not be relevant, or may not provide you with the right stimulus to interpret the direction in which to travel

Map-makers start by defining the coordinates to focus their map-drawing. In the same way when writing scenarios you need to start by agreeing what the key business question is and what the timeframe is. Be specific.

Only by doing this can you ensure that the futures you develop provide the stimulus and challenge that a good scenario should; focusing our effort, energy and creativity in the right place. In essence the maps that you are building are providing different perspectives on the future world, which allow you to pressure-test the key question that you are asking or decision you need to make.

Remember that this is a creative journey you are likely to be taking as a team, therefore agreeing the focal question/decision is crucial, in having a common starting place

So what kind of questions might be suitable for scenario learning? Perhaps you’re looking to bring a new diabetes product to market and your question is related to how the market is going to react given increased regulatory pressures and recent safety concerns? Maybe your question is a bigger organisational one? What is the right business model for us in the future? What is possible given our focus, our values and the balance of our pipeline in 2016?

We are seeing increasing price pressures on healthcare systems globally, the number of blockbusters losing patents and increasing EU focus on generic uptake . So maybe you have a series of products going off-patent in the next five years, and want to understand what the most appropriate strategy is for your company? Once again, developing different scenarios will help you innovate and explore different possible approaches that may play out across different futures

You are going to build and embellish scenarios later, but at this stage let’s make sure we have set and agreed the coordinates. What is the right strategy for us given the number of patent expiries we need to manage?

2. Define the Boundaries

Now you can start developing your maps, (your scenarios). And just as in map-building where you would define the boundaries e.g. where the county lines are or where the mountain ranges and valleys’ are, the same goes for developing scenarios – you need to set your boundaries

In other words, you know the key coordinates, the centre-point; it’s about how far you want to expand the map. There is no point just looking at one point. It’s about looking at the relationships within the system and space as in the Wikipedia definition.

So the first task is to identify as a team, what the possible driving forces and trends are. Those likely to influence the development of different possible futures

Given our recent coordinates perhaps you have noticed recent EU Commission reports suggesting they are going to be much harder on originator companies in terms of marketing activities, exclusivity deals and patent litigation at the end of patent life. Or you have noticed the increased focus on pharmacy substitution across the EU with pharmacists driven to using the cheapest generic. What you need to do now is capture these and other trends to help define the boundaries – which areas do you want to explore in more detail?

The usual environmental (PESTLE) prompts will help your thinking; what is happening Politically; what are the Economic issues, the Sociological issues; the Technological issues, (includes competitors), the Legal and Ecological issues.

Use these prompts as a team to brainstorm all the possible trends and forces (boundaries) that may be important influencers on your future, based on your key question. Some elements will be almost ‘pre-determined’ e.g. an ageing population or continued pressure on the health economy. These should be included in all scenarios but the difficulty then comes in which trends and which driving forces should we ‘define’ our scenarios by?

3. Plotting Locations and Features

So we have captured all the boundaries, you can now start plotting features on your map. In scenario development terms, this means starting to decide which trends will define the future worlds, thus prioritising the most critical uncertainties.

We have this whole list of ‘stuff’ that we know could be in our world, could be on our map, but what should we emphasise?

As with map-building, there are lots of different ways you can draw the map. In the pharmaceutical industry, given the fact that there are lots of influencing factors, we need a methodology that cuts through the complexity.

Go back to what a map is all about ie it’s about different elements and the inter-relationships between them. Take any road map. Everything is not featured, but it still does the job. To interpret it, you don’t necessarily need to see where every tree and every fire station is.

In scenario learning jargon, a deductive process can be followed, effectively, forcing yourself to focus on the critical uncertainties. You have your business question e.g. going off-patent. What are the trends that are most critical in impacting your decision? As a team, make a judgement. Perhaps it is the level of Pharmacy substitution and the level of patent protection your particular brand has?

Now we need to uncover where are we most uncertain. What do we mean by this? We mean that we are uncertain how (not if) this trend will unfold in the future. Do not fall into the usual trap of defining uncertain as if it is important.

This can be difficult to understand, but essentially a critical uncertainty (the features that you want to build your map/scenario around) are those trends or forces which you believe will critically impact what your final strategy looks like, where there are different possible ways that that critical trend could unfold E.g. Pharmacists become more influential; incentivised heavily to substitute within brands and within class vs. continuing to appear as a priority but becoming no more influential than they are today.

4. Draw and Embellish the Map

Finally we can build our scenarios. Our views of the future. As a team you have already done much of the hard work in terms of isolating the driving forces and prioritising which ones will be the anchor of our various scenarios

At this stage be creative, but remain pragmatic in your embellishment. You could spend months, taking the senior leadership team out of action, developing beautifully crafted, innovative and challenging scenarios. But, remember the purpose. A road map does its job perfectly well but it’s not a work of art.

Flesh out your thinking using creative techniques such as ‘headlining’ to show how scenarios have evolved over time, providing a narrative that people can key into. Consider the relationships and interplay between different features in your scenarios. Then supplement your creativity with gap filling research, focused on ensuring credible worlds are developed. Peter Schwartz, co-founder of the GBN puts it succinctly: “You can tell when you have good scenarios when they are both plausible and surprising.”

So in a world where Pharmacists rule and the EU take heavy legislative action against originator companies, what is the right LoE strategy? What about in a world where Pharmacy substitution becomes less influential, the patient has greater say and originator patents become harder to challenge. What then?

5. Read and Interpret the Map

Just as the map is not the ultimate goal but the journey you take is, so scenarios are not the ultimate goal, they are there to help you make the right decisions and build the best strategies. It’s a little bit like scaffolding to a building. The scaffolding is important, it helps you create the structure, but the most important thing, the focal point, is the building (strategy) itself.

You have developed these credible and surprising worlds, now you must learn from them and create the most robust strategy. In the same way, you can have the most beautifully crafted map, but if you don’t interpret it right, you are going to take the wrong turning.

Consider each scenario; what are the opportunities? What are the competitors likely to do? What capabilities are required to compete? What are the indicators of that future unfolding? What strategic options are available to us? What contingency plans may we need to make?

Also, look at the scenarios as a whole and ask whether there are strategies you can employ which play out across all or most of these worlds? Where are our exposure areas? As a team you can now decide on the most robust strategy, highlighting indicators of possible exposure areas that may need contingency plans

The Right Route

So, you have drawn your map, interpreted it, and are en route. The last stage is doing something. If you sit in your car with your route plotted, you still won’t go anywhere until you start driving. You may need to go back to the map over time and take another look you may learn new routes and features but now you are proactively engaging with the future and giving yourself the best chance of success

Take yourself out of your comfort zone; feel motivated by the possibilities presented by different futures; and now answer the question – what are you going to be doing in ten years’ time?

The Author

Jon Bircher is Head of Bespoke Consulting at The MSI Consultancy.

Originally published in PM Europe, January 2010

Shire Pharmaceuticals – Global Brand Development (Testimonial)


March 30th, 2010

“We are preparing for a global product launch which is very important to Shire. MSI has worked closely with us to build a powerful marketing proposition and Brand. Their ability to see the critical issues, provide insight into customer decision making and develop a competitive marketing proposition is outstanding. As a consultancy, they have added tremendous value.”

Shirley Wakelin
Director, Renal products
Global Headquarters UK

Sanofi Aventis – Global Launch Positioning (Testimonial)


March 30th, 2010

“We have used MSI to help us understand the market potential, strategy and positioning options for a product in development in a totally new and unexplored therapeutic area. Their ability to provide practical market insight and sound commercial thinking is first class.”

Pascal Sieuw
Marketing Director, Internal Medicine/CNS Franchise
Global Marketing Sanofi-Aventis

Nycomed – Europe (Testimonial)


March 30th, 2010

“In 2005 The MSI Consultancy were engaged to develop a state of the art marketing planning software tool (SMART) Read the rest of this entry

Biosimilars: a converging landscape?


March 22nd, 2010

Two weeks ago saw Teva snatch Ratiopharm from under the noses of Pfizer and other brand players – further establishing its presence in the biopharmaceuticals/generics market. After establishing a JV with Swiss based Lonza Biologics, and launching their own Teva branded biologics (e.g. TevaGrastim) they are set to make a big impact in this market. Read the rest of this entry

Get the Most Bang for Your Buck


March 19th, 2010

In an increasingly lean pharmaceutical industry, everyone is talking about marketing ROI – but few have the tools to effectively put it into practice.  Using a structured approach to marketing, Marketing Scientist Alex Blyth offers a practical and robust way to integrate and measure marketing activities and accurately forecast returns. Read the rest of this entry

Value Added


March 19th, 2010

Just like most specialisms, marketing, and especially pharma marketing, has its fair share of jargon.  Whilst this can sometimes be a useful shorthand, too often such phrases are used with little understanding as to their true meaning and implications. Read the rest of this entry

Ensuring Brand Consistency in Different Cultures


March 19th, 2010

Pan-European marketing, particularly within the pharmaceutical industry, is a complex discipline, strongly influenced by many factors including the expansion of the EU eastwards and the emergence of new markets further afield.  A one-size-fits-all approach to marketing won’t achieve effective results in every market, as we need to be aware and deal with very different cultures which exist in this environment.  Those marketers who regard Europe as one homogenous European whole are surely heading for disaster.. Read the rest of this entry

Brands and Assets


March 19th, 2010

Imagine that you were to acquire the Coca-Cola brand – the logo, the trademarks and the bottle shape – but none of the plant, equipment or property.  How much might you have to pay for this icon?

The answer, according to Interbrand in their 2008 “Best Global Brands” report, is an incredible $66.6 billion.  And if you continue down the list of these top 100 brands, names such as Microsoft, Google, Nokia, Apple and Nescafé will appear, each of which has a brand value of over $10 billion. Read the rest of this entry

New Brand Services section on the MSI website


March 19th, 2010

The new MSI website now contains a dedicated Brand Services section. Check regularly for updates on services and new articles.

New interactive training services to be launched in April/May


March 19th, 2010

MSI will shortly be launching a range of interactive services to training and development clients as part of the new MSI website. These will include online access to pre-read documents and training materials as well as a feedback questionnaire.

We will be updating our news and blog to keep you informed of these new features or you can also register to be kept up to date via email.

Best Practice reports now available to view online


March 19th, 2010

The launch of the new MSI website sees the archive of MSI best practice reports (which where previously emailed free of charge to registered contacts over the last 18 months) are now available online. You can read the reports here or register for regular updates by email

Time to Consider a Culture Shift?


March 19th, 2010

In the current climate, job seeking pharma marketers need to be more flexible in their thinking, argues Paul Stuart-Kregor.

This isn’t the first time that we have seen pharma companies trimming their workforces, but in the current climate, things are different.  Organisations are not just ‘cutting the fat’ now – they are having to shed good people as the economic and structural realities start to bite.  And there are unlikely to be too many openings at other big players, because they are all in the same boat.  So everyone could be affected – and everyone needs to be prepared. Read the rest of this entry

Progress on the MSI website


March 19th, 2010

Development of the new MSI website is going well and the site is due to go live at the beginning of April. Lookout for regular updates and a more interative experience.

New Futures section soon to be added to the MSI website


March 19th, 2010

A new ‘Futures’ section will shortly go live on the new MSI website. Register on the website if you wish to receive updates when new content is added.

Train to Retain


November 1st, 2009

It’s a myth that retaining staff is easy in a recession.  Although, as jobs are lost the attraction of staying put will always be stronger, the best people – the ones you really need to hold on to, especially in a downturn – will always be able to find another job.  And they are not just motivated by salary but are planning a long-term career, plus looking for employers who will help them achieve that. Read the rest of this entry

Careers Feature: Does Loyalty Pay?


July 30th, 2009

There’s no job for life any more, so if employers show no loyalty to staff, why should employees be loyal in return? Isn’t all just about looking after number one these days? Will staying loyal to an employer lead to career advancement and more money, or do you have to ‘jump ship’ from time to time? And if you do, how can you be sure you’re jumping onto a better ship, rather than into the shark-ridden sea? Paul Stuart-Kregor examines the issues and finds out if loyalty is still important – or has been sacrificed at the altar of self-interest.

Loyalty certainly featured more prominently in the careers of past generations. Unfortunately, economic necessity has encouraged organisations to make some harsh and expedient decisions about staff.

Many healthcare professionals have experienced mergers and acquisitions and resultant redundancy, or reductions in head count driven by commercial and pipeline issues. So it is no longer unusual to hear of people we know being made redundant.

Companies appear to have largely abandoned the implicit contract that traditionally promised employment security in exchange for loyalty. What they gained was agility – the freedom to use redundancies, for instance, to renew or adjust the corporate talent mix as business needs changed.

So, we can no longer expect ‘loyalty’ to pay off across the board, nor can we automatically expect favourable treatment just because we have worked for an organisation for a number of years. In the current turbulent economic times, but also as business dictates at other times, companies have to make hard-nosed commercial decisions, and will continue to do so.

People believe this has created a cultural shift in attitude, towards a ‘dog eat dog’ mentality, with an emphasis on competition, with people continually moving for career advancement. Some even suggest that staying put in one place for too long can be seriously career limiting.

So where did this idea of ‘jumping ship to get ahead’ come from? To a great extent, talk about the end of job security and one-employer careers coincided with the last big round of general company downsizing and outsourcing in the mid-1990s. Employers wanted the flexibility to adjust their workforce, and the concept of building careers by changing jobs gained momentum.

Now many people believe that the workplace has changed, and the perception that job security retired with your grandparents has become part of the accepted wisdom – but it may be more urban myth than reality.

A recent study by a University of British Columbia sociologist suggests the old-fashioned work model of staying with one employer may still be the best route to success, despite the typical career advice given to young workers that they need to change jobs to get ahead.

Using data from a US national longitudinal study that tracked 6,000 young workers during their first 12 years in the labour market across a number of industry sectors, along with details from dozens of previous pieces of research, the study found that career mobility comes with a price for workers.

The study found that workers who changed jobs several times during the first five years in the labour market did see their wages increase with each move but the trend reversed if their mobility continued.

After these first few years in the workforce, when employers expect people to change jobs more frequently to find the right fit, the study discovered that each job change reduced the worker’s wages by a little more than one per cent. So changing jobs a half-dozen times means a worker would earn about six per cent less than someone who stayed with the same employer. Workers with higher than average mobility also spent more time out of the workforce. This suggests that in general you start to lose after five years of working if you haven’t found your place in the right role.

Why? The evidence suggests that future employers may well be more willing to overlook a move early on in your career if they understand that the reason was legitimate (relocating for family reasons, a failure to launch a product). Frequent moves later on (more than two or three over the course of say five years) can be extremely damaging. Although you may have great reasons for making a move, frequent moves suggest a lack of stability or commitment, and may lead some prospective employers to question whether the worker is capable or willing to hold down a particular job for long – and that’s a difficult stigma to overcome.

Now clearly the typical career path in healthcare has a slightly different sequence and timeline to other sectors. Most of us spend some time in the field during the early years, either as part of a graduate scheme or as the first point of entry into the industry. The net result is that for the first two to four years we are ‘earning our spurs’ with the new organisation. It is then that you need to decide what to do.

If the job or the organisation suits you, then the study evidence suggests that the best move is to stay put and try to move up. Real benefits do seem to come from long-term jobs and stability.

So what if we do stay put?

Here at MSI we have worked with many people who have stayed with the same client organisation for a number of years, and there is no doubt they have done very well. They have generally moved up within the organisation to more senior and better rewarded positions.

But the path to bigger and better things is not always smooth or timely. And therein lies the rub.

There is no doubt that large global organisations offer significant, perhaps even greater, opportunities to follow a variety of career paths, always recognising that job security is never a given, but finding the opportunity to move up can be the challenge. After all, the pyramid gets smaller as we move towards the top, which means fewer positions and fewer options, if you are considering what might ‘appear’ to be the traditional career development path.

How do we judge whether our current employer offers us the best ‘future’? To answer that, let’s reflect on why people move.

First and foremost, a perceived feeling of ‘going nowhere’, exemplified by a lack of progression. For example, those feelings as you look back over your year at Christmas thinking ‘I have been doing the same old, same old, what will be different about next year?’

Then there is that feeling that nobody cares – there have been cutbacks in staff but no reduction in workload. You are taking work home in the evenings, working weekends, replying to your Blackberry when on holiday; yet there is neither recognition of your commitment, nor any reward visible.

Boredom often plays a part as well. People need new challenges and stimulation. If your employer is not providing that stimulation, maybe it’s time to move on.

Money plays a part. While we tend to view raw salary as a hygiene factor, if we do not feel we are being adequately rewarded for what we are doing, then it can be the final straw that causes us to look for pastures new. Often it is coupled with one or a number of the previous reasons.

For some of us, we need to feel we are developing. Middle-managers in particular are often keen to develop their skills, partly to help with advancement and marketability, but also due to a more personal need to ‘grow’. If you are constantly meeting others people who are getting support and development in this area and feel left out, perhaps it’s time to find an employer that is prepared to invest in you. After all, we don’t want to be so constantly in “task mode” that there is no time for career or personal-development.

Coupled with this is need to know where our career future lies. Forward-thinking companies have proper talent management programmes which provide employees with a career path. Even better, the proposed career path meets that employee’s personal and particular aspirations, not merely driving progression up the traditional management ladder.

Obviously there are also issues with ‘lack of fit’ (e.g. personality clashes, different values), but if this happens in a new job, rather than jumping onto a better ship, we may well have fallen into the shark-ridden sea. That is, we have chosen the wrong option! Alternatively, if it is happening in an existing job, it’s time to go.

Avoiding the shark-ridden sea

I am a strong believer in the right shaped peg for the right shaped hole. I have had direct reports who were obviously in the wrong job, but failed to acknowledge the issue and tried to carry on regardless. That only leads one way. Better we make the right decision in the first place or acknowledge what we need and make the change.

So how do we avoid falling in with the sharks? In part it is the converse of why people leave, but it is also about understanding what you are looking for.

To gain ‘commitment’, good employers provide employees with structured development programmes and/or the opportunity to ‘grow’ through variety, stretch and challenge. The best development programmes are not purely top down, but recognise the that their employees are bright people and so have a right to be involved in crafting their own destiny, allowing the employee to determine in part their own development.

But it more than formal development that helps us grow. The opportunity to try or be exposed to new experiences is a fundamental element of personal growth. Good jobs offer people stretch and variety, whilst providing the necessary support to ensure people swim not sink.

None of us likes to feel like a small cog in a huge machine, even though that might be the reality. It is important to most people that their efforts are appreciated. Whilst remuneration is important, none of us actually comes to work purely for the salary. Most of us like to feel valued and appreciated for what we do. Specific regular appreciation can go an awfully long way to ensuring employee commitment. If we want to employ bright and intelligent, then we need to recognise that they are not fooled by fake flattery, such as “you are doing a great job”. It needs to be specific and reflect a genuine interest in that individual and their performance.

When looking at your next job move it’s really important to look at the long term and think of yourself in two jobs’ time. If the prospective new employer cannot give you an idea of where you go next, after successfully fulfilling the initial role, walk away. They only want you for your current knowledge, skill and experience and are less likely to help you maximise your potential.

Finally, we all hold certain things dear – professional achievement, for example, or family life, or financial security. Research shows that many successful people feel a disconnect between their daily activities and their deepest desires – and more worryingly and an inability to do anything about it.

When considering the next job move consider what really matters to you. Make a list of what is important to you. Then you can judge how well a future job appears to help you achieve those personal values; it may be a sensible work-life balance to allow you to spend quality time with a young family, it may be the freedom to do things your way. Be clear about what you want out of a job, and the choice will become easier.

Commitment rather than loyalty

Perhaps ‘loyalty’ is the wrong word in this day and age; there is still a backbone of employers who value hard work, high levels of competence and commitment to the company, a more modern take on ‘loyalty’. There is no guarantee of continued employment these days, but employers are looking for commitment.

However, now there is an imperative for employers to earn that commitment, and consequent hard work from their employees. That requires a similar ‘contract’ between employer and employee to that of previous generations – based, as before, on mutual benefit. But now the ‘contract’ is not just about loyalty and longevity of service.

The modern work ‘contract’ demands recognition of a two-way commitment: as employees we will give 100 per cent commitment and effort, provided the employer helps us meet our career aspirations and matches our values.

When looking at your next job move it’s really important to look at the long term and think of yourself in two jobs’ time. It’s crucial to consider whether the move you’re contemplating now is going to help you towards that goal or merely be marking time.

The Author

Dr Paul Stuart-Kregor is Director of The MSI Consultancy.

Originally published in Pharmafocus, May 2009

Demonstrating Value to Boost Product Uptake


July 16th, 2009

I’m sure that everyone reading Pharmafocus Europe is convinced of the value of their brand. Why then do so many of us find it hard to demonstrate this self evident value to other people and in particular, those who have the power to influence whether our brand is used or not and to what extent? Surely this should be relatively straight forward? Well, not if you do not take the time out to consider what ‘value’ is and what it really means.

What is Value – and why do we need to demonstrate it?

Potentially this is difficult to define when individual people derive different levels of value from the same product or service. Our sense of value can also be influenced by other people and in particular people whose opinions we trust. So what do we mean by value?

Value is derived when the perception of the benefits of a product or a service are in line with the cost; simple enough but perhaps in our industry we do not consider this in enough detail. And too often we concentrate only on the value that comes from the functional benefits of our products (i.e. efficacy and safety), without thinking about the equally important emotional aspects of the value our brand brings. Potentially, this shows a lack of real insight into what drives the decision-making processes of our customers – and without that insight, we have limited chance of boosting the uptake of our products by them.

We all know that most healthcare systems are creaking at the seams, trying to manage the ever increasing cost of healthcare delivery without major reforms to that system, because that would be a very courageous thing for politicians to do. Coupled with this, R&D costs are soaring as pipelines continue to fail to bring radically new and innovative therapies to market and at the other end patents are being successfully challenged by generic manufacturers. Hence, no surprise then, that companies are looking to maximise their profits on any new products that make it to market. Net result? Immediate conflict with the healthcare system’s need to control costs.

Pharmaceuticals are a soft target for healthcare systems to come looking for savings. Why? I would argue because we have not established their value with key stakeholders, be that on the macro or micro level.

At the macro level, politicians and payers focus on cost and can introduce various cost cutting schemes because the voting public allow them to do so. Why? Because in the main the voters are not focusing on our industry and therefore do not care; we have not done enough to demonstrate the value that we as an industry bring to overall healthcare. I say in the main, because when the voting public can be made to care, they can have an impact as demonstrated in areas such as cancer. Perhaps we should learn from this and our industry can and needs to do more to demonstrate that spending the money on medicines does represent good value.

But that is an issue for industry-wide representation to tackle. More pertinent for most individual companies and their brand managers is demonstrating value at the micro level – that is to payers and prescribers (although let’s not forget that payers are to some extent pawns of the government, and in some respects therefore it is not in their interests to open their eyes to value, because their job is to follow political will, which in turn means to control costs).

Generally, though, as far as stakeholders within each country’s healthcare system goes, uptake of a particular product will be dependent on them believing that it adds value, by whatever measure they use to assess that value – and as we shall see, those measures are not all cost-based.

So now more than ever pharmaceutical brands need to demonstrate their value if they are to be successful.

At what level does value need to be demonstrated?

At a national level we often think about value in relation to new products and securing reimbursement and
funding. In this situation we easily slip into jargon use and bandy around terms such as the “value proposition” and “target value profile”, sometimes without fully appreciating what these terms should mean. But these words are not just meaningless jargon – we really do need to start ’valuing the value proposition’.

Often it is the responsibility of the market access or professional communications team to develop and communicate this to payer or budget holding customers, and may even be developed independent of the marketing team to the point where the market access aspiration differs from the marketing position.

This can happen because ‘getting a foot in the door’ (i.e. a profitable price and reimbursement) is most likely to be the market access position at launch. Marketing on the other hand are trying to maximise speed of uptake and maximal sales. If the two are developed in isolation, they can look completely different, and then lead to intra-company confusion. You might laugh, but we have seen this done.

The development of the Value Proposition is not a stand-alone process, but should be part of an integrated and collaborative effort with other marketing principles and must be an integral part of Brand development. Therefore the Brand Positioning and Value Proposition should not be developed in isolation, but rather they should support and shape each other.

The power of cross-functional working – having all your key internal stakeholders aligned with what you are trying to achieve, and making sure they are clear about what role they play in terms of delivery – has to be the way forward for success, otherwise you end up with left hands and right hands not knowing what is going on. Working cross functionally to fully understand payers’ needs, where the common ground is and more importantly what they will value is going to give you the best chance of success.

Shaping phase III studies may well form a key part of this and all corporations, big and small, need to have a horizon that extends beyond their home market when considering which comparators should be built into the programme and how these can drive health economic outcomes. Local marketers have a duty to inform Global teams as to what may be required and here, a detailed understanding of payer needs and motivations are immensely powerful when it comes to these discussions with your Global colleagues.

An element of flexibility is also helpful, especially if through good segmentation you can demonstrate even more value in patient sub-populations; it may prove a more effective strategy to gain reimbursement at a good price in these patients and then look to develop your patient pool overtime, linked to the clinical development. An argument that could hold true for your internal as well as your external stakeholders.

But what about existing products; products that have already gained reimbursement and have a place in treatment pathways, is there a need to demonstrate value further in this situation?

Clearly the answer is yes, and this may be where market access and marketing fail to mesh effectively. After all, if you believe that one product is better value compared to the next then you will buy it more frequently, or in our case use it more. Quite often, this need is translated by marketers into the Value Added Programme, which invariably is an educational package aimed at either the prescriber or the patient. Not that there is anything wrong with this approach, other than it is perhaps getting a little tired can be treated with an element of scepticism if aimed at prescribers and in some cases does not truly link to the intrinsic value in the brand itself.

The key question is: do these initiatives go far enough to add real value? A great example of what I mean here is Fresenius Health Care, which agrees reimbursement models to deliver dialysis to patients suffering from chronic kidney failure. They have a model called the ’Comprehensive Price Payment’, which is an integrated and quality-driven approach that bundles a variety of dialysis related services and products that in turn require the implementation and functioning of an integrated disease management model to achieve health benefits, quality improvements and system rationalisation.

This is possible because they offer products and services for the entire dialysis value chain; put plainly, they get paid for servicing a healthcare system’s dialysis needs. OK that’s great, but what if you do not have that infrastructure to be a total solution? Well, the principle is still sound; how can we help you to meet your healthcare needs in a way that is both acceptable and profitable?

Time to get emotional

So what is missing from our communication? If we go back to our definition of value, we can represent it as: Perceived Value = Perceived Benefits – Price.

Traditional pharmaceutical marketing is all about converting features of our product to benefits, isn’t it? We have all been taught to use the ’which means that’ phrase, surely that does the job? Well, no. All too often our communications focus purely on the functional benefits of efficacy and safety. Why is that not enough? Because we have not split ’benefit’ down into its component parts.

Ask any FMCG marketer and they will tell you that we derive both functional benefits and emotional benefits from the products that we buy. Just think about a man buying a car or a woman buying shoes and you’ll understand immediately what I am talking about. These are not buying decisions that are based purely on functional attributes – they contain higher levels of emotional benefit.

Can this be done in pharma? With the right communication I would argue that it can. Let me give you an example. Shire in the UK had a product for Alzheimer’s disease, Reminyl, launched after Aricept (Eisai/Pfizer), and was challenging for market share. Their initial communication was based on the functional claim that Reminyl slowed cognitive decline in Alzheimer’s patients for up to four years. Benefit over Aricept as far as prescribers were concerned? Minimal. Treating this disease is not about MME scores; GPs were not just concerned about cognitive function, they cared about the patient, and even more so if the patient had a partner. Hence, with insight, this communication was changed to a couple holding hands and the plea “Help us to hold on for as long as we can”. Far more emotive, far higher benefit to a would be prescriber. And the result? A much faster uptake of the product.

The trouble is that we often ignore or forget about the emotional benefit when it comes to marketing pharmaceuticals; after all, doctors are educated and rational people who make decisions based on hard facts and clinical data, aren’t they? But the fact remains that doctors are people too and therefore the principle holds true for them, even more so in some cases given that they enter into medicine in order to help people. The ’which means that’ phrase may get us some of the way, but to tap fully into the higher emotive needs and benefits, we need to generate a deeper insight into what really matters to our prescribers.

Without understanding this other side to benefit we are left with just being able to satisfy functional needs. Not that we should be dismissive of this, as this must be a minimum requirement, but it does not help to differentiate our brand from others that can claim similar things. So how do you uncover this level of insight?

Well constructed market research, using well thought out discussion guides and a range of different techniques can go past top line functional needs and start to get at a deeper level of understanding that can lead to true insight. Yes, it takes time and yes it takes investment, but it is a modest investment for the potential return that it can yield.

You need to understand how certain beliefs drive behaviour, and then try to think about what is underpinning those beliefs. What is your key business objective, and what change in behaviour do you need to bring about in any particular customer or group of customers?

Often this is a question of constantly asking the question ‘why?’ in research, drilling down beyond the top-line responses to really understand what drives behaviour. And don’t forget, these drivers will be different for each segment of your market; generally managers and budget holders are looking at populations, whereas prescribers tend to look at individuals.

Demonstrating Value

At whatever level, in a continent which is increasingly taking a more global view of health economics, we as an industry have to be demonstrating the value of what we bring to the table, and in a way which goes way beyond the ‘givens’ of price, efficacy and safety. In fact, the drive towards viewing health economics not just in individual budgetary silos, but in a more holistic way, should help us –spending from the drug budget can be justified by demonstrating to stakeholders the value in achieving the wider health outcomes.

But this is not happening at an even pace across Europe. The UK has had NICE for years, and therefore the industry has had to get better at HTA submissions, which in turn has generated useful debate about treatment approaches and the value of new medicines within the context of overall healthcare outcomes. In some European countries this is not the case; affiliates seem less ready to challenge current approaches to disease management.

Whatever the national environment, right across the continent there is an increasing need for the pharma companies to work harder at convincing all stakeholders about the positive value that its products brings to the over all healthcare picture. The trade off for us may be that we have to be more realistic with our ambitions and focus on selected patient groups where real value can be demonstrated, rather than everyone with the disease. The benefit though is that if we can be seen as true partners working alongside the healthcare system to bring true value to patients, then we will be knocking at an open door.

The Author

Gavin Gandy is a senior Consultant at The MSI Consultancy.

Article originally published in Pharmafocus

Do US-Based Organisations Really Know How To Market In Europe?


May 30th, 2009

Given the way the title is worded, I can almost hear a collective ‘No’ being shouted, so let’s be clear about what is actually meant here.  Most US-based organisations do have local country affiliate marketing departments or European partners with local marketers who clearly know their own markets.  Therefore what we are referring to here is the “Global” strategy and associated campaign that emanates from the Global team; a team who in reality are often based in the US and made up of US marketers, perhaps with one or two colleagues from other parts of the globe and if you are really lucky, maybe one person who has worked in one market in Europe.  Is this sounding familiarly like a global team you know?  Given that context then, is it any wonder that battles rage when it comes to implementing global campaigns in Europe.  After all, Europe is a collection of vastly different markets in terms of culture, structure and regulation, so unless you have a detailed knowledge of these differences, how can you hope to be effective?

Where does it go wrong?

It would be easy to just point the finger at the make up of the global teams as being the main reason why global campaigns are seen as less suitable for European markets. However, most global teams do work hard at trying to understand the individual markets that they are responsible for.  So why does it go wrong?

Quite often, one of the key causes of difficulty is the point at which European input is sought in the asset commercialisation process. For US-based companies the domestic market is often the largest, so Phase III studies are commonly designed to provide data against comparators that are most relevant for this market with other regions not necessarily taken into consideration.  As a result, this can have huge implications to the desired value proposition and therefore local access and claims that can be made in promotion once the license is granted.

But if global teams work hard to understand issues in European markets with or without consultation with European colleagues, why does this happen? Experience would suggest that because European responsibility is often divided amongst global team members for practical reasons e.g. managing contact, communication and travel, etc. and this leads to a fragmented view of the issues.

Coupled with this, individual marketing teams in Europe do tend to focus on why and how their market is different, so their focus tends to be more on the communication cascade to customers rather than the overall strategic challenge for the brand.

These two issues can lead to conflicting needs, requiring a compromise, which is resolved by the global team making decisions on the basis of individual market potential. Consequently the net result is the decision will favour the US view.

If we as European marketers can bring ourselves to consider the strategic context more, we would find a surprising amount of commonality and consistency that exists between markets, presenting a more consolidated European view rather than an assortment of 27 individual situations.

Another source of difficulty is how communication is handled.  Contact and communication between EU affiliates and Global teams can be confined to organising meetings around the larger events such as congresses or specific Global team meetings, where all markets are present rather than on an ‘as required’ basis.  This makes it very hard to check understanding, to ensure that what has been heard is what has been said, leaving the door open to misunderstanding and confusion, especially when your first language is not English.

Native English speakers often forget or do not think about the mental gymnastics that most European affiliates have to go through translating what has been said, thinking about it and then maybe formulating some questions, by which time the conversation has often moved on.

This is not just restricted to conversations either; a good example of this from past experience of working in a European team was when a simple diagram to support the segmentation approach was introduced, to aid understanding.  However, in the ensuing workshop, animated discussions with German and Polish colleagues seemed out of context with the main purpose of the workshop, which was to consider the application of the segmentation approach in their market.  They seemed to be totally focused on the diagram, saying that it would never work in their markets.  So what were the issues?

  1. They thought that the diagram was meant to be the new campaign visual (!) and therefore would not be understood by customers (true);
  2. They thought that it was implying that we should ignore the main segment where our existing business was being generated and switch all activity to focus on the newer segments where the brand proposition was less well established (not the intention).

Fortunately, we were able to resolve this after much eye-bulging discussion once we realised the source of the confusion.

The issue that most readers will identify with though lies in what is delivered by the global team.  All too often this is finished campaign materials, sales aids, advertising, etc. and does not place enough or any focus on the core elements of the brand, such as the Brand Vision, Brand Essence, Core Values and Brand Proposition.  Visuals in particular can be inappropriate for different markets and are most open to subjective opinion, leading to the inevitable response “this will never work in my market“.

Should we bother with a global or common approach?

Given the issues highlighted above, wouldn’t it be easier to let markets develop their own marketing strategies and campaigns to suit their uniquely individual markets?  Surely this would result in a much more effective approach and therefore maximise a brand’s potential?  Well, if that were true, then why to consumer companies dedicate so much resource to establishing and defending their brands?

Given the choice, would you rather buy the rights to the Coca-Cola brand or all their offices, production, bottling and distribution facilities? There are tangible benefits to global branding, from both a company and a customer point of view.

Company benefits include economies of scale in production and distribution, more efficient marketing, creation of a strong marketing platform that allows different brands or variants for different market segments to retain an association with the parent brand, consistent brand imagery at international congresses and symposia.  In essence, they help build barriers to local and global competitors and enhance price and margin.

And the most compelling reason in our industry; the data we have to support our brands is the data that is consistent in all markets. Hence the core product and its supporting evidence is the same.

How can we improve the situation?

We may need support from senior management to ensure that the European voice is listened to and that the dialogue starts earlier.  Asset commercialisation teams need to be put in place around Phase II to allow input and guidance to the Phase III programme, ideally comprised of representatives from the major regions.  If you do not have a European Brand Team structure then you need to have an EU spokesperson who can act as a regional representative for the brand.  However, regional representation needs to be just that, i.e. it should not have individual market bias and members of the commercialisation team need to adopt a common sense approach to resolving points of difference.

As European marketers we need to focus more on what’s the same rather than what’s different.  More often than not, the key strategic challenge for any one brand is consistent across Europe. Do we really need 27 different interpretations of the same data?

Regular communication or meetings between the global team and EU representative or market representatives should occur. However in the latter case, practical issues dictate that you cannot meet with every market in Europe.  Common sense needs to be applied but global teams need to go beyond just the top 5 markets in Europe and include representation from other commercially important markets or regions within Europe too.

There are clear benefits to having a common approach to brand marketing, to make sure global teams don’t try and provide finished materials, but rather provide guidance, data blocks, formats and a framework.  More importantly, ensure that the Brand Vision, Brand Positioning and the Core Brand Proposition are well thought through, robust plus agreed and communicated clearly.  Remember the mental gymnastics that have to be performed by country affiliates who do not have English as their first language.  Allow local tailoring within set limits, to ensure that appropriate visuals, appropriate tonality and translation issues can be accommodated.  Remember, some words in English just don’t translate.

Conclusion

No matter where head office is based there are benefits to global branding and a common approach. We’ve picked on the US, but the principles apply to any global team that focuses mainly on their domestic region. European marketers need to be more assertive about their needs and they need to communicate this at a point where it can make a difference.  However, as Europeans, we need to stop focusing on why our market is different and start looking for common issues and challenges.  In turn, global teams need to stop thinking of global campaigns as the finished article and communicate more around the brand architecture (brand vision, brand value equation, core values, brand positioning and brand proposition) and have the flexibility to allow some local tailoring that can accommodate local needs and customs.  If we can achieve this, we can start to reap the benefits of establishing true Brands that our consumer colleagues currently enjoy.

The Author

Gavin Gandy is a Senior Consultant at The MSI Consultancy.

Originally published in PM Europe, June 2009

Consolidation – where will it end?


May 30th, 2009

Analysts have said for years that the pharmaceutical industry has far too many separate companies when compared to other industry sectors, based on the relative market shares. The current round of mergers and acquisitions therefore seem to be inevitable, given the challenges the industry faces – but it is not as simple as that.

A recent report suggested that the current pharma industry sales and marketing model will be non-functional in the next ten years, with the role of the traditional sales representative becoming largely obsolete.

Why? Because the balance of power is shifting towards those who pay for medicines, with governments and insurers the ultimate arbiters of pricing and value, reimbursement and, more fundamentally, prescribing decisions. Generic versions of highly successful molecules are now more commonly available (65 per cent of previous blockbuster drugs for common diseases such as hypertension and diabetes are now sold generically in the US, and the figure is 70 per cent in Central and Eastern Europe), making it increasingly difficult to create commercial blockbusters.

Hence, products alone and mass market approaches are unlikely to guarantee success and the long-term future of pharmaceutical companies.

This is partly why we see a mad rush into specialist medicines. The global market for specialist brands accounted for 44 per cent of worldwide prescription drug spending last year and has been estimated to be twice the size of the current market for all prescription drugs by 2020.

But the latest approach by GSK and Pfizer to combine their HIV operations and set up a new entity is an interesting move. It appears that the new company (GSK will initially hold an 85 per cent equity interest in the new company and Pfizer’s stake will be 15 per cent in the UK firm, though that ratio could change as the portfolio changes) will have products worth £1.6 billion a year on the market, operating profits of £870 million and ‘an industry-leading pipeline’ with a potential 19 per cent market share.

What makes this particularly interesting is that the NewCo will have dominance in the market that should allow it to ‘change the rules of the game’ in line with the key drivers in the environment.

What will drive future success is how companies can add the value, not who can sell most pills. Rather than selling medicines, pharma companies will need to be working in partnership with the payers to help meet their agendas of promoting health, improving quality of life and reducing healthcare costs.

Managing networks of external alliances, negotiating with governments and health insurers, liaising with secondary care specialists and communication with patients will be the key skills required in future, all of which the NewCo should have in spades.

So watch this space!

If cars get MOTs why not people?

For many years it seems as though the NHS has been more of a fire-fighting than a true health care system, struggling to deal with the consequences of ill health rather than preventing problems in the first place. The recent increased focus on preventative medicine may well be too little to late given that, for example, new cases of type II diabetes in the UK increased by an incredible 74 per cent in just six years.

The Government intends to press ahead with the new ‘Health MOTs’ for the over 40s as part of this focus on disease prevention, to better the health of the nation, tackle health inequalities, and help the NHS cope with the increasing demands of an ageing population.

Under the plans, everyone in England will be invited to undergo a free health check aimed at identifying those at risk of developing serious and expensive-to-manage/treat illnesses such as coronary heart disease, stroke, diabetes and kidney disease, as well as better inform people of these conditions. The government claims this will help to save 650 lives and prevent 1,600 heart attacks every year.

The health check will be centred on questions regarding patients’ general health, lifestyles, family medical history, height and weight measurements, cholesterol and where necessary blood glucose tests, and will be followed up with a personal assessment of disease risk and recommendations on how to best reduce it – at an annual cost of around £330 million.

The intention is that the screening programme should be fully implemented by 2012/13, with the health checks ideally available at not only GP surgeries and health centres, but also walk-in centres and pharmacies to ensure ready access.

The potential issue with this is the pressure it could put on an already overstretched general practice. We all now about the ‘worried well’. On the surface it seems that those people who are likely to take advantage of this are not those who would benefit most. Added to which, surely a large part of this high risk group is already being picked up, given that many of the key questions appear to be already asked by GPs.

Right intention but I am not sure it is the right solution? Only time will tell.

You can’t have your cake and drink it

No surprises that people have been blissfully unaware of the calorie content of alcohol. Did you know that a glass of wine has the same calories as a small slice of cake? Me neither – I thought the cake would be far higher! But even more frightening: just eating one chocolate biscuit more than you need a day can lead to a 5kg weight gain in a year.

So folks, you have a choice – that glass of wine or dessert? Up to you; I know which I would prefer; but everything in moderation.

The Author

Dr Paul Stuart-Kregor is a Director at the MSI Consulancy.

Originally published in Pharmafocus, June 2009

The Brand MOT


March 17th, 2009

To have a car on the road once it’s more than 3 years old requires an MOT – an annual test of the cars function and suitability ensuring it meets the safety and environmental standards required.

Within the marketing environment, a Brand MOT provides an opportunity to check the vital components of our brand are in working order and suitable for the channels we use to communicate with payers and physicians.  However, we often overlook the need to check our brand is still fit for purpose annually.

A car can fail the MOT for the simplest of reasons which undermine its ability to do the job safely as can our brand.  Subject your brand to its MOT and you can objectively assess its suitability to the changing healthcare market and competitive challenges.

We must recognise the first signs of our brand not being fit for purpose, however, these signs might not be immediately obvious.  If issues are uncovered early, addressing them will stop them developing into major problems.

Conducting a brand MOT enables you to challenge yourself on the critical questions:

Does my brand still add value to the target customer?
Is that value the value I intended?

Taking an objective look at your brand, and answering these questions honestly, potential weaknesses or problems will become obvious, so you can tackle them before they start damaging your competitive position.

Steering

Any brand MOT must start with a review of your “steering” – the brand vision. Is it still relevant? Does it need to evolve?  Is it going in the right direction?

Strong brands have a clear vision of what they want to be and where they’re going.  Your vision is the internal expression of the qualitative and quantitative brand goals and aspirations.
It’s no good just having an internal focus. In our highly competitive world we must ‘shape’ our markets to maximise brand values.  Our aspirations must be realistic and relevant to our customers and insightful as to what is happening in their world.

The question is not only ‘what do we want to be?’, but more ‘what can we be?’  That means reviewing a number of inputs, including corporate expectations, customer needs, competitor brand visions and the drivers of prescribing choice.

Lights

Do your lights work giving you insight into the customer needs?

Can you see ahead with insight and understand how your brand and the messages trigger and exploit the drivers of prescribing and purchasing?

During your brand MOT, you need to confirm what different behaviours exist or are developing in the market, and what underpins those behaviours (intangibles such as beliefs and attitudes, motivations and constraints).  The MOT will guide the use of creative and robust research techniques to develop a greater understanding and insights into the point-of-view about the world that defines the brand’s opportunity.

Fuel System

Is your brand fuelled by the right ingredients to power it in the minds of your customers?

Too often, we measure the value we are offering in terms of the products functional benefit.  Perceived value for money, functional and emotional benefit all combine to produce the Brand Value Equation (BVE).  The brand MOT needs to ensure that all three are fuelling competitive advantage.

We need to ask, does our BVE allow us to fuel customer behaviour in the way we intend and connect with our customer’s desired value, functional and emotional benefits?

Exhaust System

Do the messages that come out of our brand deliver what we require?

Many activities in the marketing mix are part of the ‘traditional’ approach to communicating the brand values to our customers. Often, insufficient thought is given to whether the activity or its execution adds to the brand value or even undermines it in some way.

Part of the brand MOT must be a review of all communication activities ensuring they all work synergistically to build brand value.

Windscreen

Can your brand see clearly?

It’s not just about making sure your communication reflects your brand positioning and core values; to be really effective it must hit those prescribing triggers and drivers only you can see.  The MOT needs to involve everyone responsible for brand communications to ensure they have the insight into the prescribing drivers and that their activity is directed to satisfy them.

Vehicle Identification Number

Is your brand unique and identifiable?

A brand must appeal to a discrete group of customers.  Different segments will have different needs against which your brand must align.  They will also have different perceptions of your brand.

Your brand must be seen as unique or at least significantly differentiated in the minds of customers.

A strong insight into customer thinking is key to assessing the suitability of the brand and ensuring its benefits and value are meaningful, sustainable, credible, differentiating, and motivating!

Tyres and Wheels

The tyres and wheels are like brand positioning – they drive the brand and keep it on track.

Brand positioning is the marriage between four things: the balance of the target customer’s feelings; the competitive set; the distinctiveness and benefit of the brand; and what you say about it to the target customer.

The MOT should review this against the five crucial tests of meaningfulness, credibility, differentiation, sustainability and motivation.  If it meets these criteria, it will result in the target customer knowing, believing, acting upon and feeling the distinctive benefits of your brand versus the competition.

Vehicle Structure

Is the brand robust?

Every company has limited resources to put into the marketing mix.  A thorough assessment of the brand’s requirements will ensure that these resources are spent effectively.  A brand MOT is about ensuring you get the maximum ROI.

Conducting a brand MOT needs objectivity, time and insight.  But it will always give a return on the investment, because the brand’s structure is an asset that no company can afford to neglect.  Is your MOT overdue?

The Author

Chris Marks is Client Services Director at The MSI Consultancy.

Originally published in Pharmafocus, February 2009

Practical Portfolio Planning


January 27th, 2009

Portfolio planning should be a practical process that delivers a programme of work to take you to sunnier shores. All too often portfolio planning is an elaborate laborious process that is carried out every few years and then slowly forgotten just in time to start afresh a few years later with a different group of managers and no doubt a different consultancy.

Portfolio planning should not be massively time and resource hungry since it is when you have the least of these that you need it most, e.g. when a key product fails for example, and crisis management takes over.

So what is the most appropriate way of practical portfolio planning in a time and resource efficient manner?

Let’s take a brief look at the five key steps:

  1. What’s the challenge ahead
  2. Where do we want to be
  3. What’s stopping us getting there
  4. What’s required
  5. How do we do it

What’s the challenge ahead

We need to focus on where are we now and what do we face in the future? However, we are commonly all too aware of the current situation and the issues we face but that fixation can blind us to what lurks around the corner.

The future factors that require consideration that may come into play fit into 3 areas:

  1. Pre-determined inevitable truths (e.g. loss of patent)
  2. Uncertainties you think might be coming (e.g. pipeline product fails to get authorisation, existing key brand is challenged by NICE, new products cannibalising existing products)
  3. Blind spots you don’t yet know are coming (e.g. the unforeseen depth of the credit crunch)

The Pre-determined and Uncertainties can be built into different possible ‘Futures’ that the company needs to allow for, if it is to a have a future-proofed portfolio strategy. Brainstorming possible futures also allows us to hypothesise possible Blind Spots that might be unlikely but devastating to the current plan. For example, the collapse of the availability of credit and funding in the current climate for biotech’s may yet be felt by an industry that has become dependent on making up for failing pipeline through in-licensing. Yet would we ever have anticipated that situation 2 years ago? Probably not, without a lot of future gazing. How these ‘Futures’ potentially impact on the company can then be understood and the future key success factors for the company identified.

We can then apply this process one level down to assess the therapy areas that are of potential interest/opportunity. The attractiveness of therapy areas can be assessed in light of the threats and opportunities for the each therapy area under the different possible ‘Futures’. The other axis to consider is the companies currently projected capability to compete in each area given the planned products and resources.

Where we want to be

Within this scope of expected future key changes we can then clearly envisage where we want to be in that future – the strategic vision.

The vision needs to give clear guidance to the product portfolio selection process. So to be a top 10 Pharma Company in all major markets is good to have as a vision, but is of limited value to guiding the portfolio planning process. You need to be more specific in the strategic vision, such as what therapy areas you will dominate in or the types of therapeutic you focus on (e.g. biologics, small molecule, genotype specific drugs, orphan drugs, new classes).

What’s stopping us

Question what is it about our currently planned product range (in-license and pipeline) that is insufficient to enable us to achieving these aspirations?

If you plan to dominate certain therapy areas, are your current and future products going to work in harmony together or is their a risk of cannibalisation? Market segmentation is critical to understanding which segment is best served by which of your products so that you can position each of your products to have its own space. The financial returns of a harmonious product portfolio strategy by therapy area can then be forecast through wrapping up the penetration by sized segment.

What’s required

By having a clear understanding of where the company can go in each therapy area we begin to understand what is required to get there. Some products can just be repositioned through marketing perception; others will require further clinical trials or development of health economic evidence to give them the power to cultivate a credible positioning in the target segments evaluated.

Certain segments will be identified as attractive but inaccessible with the current product range. This directs your in-licensing and clinical development teams to the target product profiles that meet the needs of the unserved segments, to allow a more dominant position across the therapy area.

How do we do it

Once confirmed, therapy area strategies can then be translated into effective brand plans that define what we are going to say and do to develop and promote the product. By working this through we can start to involve the wider organisation in investigating the individual elements of the portfolio plan. A detailed due diligence process.

By consolidating the costs of the proposed plans individually by brand plus identifying the company structures and resource required to support them, we can see the financial attractiveness of not just one product relative to another but crucially one therapy area relative to another. By then taking the Net Present Values (NPVs) of each therapy area we are positioned to optimize what time, resource and investment should be committed to each therapy area (given the product arsenal within it), and then how that breaks down by product.

This stepwise process is a practical way to envisage the future whilst keeping an unswerving focus on the customer segments you service, rather than being a servant to the products you find yourself with.

The Author

Alex Blyth is a managing consultant with The MSI Consultancy.

Originally published in Pharmafocus, March 2009

So how will the recession affect the NHS?


January 27th, 2009

During a debate at the NHS Confederation on the effects of recession on the NHS, former health secretaries Patricia Hewitt and Stephen Dorrell painted very different scenarios of the likely effects of the credit crunch. No surprise there I hear you say!

Hewitt pointed out that the NHS will still enjoy two more years of 5 per cent guaranteed growth, following a trend of about 8 per cent real-term growth year-on-year for the past eight financial years. She then warned that beyond that point, the NHS will have to cope with much lower growth than it has been used to.

However, she argued that a number of the NHS reforms have left the service in a better position to manage this change – from the national tariff to payment by results and patient choice.

Former Conservative Health Secretary Stephen Dorrell said he was more pessimistic about what he described as the “cash stress” facing the NHS. He felt that the severe economic downturn could lead to growing demands as long-term poverty, stress and depression took their toll on the population.

He warned NHS managers that as the largest public service it could be asked to shoulder a significant share of the £5bn of efficiency savings contained in the pre budget spending report as a counter balance to tax cuts.

Senior health service figures warned that he NHS is facing its biggest financial challenge for more than a decade. They said the current surplus in England will only act as a temporary cushion as public spending is reduced to cope with the economic down turn, with spending on the health service likely to stall after two years

So there is no doubt that the NHS recognises these are challenging times, but it intends to continue to deliver improvements in care for patients.

David Nicholson, in his introduction to the 2009/10 NHS Operating Framework, makes the point that the NHS needs to invest the 5.5 per cent growth over the next two years in the most appropriate and sustainable way in order to improve services for patients over the next five years. He also points out that the NHS needs to be really clear that it is perfectly possible to improve quality and reduce costs at the same time.

What remains to be seen is if they can actually deliver that intent of better quality for less money. Planning in my mind was always a trade-off between quality, time and money; increasing quality requiring more time and or more money; which suggests, as many people have said before, that there are still huge inefficiencies within the NHS.

The recession many not really hit the NHS in terms of total cash but it may well come under more pressure, both internally and externally in 2009.

The final ‘state of healthcare’ report
Just to show how much has been done in recent years, The Healthcare Commission’s final ‘State Of Healthcare 2008’ report to Parliament noted significant improvements by the NHS, including dramatically improved access to services by driving down waiting times.

A significant increase in demand is demonstrated by an increase in the number of annual consultations in the health service from 219 million in 1998 to 300 million in 2007/8, and attendances at A&E have risen from 14 million to 19 million since 2002/03. To cope with and facilitate this increase the NHS now employs 26 per cent more staff than in 1997-98 and there are 65.7 GPs per 100,000 population (up from 57.6 ten years ago)

The Commission’s report calls for further efforts to enhance the quality of care and make services more patient-centred. The Commission said that the NHS must focus on enhancing the quality of care by doing more to measure outcomes for patients, the experience of patients, and the journey people make through the system of care.

What remains to be seen is if the NHS can maintain this level of service when, as David Nicholson acknowledges, “This is an extraordinarily challenging environment for the NHS”.

We may currently have a financial surplus in the NHS, but there is no doubt that the environment for suppliers to the NHS is only going to get tougher.

On a lighter note – work gyms ‘lift mood and stress’

A recent study has shown that employees who can exercise at work are more productive, happy, efficient and calm. Bristol University ran an experiment with two hundred people to test the impact of workplace keep fit facilities like gyms or classes.

For those who do regular exercise it will come as no great surprise that it re-energises staff, improves their concentration and problem-solving, and makes them feel calmer.

Experts said the findings should encourage more businesses to provide facilities for staff to exercise.

However, the study did find that employees struggled to fit exercise around their work and felt guilty about being away from their desks. They also felt they might be criticised by colleagues for taking time out from their desk jobs.

The lead author suggested, “The study also begs the question whether employers can afford not to be encouraging active breaks.”

Great idea, but how many of you have the time to take a break during the working day? It seems that everyone is getting busier and busier, so taking 60 minutes out for exercise is going to be a challenge in time management and productivity. Sounds like the NHS all over again!

Author: Paul Stuart-Kregor is a Director of The MSI Consultancy Ltd
Originally published in PMEurope January 2009

What’s your Career Plan?


January 23rd, 2009

You probably know the type: successful people who apparently ease through their careers, seemingly running on invisible, smooth rails towards advancement and success. Leading a charmed life, they always seem to be in the right place at the right time, they always seem to be in complete control of their own destiny, and they always seem to be doing better than you are.

Are they just lucky? Or well-connected? Or perhaps it’s ‘old school tie’. It’s tempting to explain away the fact that others seem to be having a more successful career than you in these terms, because it passes on the responsibility for your less than satisfactory career path onto factors you cannot influence. But the fact is – and you know this really – that to a great extent your destiny is in your own hands. Whilst you can’t totally control your career, you can do lots to ensure that you maximise the chances of success, whatever life throws at you.

It’s strange that whilst we plan for most of the important things in our life – climbing the property ladder, pensions, family and so on – so many of us rely on what seems like chance to see us through the thing which will pre-occupy most of us for a good 40 years: our career.

Now it’s true that many careers are often established by chance. I know of one PR man – now running his own successful agency – who fell into that particular career path because he agreed, on a drunken night in a student bar, to be the press agent for a gerbil with political aspirations (it’s a long story). Serendipity is a wonderful thing, and there will always be an element of it in anyone’s career. But trusting entirely to chance is a mistake. The worst thing is to drift from job to job, with no clear idea of what you want to achieve.

The answer is to have a clear career plan, and nowhere is that more important than in the fast-changing world of pharma. It’s surprising how few people in our industry have one – and that is why the favoured few seem to do so well. If you want to join them, you must start planning for success.

The first thing to think about is what success looks like for you. The answer to this question will be different for every individual, so only you can answer this. What factors are important for you: money; status; job satisfaction; power; work/life balance – you will be able to add in others. After all success is a very personal internal thing. A colleague asked me the other day if I was happy with what I had achieved. I found it really hard to answer the question as I had never thought about it that way.

If you’re feeling particularly negative, you can approach things from the other direction: what makes your career less successful than you want it to be: getting stuck in a rut or a ‘dead-end’ job; constantly being at the mercy of more successful colleagues; no job satisfaction; watching bitterly as peers get better jobs, and so on. Sometimes we have to realise what we don’t want before we can focus on what we do.

Future Proof Yourself

It’s a common mistake to think that a career plan can give you control over your own destiny. The reality is that no-one is in total control of their destiny; outside influences have a nasty habit of intervening (as many city bankers are finding out to their cost). So to my mind a career plan is more about future-proofing yourself, in other words ensuring you are a good ‘catch’ for a company, should you be – or choose to be – on the ‘outside’ of a corporate downsizing or a merger/takeover.

On the biggest scale, that is about being able to demonstrate that you have added value to the organisations you have worked for. That means planning to gain the relevant experience, whether in terms of brands, therapy areas or functional expertise. You need to have achieved demonstrable success, a good track record of performance.

Of course, planning for your career will ideally commence before you start it, so that you can lay down the ‘foundations’ for that career in terms of qualifications. The extent to which this is necessary varies by market: in eastern Europe a medical or pharmacy degree is vital, whereas in the UK it’s generally about being a graduate ‘plus’.

Even if you didn’t start planning at university stage, there are still several ‘foundations’ you need to lay as your career progresses, which have little to do with qualifications. Once you are a few years into your career, things like intelligence, action orientation, the ability to work within large organisations with matrix management, managing upwards and working the corporate environment all count, as much if not more so than your degree. Your initial qualification might get you onto your career ladder in the first place. It is these more corporate skills which will propel you up it.

And let’s not forget the huge importance of building good networks as you build your career – this should be a central plank of your career plan.

If you can’t entirely control your destiny, it is certainly easy enough to lose control of it completely. The people who have done this always seem to be in the wrong place at the wrong time: working for the wrong companies, or on insignificant brands, or not getting enough experience while working on a brand, perhaps becoming a specialist in only one element of the marketing mix too soon (partly because they haven’t planned to gain the broad range of experience first).

Planning For Success

Now a reasonable question at this stage might be: my career is going to be 40 years or so; how can I possibly plan to such a timescale? It’s a fair point. Would someone setting out on their career in pharma in 1968 have been able to foresee the many changes in the industry during the subsequent years? Of course not.

But a career plan is not about mapping every detail of your career. Rather, it’s about knowing what you really want. So your plan should be structured enough to know what you are looking for, and with a view to the different pieces of the career puzzle that you need to accumulate. In my view, that means it’s about planning as far ahead as the next job and the one after that, but with a view to building a broad and attractive CV for the future. I should point out that when I say the next job that might be a different role within the same organisation – I’m not saying you have to up sticks every 18 months to build a career.

The key is knowing what your goals are, and only you can set these – there is no off-the-shelf, one-size-fits-all career plan (and beware of careers consultants who tell you there is). Think of your career plan as a map to help you get to where you need to go. There’s no point having a map unless you have decided on a destination. You’ll simply drift around aimlessly, although at least with a map you won’t be lost. You just won’t be moving forward.

Given that you can’t possibly know what the future is going to throw at you, I would steer clear of having one, big goal for your career. Far better to set yourself a series of smaller goals. The vital thing is to review those goals – and your progress towards them – regularly. In the early stages of your career this will need to be very regular (once a year or even more frequently), whereas you might feel more confident that your goals are going to remain more stable later in your career.

Of course, there’s no point having a plan if you don’t then implement it. So your career plan should include some specific actions. It’s likely that these will be varied, but may well include some of the following: gaining more qualifications (does an MBA fit in there somewhere perhaps?); building up your network of contacts both in the industry and outside; gaining a wider range of experience, perhaps through spending some time outside the industry in consultancy.

Turbo-Charge Your CV

A good career plan will help you turbo-charge your range of experience, provided it is clear, focussed and realistic. Whilst you will never be in total control of your career, because of external factors, market changes and the fact that other human beings will have an influence on it, a career plan can help you take back control over your own destiny, and help you ensure that you end up in the job you have always dreamt of, giving you the satisfaction, money, status or any other measure of success you choose.

It’s never too late to start. It doesn’t matter if you are just entering the industry, or if you’re a grizzled ‘old-timer’ with 25 years under your belt, the message is clear: if you want to run your career, and not let it run you, then you need to take hold of it and plan it. What are you waiting for?

How well-planned is your career?

What will you be doing just before you retire?
a. I’m going to be Chief Executive/Marketing Director/Sales Director/Medical Director (delete as appropriate)
b. I’m going to be in a role which makes the most of my skills and which I really enjoy
c. I’ll wait and see what happens

How did you get into your current role?
a. I applied for it – I apply for every promotion going
b. I applied for it, because I saw it would give me a valuable experience and let me learn new skills
c. I fell into it

How is your career progressing compared to the cohort you entered the industry with?
a. Most of them report to me
b. I seem to be happier and more successful than average; but I still keep in touch with them
c. I haven’t seen most of them since I was overlooked for promotion for the third time

Do you enjoy your job?
a. I enjoy being at the top– that’s all that counts, isn’t it?
b. Yes, it’s really satisfying, and a good part of my life
c. It pays the bills, but I live for weekends and holidays

How much do you earn?
a. Loads – that’s how I measure my success
b. I’m happy with what I earn, but I aspire to earn more
c. Nowhere near enough – I seem to be paid less than everybody else

Your answers
Mostly (a): You are perhaps confusing status with career success. There are many more measures – you need to be planning for a more fulfilling career (although there is nothing wrong with ambition).
Mostly (b): You seem to have your career well-planned – congratulations. Are you reviewing your plan on a regular basis, and updating it as your circumstances change?
Mostly (c): You are drifting into terminal career unhappiness – you need a plan.

Creating a Successful Career Plan

1. Keep doing it
Career planning is not something you do once at the start of your career. It needs to be done on a regular basis, and this requires some discipline. Set aside some dedicated time to thinking about your career plan on a regular basis – perhaps twice a year. This is best done out of the office, so perhaps it’s a day on the weekend when you can shut out the day-to-day and concentrate on thinking about your future.

2. Monitor your progress
How have you performed against your career plan since you last reviewed it? Part of any strategic planning progress should be evaluating how well you are doing against plan, and the same goes fro your career plan.

3. Think about your personal aspirations
You will be much more successful – and much happier – if your career path mirrors your own personal likes and dislikes. The best way to see if your career is in tune with these is to list them. Write down the things you like doing and the things you hate doing. Then map your career path alongside these – if it falls mainly into your ‘dislikes’ category, you need to re-evaluate your career plan. Conversely, if it matches your ‘likes’, then your plan is probably on the right track.

4 Keep your CV up to date
Not for the reason you might think. A CV is useful all the time, not just when you are looking for a new job. Keeping the record of your achievements and accomplishments up to date means that when you come to build and/or review your career plan, some half-forgotten success may spur you into thinking about a new career direction, or help you realise where your strengths are.

5. Set clear and SMART goals
If your career plan is your route map to success, then setting clear goals establishes a destination for your career journey. Given that this journey is likely to last 40 years, it’s a good idea to have interim stop-off points, just as you would on a long journey. Your goals need to be realistic, yet stretching. Bear in mind that you will probably end up tweaking (or even drastically changing) these goals as your career progresses, and as you develop as a person.

6. Grab every development opportunity
Even if training you are offered doesn’t seem relevant now, always grab the opportunity – you just don’t know what skills and what knowledge will be important in the future. And you also need to be proactive in finding new training and development opportunities, and taking advantage of them, even if you have to do so off your own back. Remember that development opportunities can mean much more than traditional, structured training.

7. Believe in yourself
You couldn’t market a product that you didn’t believe in, and essentially your career plan is a marketing plan for yourself. If you have done it correctly, your plan will reflect your strengths and those things which motivate you – and that puts you in a good position to be able to see it through.

8. Be really good at what you do
After all, the cream always rises to the top!

The Author

Dr Paul Stuart-Kregor is Director of The MSI Consultancy.

Originally published in Pharmafocus in May 2009

Marketing Training


January 23rd, 2009

Pharma marketing training is too often driven by a woolly agenda rather than by genuine business need, argues Gerard Doherty.  It’s time to apply the same rigorous return on investment treatment to training that we do to our marketing plans, he argues.

As Team GB came home from Beijing, laden with a record haul of medals, it won’t have escaped anyone’s notice just how we managed to punch above our weight in the sporting arena for the first time in ages – a massive investment in training facilities and expertise giving our boys and girls the winning edge. Read the rest of this entry

Informed and Involved


January 23rd, 2009

Patient involvement in decision-making is widely regarded as an important feature of good-quality healthcare. Policy-makers have been particularly concerned to ensure that patients are informed about and enabled to choose between relevant treatment options, but what is not clear is how patients understand and actually value involvement.

There is not doubt that there is wide variation from West to East. In the UK the patient is being placed firmly at the centre of policy making, as can be seen from the initiatives that have been launched to date e.g. “Our health, our care, our say: a new direction for community services ”. Recently proposals have also been made for individual budgets for patients with long-term chronic conditions, such as mental illness and diabetes. This would give patients greater choice of treatment and allow them to develop their own package of care, mixing clinical and alternative therapies to meet their individual needs. Evidence from the US has shown that this can improve satisfaction, reduce the use of acute services and improve value for money. There is a clear view in the US that the person who has the most at stake when it comes to healthcare decisions i.e. the patient – should be involved in research, advocacy and all segments of the health care system.

However, that is easier said than done as demonstrated by The Picker Institute’s analysis of trends from national patient surveys in England between 2002 and 2007. It revealed that there has been almost no improvement to patient engagement in those five years, despite it being the supposed goal of increased NHS funding and policy reform over that period. Specifically, they found that Information needs are not always met; information about patients isn’t shared with them; many patients want more involvement in decisions but find that shared decision-making isn’t widely practised; patients don’t receive enough help with self-care and finally, patients aren’t actively encouraged to give their views.

A recent 2007 study in 11 European countries in patients over 70 showed that they do want to be involved in their care but their definition of involvement is more focused on the ‘caring relationship’, ‘person-centred approach’ and ‘receiving information’ than on ‘active participation in decision making’. What is apparent is that the desire for involvement in decision making is highly heterogeneous so an individual approach for each patient in the ageing population is needed in order to address the specific needs and requirements of patients.

This study built on findings from an earlier 2004 study of GPs in the same countries. Most GPs thought that involving older patients had positive outcomes. GPs saw patient involvement as a process taking place solely during consultations. The main barrier for GPs was lack of consultation time. Barriers related to older patients were their feelings of respect for doctors (and so an unwillingness to question them), their lack of experience in being involved and possible mental and physical impairments. To conclude, increasing involvement of older patients is not easy and will only be effective when GPs have adopted a more developed concept of patient involvement and are supported with the different methods for achieving this.

In contrast, the situation further east is less well developed. Take Lithuania for example. In a 2004 study the majority of polled women and men (84.6% and 72.6%) recognized health as a very important value in their life and as the most important among other social values. The overall mean of trust in health care system was 41.3%, trust in physicians was 69.9%, implementation of right to health care was 48.9%, concern about health care was 96.5% but patient impact in health care decisions was only 19.1%. Nearly half of respondents (47.4%) preferred the informative general practitioner-patient interaction model, which was realised in most cases (58.8%). Partnership (shared decision-making) as an interaction model was expected by 37.2% of respondents but only realised in every sixth case in primary care.

Younger and more educated Lithuanians trusted less in the health care system, but were more motivated to play an active role in health care decision-making. The informative model of doctor-patient was dominant, while ‘partnership’ was expected by patients but not frequently practised.

Other studies have shown that patients’ expectations of involvement in decisions about their care differed significantly between West and East, with people in Spain and Poland exhibiting a much greater preference for a paternalistic style than those in Switzerland and Germany, while those in Sweden, Slovenia, Italy and the UK occupied the middle ground. Nevertheless, dissatisfaction with the perceived opportunities for involvement in treatment decisions was also highest in Spain and Poland, suggesting that significant numbers of people in these countries are frustrated with the paternalistic approach, notwithstanding the prevailing culture.

Current models and measures of patient involvement in treatment decision-making tend to focus on communication within consultations and/or on the patient’s use of information to consider the selection of one treatment option from a well-defined set. These narrowly focused models and measures may obscure the relevance of patient involvement in decision-making for some health care contexts and limit investigations of the relationships between patient involvement in decision-making and health care outcomes.

However, patients can be involved not only because of what they say and do to influence a decision, but also by virtue of what they think and feel about their roles, efforts and contributions to decision-making and their relationships with their clinicians, encompassing the full range of activities associated with decision-making.

A recent study among patients with diabetes showed they associated involvement in decision-making with a number of features relating to the ethos and feel of healthcare encounters (welcoming; respectful; facilitative of patients’ contributions; and non-judgemental); communication about health problems (practitioners attending to patients’ views and patients feeling listened to; practitioners giving clear explanations based on their professional knowledge and patients understanding these); and communication about treatments (practitioners explaining treatment rationales in ways that patients understand and enabling patients to feel they have a say).

In practice this means that clinicians who aspire to facilitate patient involvement in decision-making need to look beyond the way they discuss health care options with patients. They should also consider how they might enable patients to engage in the full range of decision-making activities and to develop a positive sense of involvement in these activities and with their clinicians. They need to consider the way they discuss problems in consultations as well as to the provision of information about treatment options and the scope patients have to influence decisions.

To achieve patient-centred healthcare the International Alliance of Patients’ Organizations (IAPO) believes that healthcare must be based on the following Five Principles:

1. Respect – Patients and carers have a fundamental right to patient-centred healthcare that respects their unique needs, preferences and values, as well as their autonomy and independence.

2. Choice and empowerment – Patients have a right and responsibility to participate, to their level of ability and preference, as a partner in making healthcare decisions that affect their lives. This requires a responsive health service which provides suitable choices in treatment and management options that fit in with patients’ needs, and encouragement and support for patients and carers that direct and manage care to achieve the best possible quality of life. Patients’ organizations must be empowered to play meaningful leadership roles in supporting patients and their families to exercise their right to make informed healthcare choices.

3. Patient involvement in health policy – Patients and patients’ organizations deserve to share the responsibility of healthcare policy-making through meaningful and supported engagement in all levels and at all points of decision-making, to ensure that they are designed with the patient at the centre. This should not be restricted to healthcare policy but include, for example, social policy that will ultimately impact on patients’ lives. See IAPO’s Policy Statement at: www.patientsorganizations.org/involvement.

4. Access and support – Patients must have access to the healthcare services warranted by their condition. This includes access to safe, quality and appropriate services, treatments, preventive care and health promotion activities. Provision should be made to ensure that all patients can access necessary services, regardless of their condition or socio-economic status. For patients to achieve the best possible quality of life, healthcare must support patients’ emotional requirements, and consider non-health factors such as education, employment and family issues which impact on their approach to healthcare choices and management.

5. Information – Accurate, relevant and comprehensive information is essential to enable patients and carers to make informed decisions about healthcare treatment and living with their condition. Information must be presented in an appropriate format according to health literacy principles considering the individual’s condition, language, age, understanding, abilities and culture.

However, many of the healthcare delivery systems in Europe are struggling with all of this due to the fragmented and individual nature of healthcare. Responsiveness to patients is now seen as a key characteristic of effective health systems but unfortunately, in many countries there is a long way to go.

The Author

Paul Stuart Kregor
is a Director at The MSI Consultancy.

Originally published in

Everyone’s Going Specialist


November 4th, 2008

From the middle of the last century, the likes of GSK, Pfizer, AstraZeneca, BMS and others have made billions from a business based on the development and commercialisation of medicines for conditions such as high cholesterol, asthma and depression with populations numbering millions.

As Andrew Whitty highlighted when taking on his role as CEO at GSK “It is clear that our industry is facing a rapidly changing environment. Demand for innovative medicines and healthcare products continue to grow, however we are also presented with increasing challenges, such as cost containment, regulatory pressures and generic competition.”

However as James Cornelius CEO of BMS puts it, companies still have: “to increase revenue, expand profit margins and improve cash flows so we can boost shareholder value while also delivering a steady stream of innovative medicines to patients fighting serious diseases and do all this by being both competitive and compliant.

It appears that the industry is employing three strategies to counter these pressures and to ensure the future success of Big Pharma, with less reliance on the blockbuster model.

As ever, there is a focus on expansion into new markets, with particular excitement about the prospects of the hyper-growth BRIC countries. In 2006 the emerging markets such as China, Russia, South Korea and Mexico grew by 81% compared to 5.7% for the US and the other nine biggest markets. Interestingly, Whitty recently announced the development of a new division within GSK solely responsible for sales to these emerging markets.

As well as expanding globally, Big Pharma has been snapping up vaccines, generics and OTC companies in a rush to broaden their revenue base. sanofi-aventis has offered over $3 billion for a Czech generics house, a British vaccines manufacturer and an Australian vitamins business whilst Daiitchi-Sankyo has purchased the Indian generics manufacturer Ranbaxy. Novartis invested early in this strategy and in their 2008 half yearly results reported that their generics (Sandoz), vaccines and diagnostics and consumer health divisions all grew faster than pharmaceuticals.

Finally, organisations are increasingly going specialist. But going specialist can be done in a number of different ways. Hyper growth speciality Pharma companies are successfully focusing on niche products and specialist infrastructure, whilst Big Pharma is more interested in orphan drugs for rare diseases with some organisations reorienting themselves into BioPharmas, a nebulous name suggesting a cross between the innovation and large molecule therapies of Biotech and the size and both commercial and developmental expertise of Pharmaceuticals.

For example, in 2005 BMS was considered one of the top 5 global pharmaceutical firms with over 70% of total 2005 revenues coming from their highly successful cardiovascular portfolio. With the loss of patents on leading therapies Pravachol and Plavix, 2005 cardiovascular revenues of $7 billion declined to $5.5billion in a year, with sales of Pravachol declining at over 50% and Plavix by 15%.

Forced to reconsider their rapidly declining business model, BMS has undergone a significant strategic restructuring reorienting “from a Big Pharma company, into a next generation BioPharma company”. Cornelius commented ‘While businesses are always in a state of flux, it’s not common for a company to launch a top-to-bottom transformation of its organization and operational philosophy.’   The aim of this restructuring was “to combine the strengths of a traditional pharmaceutical company such as its global reach and its integrated commercial and manufacturing infrastructure, with the advantages of agility, entrepreneurial thinking and flexibility that are characteristic of many successful biotechnology companies” reflected in BMS’s pipeline which currently boasts twice as many oncology candidates than any other therapy area.

But why are organisations going specialist?

Speciality Pharma

One business model which has seen extensive growth over the past 5 years is speciality Pharma. Companies such as Meda, Shire, ProStrakan, Almirall and Archimedes focus on therapies for niche conditions in promising late-stage development, which are below the radar of Big Pharma and are promoted only to specialist clinicians. This model reduces both the development costs and risks to the firm, and with a smaller dedicated specialist sales team means lower organisational costs; driving profit and cash flow. The positive cash flow allows rapid expansion; Meda a Swedish speciality Pharma company has seen hyper expansion over the past 6 years growing annual sales of $30m in 2001 into an incredible $1,252m in 2007 a growth of 85% year on year. However the challenge is purchasing a competitive, innovative and successful portfolio in the face of Big Pharma. Share prices fall quickly and new venture capital is hard to raise for organisations that expand too quickly, because portfolios become unfocused and inefficient to manage.

Rare Diseases and Orphan Drugs

There is evidence that large Pharma companies see their future to a greater or lesser extent in specialist pharmaceuticals, rare disease areas, biological products and therapies with orphan indications. Over the last 3 years AZ has spent $18 billion on acquiring Cambridge Antibody Technology and Medimmune, Shire spent almost $2 billion on Transkaryotic Therapies and Jerini while Roche is currently negotiating an offer for Genentech for an enormous $44 billion. Just this August, BMS offered $4.5 billion for Imclone and Eli Lilly bought an Oncology biotech specialist SGX Pharmaceuticals Inc. Why? Global sales of biotech prescription drugs increased 12.5% to more than $75 billion in 2007, growing at nearly twice the rate of the pharmaceutical market and a look at the top 20 therapies worldwide over the last 5 years highlights the increasing importance of biologic therapies with names such as Enbrel, Remicade, Rituxan, Aranesp, and Avastin appearing.

And organisations are not just buying their way into specialist pharmaceuticals; Oncology is currently the darling of the industry development pipeline, with companies such as Genentech, Roche, BMS, Eisai, Novartis, Takeda, Merck KGaA, Genzyme and GSK focusing on this therapeutic area for their future. The success of therapies such as Rituxan, Avastin, Glivec, Erbitux and Herceptin has highlighted that by concentrating on orphan diseases and novel lifecycle management strategies, organisations can create super blockbuster brands, in a potentially less challenging and more lucrative market environment.

The Benefits of Orphan Drugs

“Orphan drugs” are developed to treat rare diseases, defined as diseases where less than 1 in 2000 patients are affected (in the US it is any disease which affects less than 200,000 people in total). In most cases no effective therapies have been developed for these diseases, as under normal market conditions there would be little interest for companies to develop and market products; as it would be unlikely that the cost of bringing a medicine to market would ever be recovered.

Governments have therefore created economic incentives to encourage companies to focus on these areas, initially in the US in 1983, reaching Europe in 1999.

Although numbers for an individual rare disease are small, there are between 6000 and 8000 rare diseases with an estimated total population in Europe of 30 million people. The paradox being that even though the diseases are rare, it is not unusual to have a rare disease!

Usually, orphan drugs are not expected to create high revenues, however in 2006 50 orphan drugs broke that rule with annual revenues exceeding $200 million and out of these, 19 attained the $1 billion blockbuster mark, mostly because of their ability to treat several rare diseases. For example, Glivec, currently licensed for two orphan cancers, is effective in at least four other rare diseases and in 2007 delivered $3 billion becoming Novartis’s second largest brand.

Organisations are also using orphan indications as a gateway into larger markets; Remicade was initially launched for the orphan indication of Crohn’s disease before receiving approval for the much larger rheumatoid arthritis market, and as an end of lifecycle “evergreening” defence mechanism; Topamax, initially indicated for epilepsy, extended patent protection through the additional orphan indication for Lennox-Gastaut syndrome a severe form of epilepsy.

The main incentive of orphan drug legislation is market exclusivity, after the granting of marketing authorisation, for a period of 10 years (7 years in the US). By preventing direct competition, an organisation gains substantial protection during the critical brand launch phase, something not seen in mainstream pharmaceuticals. Organisations also get reduced fees for the market authorisation process, and support in designing trials to be submitted for authorisation.

As well as direct incentives, Orphan designation offers other benefits:

Costs to market are lower and timelines shorter

Clinical development programmes cost less, as they are usually in smaller numbers of patients (patients are rare and difficult to find) and have shorter timelines. There is also evidence that the regulatory authorities approve orphan drugs faster, which allows organisations to recoup their smaller investment costs and attain break even much earlier. In addition, as the audience is much smaller, the infrastructure required to market an orphan therapy is simpler, with the resulting smaller cost base; TKT-Europe commercialised Replagal for Fabry’s disease with 20 employees!

Stronger relationships

At launch, the small population of both patients and expert specialists often have similar needs to the drug companies. Almost certainly the key opinion leader (KOL) network will have had very little support for developing their services, and the need to drive disease awareness, formalise a clinical management network and ensure access to both a disease network and therapies, builds strong relationships. Orphan drug teams often find themselves much closer to their prescribers and end users and during the initial growth phase successful marketing can build strong brand loyalty quickly, creating higher barriers for any future competitors.

Orphan therapy has a faster time to peak sales

Although diagnosis of rare diseases can be difficult, many patients will already be diagnosed, motivated and informed through active patient organisations and so are actively awaiting new treatments. Disease specialists are also likely to be aware of new therapies, having been involved in the phase III trials and the limited competition is likely to require complex and expensive management. Because of this, uptake is usually swift, and the high unit prices which companies can command and the likely high market shares of a monopoly, mean organisations can aspire to generating peak sales faster.

Despite lower clinical and infrastructure costs, the ability to build strong brands quickly on close relationships and shorter time to peak sales, there remain significant challenges for marketers to overcome.

The Challenges

Single orphan markets are small, so to overcome this and become blockbusters orphan therapies have to expand into a variety of different indications. With shorter timelines, managing successful lifecycle is unusually urgent. Developing a ‘Brand Vision’ early in the life of the product is essential to guide the best lifecycle strategy, which can then be valued and tested, before finalising programmes.

Orphan therapies often have a clear clinical advantage; however exclusivity from competition is a misnomer. Many clinicians have difficult to change beliefs about the management of rare diseases with personal preferences for older, unproven but very cheap therapies or complex surgical interventions, and can be reluctant to try new therapies in sick patients. In addition, the clinical data with which a marketer is working can be small and the endpoints complex and non-comparable. Communicating both disease and brand benefits, with unusual clinical data, to an audience with deeply fixed beliefs requires creativity and a deep understanding of the needs of all stakeholders. Mapping all stakeholders involved, researching their real needs and developing a clear brand proposition is essential. In the UK this needs to be developed long before marketing authorisation, to ensure specialist commissioning teams don’t position your brand for you!

Understanding an orphan disease environment is a skill in itself and must be considered when developing teams. Success of a new therapy will rely heavily on orphan expertise in both development and commercialisation. The regulatory process is a significant challenge as trials may never have been run in the disease area before, and patients are hard to find. Following marketing approval, knowing how to develop a rare disease management network and who to work with to access funding are necessary for success. When assessing an orphan market, drawing on knowledge of rare disease management in different countries will guide recruitment of people with the correct balance of skills.

With high unit costs and a lack of understanding of the disease, the biggest challenge to launching an orphan therapy will be ensuring smooth access to therapy for patients. By developing processes and relationships with key funding stakeholders early, directly and through KOL and patient advocates, teams can keep fund holders happy supporting managed entry.

Conclusion

With the growing importance of specialist drugs, organisations should recognise that different marketing skills are needed to maximise the success of specialist brands. Orphan indications offer many benefits, although marketers face significant challenges.

Much as the tools that marketers need to support both clinicians and patients are recognisable to any pharmaceutical marketer, in an orphan disease, the balance of where and how to use them is very different. An emphasis on the development of both a formalised clinical management network and funding process requires insightful use of the small pool of advocacy, creative value added services and early development of a clear value proposition.

The Author

Michael Craig is a Consultant with The MSI Consultancy.

Article originally published in Pharmafocus, October 2008

Building an ROI Marketing Culture In Pharma


October 21st, 2008

Much ink has been spilt about the importance of measuring return on investment on marketing activity in the pharma industry – and yet, as Alex Blyth argues, the concept is not yet fully ingrained as part of the culture.

If I was to tell you that I could offer you a proven set of tools and techniques which you could use to undertake an assessment of your brand’s marketing plan, and optimise it with the result that sales increased by anything up to 50 per cent, within the same budget, what would your reaction be? Perhaps you might be cynical at first. But if I could prove that it works, not in theory, but by demonstrating successful case studies, then what would your reaction be?

Given how much marketing ROI has been spoken about over the past few years, I would expect you to be beating a path to my door. And to be fair, increasingly that is happening (because, yes I have those tools and techniques). But there is something which holds many pharma companies back from embracing such an obvious benefit – and I think I know what it is.

It’s a cultural issue – and it needs to change, if as an industry we are going to seize the opportunities which evolving markets are presenting us, and if we are to remain competitive in a marketplace where there are no longer any easy pickings.

The problem as I see it is that in major pharmaceutical corporations, the culture which predominates is that of making decisions based on what I would term Career Returns on Effort, rather than Corporate Return on Investment. If these two concepts were aligned, and had similar outcomes, then that would be fine – but they are not. In fact, in the current climate where ‘keeping up appearances’ can be more important than necessarily delivering better results, then I would argue that the two concepts are clearly opposed.

Let’s be honest: undertaking an analysis of your marketing plan to date may just show that you have not been making the budget you have been allocated work as hard as it could have for the brand. Now from a company point of view, that’s a really useful piece of analysis, because it is the start-point for driving a better return for the investment in time, resources, people, effort and money which is poured into marketing.

Unfortunately too many marketers view this as exposing themselves to criticism, and would rather just keep making the same resource allocations: no questions asked, the appearance of doing the right things maintained! Why? Because nobody is counting!

If we accept this picture, it’s clearly a flawed culture. The big question is: how do we change it?

The Reality Chasm

The big challenge in pharma marketing is that we don’t have a ‘tracking returns’ culture. Most brand teams do not reliably track the real impact on sales of past campaigns, for the simple reason that no-one in a senior position is insisting they do. Consequently, we create a culture where it is acceptable to not worry about the robustness of newly-proposed marketing campaigns – because nobody is going to check those either.

There is a huge gap between talk and action here. CEOs talk to shareholders about continuing to drive shareholder value in tough times, and yet on the ground, with brand managers it can be a story of spending what you feel makes sense – and you’ll only face awkward questions if sales go south, or you go over budget.

The result is a huge reality chasm between the company image and the internal reality. As a consultant looking in from the outside, you see this far too often.

If I was a shareholder I’d be outraged at this. Is this really a culture that delivers shareholder value? I suspect that if shareholders were asked if pharma marketers should be doing an ROI analysis on their marketing plans as standard practice they would do two things: gawp in disbelief that it isn’t already, and then bark the order to ‘Do it!’

Sometimes I dream about what would happen if Amstrad boss and The Apprentice supremo Sir Alan Sugar – famous for his loathing of ‘corporate types’ – were running a pharma company, and became aware that the returns on spending were not being tracked. Only one phrase would be reverberating off the expensive glass atrium walls: “You’re Fired!” Perhaps not touchy-feely, modern management, but just the kind of kick up the backside that can stimulate cultural change when it’s needed most.

There is what economists sometimes call a Principal-Agent information gap in pharma, that urgently needs resolving. Shareholders (the principal) do not ask about how decisions are made, and the company management (the agent) glosses over the disturbing reality that decisions in marketing are rarely based on delivering value – but rather on gut feel and what is perceived to be good for careers.

I use the word ‘perceived’, because in the long-run with this kind of decision-making we all lose. The days of plenty are long gone, and even if there once was a so-called Golden Age when we could afford to be sloppy with how we spent our resources, that is no longer the case, nor should it ever have been. Not only do poor decisions fail to maximise company value for shareholders, they also stifle employment, salaries and investment in R&D, arguably the lifeblood of our future.

You see the thing is, we are all in this together. What is good for shareholders is also good for employees, at least in everything other than the very short run. If you want a successful and long-lived career in pharma you have to accept that point. It’s time to stop being defensive and viewing ROI assessment and maximise techniques as something to be feared. They are good news, and in the present climate the only way that pharma marketers can guarantee a future for themselves. It’s time to change.

Striving For Constant Improvement

So what can be done? How can we create a culture of challenge and constant improvement? What changes have to happen in the mindsets of both marketers and senior managers if we are to bring about this win-win situation where properly assessed marketing plans lead to added shareholder value and brighter futures for marketers?

As with any cultural change, it has to start with an adjustment of mentality. Even if you have the most suitable marketing plan now, there has to be an acceptance that nothing is optimal for ever. Therefore it stands to reason that if a brand manager has not recently changed what they do and where they are spending their resources, it is not because they are good at what they do – it’s because they are oblivious to potential improvements.

Planning should improve the closer you get to the event. So if you cannot update your long-term strategy with annual (or more frequent) refinements to your tactics, you might as well live 10,000 feet up on a cloud.

There needs to be a recognition as well that a combination of competitor response and customer fatigue mean that you simply cannot keep doing and saying the same thing and expect the same results. Sooner or later it will stop working, or at least work less well. And certainly not work as well as it could.

It is vital that management instil the thinking that changing plans is not about admitting error, but striving for constant improvement, something which should be commended, not condemned. They need to recognise that a static plan lives in a drawer devoid of learning, by promoting those who show real added value by doing things differently, rather than those who just carry on with what the previous brand managers put in place, and inherit their success – however limited that might be.

The second cultural shift has to be the valuing of business intelligence. How often have you seen brand managers bluffing their way through the need to build an evidence-based plan by suggesting that ROI can’t be correctly calculated – so it’s not worth doing at all.

Our ROI-friendly culture has to recognise that in an imperfect world, a better result can be achieved with imperfect information than in total ignorance. Provided that you have 90 per cent confidence that an activity is at least going to break even, then resourcing decisions are about the relative returns of one activity over another.

So if you have 25 per cent margin of error around the expected returns of activity A and activity B, but activity B suggests double the ROI of activity A, you would expect to spend at least double on activity B than on activity A – or more, depending on the diminishing returns seen in activity B. Yet we commonly see marketers splitting their spending equally on A and B in comparable situations, even based on their assumptions of returns. Which suggests not just insufficient data, but a simple refusal to even try and work it out.

At the risk of sounding Donald Rumsfeld-esque, a brand manager who knows what they do not know is better than a brand manager who does not know what they don’t know, in that the former can look to validate their judgement, whilst the latter is doomed to ignorance.

The logical corollary to this is that an ROI analysis of a brand can be undertaken relatively quickly when you’re working with a brand manager who has the maturity and confidence to estimate what they do know and recognise what they do not know. The analyst is then able to work with business intelligence to use historical data to identify what has proven possible in the past, to validate what is realistic to achieve in the future.

Strive, Challenge, Thrive

It is not an exaggeration to assert that the future survival, prosperity and growth of the pharma industry is dependent on creating and nurturing leaders who deliver return on investment. But getting to this point requires a major cultural shift within organisations to recognise the value that applying rigorous ROI assessment techniques to marketing plans.

Crucially, there has to be a recognition that Return on Investment Marketing can and does deliver a Career Return on Effort, and an ROI culture makes this happen by rewarding those who adopt an entrepreneurial attitude and who demonstrate better plans and optimised resource allocations. The first step in this great leap forwards is for Brand Teams to strive to track the KPIs that are relevant to the area of opportunity they are focusing on, rather than the IMS data that business intelligence has to hand. I think we could all live a little happier for not seeing endless slides of seemingly compulsory, yet strategically irrelevant, IMS graphs in Marketing Plans.

Create a culture of ‘Strive, Challenge, Thrive,’, and you create that happy situation whereby both shareholders and marketers enjoy the tangible returns on their own investment of money and time respectively.

The Author

Alex Blyth is a Senior Consultant with The MSI Consultancy.

Article originally published in Pharmaceutical Marketing Europe, October 2008

You Can’t Learn The Future From The Past


September 21st, 2008

Whilst no-one has a crystal ball, why is the pharma industry so bad at creating future-proof strategies? Jon Bircher, of the MSI Consultancy, explains what we can learn from using scenarios.

Our ultimate dilemma is that all of our knowledge is about the past, and all our decisions are about the future,” wrote Ian Wilson, principal of Wolf Enterprises. If you wanted to sum up why making decisions about what to do in the future is so difficult, it’s hard to put it more succinctly.

We only have knowledge of the past; so it’s neither surprising nor necessarily a bad thing that we tend to refer to what has historically happened when developing our future strategies. Using research to develop insights into the different forces that interact with each other, gaining an understanding into how systems work is critical when building our plans. We can’t discount what we have learnt from the past because it’s the only thing we’ve got reference to. What we must do is keep an eye to the future.

Put simply, building or pressure testing a particular strategy doesn’t just need knowledge, it also needs foresight. There are possible events and influences in the future which might get in the way of a successful strategy, for example changes to the marketplace, unexpected competitor strategies or even natural disasters. Unfortunately, until someone invents a time machine, we won’t be able to accurately predict the future. But that doesn’t stop people trying!

One common tool used in our industry – and many others, for this is not just a pharma dilemma – is the use of scenarios. Scenarios in our vocabulary have very much become a forecasting term, which attempts to find the most predicable or most likely future. A strategy is then built to account for that world, and we may adjust the scenario to help us define upsides and downsides in financial terms. There are many downsides to this approach, but critically it doesn’t use scenarios as they are intended: to build pictures of distinct worlds enabling appropriate creative, innovative and robust strategies to be formulated.

If you’re serious about building a strategy which is as robust as it possibly can be, then you’ve got to put the time, money and investment aside to look at it. In today’s competitive and changing environment it’s not good enough to just say, “I’m going to build my strategy simply within the boundaries and bias of what the world looks like today.”

It’s also not good enough to build a strategy based simply on what we think is the most likely future. Spending time developing different scenarios allows us the time to build, evolve and pressure test strategy, learning about what should or could be achieved.

Scenario Learning

Firstly using the term ‘scenario planning’ in itself doesn’t help. You can’t plan for a future unless you know it’s going to exist.

I’m not alone in my scepticism about the term. Michael Porter, in his book Competitive Advantage, writes, “Scenarios aim to stretch thinking about the future, and widen the range of alternatives considered.”

This way of thinking is backed up by Liam Fahey and Robert Randall, who in 1997 published a highly-recommended book called ‘Learning From The Future’. In it, they introduce the concept of ‘scenario learning’ rather than scenario planning. It’s not about predicting, but rather about thinking through the consequences of potential futures. Put another way, it’s about spinning stories about the future. These can help us develop fuel for new and innovative strategies or act as test beds for our current strategy.

At the end of the day, historical analysis alone is inadequate in its ability to be able to judge risk. If we’re trying to understand risk and trying to understand the optimal strategy, we can’t do that purely on the basis of the past, we have to create future worlds that allow us to work out how robust a particular strategy or a particular line of action might be.

So if we’re trying to look at possible futures, how do we identify those scenarios which are going to be useful to us? Peter Schwartz, co-founder of the Global Business Network, hits the nail on the head: “You can tell you have good scenarios when they are both plausible and surprising.”

In other words, it’s got to be something that could happen (although we shouldn’t be constrained by what we know today) but it also has to have a level of uncertainty about it – because you’re trying to work out things that you don’t know. So when you’re building a scenario, it is a mixture of things that you believe are pre-determined alongside those factors which are most important and most uncertain. You’re trying to learn new possibilities from the uncertain, but you are still grounded in what is plausible.

Danger of Paralysis

The danger is that in trying to avoid prediction, knowing that we can’t see past uncertainties, paralyses us into inaction. You could focus your whole thinking based on what you believe is predetermined, but, recognising that this is not enough, do you just freeze and do nothing, and therefore not know where to go – or do you create these possible maps of what the world could look like?

The answer is to remain focused on what you are trying to achieve. This falls into two main areas: pressure-testing existing strategies, or developing new ones.

You can use scenarios to say: I’ve got a strategy, is it really as robust as I think it is? And if the world looked slightly different, would it still play out?

On the other hand, it could be about building or developing new strategies – or anticipating potential contingencies for your current strategy. Then, it’s much more about creativity, about using scenarios to say what could be possible: what different ways could we do business, what different ways could we challenge particular questions. This is then cleverly using the scenarios to generate innovative strategic possibilities rather than testing one particular route of action.

Either way, you have to engage the company’s senior leadership team fully in the scenarios process. Their knowledge, insights and awareness of the areas of uncertainty are crucial in terms of constructing the final product. If you haven’t got everybody bought into what these possible futures could look like, how they feel and what the rules of the world are, then it’s going to be very difficult for people to engage in them, either to pressure test the strategy or to build new strategies.

There are many different approaches to building scenarios and linking them to strategy development. Some of these are hugely time-consuming; some link quite heavily into computer technology; some are very external expert driven, some workshop driven – but there are some core elements that are required however you choose to approach the scenario learning process.

The critical stage when utilising any scenario learning process is to be clear about the key business question that is being asked, the key decision focus of the whole process. For example, in the early 1980’s Shell’s top management famously asked “what if oil prices fell drastically?” and in working with the likes of Schwartz et al were able to fare much better than the competition when in 1986 prices did fall by almost half.

So isolate the key question, whether that be “what is the right way to fill our pipeline gap?”, “what is the impact of this new competitor on the dynamics of our market?” or “what is the most appropriate organisation for the future?”

Once you understand the key decision question, the focus of the scenario development process is orientated around that central query, ensuring that you are focused on the factors that may (or may not) influence the success of any consequential strategy developed. Everything else that we do including selection, building and embellishing of scenarios are all in the context of that central question ensuring strategic implications have clarity, relevance and credibility.

Ongoing Process

The final stage is to apply these learnings to your strategy or to refine the current strategy is. If you really believe in scenario learning and strategy development then it has to be an ongoing process where you keep challenging your views on what the future could hold.

This is an evolving and ongoing process; by using scenario learning we may have test-bedded our strategy against possible futures but we may also want to expose ideas to customers’ views, run further feasibility analysis, both internally and externally. Maybe we have spent a lot of time in our scenarios thinking about the market environment, but we haven’t devoted a lot of time to competitive reactions. Once you have spun stories about possible futures, you may want to check them from additional angles.

And don’t forget that your views on the future will change as time moves on. You know there will have been assumptions made, and this might have highlighted information gaps – which you can go and start to fill. Some of that might be about the present; some of it might even be about past.

Scenarios are an extremely useful tool when used appropriately – not for planning or for forecasting, but for learning about the implications of possible futures. Let yourself be taken out of the realm of comfort, and feel motivated by the possibilities of different worlds. As long as they’re both plausible and surprising, they will help you to ensure that you have a strong strategy in place whatever happens.

We will never be able to account for everything in the future – it’s too uncertain. But surely it is better to be broadly right than precisely wrong.

The Author

Jon Bircher is a Managing Consultant at The MSI Consultancy, and is one of the creators of FUTURES™, a new initiative to help pharma companies develop robust strategies that play out across possible futures.

Originally published in Pharmaceutical Marketing, September 2008

Putting ROI Marketing into Practice


August 21st, 2008

Forecasting the impact of specific marketing activities is challenging, and marketers receive little formal training or the tools to support doing it properly. To ensure success, Pharma companies require a consistent best-practice approach to ROI, enabling measurement and monitoring of current plans, and forecasting of future activities. Arguing that a market model should be the backbone of robust ROI forecasts, Dr Paul Stuart-Kregor introduces some new thinking and innovative tools to help Pharma marketers put ROI into practice.

Introduction

Marketing is under increasing pressure to demonstrate how it can add value, particularly to justify expenditure. Marketers are often seen as the people who spend money, whilst front-line sales personnel ‘deliver results’. This is a common perception among management across many industries, in no small part due to we marketers inability to demonstrate what we actually do to help drive business forward.

With the lack of a consistent requirement historically to justify marketing expenditure on its return, we are starting in what feels like a vacuum. Without a bank of historical evidence on which activities deliver what results, either in direct sales or the necessary precursors to a prescription e.g. awareness or intention to prescribe, it is hard to know what ROI we can expect.

This may seem incredible given the wealth of data we have within our Industry. And there’s the rub. The data we have is often at a high level, with no established ‘cause and effect’ relationship to understand exactly what has contributed to those end results. The data providers do offer services where they interrogate their data sets and look for correlations, but in reality this is again at macro level. Providers suggest they can optimise the overall promotional mix but without that ‘cause and effect’ link you have to ask whether this is truly optimal.

Therefore, we need to consider how we fill this vacuum and build a discipline in healthcare marketing that shows how marketing adds value and demonstrates real return on investment. Simple…!

“It’s easy when you set SMART objectives” however, how many of us really do set specific, measurable, achievable, realistic and timed objectives for everything we do? There is often no direct logical link between what’s needed to change prescribers’ behaviour and hence drive business, and what’s proposed in our marketing plans.

The challenge is to understand the process by which we generate prescriptions and to what effect we can influence it. Within primary care, (the largest part of the market), the ‘share of voice’ sales model persists and is difficult to step away from; more noise generates more results but we have not seen any improvement from a linear return over the years, which cannot continue in the current climate.

With the shift in focus from primary to secondary care in many companies, this is going to be more challenging given most marketers have primary not secondary care experience, and driving returns in secondary care is even more complex.

Where do we start?

It’s back to first principles – we need to understand where our business comes from and how we generate that business through our activities. We need to build models that predict how our activity will change behaviour, and that behaviour involves prescribers, patients and how they use medicines.

Recently, many organisations have begun using the ‘Patient Flow’ as a tool in understanding how we arrive at our market share. But the Patient Flow is a relatively blunt analytical tool; it provides an overview of how many patients end up on your drug, and where we lose people in the process from presentation to prescription. It doesn’t identify ‘why’ or which particular activity changes behaviour.

We also need to model how our annual sales are generated: how many doctors prescribe, how many patients they prescribe for, what their prescribing patterns are and how the patients use our brand.

We then have a model, an extension of the Patient Flow, explaining where revenue is currently generated and could be generated in the future, that provides the basis for modelling and measuring marketing and sales activity.

Key strategic levers

To be profitable, activities must relate to identified opportunities to maintain and/or drive sales or profit in our model; our ‘levers for growth’.

Each of these levers will require us to change or support existing behaviour, be that of a prescriber, a non-prescribing influencer or the patient themselves. What we need to do in broad terms to change that behaviour represent our ‘Key Strategic Levers’.

You might think you do that already, however, when reviewing brand plans we often see a familiar set of activities with little thought to what really needs to happen to move a particular doctor’s behaviour in a specific market.

To make ROI analysis work, we need to be clear about what behaviour and the scale of change we must achieve to impact the Key Strategic Lever (KSL) e.g. access to screening resources if doctors are failing to identify or correctly diagnose patients; audit tools to help identify sub-optimally treated patients if we are trying to drive brand switch.

This will then enable us to set Key Performance Indicators (KPIs) for each KSL.

Deciding on the appropriate activities

Undoubtedly, the ‘share of voice’ model, executed through face-to-face meetings between doctors/representatives, has historically been an effective way of developing business for Pharma. However, with the advent of prescribing controls, medicines management and imposed targets, changing behaviour of prescribers has become increasingly complex.

Prior to 2003 Prosser and Walley showed there were a number of different influences on prescribing behaviour:

Factors influencing GP Prescribers (from Prosser and Walley, 2003)

Influences cited High prescribers (Percentage of 173 new drug initiations) Low prescribers (Percentage of 19 new drug initiations)
Pharmaceutical representatives 46 10
Failure of current treatment 23 31
Patient request 21 32
Hospital/consultant colleague 13 58
Guidelines 10 26
GP colleague 9 0
Adverts/mailings 9 0
Curiosity 6 0
Nurse 5 10
GP press 5 5
British National Formulary 3 0
PCT or Strategic Health Authority influence 3 0
Peer-reviewed literature 2 16
Self-medication 1 0

Source: Prosser and Walley (2003), New drug uptake: qualitative comparison of high and low prescribing GPs’ attitudes and approach, Family Practice 2003, 20: 583-591.p. 585

However, that was before the Quality Outcomes Framework (QOF) and the new PCT structures and processes began to bite.

We know there are now various activities that affect prescribing in addition to the traditional mechanisms. Reports show these operate at different levels in the healthcare system. At the national or international levels, evidence on treatments and drugs presented in authoritative journals was a significant influence, as was NICE. At the PCT level, influences include publication of local guidelines, newsletters, site visits by prescribing advisers, and Scriptswitch. At practice level, the professional experience of the GP, clinical needs of the patient, patient demand, peer networks, and drug company representatives may influence prescribing.

It is rarely one specific activity that delivers prescriptions. It’s more likely that we need numerous complimentary and sequential activities to achieve our objectives, moving our customers through the adoption and usage process. So, it’s critical to be clear about the process needed to achieve that change.

The principle is the same: identify what behaviour and the scale of the change we must achieve to impact the KSL. However, now there are some significant inhibitors and potentially opposing drivers to our aims, e.g. defined guidance on when and how long to use particular classes of drugs in treating specific conditions or patients, it means historical views on what ROI an activity may deliver are potentially obsolete.

With forecasting, we often become dependent on analogues, so could we use the same approach for ROI? Not really since with the new environment and influences there is little applicable history or guide to an activity’s expected ROI.

We must look for fresh insight into the probable impact of a specific activity on a KSL. Customers stated propensity to change in light of an activity/information is a good starting point. However, this will often need to be followed-up by a more discreet approach e.g. choice-based conjoint analysis, where customers choose between different product and service packages made up of the benefits of the proposed different activities in your campaign, be they educational initiatives, or dedicated resource or practice tools.

What about the ’soft’ activities?

The problem of less tangible ‘softer’ activities, such as awareness and interest, is that their financial impact is less direct but it is still intrinsically there. We must think through the string of additive effects and identify the relevant, measurable KPIs.

Conclusions

Putting ROI marketing into practice is not complex in principle but can be challenging to implement at first. We often see ROI analysis that tests returns on ill conceived activities which weren’t derived from an understanding of where the opportunity to drive sales exists.

The key is to understand where our revenue is generated, by building a model based on the Patient Flow, to provide the basis for modelling and measuring marketing and sales activity. Then by identifying where and what behaviour change is required to achieve our business objectives, we can set appropriate KPIs which we can measure.

Finally we build a set of profitable activities to achieve those KPIs, and measure the ROI accordingly.

Simple!

The Author

Paul Stuart-Kregor is a Director at The MSI Consultancy Ltd

Article originally published in Pharmaceutical Marketing, August 2008

Careers Feature: Don’t Get Pigeon-Holed


July 21st, 2008

In the days when the pace of change was much slower in the pharma industry, many a good career was built on finding a niche and becoming a specialist in it. This is no longer the case: what might once have been prudent career-building is now pigeon-holing – and it is the kiss of death for a long-lasting career.

In these days of constant and fast-paced change, a varied cv with lots of different experience is what will stand you in good stead. That means changing roles – and probably employers – much more frequently. Paul Stuart-Kregor argues that some lateral thinking is required to build a sustainable and successful career in pharma – and he has some unexpected tips about how to achieve the perfect cv.

With flattening organisational structures and lower head counts, building a commercial career in pharma is quite a challenge. Unfortunately, those organisations that are not ‘knowledge-based’ (i.e. depend upon people and their expertise) are highly likely to cut people – so choosing the right company to join in the first place is key.

Obviously, you should look at their performance historically, but more importantly what is coming. The old model of super-blockbuster products that power the financial engine is becoming less and less applicable. Now companies are looking to extract maximum value from assets with smaller potential, in an increasingly budget conscious market. This should move us way from the old ‘boom-and-bust’ cycles of the past, which is no bad thing.

A healthy pipeline of future products that will enter markets that are less price sensitive and open to generic competition is one way of ensuring a more positive future financial picture and hence more secure employment. It will also mean that the atmosphere in the company is more likely to be positive and upbeat, focused on doing the right things, rather than defending budgets.

Something else to consider when choosing prospective employers is their approach to ‘talent management’. Too often we have conversations with people over a beer after work which demonstrate that good talent management is not the norm. By ‘talent management’ I mean a structured process of identifying and nurturing people within the organisation so their commercial skills are developed, in line and along with their career aspirations.

Good companies explain not only the next move but the one after that. Then a secondment into sales does not seem like being sent to Alcatraz with a life sentence, but rather six months of valuable experience en route to becoming a more customer-focussed marketer.

The traditional route in ‘commercial’ pharma has been sales and on to sales management, or sales into marketing. Depending on your particular strengths one or other is perfectly valid. However, having experience of each other’s role can certainly help dialogue between the two disciplines and improve implementation. Even if you have come into marketing through a graduate entry scheme, then gaining sales experience is an important part of building the CV.

But what are companies looking for from future employees? Well, I cannot talk from a structured research base, but looking at recent people’s moves I can hazard a guess.

Companies who do not develop their own talent look to buy it in; and they are looking to tick a certain number of boxes.

These can be in a particular therapy area and/or specific functional expertise. Generally the former seems to be what they are looking for rather than the later, particularly at junior levels and in smaller companies. However, as you get more senior then success in all the strategic as well as operational areas of marketing or sales becomes increasingly important.

The danger however is that you become siloed i.e. an expert in a narrow therapeutic field, which then limits your future options. So you need to ensure that even though you have been ‘bought in’ to work in a particular therapy area, you can move across therapy areas later, so that you broaden your experience and hence your marketability. But: beware the ‘jack-of-all-trades’ tag if you only have a superficial level of experience in a number of therapy areas. You need to spend enough time in one area that you can demonstrate you have made a difference.

The same applies with functional expertise. Some larger companies pigeon-hole marketers, particularly junior ones, so that all they ever do is related to one area of the marketing mix. Again, a dangerously narrow base, unless you want to become an expert and make your fortune that way! So look to broaden your experience of the marketing mix in the early years.

While functional expertise seems to be hard to measure, even with assessment centres, there is no doubt that this is the foundation on which all else is built. The trouble is that many companies are focussed on the immediate results rather than the more medium-to-long term. The result is that people are busy ‘doing’, but may not be provided with the knowledge and skills to develop that critical foundation.

While experience is a key part of learning, more and more so in the modern era, there is a definite need for mental ‘processes’ or ‘frameworks’ that can guide the individual through solving the increasingly complex competitive commercial challenges we face now and will face in the future. Without those ‘processes’ or ‘frameworks’ life gets quite tough.

In our experience many pharmaceutical companies have not provided these in the recent past. More and more are doing it now but there is still a huge need and a gap between where people are and where they need to be.

One place to get both the breadth of functional and therapy area expertise can be, dare I say it, on the ‘other side of the fence’. While thinking about stepping outside a pharmaceutical company may seem like career suicide, and in some cases where longevity of service is the name of the game then this may be true, there is no doubt that a period of time on the service side can turbocharge your knowledge. The right consultancy, of which there are a core few, provides process, range of experience, both in therapy area and commercial challenge.

Above all it is building a logical CV that makes you an attractive asset: a range of therapeutic area experience, demonstrable functional expertise and a successful track record. Where you do that is not necessarily so important but rather having a rounded track record is what matters.

The Author

Dr Paul Stuart-Kregor is a Director of The MSI Consultancy

Originally published in PM, July 2008

PM Careers Feature: Don’t Get Pigeon-Holed


July 21st, 2008

In the days when the pace of change was much slower in the pharma industry, many a good career was built on finding a niche and becoming a specialist in it. This is no longer the case: what might once have been prudent career-building is now pigeon-holing – and it is the kiss of death for a long-lasting career.

In these days of constant and fast-paced change, a varied cv with lots of different experience is what will stand you in good stead. That means changing roles – and probably employers – much more frequently. Paul Stuart-Kregor argues that some lateral thinking is required to build a sustainable and successful career in pharma – and he has some unexpected tips about how to achieve the perfect cv.

With flattening organisational structures and lower head counts, building a commercial career in pharma is quite a challenge. Unfortunately, those organisations that are not ‘knowledge-based’ (i.e. depend upon people and their expertise) are highly likely to cut people – so choosing the right company to join in the first place is key.

Obviously, you should look at their performance historically, but more importantly what is coming. The old model of super-blockbuster products that power the financial engine is becoming less and less applicable. Now companies are looking to extract maximum value from assets with smaller potential, in an increasingly budget conscious market. This should move us way from the old ‘boom-and-bust’ cycles of the past, which is no bad thing.

A healthy pipeline of future products that will enter markets that are less price sensitive and open to generic competition is one way of ensuring a more positive future financial picture and hence more secure employment. It will also mean that the atmosphere in the company is more likely to be positive and upbeat, focused on doing the right things, rather than defending budgets.

Something else to consider when choosing prospective employers is their approach to ‘talent management’. Too often we have conversations with people over a beer after work which demonstrate that good talent management is not the norm. By ‘talent management’ I mean a structured process of identifying and nurturing people within the organisation so their commercial skills are developed, in line and along with their career aspirations.

Good companies explain not only the next move but the one after that. Then a secondment into sales does not seem like being sent to Alcatraz with a life sentence, but rather six months of valuable experience en route to becoming a more customer-focussed marketer.

The traditional route in ‘commercial’ pharma has been sales and on to sales management, or sales into marketing. Depending on your particular strengths one or other is perfectly valid. However, having experience of each other’s role can certainly help dialogue between the two disciplines and improve implementation. Even if you have come into marketing through a graduate entry scheme, then gaining sales experience is an important part of building the CV.

But what are companies looking for from future employees? Well, I cannot talk from a structured research base, but looking at recent people’s moves I can hazard a guess.

Companies who do not develop their own talent look to buy it in; and they are looking to tick a certain number of boxes.

These can be in a particular therapy area and/or specific functional expertise. Generally the former seems to be what they are looking for rather than the later, particularly at junior levels and in smaller companies. However, as you get more senior then success in all the strategic as well as operational areas of marketing or sales becomes increasingly important.

The danger however is that you become siloed i.e. an expert in a narrow therapeutic field, which then limits your future options. So you need to ensure that even though you have been ‘bought in’ to work in a particular therapy area, you can move across therapy areas later, so that you broaden your experience and hence your marketability. But: beware the ‘jack-of-all-trades’ tag if you only have a superficial level of experience in a number of therapy areas. You need to spend enough time in one area that you can demonstrate you have made a difference.

The same applies with functional expertise. Some larger companies pigeon-hole marketers, particularly junior ones, so that all they ever do is related to one area of the marketing mix. Again, a dangerously narrow base, unless you want to become an expert and make your fortune that way! So look to broaden your experience of the marketing mix in the early years.

While functional expertise seems to be hard to measure, even with assessment centres, there is no doubt that this is the foundation on which all else is built. The trouble is that many companies are focussed on the immediate results rather than the more medium-to-long term. The result is that people are busy ‘doing’, but may not be provided with the knowledge and skills to develop that critical foundation.

While experience is a key part of learning, more and more so in the modern era, there is a definite need for mental ‘processes’ or ‘frameworks’ that can guide the individual through solving the increasingly complex competitive commercial challenges we face now and will face in the future. Without those ‘processes’ or ‘frameworks’ life gets quite tough.

In our experience many pharmaceutical companies have not provided these in the recent past. More and more are doing it now but there is still a huge need and a gap between where people are and where they need to be.

One place to get both the breadth of functional and therapy area expertise can be, dare I say it, on the ‘other side of the fence’. While thinking about stepping outside a pharmaceutical company may seem like career suicide, and in some cases where longevity of service is the name of the game then this may be true, there is no doubt that a period of time on the service side can turbocharge your knowledge. The right consultancy, of which there are a core few, provides process, range of experience, both in therapy area and commercial challenge.

Above all it is building a logical CV that makes you an attractive asset: a range of therapeutic area experience, demonstrable functional expertise and a successful track record. Where you do that is not necessarily so important but rather having a rounded track record is what matters.

The Author

Dr Paul Stuart-Kregor is a director of The MSI Consultancy.

Originally published in PM (Pharmaceutical Marketing), July 2008

Global Marketing


June 21st, 2008

As a marketer in the international pharmaceutical world, it is very likely that the brand we are responsible for has a global presence, available and marketed in many different countries. But are global campaigns an increasing problem for marketers or do they offer an opportunity to support local needs with significant resource, freeing you up to focus your energies on other key, local issues? When is it that we should be raising concerns over a global campaign, and should we be rocking the boat at all?

In the world of Pharmaceutical marketing, how often is there some level of conflict (challenge) between the global brand team and local marketers? How often does the US voice in international brand team meetings generally shout the loudest, or seem to continually act independently regardless of global consensus. And how often as UK or even European marketers, do we find ourselves being advised to implement the US brand format across our own markets and having to fight hard to make any changes, despite our very different market environment?

This article looks at when we should consider if we need to and to what extent we should adapt a global brand and/or its campaign and also how we might better influence the development of the global brand. It will draw on some examples from FMCG highlighting why this could be a good environment to learn from, with its history, experience and expertise in global branding.

Why is this important to consider now?

It appears that the power balance in the pharmaceutical world is about to change which will affect how we should consider our global brand. Changes are occurring in the US and have already begun to have an impact on this historical bastion of Pharma profit. The American pharmaceutical payers and consumers, despite the latter continually swelling in numbers, is having a significant change in mind-set regarding health costs and are much less readily accepting of their mounting pharmacy bills. Given the economic difficulty in the near future for the US, since the widely reported ‘Credit-Crunch’, and 50 million American citizens being unable to afford medical insurance and essential drugs, it would seem likely that consumers and politicians will intensify their focus on the health economy and inevitably the US drug spend, our key profit source.

For many years the US’s market size, liberal advertising rules and relatively free pricing system has ensured its position as the focus for brand development, with global brand aspirations fulfilled through an international roll-out of the US campaign.

The changes in the US market means the Pharma industry will need to re-think the global commercial balance in the near future and re-visit investment and mid term strategies to support greater diversity outside the US. Part of this restructuring will involve a greater need to develop and execute truly global pharmaceutical brands.

However, with this shift in the commercial epicentre of the pharmaceutical world, it is important that we optimise results in other markets. As marketers we aspire to truly understand our customers, and work closely with complex local issues, such as culture, attitudes, beliefs and complex healthcare structures. Using a single culture based brand execution is therefore highly unlikely to result in the necessary local competitiveness required to sustain a successful future for our product.

A quick review: What is a brand and how do we develop a brand?

A brand is the sum of all the characteristics, both tangible and intangible which make your offering differentiated or unique in the minds of target customers, adding value and developing a relationship over a simple functional interaction. (How does popping a cork on a champagne bottle make us feel, why is it so different to drinking sparkling wine?)

So, how do we go about developing our brand? First we develop the Brand Vision which is the internal expression of the goals and aspirations for our brand, based on an insight about the future market that defines the brand’s opportunity, and uses relevant and specific language which reflect our core values. We then consider the more practical aspects of the product, outlining the consequences and emotional implications of the functional product attributes and the particular unique selling proposition we defined.

Having considered both our aspirations for the brand and the emotional benefits derived from the functional attributes of the product, we then need to consider what is the best balance of functional benefits, emotional benefits and perceived value for money, The Brand Value Equation (Why are we so much more particular about buying shoes rather than socks?). These processes then allow us to develop our Brand Positioning by considering what we want target customers to ‘know’, ‘believe’, ‘do’ and ‘feel’ about our brand and its opportunity for them.

Subsequently, our whole process is crystallized in the Core Proposition: A single consistent expression of the brand and its essence and finally the developed visualization and imagery is termed the Brand Identification.

Given an increasing acceptance of global communication, a greater focus on RoI by Pharma companies with strained pipelines and an economic storm meaning a less rosy future for the once lucrative US market place, our futures as marketers we will be increasingly driven by clear success and evidence of efficiency of our marketing. A global brand can therefore be highly attractive as it can deliver these efficiencies in cost as well as control and clarity of positioning,

However, there may be situations where adapting the global brand is likely to be the most successful and efficient option. Given the need for maximum efficiency and success at local level we should therefore be prepared to challenge the status quo, but on an objective, not a subjective basis. So, how can you identify that moment for your brand?

The first question you must ask yourself is ‘why do you want to change the global brand’? How often do we find the motivation for adaptation is based on a misconception; that the core brand is wrong locally, when in reality it is the local execution that is causing the trouble and in fact the Core Proposition has clear local relevance? It is crucial you that you make sure you are not confusing global brand with global execution. If we do jump to such conclusions, we are in danger of missing the opportunities to profit from greater brand efficiencies and larger global brand resources. By working back to core branding principles and assessing the global proposition in our local market we could save ourselves much time, effort and unnecessary expense!

When considering if we need to adapt the global brand, we need to be clear and ask:

1) Have our international colleagues really developed a global brand? If we are missing clarity on the Brand vision, the Brand positioning and the Core proposition, then we must raise the need to develop more clarity on the global brand.

2) Is the global brand is meaningful, credible, competitively differentiated, motivating and sustainable for our target customers? If not, then we may need to go back to the drawing board to help tighten things up.

On the basis that we do have the clarity, differentiation and sustainability on the global brand, then we need to consider whether the ‘brand drivers’ or the ‘market drivers’ are different in our market to those on which the global brand is based.

We all know of brands that have different names at a local level due to legal or language restrictions. While that does not affect the overall brand value, it is a key consideration if it fails to communicate the fundamental brand values.

For example: Motorola is pronounced ‘me de lou la’ in Cantonese, meaning ‘nothing to take’. In some southern Chinese dialects, the Peugeot 416 is pronounced ’si yi lu’ meaning ‘die all along the road’. The Coca-Cola name in China was first read as “Kekoukela”, meaning “Bite the Wax Tadpole” or “Female Horse Stuffed with Wax”, depending on the dialect. Coke then researched 40,000 characters to find a phonetic equivalent “kokoukole”, translating into “Happiness in the Mouth.” This is also culturally relevant, since the Chinese have a fondness for names that express goodwill. Far more in line with the core brand values but an example of local execution NOT a fundamental change to the brand.

Another vital consideration is that not all markets are in a similar state of development; perhaps the treatment paradigm is different with an emphasis on different classes of drugs, or the unmet need on which the brand opportunity is based is just not recognised in a particular market. In which case there is work to do at local level to develop customer’s thinking. The core brand may be valid but we will need to focus local communication more on establishing the ‘know’ of the brand positioning (i.e. that the unmet need is an issue) than the ‘believe’, ‘do’ or ‘feel’. Yet again, execution not brand per se.

If we have looked at the drivers and found some inconsistencies, then we need to establish how far we need to adapt.

Is it just about execution?

When we work through the different drivers, what we often discover is that in most cases the vision, positioning and core proposition of our brands will stand up across international borders, and actually the majority of work we have to undertake is to ensure that our brand proposition is clearly communicated in a locally acceptable manner.

FMCG companies have been considering how to maximise their global brand potential for many years and have found that although many global brands are highly successful they do not always work. Many successful global brands express clear core values in a relevant and appropriate way which is adapted specifically for the local market; in the words of Intel successful brands express a “global chassis, local body” or as we classified earlier, a global core proposition and local brand execution.

Despite working for many years on establishing as tight a global execution as possible some FMCG brands have recognised the value of local execution but still want to achieve the efficiencies that result from centralised development. Coca-Cola replaced its global ad and branding campaign with more tailored local and regional strategies. In one case a core selection of 10 ads together with images and music was produced. Local managers could then put together and edit ad packages that were most appropriate for their local consumers. In another case, Mercedes-Benz implemented a similar local adaptation strategy using a single ad agency to create a menu of 5 campaigns. Brand managers in each country were then able to choose the campaign which suited their local market the best. This halfway house ensures that campaigns are of suitable size to benefit from the economies of scale and central control, whilst at the same time delivering a more tailored and more locally efficient result.

Although FMCG doesn’t reflect many of the complexities and technicalities of the complex Pharmaceutical market we are all working in, these examples do illustrate the ongoing search for an ideal global / local brand mix. By considering the real drivers behind our local brand elements we can optimize our marketing efficiencies.

Conclusion

We are all faced with global marketing to a growing extent, and when, why and how we adapt the global brand is a continual area for heated debate. While some arguments for global brands seem spurious, there is no doubt with the drive for cost efficiencies global brands are here to stay. However, by working through the core developmental elements of a brand, and understanding their relevance, local brand teams can identify which parts of their brand need adapting, whether it is the brand vision, the core proposition or simply the local brand execution. Given the shift in the commercial balance of power in pharmaceuticals globally and an increasingly global communications platform for brands, we need to get to grips at a local level with driving greater marketing efficiency. If we truly want to be successful, surely we are best placed by using the resource and efficiencies of our global brand and only adapting it where entirely necessary, to drive local advantage. However, it is just as dangerous to assume it will work as it is to challenge the global brand. Be brave and do what’s best for your market.

The Author

Michael Craig
is a Consultant at The MSI Consultancy.

Originally published in Pharmafocus, June 2008

Implementing Global Campaigns in a European Environment


June 21st, 2008

Dr Paul Stuart-Kregor argues that although global branding is a fact of life in the pharma industry, local marketers must keep the customer firmly in the front of their minds when validating whether the global approach will work in their market – or whether they need to argue for local adaptation.

Pharma is by its nature a globalised business, and therefore standardised, globalised brand strategies are a fact of life. Even though marketing is a complex discipline, influenced by all sorts of factors including culture and the local business environment, sometimes a global approach makes sound strategic sense, even when that decision is made with the knowledge that it may not always be best for a brand’s local competitiveness.

No-one likes being told what to do, especially when they regard themselves as experts in their own market, which is why local marketing teams are sometimes resistant to global strategies. But this is one area where it is important to be objective, rather than letting emotional considerations, or feelings of dented professional pride, get in the way.

That said, as in so many areas, we can learn from the fmcg sector. Here, there was a realisation long ago that a ‘one size fits all’ approach doesn’t always work, and that a ‘glo-cal’ approach, where the core brand values are expressed in an appropriate way for local markets, often works better. Whilst consistency in every market is desirable, sometimes it is simply wrong to impose it on all markets.

But pharma is not the same as fmcg. Given that pharma brands are based on evidence and there is one common evidence base, it’s not hard to see why a global branding strategy is so attractive to international marketers. There are clear financial and commercial benefits in developing global brands in our sector, with both time and cost efficiencies, as well as keeping control (something which is very attractive to corporate entities operating in a multi-national environment).

The ‘New’ Europe

The accession to the EU in 2004 of ten new and very different countries brought with it perhaps unrealistic expectations that the ‘European’ market (and of course, this extends well beyond the boundaries of even an expanded EU) would bring about a more homogenous market, making the implementation of brand consistency, and beyond that a centrally determined brand strategy, considerably easier.

But the emergence of new markets, whether inside the EU or further east, doesn’t alter the fact that the European marketing environment has always been disparate. So just how realistic is it to take a global brand and impose it on such a varied marketplace?

This new European environment is not an amorphous mass of 450 million people opened up to the delights of free trade. As we should all be aware by now, it is in fact a collection of unequal markets, some with low-wage, low-cost and in some cases low-regulation economies.

This brings about a series of challenges to pharma marketers who are trying to implement a global brand. Issues such as pricing, regulation and attitudes to generics surely pose an insurmountable barrier to achieving consistency across different markets.

Four years on from the accession of the ten new countries into the EU, we can see that some of the initial fears about parallel importing and lack of harmonisation were overstated. Membership has already had a beneficial effect on these countries, and as they grow steadily richer, their populations are coming to expect better levels of healthcare, and their health systems are slowly being given more resources to deliver it – all of which is good news for the industry.

At the same time, and this has a big resonance for the attempt to promote brand consistency across different local markets, the unprecedented free movement of people across the continent – predominantly from east to west – is starting to break down cultural barriers, opening up the opportunity for pan-European initiatives to find receptive audiences. Only by this breaking down of national emotional barriers as well as physical borders will pharma businesses be able to create truly pan-European brand campaigns, benefiting from the cross-fertilisation of people and processes.

So far, so good. But does this mean that the European market is ready to adopt and implement the so-called ‘Global Brand’?

The Global Brand

What exactly do we mean by a global brand? Is it about the same name, logo and imagery? Not necessarily. Too often the perception is that if we have the logo and imagery in every country we will have a global brand. Not true – just ask General Motors, whose Vauxhall Nova would have bombed in Spain, where ‘Nova’ means ‘doesn’t go’!

In the pharma world as well, there are well-documented right-thinking examples of where a global brand strategy didn’t mean an inflexibility when it came to the execution of marketing communications in different markets. Responsiveness to the market context determines the treatment. Pfizer’s Celebrex was launched in many markets with a ‘power’ positioning, taking advantage of its first-to-market status in most places. But as it wasn’t first-to-market in the UK, where Vioxx had already made this territory its own, Celebrex had to adopt a completely different positioning message in this market. However, the rest of the brand, it’s vision, values and overall benefits remained the same.

Brands are about benefits, both functional and emotional, values and relationships. Those need to be built country by country, based on the needs and values of the target customers and their perceptions of the competitive set. Essentially, there are four potential scenarios, based on the extent to which brand values and brand identification are globally consistent or inconsistent, and where a particular local market sits will determine the extent to which it is appropriate for the global brand to be implemented in the local market.

1. The ‘Purely Local’, where both brand identification and brand values are globally inconsistent: this scenario is relevant where the local situation means that a global approach is inappropriate (e.g. it is purely a local brand), and allows the strongest appeal to local customer and market needs. But with no tie-in to ‘larger thinking’, there is the danger of inefficient i.e. costly,marketing.

2. The ‘Label’, where brand identification is globally consistent, but where brand values are globally inconsistent: this scenario has the danger that it has the illusion of a brand, but can lead to the use of inappropriate materials at local level, with the temptation to adopt ‘global’ executions where other elements of branding are not consistent.

3. The ‘Value Set’, where the brand values are globally consistent, but where brand identification is globally inconsistent: this still represents a global brand, with consistent core thinking but different executions. This scenario is appropriate where local customs or history dictate the need for differences, or where there are problems locally with the global brand identity – perhaps for legal or cultural reasons. The danger here is overstretch and/or lazy marketing.

4.The ‘Complete Brand’, where both brand values and brand identification are globally consistent: this is the ideal, provided it is real. This scenario delivers the full customer and company benefits of a global brand, and offers the highest level of potential marketing efficiency.

In practice, there is rarely a black and white answer as to where any brand sits, and the pharma marketer needs to assess all sorts of brand and market drivers to gain a better picture of whether the approach in any given market veers towards the local or the global.

I would argue that there are six elements which make up a complete strategic pharma brand, and it’s useful to understand what these are when you are considering the extent to which such a brand can be implemented locally:

* Brand Vision & Core Values: the aspirations and personality for the brand, derived from the brand’s objectives and insights about the market
* Brand Value Equation: the balance of functional, emotional and/or value for money benefits, derived from our understanding of customers, their personas, needs and drivers
* Product Positioning: the ‘who’, ‘what’, ‘where’ and ‘when’, which also requires an insight into competitors, and their brands and messages to ensure the brand is competitive and differentiated
* USP: the ‘why’, derived from our product’s unique characteristics
* Brand Positioning: what we want the customer to ‘know’, ‘believe’, ‘do’ and ‘feel’, which follows from the product attributes, consequences and the emotional benefits
* Core Proposition: the single, consistent, over-arching proposition: what makes our brand meaningful, credible, differentiated, motivating and sustainable

All of these six elements come together to form the complete strategic brand, and the international marketing team will have put this together. But how much of each element needs to be globally consistent? For example, the USP may be global, but it can be expressed differently in different local markets.

Having A Say

Ideally, the understanding that local teams have of their markets will be tapped into during the development of the strategic brand, so that local needs are taken into consideration. A global brand should be something which develops from within every market that the brand will interact with, rather than simply being imposed from above by the international marketing team sitting in their marble and glass palaces in say New Jersey!

Audiences in Europe will always react better to a Europe-centric marketing approach than to a US-centric one – or at least a global approach in which the importance of the European market is recognised, as is the particular market needs of our disparate but nevertheless converging markets.

Rather than just accepting what comes from ‘on high’, European marketers must constantly question whether there is a better way of doing things at a local level that fits within the global strategy. Pharma is strong as an industry because it is global, but to survive and thrive we must not be scared of standing up for a European point of view while the global strategy is being developed.

In the end, if the global brand is consistent with local needs and you have the same competitive set, then the global strategy should be adopted locally – this should be the default position. If this is not the case, then a local execution may be appropriate. But either way, any local execution must not conflict with the global strategy, must fit under global umbrella, with the same brand values. In this sense it is the global which should inform the local, more than the local ploughing its own furrow.

European markets are generally important enough globally to have some input into the creation of the global brand. The understanding of the local market can only come from local marketing teams, and in major markets this can be used to influence the global brand strategy. With well structured and value input we can create better global brands, rather than have poor ones imposed on us!

The important thing for European and global marketers to recognise is that global brand does not always mean global advertising execution. Fmcg has shown us the value of allowing or even providing for local advertising by creating a series of adverts from which countries can choose. In many cases the global brand should be relevant to the local market. What marketers often focus on is purely the advert, potentially missing the point and getting into unnecessary arguments. Implementing a global brand will often be the appropriate approach, but adjusting the local execution may be necessary, but it needs an objective not an emotional assessment.

The Author

Dr Paul Stuart-Kregor is a Director at The MSI Consultancy

Article originally published in Pharmaceutical Marketing Europe, June 2008

Marketing Effectiveness


June 21st, 2008

The pharma industry has traditionally lagged behind other sectors when it comes to measuring the effectiveness of its marketing activity. Jon Bircher, of the MSI Consultancy, says it’s time to take action and measure marketing activities in structured way.

Over recent years the pharmaceutical industry, has been unable to escape the mantra of ‘return on investment’ (ROI). Investment in just about everything – from R&D to clinical trials to sales force effectiveness – is being scrutinised, with ‘marketing effectiveness’ measurement and monitoring being thoroughly challenged.

But when it comes to ROI on marketing spend, the truth is that the marketers have struggled to find a way to measure all of it. Parts of the promotional mix that are more closely linked to sales (e.g. sales force effectiveness) are easier to measure if we look at inputs and potentially have very tangible outputs albeit that the link between them may not be direct. This is not always the case with marketing (depending on what the objective is), at least in pure financial (revenue) terms. And that’s what many people think of when they try to measure ROI: the balance sheet.

Perhaps when big blockbuster products were turning in so much income, a little wastage, or a lack of expenditure accountability, in the marketing department wasn’t so important, especially in the days when the markets were more defined and accessible – and hence the marketing job was arguably easier.

Even if this was true, the pressure to deliver more for less is certainly pronounced, and to achieve this, knowing what is working and what isn’t is more important than ever. We may smile at the old quote attributed to Lord Leverhulme: “Half the money I spend on advertising is wasted; the trouble is I don’t know which half”. But increasingly pharma marketers are being called on to have a better insight than that.

Many marketers are still struggling to link measurement of the less tangible elements of the marketing mix, such as, changing perceptions, awareness or interest levels to actual return. But I believe passionately that we have to find ways to measure robustly what we are achieving, if we are to maximise the effectiveness of marketing in our industry.

This is a call to all people in the industry not just marketers. Marketers should have high expectations of the agencies they commission whether that be market research agencies, advertising agencies, communication, medical educational, PR companies or even consultancies! Any proposed project or activity should have clearly defined objectives and metrics that enable demonstrable alignment to what will drive future growth.

Measurement is not simply about comparing marketing spend to sales, the correlation is not that simple. Which is why some pharma marketers end up giving up and simply accepting sub-standard anecdotal ‘hunches’ that they are doing the right thing. These days that is not an option, it’s too important to take that tack!

Yes, it is sometimes difficult, and challenging, to relate sales to certain specific marketing activities, especially market shaping and market access activities, but it is important that as marketers we do it to ensure we demonstrate the value that ‘marketing’ can add in a predominantly sales-driven culture.

To measure marketing effort effectively you need to understand where you are impacting on the patient flow, you need to know what success actually looks like, plus where you are trying to move customers from and to.

Using the Patient flow enables marketers to measure effectiveness using an appropriate combination of qualitatively researched performance measures, as well as regression based sales analysis and benchmarking measures. The patient flow is the link point enabling marketers to connect qualitative KPIs to the ultimate goal – financial return.

You should be cautious about relying purely on past sales performance as a measure. Looking back, you can make correlations between marketing activity and sales, and from extrapolate to the future. But marketing activity doesn’t necessarily translate straight into sales, and it’s certainly not exclusively about direct sales effort – factors such as increasing the number of patients available for treatment or increased diagnosis also come into play.

To do this effectively requires above all an understanding of where in the patient flow you need to be concentrating your marketing activity, where the critical barriers are, and what success actually looks like. It’s no good simply saying that the finishing line is increased sales, and therefore marketing success can only be measured using that criterion. True, all successful marketing should contribute to commercial success, but often that end result is too far removed from the specific marketing goal to be the only valid metric.

Take as an example a patient consulting their GP with obesity. Your marketing aim may be simply to drive more diagnoses (knowing that if you get this right the patient is more likely to end up on your treatment). The starting point will be to understand the barriers which are preventing this happening (through insightful market research).

Perhaps the big barrier is that the HCP feels it’s more of a lifestyle problem, or the patient doesn’t realise that they have a medical condition. Identifying the barriers will flush out who needs to be influenced, and what changes in their behaviours must happen to make drive success which will in turn inform the appropriate use of the marketing mix.

Driving those changes in behaviour is the objective of any marketing activity, and therefore we should be identifying clear KPIs which can then be measured. Although in this case you will be hoping that increased diagnosis will lead to increased prescribing, and hence increased sales of your brand, that is a few stages removed and we need to ensure that we have markers or measures in place to highlight what success initially looks like, e.g. a mixture of awareness of obesity as a true medical condition and increased diagnosis.

Whilst getting the methodology of measurement right, there must also of course be an understanding of what it is that is being measured. Perhaps the biggest error that is made in the pharma industry is either to look too generally at the whole market, and thus miss effects which are happening in specific parts of it – or to get the segmentation hopelessly wrong.

Segmentation is something we talk about a lot, if we have truly challenged ourselves to go that step further in terms of segmentation: looking into customer goals, beliefs and attitudes, then equally we should spend the time ensuring we measure our marketing effectiveness by segment. This requires two key things 1) Markers so we can clearly identify one segment from another and 2) a review of the stages of the patient flow for each target segment separately. Once we have done this we will be able to find our segments and understand the differences in terms of growth levers and barriers that need to be removed through our marketing activities.

Considering the basis of segmentation, as groups of customers with distinct, different needs, we must account for this in reviewing marketing effectiveness. .Even where segments are well-defined, too often measurement of marketing success is based across the whole market, and not on the segments of the market which could – with the right messaging – make the biggest difference. Therefore let’s ensure we have identified differences in the patient flow by segment helping us understand the critical barriers to success, highlighting the levers of growth. This allows us to ensure marketing effort is measurable, aligned to qualitative and quantitative measures and is segment specific.

If we have decided to launch a particular brand into a specific segment, with similar needs and consistent messages, then we need to focus our measurement on only those segments, not the market as a whole.

So is it that the industry is not gathering enough data to be able to make meaningful assessments of marketing effectiveness or are we simply not making good use of the data we have?

An often used excuse for the shortage of marketing effectiveness in pharma is the relative difficulty of gathering data compared with the fmcg world. But whilst certain aspects of marketing are more difficult to measure than others, this is no different for fmcg than for pharma. Yes, it’s difficult to access the end-user in pharma, but we have much to learn from the techniques used by fmcg. And in fact in my experience there is less readily available data in fmcg.

The challenge for fmcg is the same – to work out which elements of the marketing mix are having the best return on investment. There is no reason why we cannot commission more market research with our customers to get a better understanding of where we are having the most impact, and then utilise these insights to inform and improve what we do moving forward.

Actually, most pharma companies I know are awash with data which could be used better with the correct tools and processes to ensure that we measure our effectiveness. If the data is not there, then challenge yourself – and your agencies – to understand what data you need, and look at approaches you can take to accurately measure marketing success and that won’t always be about demand or sales.

Those increasingly sophisticated metrics tools which are commonplace in fmcg are now finding their way into pharma. We are now using bespoke tools which have been developed specifically to meet the individual challenges of measuring pharma marketing effectiveness.

However you express it, the days of ‘digital hydrometry’ (i.e. finger in the air) are gone. Financial management and profitability are rapidly becoming a major part of the marketer’s daily workload.

A simple way to start marketing effectiveness is to imagine that it is your own business: your own money that you are investing. Marketers need to pay more attention to measuring their effectiveness – not just to be better marketers, but to understand what success looks like, and to gain competitive advantage. Would you really spend money on that programme if it was your business or are there better ways of achieving the goal?

I believe that there is a cultural shift required in understanding what is meant by the term ROI. It’s not just about increasing sales (at least not in the direct sense); it can be about a whole plethora of success measures, whether it’s awareness, perception, driving diagnosis or adoption of a particular technique.

The ultimate challenge we face as pharma marketers is to pick the right growth levers. Of course the ultimate goal is towards increasing sales, and profits. But to measure marketing effectiveness properly, we need robust qualitative markers to show that we are going in the right direction.

That’s not about suffocating creativity or innovation, but rather about informing it, improving it, and knowing when it has achieved your objectives.

The Author

Jon Bircher is a Managing Consultant at The MSI Consultancy.

Article originally published in Pharma Times, June 2008

Slicing the European Cake


June 21st, 2008

More than any other industry, pharmaceuticals cannot exist in a one-market ‘bubble’ – and this means that dealing with different cultures is inevitable. Expansion of the EU eastwards, and the emergence of new markets outside the EU, has exacerbated this, and any marketer who regards Europe – from Russia to Portugal – as one homogenous ‘European’ whole is heading for disaster, says Dr Paul Stuart-Kregor.

We often refer to Europe in discussions as if it represents a single homogenous entity. Those of us who live here know that the continent cannot be regarded as such. In fact, commercial Europe is becoming even more diverse. For example, the accession of ever-more Eastern European states seems already to have shifted the centre of gravity away from the usual epicentre of the EU5. If Turkey was to join the EU, is it really still a ‘European’ market or a more Eurasian one? And we must also take into account the countries perceived as part of the European market – especially Russia – which are not part of the EU.

So to what extent can Europe be regarded as one, single market – and if so can this unity sensibly be managed by a European team?

The process of EU accession and legislation harmonisation has driven a positive change towards a more predictive regulatory and intellectual property environment. By the implementation of various Directives, in terms of data exclusivity 8 + 2 + 1 rule, Bolar provision and relevant registration procedures (Centralised Procedure, Decentralised Procedure and Mutual Recognition Procedure), the EU has contributed to a more single European medicines market.

There is no doubt that this is an attempt to standardise medicines and their approval across the EU, but this does not mean that marketing of those medicines can be to a standard formula across Europe, not least as there are European countries that are top of mind yet not part of the EU.

In this way we can say that there is technically one market, but even then, we know that there is no guarantee that we will gain the same registration status in each EU country, nor the same reimbursement; and the accession countries have time to normalise their local situations.

So why is cutting the European cake an issue now?

More and more we are seeing the centralisation of strategic thinking in European or International teams based in Europe, with local operating countries implementing the defined strategy. There is a natural tendency to focus on the obvious, the countries where there are the most people and therefore the greater number with the condition for which our brand offers a solution. The problem is that size may not be everything. For example, the UK is among the top five European countries on size but in some therapy areas (e.g. specific cancers), the true opportunity is smaller than it should be due to funding restrictions.

On top of this, the potential reduction in the scale and profitability of the US market means that maximising growth in Europe is going to become increasingly important.

So unless that thinking is based on a sound segmentation of the market, then the strategy devised may be sub-optimal, not providing the necessary competitive differentiation and relevant support to access the opportunities. What we are not talking about (yet) is a pan-European behavioural or attitudinal based segmentation, as perhaps the car industry might consider (and BMW did in fact execute). Rather, we are looking at an opportunity-based selection process that can lead into a macro-level need-based segmentation on which our European brand strategy can be built.

Options for slicing the cake

The traditional way of looking at the individual countries within Europe has been on population and hence prevalence of our target conditions. Thus we always think of the Top Five in Europe as Germany, France, UK, Spain and Italy, the EU5. For a time it looked as if Poland would break into that group to establish an EU6 given it has a population of 39m people and was becoming increasingly linked to the other major markets within the EU. Turkey has an even larger population at 70m so on paper would represent a significant opportunity if we just looked at population, as would Russia at 143m.

However, recent reforms in Poland, driven as ever by the affordability of healthcare, have meant that Poland has lost its pre-eminence as a potentially major market. Perhaps this gives us one clue to how we might consider selecting opportunities within Europe.

Maybe it’s not just about size but economic performance. Gross domestic product (GDP) is a common measure of the wealth of a country. If you look at Poland’s GDP in 2005, it was around $530bn, but if you then calculate GDP per capita for Poland it is $19,889 (Source: OECD). To put that in context, if you look at Austria’s GDP it is less at $283bn but per capita it is $34,393, above the EU average, suggesting that a higher level of healthcare is affordable in Austria when compared to Poland.

For reference, Hungary has a population of 10m, GDP of $176bn and GDP per capita of $17,483, whilst Turkey, with a more significant population of 70m, has a GDP of $556bn resulting in a GDP per capita of $7,711, one quarter the EU average. Russia with a population of 143m and a GDP of $764bn has a per capita GDP of $5,342. Hence, total health spending accounted for 10.2 per cent of GDP in Austria in 2005, more than one percentage point higher than the OECD average of 9.0 per cent. In Poland it was 6.2 per cent and in Turkey 7.6 per cent. If you look at that as health spending per capita then Austria is $3,519, far lower than the US, Norway and Switzerland, but higher then Poland at $867 and Turkey at $586. Health spending tends to rise with income: in general, OECD countries with higher GDP per capita tend to spend more on health.

According to OECD Health Data, health spending has grown faster than GDP in every OECD country except Finland between 1990 and 2004. It accounted for 7 per cent of GDP on average across OECD countries in 1990 but reached 8.9 per cent in 2004, up from 8.8 per cent in 2003, which is good news. However, the public share of health spending has fallen in countries such as Poland, Hungary and the Czech Republic, which had a relatively high public share of health spending in 1990.

For countries in transition like Bulgaria and Romania, but also in most of the new accession Central and Eastern European (CEE) countries, the low purchasing power of an ageing and ailing population and a highly restricted state budget to get whole or partial reimbursement for their treatment results in the extremely high social demand for effective cost containment policies for pharmaceuticals. As a result, the socio-political change which the above States are experiencing is having a serious impact on the macro and microeconomics of the healthcare sector in CEE, where branded and generic medicines play a vital part.

Paying the drugs bill

Indeed, the major problem of the national healthcare policies is the lack of sufficient budgetary resources, an average of 4.2 per cent of the GDP for the last six years in Bulgaria. In Romania, the budget assigned to the healthcare system accounts for 3.6 per cent of GDP, as compared to an average of 5.3 per cent in Central and Eastern European countries and 8.5 per cent in the old EU member states.

As mentioned before, healthcare costs are under increased pressure in Europe, especially in transition countries, and this will force new member governments to introduce more effective price cutting or budget control measures. The Czech healthcare system underwent a minor revolution on 1st January 2008, as patients are now asked to pay a small fee each time they visit their doctor. Czechs enjoyed free healthcare during four decades of communist rule and in the past 17 years of capitalism. But from 1st January, Czech patients will be asked to pay 30 crowns (£0.83; 1.1 euros) for each visit to the doctor, and 60 crowns for each day spent in hospital. Not huge but still a significant change.

Interestingly, if you look at who pays for drugs, in 2004 public coverage of spending on drugs was lowest in Poland (37%). By comparison, more than two-thirds of spending on drugs was paid by public sources in Austria, France, Germany, Spain and Sweden.

So, as decision-makers are increasingly interested in maximising value from healthcare investment, pharmacoeconomics criteria are being introduced into the pricing and reimbursement for medicines decision-making process as a trend throughout whole Europe. All this creates a favourable policy environment to raise reimbursed volumes for generics and to optimise value for innovative products without therapeutic alternatives, yet pressure on prices and health economics based on results of medicinal therapies must be considered.

Consequently, if as commercial people we are to maximise return on investment, we need to consider the whole value proposition as it relates to the economic status of our target markets.

A three speed system?

Moving on, according to a recent report covering all 27 European Union members, as well as Norway and Switzerland (Euro Health Consumer Index – EHCI), Europe has a three speed healthcare system.

There is a small group of countries – Austria, Netherlands and France – which compete for pre-eminence in excellence, separated only by minor differences; followed by Switzerland and Germany they make up the top five. These are followed by a middle group of adequate performers, the Nordic countries of Sweden, Norway, Finland and Denmark, with a tail of under-achievers. No country in the index achieves more than 80 per cent of their potential, so all remain in need of some reform.

If you look at healthcare systems in Europe they fall into one of two types: Bismarck healthcare systems based on social insurance, where there is a multitude of insurance organisations, Krankenkassen etc, who are organisationally independent of healthcare providers: and Beveridge systems where financing and provision are handled wholly or partially within one organisation, such as the NHS of the UK, countries of Nordic states etc.

The results of EHCI 2007 show that the top five countries, which fall within 36 points on a 1000-point scale, all have dedicated Bismarckian healthcare systems. There is then a gap of 30 points to the first Beveridge country (Sweden) in sixth place. While not at all arguing that the Bismarck-type healthcare systems are in every way superior, the EHCI report seems to suggest that for total customer value, the Bismarck model wins over the Beveridge.

In southern Europe, Spain and Italy provide good healthcare services. However, real excellence in southern European healthcare seems to be dependent on the consumers’ ability to afford private healthcare as a supplement to public healthcare. The CEE member states are doing surprisingly well; however, readjusting from planned to consumer-driven economies takes time.

Which model works best?

As ever it depends! Size alone is not enough, as we can see from considering the situations of Poland and Turkey.

As commercial people we need to consider how best to work in a complex arrangement of different nation states. Operationally there are logical geographic considerations which maximise operational effectiveness e.g. EU5 plus perhaps Austria, Switzerland, Netherlands and Belgium; North – the Nordic countries; Central – CEE; SE Europe – Turkey, Greece and the Balkans.

To a great extent this also reflects the economic, healthcare spending power and hence market potential. There is no doubt that the budgets in CEE and SE Europe are under more pressure than in the larger more affluent markets.

This then suggests that the strategies we employ will need to take into account very different spending power by country. The consequence of this is a need to be able to demonstrate the full value of our innovative, branded medicine over other less expensive perhaps generic options. Alternatively, the use of risk sharing models may become more normal in the less well developed markets than in the EU5.

As for priorities, we could stick to the ‘old’ way of considering the EU5 as our prime focus, but that ignores other potentially up and coming parts of Europe where there is definitely new business to be had.

In conclusion, Europe appears to be more heterogeneous than ever, which makes European marketing an increasing challenge. There are a number of different ways to slice the cake; you pays your commercial ‘money’ and makes your own choice. There definitely is not a one-size-fits-all solution.

The Author

Paul Stuart-Kregor is a Director of The MSI Consultancy

Originally published in Pharmafocus, June 2008

How would you like to die?


April 21st, 2008

When a healthcare professional relative of mine diagnosed with an inoperable brain tumour was told by a close friend that knowing when she was going to die was a gift, you can imagine that her reaction was not positive.

But think about it. Would you rather go relatively quickly or decline over a long period, gradually losing your faculties and control of bodily functions? Or as the best selling author Terry Pratchett put it recently more eloquently than me when talking about living with his diagnosis of early-onset Alzheimer’s disease, a condition that “strips away your living self a bit at a time”.

That is why the 59-year-old fantasy author, who appeared at a conference for the Alzheimer’s Research Trust (ART), has pledged a million dollars (around £500,000) to research. He told the conference: “I’d like a chance to die like my father did – of cancer, at 86. Before he went to spend his last two weeks in a hospice, he was bustling around the house. He talked to us right up to the last few days, knowing who we were and who he was. Right now, I envy him.

Dementia does not have the “heroic glamour” of cancer to put it in his words – as he told the ART conference: “It’s a shock and a shame to find out that money for [Alzheimer's] research is three per cent of that which goes to find cancer cures. Perhaps that is why I know three people who have survived brain tumours but no one who has beaten Alzheimer’s.

The World Health Organisation has calculated that, when it comes to disability in the over-60s, dementia is responsible for about 11 per cent, cardiovascular disease for about 5 per cent, and cancer for 2.4 per cent. In January, the House of Commons Public Accounts Committee was told that dementia costs the UK economy £17 billion a year, more than stroke, heart disease and cancer put together! Yet the Alzheimer’s Research Trust points out that only £11 is spent on UK research into Alzheimer’s for every sufferer, compared with £289 for every cancer patient. Have we got our priorities wrong?

As I have discussed before, even accessing drugs is difficult. As Pratchett noted wryly: “The NHS kindly allows me to buy my own Aricept because I’m too young to have Alzheimer’s for free, a situation I’m OK with in a ‘want to kick a politician in the teeth’ kind of way.”

It’s about time that our NHS started to get its priorities right. The proportion of people over 65 is increasing and will continue to increase. That means dementia is going to become an increasing reality for more and more of us. People with dementia have a really hard time, as do the families that care for them, but the usual approach is to shut them away in homes, and forget about them. Hardly a world-class healthcare system!

NHS ‘the sick man of Europe’

So says the think tank Civitas who recently published their new report “Why the NHS is the sick man of Europe”. They contend that despite record increases in funding over the last decade, with public spending on the NHS nearing £100 billion, the performance and productivity of the health service has been steadily declining. Yes, the money and the reforms have produced some notable achievements – particularly on waiting times and falling cancer and CHD mortality rates – but there are some fundamental issues to resolve.

Civitas believes that the root of the problem is not the world-class doctors, nurses or even managers who work in the NHS, but the system they are working in that prevents patients from taking control of their health care and prevents frontline professionals from revolutionising services for their patients’ benefit. Civitas feels that where you live, and how much you shout, accounts for much in the standard of treatment you can expect.

Civitas sees two symptoms: first, inequity. For example, Lord Darzi’s interim report that documents the gap in life expectancy between the most and least deprived areas in England as nearly ten years (for men), and it’s getting worse. There is a deeper issue of the quality of care a patient receives in the NHS which appears to depend on education, intelligence and connections (i.e. ‘he who shouts loudest’), and where you are treated (e.g. there is a fourfold variation in mortality rates between NHS organisations for coronary artery bypass graft (CABG) operations).

Secondly, inefficiency – NHS productivity, according to the latest estimates by the Office of National Statistics, has fallen by an average of one per cent per annum over the past ten years. And finally, unhealthy outcomes – the NHS still languishes at the bottom of European league tables on cancer survival rates, much closer to the performance of Poland and the Czech Republic than the best performers Sweden, Finland and Switzerland.

Civitas sees the crux of the problem as the fact that the NHS has never found a satisfactory mechanism to assess clinical need, or the demand for health care, and allocate resources accordingly.

Given these problems, how then can the government justify that the NHS is now heading for a £1.8 billion surplus for 2007/08? If you provide a ‘budget’ to achieve certain objectives then why is there a need to deliver a surplus? Beats me! Maybe that’s why I am not a politician.

The Author

Paul Stuart-Kregor is a Director at The MSI Consultancy

Originally published in Pharmafocus, April, 2008

Pan-European Marketing: Is it Really Possible?


February 22nd, 2008

There is no doubt that the pharmaceutical industry is a global industry. The importance of geographically diverse markets to the overall success of a brand and the company is clear. With developing markets becoming more significant, this global perspective will be increasingly important, and therefore standardised, globalised brand strategies are a fact of life which we will need to live with.

With the growing complexity that results from being global, it is very easy for a company to be tempted to try and centralise decision making, adopt a ‘global’ marketing approach, and insist that all countries follow that approach. It can work, of that there is no doubt, but it is clearly not the optimal approach.

It can be very tempting to see Europe as one entity, particularly for our American cousins, but as we all know, just because we are part of an Economic Union does not mean we are the all same. The extension of the EU, and the consequent proliferation of countries under one ‘banner’, is also likely to lead to attempts to develop a pan-European strategy within the global context.

Is a ‘European’ approach really feasible?

The first question to ask is what exactly we mean by a ‘European’ marketing approach? If we focus on marketing only, then we are talking about branding, overall strategy to include focus segments, positioning, messaging, pricing and implementation.

If by a ‘European’ approach we mean every country following exactly the same strategy and doing exactly the same thing then the answer is obvious – no.

However, there are obvious commonalities across markets in how medical thinking develops and is then put into practice. Again, it is not totally consistent across all markets, but there are common threads, in most therapeutic areas. Added to which the clinical database for the molecule is in many cases fixed, so we cannot significantly change the supporting evidence.

So, even though marketing is a complex discipline, influenced by all sorts of factors including culture and the local business environment, sometimes a pan-European approach to strategy makes good sense.

What is required to market successfully across the continent?

This is not just about a ‘top down’ approach; rather, it is about developing the best solution for as wide a geographic base as possible.

The simplistic answer is to go for a rigid definition of strategy by a European Regional Team which is then implemented to the letter by the local markets. We all know that is not the right way to go. People need to be more than operators; after all we are not computers!

So what exactly is a pan-European brand? Is it about the same name, logo and imagery? Not necessarily. Hence the need to ensure all markets fully understand those key parameters.

The key is to define what the brand is going to stand for in the target customers’ minds, i.e. its value proposition and positioning. It is also vital to be clear about what it will NOT stand for. Once we have defined that ‘box’ then each market knows where it can operate and into areas where it must not stray.

What we must not confuse is strategy and implementation. Strategy may be consistent but local execution may be different, due to local market forces and different competitive sets.

For example, Pfizer’s Celebrex was launched in many markets with a ‘power’ positioning, taking advantage of its first-to-market status in most places. But as it wasn’t first-to-market in the UK, where Vioxx had already made this territory its own. Celebrex had to adopt a completely different message set in this market while being true to the core global brand.

Alternatively, communicating the key global or pan-European brand values does not mean an inflexibility when it comes to the execution of marketing communications in different markets. Pfizer’s Lipitor used different visuals – and indeed different names – in different markets, yet the global brand strategy meant that the core message and values (more potent on LDL-C, extended efficiency on TG, simplicity of use) remained the same.

A significant challenge in the era of ‘managed markets’ is price and pricing strategy. Different countries use different approaches but most if not all European markets have some form of constraint on prescribing and or price.

With the increased use of reference pricing across Europe it is increasingly important to maintain an effective price corridor. If that means maintaining price in one market at the expense of local sales to ensure that the pan-European and hence profit can be maintained then so be it. Pfizer have done that with atorvastatin in Germany, where they have decided not to reduce the price to that of the Festebetrag.

Clearly there are implications for corporate and brand perception where price is maintained in a low cost market, but if the value proposition is strong enough this should not have a negative impact elsewhere. In addition, if the value proposition is strong, a proportion of patients may still be willing to pay; in Pfizer’s case 20% of them, based on market share. The impact on corporate perception may be more challenging; is it ethical to not market a product in a country to maintain price? Only time will tell.

In summary, pan-European is a necessity and a reality. Doing it well is the challenge, as it requires significant skills on the part of the European marketers to ensure that it is not all about the lowest common denominators.

The Author

Dr Paul Stuart-Kregor is a director of The MSI Consultancy.

Originally published in PM Europe, February 2008

The Needy Marketer


January 22nd, 2008

The pharma industry ought to boast some of the best marketers in the world. We attract an almost exclusively graduate intake, bringing in some of the best minds and brightest intellects. The challenges facing the pharma marketer are certainly changing, but then that’s probably true in most sectors. But few would seriously argue that as an industry we are right at the forefront of marketing excellence.

The question, given the quality of the raw material we attract, is why not? Surely our marketers are up to the job. So are they getting the guidance, help and support they need – and if not, where can they find it? Are we giving them the tools to perform?

Lots of difficult questions, and the temptation is to answer them with a series of inaccurate generalisations. Of course, there are many examples of true excellence in marketing departments throughout pharma, but I think it is safe to argue that there is also a lot of raw potential not being realised, because marketers are not being given -and in reality perhaps not even seeking – the development they need to build their skills and face the new challenges which are emerging.

The implications of this situation are clearly negative. Even if there was once a ‘golden age’, when competition was slight and the marketing job was relatively simple (and in reality that situation probably never existed), then things have certainly changed now. A considerably more complex customer structure, diverse market needs beyond the pure ‘efficacy safety tolerability’ play, increased competition and decreased differentiation have all made the marketer’s job still harder.

So are pharma marketers up to the job? In reality, this question should be split into two: are they intellectually capable? And do they have the training and experience necessary?

It’s difficult to answer anything other than ‘yes’ to the first question. The industry is stuffed with clever people; we attract some of the very best brains. All around the world, pharma marketing departments boast a remarkably similar group of people, in terms of intellect and attitude. So the raw material should certainly be equal to the task.

But what are our marketers receiving the training and development to give them the tools they need to do the job? This is the real issue, and it’s one which needs addressing if we are to avoid the parallel dangers of ineffective marketing, unmotivated individuals and unacceptable levels of staff churn.

Whilst everyone says that the job of pharma marketing is getting harder, a more accurate way of putting it would be that the job is getting more complex. There are far more things for the pharma marketer to consider, many more options on how they choose to deploy their time and resources. Issues such as market access, gaining access to funding for products whilst driving prescriber demand, and taking account of the impact of consumer influence – these are all things which were previously absent from the traditional pharma/prescriber axis.

A Curious Contrast

If you want to see what I mean about the lack of support given to marketers, you only need to look at the contrasting way we tackle preparing new sales people and new marketers for the job. A new member of the sales force will undergo a rigorous, intense induction, spending many weeks going through a training process before being let loose on real live customers.

Does that happen in marketing? Very rarely. Whether a new marketer comes via the traditional rep route, or whether from outside the industry, they are usually thrown in at the deep end and expected to learn on the job.

Why is this? Maybe because it’s always been done like that, or because so many who are already in the industry have come from the sales force. Clearly the scale is different: even a small pharmaco will have sufficient throughput of new reps to make developing a training structure viable, but the same cannot be said for marketing..

This gives marketing departments a great supply of people proving themselves in the field. This is the ultimate test of a marketing strategy – how it works in front of the customer. So the ‘sales to marketing’ career route makes a lot of sense.

But – and it’s a big but – the ability to succeed in the sales force does not necessarily translate into being an effective marketer. Wherever they enter marketing from, new product managers are often dropped straight into a relatively small team where lots of things need doing, right now. They are expected to hit the ground running, an attitude often perpetuated by managers who had the same experience and, like many consultants’ attitudes to the long hours endured by junior doctors, take a ‘I did it, so you should too’ stance.

But if we accept that a comprehensive training programme will make for a better and more effective sales person in the long term, then why do we not think the same when it comes to marketing?

All of this means that our marketers are not as developed for the job as they could be. They certainly have the intellectual capacity to be so, but they are not being given the tools and techniques to help their decision-making. So their capability ends up being dependent on their particular team’s clarity about tackling the task.

This is a bit like being taught to drive by your dad when you were 17. If you happened to have a dad who himself had been taught to drive well, then you stood a better chance of a thorough grounding yourself. But if he learnt from his dad, who also didn’t teach him particularly well, you stand no chance of becoming a good driver. So it is with marketers – because much of the learning is on the job and team-based, the quality of learning will be dependent on the quality of the team – as well as the time they can spend developing you.

With fragmented training, you may learn some or even most of what you need to know, but it’s unlikely that it will all fit together when you try and relate that knowledge to developing clear brand strategies and marketing plans. It’s all a bit hit and miss.

Clarity and Structure

So if the quality of training is largely dependent on the team, and especially the manager, what can they do to ensure that it meets the needs of both the individual and the company?

The first – and obvious – answer is that there has to be a clear and structured training programme which directly relates both to the competencies expected of the individual and what they need to be doing on a daily basis.

An A to Z of marketing is required with each part of the process leading logically to the next. Whilst most marketing plans across the industry address the same elements, such as segmentation, stakeholder mapping,, what is often missing is a route map of how to make all the elements of the plan fit together. Without this logical route-map it is not surprising the new product manager can get lost in the detail

To achieve this requires a mindset which concentrates not on process, but on outputs. If we teach our marketers that strategic thinking means creating graphs and spreadsheets, and that they should concentrate on operational detail, of course they will not see the bigger picture and become truly strategic thinkers. Too often the requirements of the current sales year, and how to achieve those, displace any thinking about why any given strategy might, or might not, be appropriate.

And don’t think that this training structure is only needed for new recruits into marketing. Even those ‘old-timers’ who have years of experience are facing many new challenges. Even if the marketing basics haven’t changed, the market has, and now marketers need additional tools and understanding to be able to identify who the new customers are, and to understand their needs. Or even just structured time out to think differently.

Never has continuing professional development been so important. And yet continuing professional development is, with a few exceptions, almost non-existent within the pharma marketing sector. Once someone is in place and is up to speed, it seems to be assumed that they will somehow gain the new skills they need through a process of osmosis.

Even for those companies with the foresight to provide training for new marketers the provision for senior marketers is almost always insufficient, and often recognised by the companies as being so. We can see a number of reasons for this, on top of the obvious one that people are busier than ever, and getting the job done always seems to take precedence over planning for future skills needs.

Perhaps there is a reluctance amongst more senior staff to admit, either to themselves or to others, that they need development. Many organisations have a culture in which it is assumed that their senior people should be capable of doing the job and performing at the top of their game.

This macho stance is dreadfully short-sighted. Yes, of course we expect our senior people to perform. But if we want them to be innovative to meet these new marketing challenges, and also if we want them to be happy, motivated and loyal, then we must provide them with the support to meet their development needs. Then they could do an even better, and a more enjoyable job.

Training ROI

In time and money terms, training is often viewed as a drain on resources. But just as we invest in research and development, marketing communications and sales forces – and expect to see a return – then pharma companies must view developing their marketing people as an investment. And as with any investment, they should be able to see a measurable return on that investment.

But marketing is more difficult to benchmark than sales, so some clarity is needed here. What are we expecting of our product managers? What is their current performance, and how can we compare it, both internally across the company, and externally across the industry?

Sadly, the basics of performance measurement – appraisals – are rarely rigorously applied for marketing staff when compared to the sales team- . How well they are done depends both on the culture of the organisation and the attitude of the individual manager. But if we don’t measure our people’s competencies and outputs against a clear idea of what we want them to do, then how can we hope to gain an insight into the return we are getting for investment in training? Just as any business process, training and development must be shown to add value.

The Needy Marketer

We shouldn’t view the fact that many marketers in our industry are ‘needy’ as a negative; we should accept that it’s a fact, and be pleased that most are willing and eager to learn to become more effective. Most realise that there is a constant need to evolve, and even if they are the best at something today, there is no guarantee that will still be the case tomorrow.

Because we recruit some of the brightest intellects into our industry, our people are often sponges for learning, and if we don’t fulfil their development needs we lose out in two ways: they will be less effective, and they will look elsewhere for the intellectual fulfilment that bright people always seek.

So those responsible for the effectiveness of marketing departments don’t have a choice. They should take a leaf out of the sales book and make sure that their new marketers are thoroughly grounded with the skills and tools they need to do the job, and not just assume they will learn as they go along. That means a structured approach, even where the numbers are relatively small.

They should have a clear idea of what their marketers should aspire to, both in terms of competencies and outputs. Then it’s a question of assessing where their teams are against these aspirations, and identifying the gaps.

This process will give you a clear idea of the learning outcomes you want to achieve, how any learning relates to what marketers actually do in their job, and what both employer and individual marketer are getting back as a return for their investment in time and money.

We are finally accepting that we need to understand our customers’ need, and fulfil them accordingly, to be effective. Now we must turn that same attitude towards the very people we are asking to do that, and make sure that our marketers are no longer needy as well.

Filling The Gaps

The most common shortcomings in pharma marketing competencies, from the point of view of senior marketers and product managers.

Senior Marketers

* Advanced strategy: predicting the future market, how to fit company capabilities to the market, dealing with portfolio brands….
* Innovation: How to do things differently
* Competitor Insight: Gaining insight into our competitors’ attitudes motivations and imperatives and hence predicting their actions (including war gaming)
* Market Access: Mapping the customer network, understanding key stakeholder needs and fitting company resources to key stakeholders

Brand Managers

* Strategic Marketing Planning: The A-Z of marketing and how to build a competitive plan for the brand
* Market Access: who are our key stakeholders, what our messages should be (including the value proposition) and how to communicate
* Segmentation: How to gain competitive advantage though segmentation

The Author

Gerard Doherty is a Managing Consultant at The MSI Consultancy.

Originally published in Pharmafocus, January 2008

Developing the Market


December 22nd, 2007

Introduction

When first presented to a doctor, a new product is generally assessed against and slotted into current practice. The net result is the product is compared to existing treatments and as we all know runs the risk of being only used where the doctors can themselves see a need, for example the ‘difficult to treat’ patient and/or where their treatments of choice have failed. That demands that as marketers we ensure effective, differentiated and meaningful positioning of our product from the outset.

But no matter how effective we are in positioning our product, there comes a time when we have soaked up all the available capacity in the market and so sales and/or market share growth begins to slow. That is to start considering Market Shaping/Market Development or Market Expansion, not when growth has stalled completely.

A number of factors should taken into consideration when deciding which approach to take and when, not least where the levers for growth lie and our own market position.

Logic suggests Market Shaping/Market Development comes first. Why? Because this is about changing current management or treatment practice of an existing market, rather than encouraging more patients in to see doctors, a slower and more expensive process, even when you have the ability to appeal directly to consumers.

Clearly if this is a relatively new or significantly underdeveloped market then Market Expansion will come much sooner, perhaps even before launch, as was the case with Viagra. Generally though, Market Expansion comes later, when the product has established a strong position in the existing market, to help ensure that the benefit of more patients being treated is felt by your product and not the competitors.

Developing or Shaping the Market by Increasing Patients Treated

How you develop or shape the market will depend on the specific situation in that market. If we use the patient flow (or patient pyramid) as our guide there can be a number of reasons why patients are not currently being treated. Our challenge is to identify where this is occurring in that patient flow, identify the barriers to current or more extensive treatment and any associated inhibitors; easier said than done in some cases. We then need to determine how best to change current practice or thinking by providing the ‘solution’ which may or may not be a medicine.

Firstly, patients may not actually be receiving prescriptions. They may have been identified and diagnosed as having the condition to which we can provide a solution, but they are not currently receiving a prescription medicine. After all, the first tenet of medicine is ‘do no harm’ so doctors may delay treating a patient at all, or suggest using something other than a prescription medicine. This can often be the case in early stages of a condition, perhaps when it is asymptomatic, and the doctor does not see an urgent need to treat..

Here we therefore need to demonstrate the sequelae of not treating these patients and convince the doctors of the need to treat early. This can be quite challenging when there may be no acute or apparently pressing need. Enlisting the help of acknowledged and respected ‘experts’ to change thinking and provide the evidence is therefore going to be crucial. However, this does not necessarily mean the traditional national or international key opinion leader (KOL). In many cases for general practitioners, a local specialist to whom the doctor refers patients can be just as or even more powerful in helping doctors see the need to treat the non or under treated patients.

Clearly if targets to which doctors agree they should be treating are lowered, this results in a larger potential patient population. Treatment of dyslipidaemia has changed significantly since the introduction of statins. Lower targets than the current 5 mmol/l for total cholesterol (as in the Quality Outcomes Framework or QOF) and 3 mmol/l for LDL-C are now being proposed (4 and 2 mmol/l to be exact), especially in high risk cases, such as those patients with established cardiovascular disease or diabetes, which is quite a challenge for doctors given the nature of the dose response for statins.

Another option is to develop the ‘thinking’ behind treatment. Once primary objectives have been achieved in the majority of the patient population, it is common to see goals being extended. For example, treating hypertension was initially about achieving a healthy blood pressure. However, now that available treatments have increased the chances of success, secondary goals are coming into play, for example protective effects on end organs to avoid damage.

It is important to remember that achieving behaviour change takes time. Firstly, there is a need for evidence to establish the benefit, then developing consensus on when and how best to treat patient populations will be vital before getting this is accepted in everyday practice. We know that here in the UK if it is not in QOF then it is not a priority within primary care.

Do not underestimate the challenge. Doctors will have already started to treat those patients with an obvious and pressing need. We need to demonstrate how to identify these other patients and why they should consider treatment i.e. change motivation and prescribing behaviour.

Obviously there is a limit to how far we can push this, particularly in this age of cost-effectiveness, evidence and restricted budgets. Unless we can convince the key decision makers of the need to treat then we may be facing a thankless task and perhaps risk losing credibility, potentially limiting any future development.

Developing the market through better diagnosis

Another area to consider is non-treated patient recognition or diagnosis. As we know, some patients are not actually diagnosed or are not diagnosed with the condition from which they are actually suffering.

There can be a number of reasons for this. In this day and age, unless there is a ‘test’ and a hard number which defines the disease or condition, then a straight forward diagnosis can be a challenge. We take it for granted that diagnosis is doctor’s key role, however it is more of an art than a science in some cases. Different diseases can present in the same way or one can mask another which makes the doctors life difficult. They do not deliberately miss the diagnosis rather it may be the nature of the condition or a lack of knowledge. In some cases they may give the patient a different, more palatable label, particularly if the treatments are very similar, but in general this is not deliberate.

Again we need to understand why this is happening. Is it a lack of knowledge? Is it down to diagnostic skill? Is there a lack of motivation to ‘look’ for or perhaps even treat these patients? Do doctors just not recognise the issue? GPs are generalists after all and see many different conditions.

Unless we can unlock the reasons behind it we may well throw lots of time, effort and money at the problem but to no avail. We will need to bring the issue of lack of recognition or appropriate diagnosis to their attention, in a non-threatening non-critical way. Telling a doctor he has got it wrong in an area that is considered a major skill is not going to produce positive results!

Once we understand the main reasons for this under diagnosis we can provide the ‘solution(s)’. Again there will be a requirement for consensus on the need to diagnose in particular patient groups, based on the consequences of not treating optimally. Working on the ‘whole’ undiagnosed population is just not going to be effective. Doctors will see that as a cynical attempt to build sales. Rather we have to create that elusive win-win, by uncovering a need, getting doctors to recognise and then act upon it.

Sometimes it may be that there is no simple way for prescribers to identify the relevant patients. In this instance some companies have needed to develop a specific test to identify the appropriate patient for treatment with their medicine. A good example is Herceptin and HER2 positive breast cancer. Just having the test does not necessarily mean treatment will be optimal for all suitable patients, but it will make a big difference.

Also, having the diagnostic test or tool does not necessarily mean it will be used. After all, you can give away tools but as with all things in life, those that are ‘free’ often do not create any real feeling of value in the recipient. They may just sit on a shelf somewhere.

We need to encourage the doctor to actually use the test or tool in their daily practice, and that is all about motivation. Doctors have to see the need and the value, to them, their practice and or their patients before they will do something different. Similar strategies to those for extending treatment are appropriate.

Sometimes what gets in the way of suitable patient identification or diagnosis is not the lack of will but lack of resources, usually time. Hence the classic, and now perceived by many UK general practitioner’s as the standard, solution being to provide a people resource to do the necessary screening, after the provision of asthma nurses by GlaxoWellcome many years ago.

However, all of these efforts to change doctor behaviour will be unsuccessful if there is not some form of positive feedback to show the doctor that they are doing the right thing, achieving positive results and making a difference.

Increasing Patient Presentation

It is always tempting to think that encouraging more patients to present to the doctor is the secret to developing the market. The problem is, if the doctor cannot readily diagnose or identify the appropriate patient, and is not willing to prescribe a suitable treatment, then much of that effort is wasted.

Hence Market Expansion is all about timing.

The majority of marketers will know that in an established market this is really suitable for the market leader. However, there are situations when a strong Number 2 in the whole market or even a more focussed player who is dominant in a particular segment can benefit from Market Expansion. It is all about linking the appropriate patients to your product in the doctor’s mind (aka effective, differentiated and meaningful positioning), and the more we can use patient pictures to help doctors make the link the better. After all, that is what they do, link patients to treatments.

The problem with Market Expansion is that it can be a slow and expensive process as we are trying to change patient behaviour in an environment when we cannot speak directly to them about our product.

Clearly we can raise awareness of the disease and encourage interest in seeking a solution, but what we do not want to do is encourage large numbers of the ‘worried well’ to seek treatment. Doctors already have many of those, and it will do us no favours if we are seen to add significantly to this group.

Once again it is about first establishing the recognition, consensus, appropriate action and positive feedback, and removing any significant barriers (e.g. resource and or funding, as is the case with Alzheimer’s for example) before encouraging new patients to seek treatment – not the other way round.

Do you need to develop or expand the market?

Market Development and Market Expansion are challenging, time and resource consuming strategies. They definitely have their place at the appropriate time in the lifecycle of many products.

However, many marketing strategies seem to focus far too much on new patient, and also prescriber, capture. Are we sure that we have exhausted the potential among existing patients, that is are we maximising compliance and adherence? Too often this way to increase sales is ignored.

So next time you start thinking about Market Development or Market Expansion, make sure you are also focusing on your existing patients.

The Author

Dr Paul Stuart-Kregor is a Director at The MSI Consultancy.

Article originally published in Pharmaceutical Marketing, December 2007

Plugging The Growth Gap: Part One


August 22nd, 2007

In the first of a three-part series, Alex Blyth from The MSI Consultancy introduces a novel solution to the age-old problem of finding ways to deliver growth across a portfolio of in market brands.

Pharma marketing managers often find themselves having to deliver growth across their brands which has been promised – either externally (for example to stakeholders), or to meet internal expectations. Whilst these predictions are sometimes made more with delighting the audience in mind rather than reflecting the true potential of a brand, the marketer nevertheless faces this ‘Growth Gap’.

Whether it’s at portfolio level across the whole pharma company, or at business unit level across a product range, meeting these raised expectations is often one of the hardest tasks a pharma marketer can face. How can you identify opportunities for growth which may have been missed, and how can you ‘rev up’ opportunities and measure them to ensure they maximise the potential for growth?

As so often happens in marketing, the answer lies in taking a rigorous scientific approach, or rather combining ‘art’ with that science to develop breakthrough formulas for success.

Sounds too good to be true? Over the next three months, I’ll be explaining how it can be done. And this isn’t just theory: in the final part of this series, I will use a real case study to show how this process helped to build a robust three year plan with a 71% sales increase – a planned ROI of over 200%!

The key to plugging the growth gap is what I call ‘Structured Ideas Management’ – which is where art meets science. First, scientific analysis tells us where the growth and innovation problems are; the ‘art’ is then in solving problems and creating better ways of doing things. Science then steps back in to help evaluate the opportunity to ensure that it will maximise the chance of success.

The basic premise is that by understanding the drivers behind commercial success, we can understand what is required to excel.

‘Structured Ideas Management’ may be a relatively new concept in our industry, but it is an accepted way of doing things in other sectors, especially in electronics and the automotive industry. As the name suggests, it creates a more structured environment than pure ‘Blue Sky’ brainstorming. By establishing the criteria for rejection of ideas first, it focuses the minds of the ideas generators.

It relies on an analysis of the existing business to establishing those factors with which you can screen out ideas that will not work: perhaps because they are not practical, or because they deliver too small a ROI, or simply because they don’t match the strategic objectives of the company. Or it might be simply that the organisation doesn’t have the capabilities to deliver a particular idea (and has no prospect of acquiring them).

By adopting a scientific approach, you can then identify the gap which exists in most organisations between the current planned growth plan (which will include natural underlying growth) and the target growth, which may have been expressed as much as an optimistic aspiration as a realistic goal!

By demonstrating a robust system of measurement, the pharma marketer can show whether they are maximising the ROI on current activity – as well as making the business case for why further investment is needed to plug the growth gap.

What is needed in such a situation is what I call ‘Growth Fuel’: it’s a tried and tested decision support process to help fill that gap. Whether it’s investigating the value of taking best practice from one market to another, or a way of revving up an existing plan, or implementing a step change and doing things fundamentally differently; Growth Fuel should secure management buy in to an objective, fair and robust process that does not create unnecessary work in chasing unrealistic aspirations.

Once the growth gap has been identified, the process of filling it with Growth Fuel essentially has three steps. First comes Opportunity Generation, in which identifying and developing opportunities for growth precedes screening out unviable ones. The second stage is Opportunity Assessment, a rigorous process which assesses the attractiveness and fit of each opportunity against a weighted set of criteria and objectively selects the financially attractive ones.

The last stage is Strategy and Execution, where strategic options are financially assessed and an optimal strategy and strong business case is built, before being implemented.

This Growth Gap Tool is a sophisticated, structured and transparent way of tackling a straightforward problem. Importantly, it maximises the chances of success, and removes much of the risk of unnecessary work and low returns which can come from trying out new ideas to achieve growth. It’s not a magic bullet – but it is a powerful way to plug that growth gap.

Next month: Generating opportunities for growth, and assessing their chances of success.

The Author

Alex Blyth is a Senior Consultant for The MSI Consultancy Ltd

Article originally published in Pharmaceutical Marketing, August 2007

Working in Consultancy


August 22nd, 2007

Dr Paul Stuart-Kregor argues that a period spent on the consultants’ side of the fence is a big plus point in a pharma marketing career.

For most pharmaceutical marketers, true career planning is not something which is very structured, or even much thought about. For most, the tried and tested route through a science degree, a spell on the road as a rep, followed by the move into product management, and then climbing the greasy pole to more senior marketing positions, is something that they assume will be the secret to future success.

Because it’s such a well-worn road, few consider stepping off it and trying another route. Which is strange, because whilst the traditional path works for some, many more can end up frustrated that they are not fulfilling their potential or achieving what they feel they are capable of.

As our industry rationalises, centralises and consolidates, this situation could well become more common. Fewer companies means less opportunity to gain a variety of experience, which in the long run is bound to hold a career back.

I’m not going to suggest that there is a magic bullet to overcome this problem of lack of opportunity, but it has always been a mystery to me why so few great marketers are reluctant to step outside the industry to spend a period (or indeed, the rest of their career) in consultancy.

Now, I should at this point declare an interest. I am a Director of The MSI Consultancy, which is a consultancy specialising in helping the pharmaceutical industry. Yes, that gives me a partial view; but I have also worked on the client side and genuinely believe that many pharma marketing careers, especially those of the most talented people, could be massively boosted by spending some time on the other side of the fence.

It’s difficult to think of anywhere else you could accelerate your career as rapidly and as comprehensively. The equivalent of years of experience can be gained in a relatively short period of time, as well as learning new skills and creating the kind of networks most pharma marketers can only dream of.

So what motivates someone to step outside the ‘safety’ of the industry (although I would contend that is now a fallacy) and into consultancy? What are the benefits and pitfalls? And why do so many in our industry view – wrongly – such a move as career suicide?

To find out, I’ve been speaking with two new colleagues, both of whom have very recently taken the plunge. They are both experienced pharma marketers, with gold standard careers within the industry. Neither has been forced through circumstance to seek employment in consultancy – they have both taken the decision positively.

Dr Richard Jones joined MSI in May after a career spanning 20 years experience in the pharmaceutical sector, most recently as International Marketing Manager in the International and GI Unit at Shire Pharmaceuticals. So why did he decide to make the move at this point in his career?

I had worked within a rapidly-growing pharma company for a number of years in various senior marketing and commercial positions and had reached a point where I was looking for totally different challenges. I had been approached by other pharma companies with offers for senior international roles within global teams but I saw the challenges being very similar to what I had already faced, albeit for differing brands/therapeutic areas.

“By moving to a role in consultancy, I felt I would be exposed to many different companies and get a better understanding of different operational models and modus operandi. I would also be exposed to many different challenges through the various and varied projects I would be working on, and at differing levels – global teams, local teams, market shaping, re-launching brands and so on.

I saw this as a great opportunity to have a broader experience base and to attain a fuller understanding of this industry.

Although at an earlier stage in his career, Michael Salmon is also keen to expand his marketing and strategic skill set beyond his brand manager experience. After five years at AstraZeneca – including winning their annual Marketing Excellence award in 2005 – he became a consultant with MSI in July.

I feel consultancy experience will provide me with broader skills through working with multiple companies and projects, and hence be more employable in the long term. A consultant role can also allow you to go deeper and specialise in the areas that you prefer – for example an area of marketing like quantitative marketing.

With consultancy you are able to work with multiple companies and therapy areas in a short time frame. Another advantage is that you do more thinking as opposed to doing – the latter being a predominant part of brand management.

It has to be said that working in consultancy is not for everyone. It is certainly a different way of working, and although the perception that consultants work longer and harder than their industry colleagues may not be entirely accurate, the nature of the job means that there are probably more immediate commercial pressures.

The flip side to this is a world which is far removed from the politics and strictures of big company life, a significant attraction for some who make the move. “To a certain extent, you can dictate your working environment and eventually determine your projects,” says Jones. “This is different to working in the industry – although it does depend very largely on your client’s demands. However, your life revolves less around e-mails and meetings, and more about thinking and analysis.

You need to be prepared to ‘close’ potential sales as a consultant to maintain and open new accounts. This is essential, as no matter how good a consultant you are, you are only successful if you get the business. In the industry, the customer/client sets are mainly internal, and whilst ideas and recommendations are ‘sold’, the transactions are normally not financial. Therefore, a consultant needs to be prepared to sell and go after the business.

Perhaps the biggest fear is that moving across to consultancy will close the door to returning to the industry at some stage in the future. In reality, this concern is unfounded – I have seen many people successfully build up their skill sets in consultancy before taking them back into the industry, usually at a much more senior level than left.

I have no concerns about moving back into pharma companies, consultancy experience would be a huge advantage,” says Salmon. “It will allow me to develop contacts in multiple companies, and an understanding of multiple therapy areas. It will also potentially open doors in more strategic roles or higher level roles in pharma companies as opposed to pure marketing roles.

Jones agrees: “There is a tendency to view the agency side as the “dark side”, with associated connotations. Having stepped over the line, there is a fear of not being able to cross back. I personally do not share this fear, and indeed see having consultancy experience as a key factor in my personal development plan which will greatly benefit me in the future.

The key point here, is that those who succeed in their careers and get where they want to go have a plan – what Richard Jones calls his ‘personal development plan’. This forces you to work out what skills, experience and networks you need to build up to achieve what you want to (and indeed identify what those goals are in the first place).

Although it won’t be for everyone, a period spent working in consultancy, gaining a much wider variety of experience and skills, as well as the commercial nous which becomes more and more vital the further up the corporate tree you want to go, can be very beneficial.

Although the fear does exist that leaving the industry will be an irreversible step, the opposite is true: the skills and experience you gain working alongside multiple clients makes you more attractive to future employers. And that’s the best way of avoiding that frustrating career stagnation in a role which is underusing your abilities.

The Author

Dr Paul Stuart-Kregor is a Director of The MSI Consultancy Ltd

Article originally published in Pharmaceutical Marketing, August 2007

How Better Customer Insight Can Drive Increased Prescribing


July 26th, 2007

It should be a very simple equation: if you can understand what motivates clinicians – and all the other prescribing influencers – to prescribe a particular treatment, you can adapt your marketing to ensure that you are pressing those ‘hot buttons’.

A vital part of this is understanding how shifting NHS priorities affect these prescribing triggers. In a healthcare system where an ever increasing number of stakeholders (both in the NHS and outside it) influence prescribing behaviour, ensuring that your marketing message hits the spot is the key to success in a complicated marketplace.

Using market research to try and find out exactly where and what that ‘spot’ is, is nothing new. But how often does it give pharma companies the real insight they need to adapt their marketing to be fully effective. Too often market research is used to try and prove what brand guardians (and often senior management) think is the case – rather than genuinely seeking out new knowledge to improve their understanding of the customer.

Truly insightful research should find something you didn’t already know previously, which will help you guide your marketing. To achieve this requires far more than a well-executed market research programme (although that’s vital too). What it needs is a level of focus which is sadly all too often lacking. But achieve it and you have a very powerful tool to pull those prescribing triggers and drive increased sales.

We so often assume that the first product to market in any particular therapy area will always be the one which sticks in the mind of the prescriber, but this is not necessarily so. The product which will stick best will be the first one which is positioned to best meet the customers needs – and this quite often means we need to communicate at an emotional as well as a functional level. As Rees and Trout say in their ’22 Immutable Laws of Marketing’: “Marketing is not a battle of products, it’s a battle of perceptions; and sometimes it’s better to be first in the mind than to be first in the marketplace.”

Get under the skin of your customers , develop true insight into their needs, and you can become positively positioned in their mindsets, even if your product is not first to market, or even on paper the best. It’s very powerful.

As ever, the starting point for this process has to be the customer (and not your product). You need to identify what change in behaviour you require from your customer in order to achieve your objectives. If you can understand that, and also who and what might influence your customer, then you can tailor your marketing accordingly, both directly to the customer and also to all of those influencers, both clinical and non-clinical.

In the end, what will persuade a customer to change their behaviour will be if they are convinced that in doing so their needs will be better met – whether this be functional clinical needs, role based needs or personal/emotional needs. Pharma has grasped this concept for some time, but traditionally we have concentrated on the basic, obvious needs of efficacy, safety and tolerability.

Many marketers will be familiar with Maslow’s ‘Hierarchy of Needs’, which identifies a pyramid of need ranging from the basic at the bottom, through to what he calls ‘self-actualisation’ at the top. In pharma marketing terms, efficacy, safety and tolerability are basic needs, and ones which most prescribers will now take as read.

So the differentiation can only come further up the need pyramid, and that means gaining a real understanding of the more complex and more sophisticated needs which will impact on their prescribing decision. Often pharma marketers only think in terms of what the solutions might look like, rather than trying to visualise the little details which will change behaviour.

Using research only to look at the basic needs of doctors may give you some data, but it certainly won’t give you customer insight – not in any meaningful way which will help you shape your marketing effectively.

In practice, the other needs we need to consider can be split into two categories: role-based needs, and personal needs. The first of these are defined by the factors which impact on what the clinician needs to happen to fulfil their role and accounts for the influences and influencers impacting them. These might be achieving financial targets or achieving agreed objectives with their employers. If a Trust’s priority is to keep a group of patients out of hospital and in primary care, then if the pharma company can persuade the prescriber that its product will achieve this, this message will have a big impact on prescribing. But you need to know what the priorities for the doctor are first.

In a system where the patient is increasingly viewed as a ‘healthcare consumer’, the need to keep the patient onside is an important role-based need for doctors. The NHS is increasingly building community-based services where patients must be motivated and empowered, and this impacts greatly on the prescriber’s decision-making.

The other – less rationale needs that we often need to account for are the personal needs of doctors. The more emotional, personal opinion that impacts on his beliefs, goals, attitudes and beliefs. Healthcare professionals will never directly say as much, but just like you and me, all prescribers are human, and therefore there will be emotional factors which will affect the way they make prescribing decisions.

Traditionally market researchers have shied away from digging too deeply into this important aspect of prescribing triggers, and not just because it is difficult to unearth the truth. It is sometimes said that because such emotions are intensely personal, that it is simply too complicated to build them into the equation.

However, a well thought-through and well-executed piece of research will be able to identify trends or segments with similar needs, beliefs, attitudes or goals.

What we are talking about here are emotions, and the doctor who wears his or her heart on their sleeve is few and far between. But just because they don’t immediately open up about it, clinicians – like all of us – have an emotional side which drives their decision-making; they are not just prescribing machines. Quantitative market research cannot capture those human and emotional triggers – that requires true insight.

So given all of this, how do you go about gaining the insight? How do we ensure we dig down deep enough into functional, role based and emotional needs to ensure we build a differentiating product proposition that ensures we are optimally placed in the customers mind?

Perhaps the first step is to identify what we really mean by insight. Chambers Dictionary describes it as “imaginative penetration”, which although incomplete as a definition, starts to express the difference between insight and data. It’s only insight if it tells you something you didn’t already know, which is useful to you.

In the pharma marketing sense, insight is about looking at the situation, understanding the challenge and, crucially, understanding the depth of information you need for your brand. If you don’t know this, then you cannot structure your research to find it, and then no matter how well-executed your research is, it won’t give you the insight you need.

Achieving it should be viewed as a four step process, with the implementation of the research not occurring until step three. This proper consideration and preparation is the key, because if you can’t identify what insight you need, you won’t know what to look for.

The first step is to define the problem, and agree the research objectives. What is our business issue? What level of insight do we require? How much do we need to explore role based and emotional needs? This means knowing the business issue you are facing, what information you need – and why. It’s important to stay focussed at this stage, and avoid the common temptation to ‘test something else at the same time, while we’re doing the research’. You’d be surprised how often this happens.

It is important that everyone buys into the objectives of the research at this stage, because you are setting out to gather things you don’t yet know. So inevitably some of those things will not fit into your current way of thinking, and you need to be prepared to take those insights on the chin and develop your approach accordingly. Accepting this before you are faced with the situation is easier to deal with.

Step two is developing the research plan and methodology, and this will be informed by the needs identified in step one. Clearly this is not as straightforward a process i.e. when you are seeking personal needs than when you are seeking more tangible treatment needs, so confidence in your market research agency is crucial.

At this stage you also need to work out what flexibility you will build into the methodology, because as you start to gain insight you may need to change the questions you are asking and revisit the whole process.

The third step involves implementing the research. Again, it’s useful to have interim steps here, including a pilot so that you can test whether you are gathering the insight you need and adjust the process as necessary. Many product managers are unwilling to challenge their market research agencies once the process is underway, but it’s important that you do. Constantly ask yourself – and the agency – “am I learning something new?” If the answer is no, you are missing out on the insight.

The final step is making sure that the results are reported. There is little point gaining insight if it is not acted upon. Because you will be hearing things that are new to you, and not just confirmation that what you thought is right, you need to be prepared to hear things in the presentation which may be difficult to accept internally.

You may need to pre-empt political problems by priming senior management. But if your organisation is genuinely committed to gaining and using customer insight to drive its marketing, then that does imply an open corporate mind.

Customer insight is a hugely powerful thing. To make the most of it means getting away from the too-often-seen situation where market research is driven by questions asked by senior management, rather than by a genuine desire to understand what drives the customer – and a willingness to change what you do accordingly, in line with the customers’ needs. The question in any organisation is whether everyone is prepared to buy into a process of, in Chambers’ delightful phrase, ‘imaginative penetration’.

Mapping Customer and Influencers

If we accept that the prescriber should be at the centre of any marketing campaign, then insight into his or her motivations is crucial. But unless you also grasp the drivers for all the people who will influence that prescriber – and who may have a big sway over their role-based and personal needs – then you are not getting the whole picture.

This too can be summarised in a four-step process:

Step One

Identify the Primary Customer and the behaviour change you require from them. This could be something as simple as isolating a group of clinicians and associating ‘perform the new treatment’ as the desired change in behaviour.

Step Two

Map what needs to be in place to allow this behaviour change to happen. These may relate to resources, support, guidance or procedure (such as training, support of professional bodies, equipment requirements or simple motivation to treat).

Step Three

Expand your ‘map’ to identify the individuals and groups associated with each individual requirement – the range could include medical colleges, patients, nurses, local payers, business managers, peers; the list can get very long.

Step Four

Categorise the customers and influencers in terms of the nature of their influence rather than by pure job or group titles. The nature and role of their influence is much more important and people with very different titles may have similar ways of influence e.g. commissioners vs. opinion formers vs. providers vs. goals setters or regulators.

The Author

Jon Bircher is a senior consultant with The MSI Consultancy.

Originally published in Pharmafocus, July 2007

Communicating With Key NHS People


July 22nd, 2007

Communicating with key people in a rapidly changing NHS requires looking at the bigger picture – and a better understanding of what is driving those changes, says Jon Bircher.

Most marketers in the pharma industry understand the need to get alongside and talk to key people in the NHS – and yet as an industry we haven’t yet cracked it. Because we don’t always fully understand why and how that investment in time, effort and resources can pay off, we are not always maximising the benefits of those communications channels.

Partly, of course, this is because pharma has always been driven by sales targets – in other words short-term goals, making an ‘instant’ return. That has some validity, of course, given that we are a business like any other, and one which has seen our opportunities to reap return on significant investment truncated by various pressures.

But there is a danger here. Thinking too short-term, and not investing in building longer-term relationships with our key NHS customers, will have profound effects. So why aren’t we doing it well enough yet?

Much has been written, both here and elsewhere, about the nature of the new NHS, and I don’t propose to repeat that now – if you don’t know yet what is going on, you’re in the wrong industry. We simply have to accept that the NHS contains pretty much all of our important customers in the UK, and so we have to build our relationships within the context of all that change, like it or not.

And understanding what is happening is the crucial first step to achieving that. As the number and type of customers grows, we have to get a grip on this new plurality, and consider carefully just who are the ‘key people’ we should be talking to.

Understanding Local Health Economies

Traditionally, pharma has divided NHS customers into distinct groups of stakeholders, and targeted different messages for each group. So GP teams spoke to GPs, hospital reps to hospital doctors, and for the more enlightened, NHS teams built relationships with non-prescribers. How well this ‘separate bucket’ model has worked is open to debate, but what is unarguable is that such an approach is no longer valid.

Instead, we have to consider our communications in the context of local health economies – increasingly the driving force behind most health decisions, including prescribing.

It’s clearly nonsense for NHS teams to undertake market shaping or patient identification work if the sales reps continue doing the usual short-term thing of trying to capture as many patients as possible. Likewise, how in tune are we with the local health economy, how much are we partnering the NHS if the hospital sales reps continue creating hospitals discount schemes that clearly don’t fit with the needs of the whole local perspective?

Surely we should be fitting our offer into the context of common health system goals. Pharma has to keep up with these, and make sure that its communications are consistent across local health economies to make sure that NHS needs are being met. Only then will we stand a chance of meeting our commercial objectives.

Communication with key NHS contacts will only be successful if we concentrate on customers needs, goals and priorities .This means getting an insight into what life is like within the NHS for these people, and especially understanding the sometimes contradictory priorities they face. If we in pharma can start to understand what that feels like, who and what are the major influencers/ influences, then we will start to really understand the needs of our customers, whoever they might be.

What Success Looks Like

The first thing to think about, then, is exactly who the key stakeholders are, and, crucially, how they fit in with each other. Alongside this, it’s important to look at two things in parallel: what those stakeholders’ needs, goals and priorities are; and how those can fit with our own commercial objectives. Understanding what success looks like is not as simple as it perhaps once was. It’s no longer about capturing short-term sales to meet targets against prescribers; it’s about making sure that our longer-term (commercial) objectives fit in with the needs of the whole local health economy.

Knowing what our customers’ needs, goals and priorities are is the first step. .We then need to establish what the desired behaviour change is and what needs to take place for them to do that. Once you have got to grips with that, you’ll know what the opportunities – and the barriers – are, and therefore what capabilities are required to align your activity and your communications.

It’s no good simply looking at one part of the NHS, though. Increasingly, there is interplay of influencers, and not realising what impact that interlinked influence has will mean your communication will be ineffective. Perhaps the biggest change of all in the NHS is that interlinking of influence on prescribing decisions – so you have to look at the whole picture.

Only when you have this level of understanding can you start to think about how to build effective and consistent communications with the NHS.

It’s about building genuine partnerships with specific health economies more than simply prescribing individuals. This requires much more of an account based focus where we align goals, agree the appropriate patient and consistently communicate to all stakeholders.

The word partnership is defined by some NHS people in a different way to how you or I might define it. In general, NHS people view partnerships, especially with the pharma industry, as being one-sided. But it is possible to find genuine partnerships, but only where all concerned are truly going for the same goal.

You simply can’t claim that you are partnering the NHS if your reps are pulling sales through inappropriately. Instead, you have to create a situation where you are helping to shape the environment alongside your key NHS partners – and then your reps are pulling through appropriate patients. And that means in many cases a fundamental change in thinking.

Overcoming Scepticism

Just as reps are going to have to think more strategically, it’s fair to say that NHS teams are going to have to start thinking more commercially. The new NHS is a world of increased transparency, so we can’t – and indeed shouldn’t – seek to hide why we are here as an industry. Provided we can convince our customers that our commercial objectives are in line with their own health and health economics objectives, that shouldn’t be a problem, although this will require a cultural shift from both sides.

That shift in thinking requires us to consider all the appropriate stakeholders in an environment, and that means waking up and thinking about how we’re viewing the customer, who they are, and what the joint objective is. And that can only happen in an atmosphere of openness and frankness, especially given that there is genuine scepticism on the NHS side, based mainly on their experiences of pharmaceutical companies pulling them in different directions in the past. (And let’s not ignore the fact that there is a degree of scepticism on the pharma side as well, and if we don’t overcome this, we have no chance of aligning ourselves with our customers’ objectives.)

Let’s not kid ourselves here: whilst there may be some scepticism about all business within the public sector, it reaches a peak in the way NHS views pharma, based on previous, behaviours and relationships.

Moving forward, then, we need to adopt a more contractual approach – perhaps the word ‘compact’, a popular concept in the public sector environment, suggesting a consensual and mutually beneficial statement of intent, is this time appropriate.

It’s no longer simply about doctors having all the power to write prescriptions. That this still needs saying in 2007 is in itself an indictment of our industry’s slowness in embracing change. Yes Doctors are still extremely important but many companies are still struggling to understand the fact that they need to account for the needs of all the customers that impact a prescription, although to be fair some have radicalised their approach, and some are looking at completely different models of provision.

Effective Communication

Of course, let’s not lose sight of the fact that the pharma industry needs to pull through sales in order to survive, and indeed to provide investment for research and development for future therapies. So ultimately the aim of building better communications and long-term relationships is indeed to pull through sales. What has changed is that those sales need to be appropriate, both for the pharma company, but also for local health economies (or ‘accounts’).

Having established exactly who the customer(s) is/are in the new NHS, what their needs are, and what needs to happen for them to change their behaviour, we now have to engage with these key stakeholders as soon as possible.

Building a clear and transparent relationship means putting your cards on the table about your own objectives, so that you can try and find commonality in your goals. If you can genuinely work together to identify and prioritise those goals, then you are in a position to capture those appropriate patients.

I mentioned that a new thinking had to be brought about across all teams in pharma, and that includes the sales teams, who of course still have a role to play in all of this. Once common goals have been identified, both GP sales teams and hospital sales teams can work with individual doctors to help them identify patients who are best suited for treatment. Getting the right patient on the right drug is – or certainly ought to be – high on the list of the industry’s objectives, just as much as it should be on the NHS’s agenda.

Another key advantage of this approach is that it becomes something more than selling product post-launch. If you can engage with the NHS and understand its needs, you can engage with people much earlier on in the process, well before launch. This means you can make sure that trial designs meet actual NHS needs, which in turn will lead to a greater chance of success of the launch itself, with your customers’ needs met, and your USP based on real, rather than assumed, customer requirements.

Building effective communications and strong relationships within the NHS is not simply about adapting to a new environment – it is much more than this. It’s about a significant cultural shift, for the industry and for the NHS. We need develop relationships that allow honest and transparent debate in order to align objectives.

The NHS is rapidly identifying the patient who would be most appropriate for our brands so lets work together, engage early and help them identify the appropriate patients that allow the NHS to hit its objectives and pharma to meet its commercial objectives. In order to do this we require deeper insight into the needs, goals, priorities and drivers across local health economies (‘accounts’) and consistent communication with all customers within them.

Get this right, and you can build a significant competitive superiority – and what company wouldn’t put that high on their own list or priorities?

The Author

Jon Bircher is a Senior Consultant for The MSI Consultancy Ltd

Article originally published in Pharmafocus, July 2007

Key Issues in Strategic Planning


June 26th, 2007

Every year at about this time or a little earlier, we start the process of ‘strategic’ planning.

The annual planning process, for all its focus on analysis, or template completion, can easily fall into the apparently comfortable tactic of merely updating the activity from last year’s plans. Often, however, what is really needed is a fresh approach which can pay dividends.

Approaches to planning differ, depending upon the attitude and culture of the company involved, which in turn affect the relative importance given to different elements of the process and the output. Some companies are heavily financially oriented, making the desired output more focused on numbers than the thinking behind those numbers. Other organisations focus heavily on the resource implications of the tactical plan, and particularly sales force allocation and efficiency.

Not all companies perform truly strategic (long -term) market-centred planning, but all companies generally aim to produce a set of financial forecasts. The major differences are in the way they get there and as a consequence the basis on which those forecasts are derived.

First and foremost, the organisation needs to be clear about what issues can get in the way of developing a sound strategic plan before deciding on an appropriate approach.

Clearly all planning is driven to an extent by profit and financial forecasts but there is a need to be clear what else the plan has to deliver for the organisation, the individual, and the brand – the planning ‘need’ – otherwise the process used may be sub-optimal. Why does the organisation need a plan? What is it meant to deliver over and above the financial projections?

Many companies are often unaware of the issues and constraints that will affect the planning process and output , for example the local operating company situation. Are the right resources, the right experience and the right information available at a local level to develop and complete the plan? Can the local markets get the right quality of information they need to drive good quality thinking? If not, then how can this be provided to ensure the right level of thinking is achieved? It could also be that the chosen approach is too sophisticated or inappropriate to deliver the required answers. For example, the process may have all the ‘standard’ elements of analysis but there is no thought given to what each element is telling them.

All companies do have a structured process but if the process does not drive the necessary thinking then the resulting plans can be limited. If the process does not challenge the planners to consider different ways of doing things but is merely a set of agreed templates and a time line for deliverables, the resultant forecast simply becomes a straight line projection from historical sales data, and activity remains the same as last year no matter whether or not things are changing in the market. This is the apparently ‘safe’ option but it rarely maximises return on investment and is often not safe at all.

Above all the process needs to raise the right questions, stimulate debate both internally and with external stakeholders, and force conclusions to be drawn from the analysis and interpretation of information that can then form the basis for strategy development.

And finally, senior management by their actions and questions often demonstrate that all they are really interested in are the numbers, with no challenge or credence given to the thinking behind those numbers. Even though a thorough process is used to arrive at a market -based forecast, senior management just focus on the revenue with/without profit Sometimes the budget or forecast even comes before the planning/thinking in time, and at other times it is ‘imposed’ so the plan reflects how to achieve it, not whether it is at all achievable.

There are three very different approaches to strategic planning in our experience:

The data-driven approach is based on hard data collected from a variety of sources, both primary panels and syndicated data, from which a market model is then built by brand from the bottom up. Issues are then identified but there seems to be no real focus on what drives success in local markets, or on what competitors will do and the impact of their actions. This approach can simply lead to ‘more of the same’, making a projection based on the previous year and no real change in approach, with the whole focus being on next year’s revenue. While many companies may not use such an apparently numbers-focused approach they still act in the same way, with the forecast being the key, rather than the rationale behind it.

To overcome the inevitable local variances in both resource and/or experience and to ensure a consistent base for review, many companies utilise a template-led approach . This consists of a pre-defined plan with key headings that can be amplified or contracted, but with certain key elements which must be completed. This option works well as it provides a structured process for analysis, with check questions at each stage. However in some cases we have seen that such an approach can still be very financially focused. Sometimes it does not analyse the brand and company strengths and weaknesses in a meaningful market-centred manner, to enable a market -led SWOT analysis and often there is still not enough competitive focus.

The next level is often seen in the ‘marketing excellence’ approach, where the organisation provides an integrated planning tool comprising standard marketing planning software. In a sophisticated example this allows local working but is linked into a central supporting database, with aspects that can be adapted and others that are fixed. The beauty of such a process is that it is transparent, allowing a clear overview of who is performing well, and enabling experience and successes to be shared. However when this is a relatively new process people tend to take time to get to grips with the process resulting in ‘doing the process’ rather than really thinking about what each step is telling them. Moreover for this approach to be used effectively, senior management must understand the process very well so that they can interrogate the people who are developing the plan.

Efforts to plan correctly often fail due to poor alignment between personal and corporate goals – people are often rewarded for achieving short-term deliverables with secure outcomes rather than longer term brand building and innovation or driving change.

In summary the key issues in strategic planning are:

  • Not being clear about the planning ‘need’
  • Not being aware of the issues and constraints that will affect the planning process and output
  • Approach too sophisticated or not appropriate to deliver the required answers
  • The financial forecast is all that matters, with the thinking behind those forecasts being ignored or not challenged/considered
  • Process not challenging people to think or act differently
  • Insufficient external focus: environment and/or competitors
  • Lack of real focus on (new) opportunities for growth
  • Poor expertise at local level
  • More tactical/operational than strategic focus

So what works well in overcoming some of these inherent problems? Ensure a complete and effective structured process to develop the analysis base. Output should focus on alternative scenarios and ‘what ifs’ working from a base plan. Thereby, focusing on incremental growth and type of incremental drivers that need to be addressed. Build market -based forecasts by brand at country level. This requires country plans and budgets built from bottom up by brand and forecasts linked to hard data and clear market maps. Allow enough time for countries to make amendments based on sound strategic thinking and then finalise forecasts  do not just use Excel formulas. Balance the need for a ‘quick’ solution with a complete process (analysis and review). Value the process, including through management attitude, and align management with the strategy.

Key imperatives are to ensure a complete and effective structured process to develop the analysis base, with structured external and internal analysis, and check questions at each stage. The process should be transparent, reviewed by management so that the output is seen by senior management during budget process. Multi-functional teams should build plans with all key stakeholders involved, but led by marketing.

Recent surveys show that where companies use a good formal process, satisfaction with strategic planning is higher. Companies are looking more and more at processes that drive to different strategies and/or activities. However, there is a demand for a stronger link in pharma between action and reaction, i.e. if we do X then €Y will result.

Strategic planning should prepare executives to face the strategic uncertainties ahead, and serve as the focal point for creative thinking about the company or the brand’s vision and direction. It should also be about making choices between competing priorities, focusing on strategic as well as operational issues. This will ensure that progress against the strategic plan is monitored.

There are a number of ‘tricks of the trade’ that help in strategic planning. Among the best practice companies, executives who carry out strategy also make it, and plans reflect goals and challenges. It is important to use any plan to identify growth opportunities, both within and outside the core business. Monitoring progress against the strategic plan is critical and a key area for improvement.

It is important also that planning meetings are true ‘conversations’. Simple ‘tricks’, such as having only a small number of the right people in the meeting, can pay dividends. The process also takes time, so more than one meeting is required. It is also important to avoid combining strategy reviews with discussions of budgets and financial targets because when the two are considered together, short-term financial issues tend to dominate at the expense of long-term strategic ones.

The ideal process leads to strategic decisions that allow the company to meet goals and challenges. It assesses risks as well as benefits, but is based on fact, focusing on strategic issues, and is therefore not merely tactical. The ideal process ensures that those who will carry out strategy are involved in developing it, builds shared understanding of market dynamics, and emphasises discussion of issues not process.

Planning should build ‘prepared minds’ through dialogue to make sure that all decision makers involved have a solid understanding of the business, its strategy, and the assumptions behind that strategy. Then it will be possible for them to respond swiftly to challenges and opportunities as they occur during the year. No strategy process can guarantee great flashes of creative insight, but much can be done to increase the odds that they will occur. The process can be used to challenge assumptions and open people up to new thinking.

Core questions to answer in a strategic plan:

  • What is the scope/nature/dynamics of the market?
  • For what purpose, where, who is the customer?
  • How big are the opportunities? Where are the opportunities for growth?
  • Where are the most attractive opportunities?
  • What external factors/major events could have a positive or negative impact on my markets?
  • What are the key segments?
  • What capability is required to successfully compete? Where am I strong, where am I weak?
  • Which segments represent the most attractive commercial opportunities now and over the planning period?
  • What are the critical success factors?
  • What strategy or strategy options should we consider to evaluate optimal return?
  • What key business objectives should we aim to achieve?
  • Which strategy makes commercial sense  what would I recommend?
  • What specific actions are required to successfully implement the chosen strategy?
  • What performance areas need monitoring

The Author

Paul Stuart Kregor is a Director of the MSI Consultancy Ltd

Article originally publised in Pharmaceutical Marketing, June 2007

Quality of Life


June 22nd, 2007

Whatever product or brand is chosen for the purposes of this article, somewhere high on the list of its key features will be “Improves quality of life” or a similar phrase.

Comparing pharmaceutical marketing to fast-moving consumer goods (fmcg), the relative simplicity of the communication messages employed in what is such a sophisticated marketing environment often seems surprising. A few years ago, anyone looking at pharmaceutical sales aids, journal advertisements, mailers or leave-pieces would have been assured of finding, emboldened, those immortal words of “Effective, Safe and Well Tolerated”. That is not to say that these essential, entry-ticket items can be left out of a communication cascade, but it is what they actually mean, i.e. the benefits of these features, the functional and the emotional that can make a difference in markets where differentiation is increasingly hard to find.

Therefore marketers across the industry turned their attention to “Quality of Life” as at least this ought to tell the prescriber of a key benefit for them and their patient. However, as is often the case, everyone now claims their brand “Improves quality of life”. Unfortunately for us marketers, it seems this term has joined the list alongside efficacy, safety profile and tolerability – overused and now pretty meaningless. Coupled with the visualisation of quality of life into the ubiquitous “Smiling patient”, the advertising is pretty meaningless as well.

So how do we ensure our brand is not lumped in with all of the other bland marketing promising improved QoL without demonstrating what this actually means?

When either conducting or observing market research interviews with physician, nurse and patient it is essential to carefully note the reaction to the phrase “Improved Quality of Life”. At first glance, most respondents will instinctively remark that this is a positive attribute. However they often then go on to suggest that in reality this phrase is meaningless and unless it is put into context, then it will continue to be of little relevance to them. In these market research situations, almost all have said that, particularly, regarding the visual of a “happy patient” it is neither compelling nor motivating. Indeed many will go so far as to suggest that these clichéd images and phrases are a real demotivator as they reveal little or no understanding by the marketer as to the condition, or what the healthcare professional or patient being targeted needs.

We therefore need to think through why this might be the case. So often the QoL phrase is just a written claim that we do not actually bring to life for any of our customers or consumers and so we fail to really demonstrate that we understand what quality of life is condition by condition.

Quality of Life to a person with diabetes is a very different thing to Quality of Life to a patient with COPD that in turn is very different to quality of life when talking about dementia. Yet we expect the recipient of the message to do the hard work of interpreting this.

The real challenge to us as marketers is to look beyond the term and really drive out what Quality of Life really is for the condition or severity that one is interested in.

We therefore need to look at a check list of considerations that are addressed to help to turn Quality of Life into something that can help us to meet the challenges and needs of our customers and differentiate our brand from its competitors or generics

1. The treatment goals for the physician

2. The level of interest that the physician may have in the condition itself

a. And any other HCP involved

3. The impact that the condition has on the physician

a. Personally

b. Financially – the impact that the impaired QoL may have on his budget

4. The impact that the condition has on the patient

a. Functionally – what they are capable of performing

b. Emotionally – how it makes them feel

c. Psychologically – how it impacts on their self-confidence, self-esteem etc

5. The impact the condition has on any carer

a. Functionally

b. Emotionally

c. Financially

6. The actual language – pertinent to the disease – not “one size fits all”

However, we must also, remember that in the cost conscious environment in which we operate today, “Quality of Life” is not just some nebulous marketing claim that helps to make a physician feel good about what he or she is actually doing. It is a claim with a financial reward for a GP. Just look at the QOF criteria which awards surgeries achievement points for:

* managing some of the most common chronic diseases e.g. asthma, diabetes
* how well the practice is organised
* how patients view their experience at the surgery
* the amount of extra services offered such as child health and maternity services.

And then there are QALYs or Quality Adjusted Life Years which are widely used in health economics and medical decision-making to assess the extent of the benefits gained from intervention in terms of health-related quality of life and survival. QALYs are a measure with significant repercussions on physicians and patients which brings a whole new dimension to Quality of Life – metrics and measurement.

Obviously the portrayal of health in QALYs is far from ideal, since, for example, the definition of perfect health is highly subjective and it has been argued that some health states are worse than death. It is no use pretending that QALYs are anything but a crude measurement, but the use of QALYs in resource allocation decisions does mean that choices between patient groups competing for medical care are made explicit. QALYs have been criticised because there is an implication that some patients will be refused or not offered treatment for the sake of other patients and, yet such choices have been made and are being made all the time. However big the financial pot, choices still have to be made.

So now “Quality of Life” is much more than a happy, smiling patient. It is hard cash and physicians tend to be very, very motivated by cash that they receive for hitting targets or the budgets that they receive for treatments. It is up to us as marketers, to get our presentation and marketing of Quality of Life beyond the obvious. We must look beyond a catch-all phrase, look at the real functional and financial benefits for physicians and the emotional benefits for physicians and patients and then Quality of Life might actually mean something and present real opportunities for competitive differentiation.

The Author

Chris Marks is a Director of The MSI Consultancy Ltd

Article originally published in Pharmaceutical Marketing, June 2007

Drug Repurposing


April 26th, 2007

Introduction

In recent years, the pharmaceutical industry has experienced a difficult period whereby productivity has not kept pace with increases in R&D investment. To counter this issue, an increasing number of companies have been focusing on drug repurposing, i.e. the development of novel uses for existing drugs. Although repurposing of drugs is not new to the pharmaceutical industry; large companies using classical life-cycle management strategies often extend drug use into new indications to preserve or extend the value of a pharmaceutical brand. A clear example of such a classic approach can be seen with. Seroxat and the extension of the product’s original license for the treatment of depression, to a much broader range of uses including; treatment of social anxiety disorder, obsessive compulsive disorder, post traumatic stress disorder and panic disorder. Of the 50 top selling brands in 2004, 84% have had additional indications approved since their initial launch in the US, and a further 6% are known to have subsequent indications in development. However, the appearance of companies founded exclusively on drug repurposing reflects a general trend today that seeks to maximise the investment in R&D and reduce the risks of drug development to the industry.

The benefits to the R&D organisation of repurposing are clear. There is a significant reduction in risk as the start point is an approved compound with established safety and bioavailability profiles, proven formulation and manufacturing routes, and well-characterised pharmacology. Therefore, repurposed compounds can enter clinical trials quickly, and at a lower investment cost than completely new chemical entities (NCEs), while avoiding two of the common areas for failure of NCEs, namely human safety issues and pharmacokinetic profiles.

Case Study

To illustrate, Requip (GSK) and Mirapex (Boehringer Ingelheim) were not developed from scratch for Restless Leg Syndrome. Both products were already licensed and established for use in Parkinson’s disease. For the repurposing organisation there is some additional expense for a Phase IV study in support of the new indication, in applying for the SNDA, as well as for marketing the new indication once it is approved, however, nothing like what it had already cost the companies to discover ropinirole and paramexipole and take them through pre-clinical, Phase I, II, and III trials in the first place for the original indications in Parkinson’s disease.. After all the cost to develop a new chemical entity was in excess of $800m in 2001 (Tufts Center for Drug Development), current Eli Lilly estimates put the cost of a new medical entity at $1.2 billion and they forecast it will reach $2bn by 2010… The result – weekly new prescriptions for Requip in the US quadrupled in Q1 2006 after it was launched for RLS in Q2 2005.

Two types of drug repurposing

Known compound-new target

Drug repurposing is based on two core principles. The first is that a single molecule often acts on multiple targets. Taking advantage of this, one repurposing approach focuses on the identification of secondary or so-called “off-target” drug actions, followed by the development of the compound in a new indication where the secondary target is relevant. Historically, compounds with such marked off-target effects have been considered “dirty” because of the side effects they induce. However, the undesirable side effect of a compound in one indication may sometimes provide a desirable effect in another indication. This is the “known compound-new target” approach.

Known mechanism-new indication

The second principle is that mechanisms relevant to one disease or biological process are often involved in several biological processes. So, the second repurposing approach is to establish the relevance of a known drug to a new disease. Sometimes scientific links have been established between the mechanism and the disease, and between the mechanism and the compound, but not between the compound and the disease. At other times, the link between the compound and the mechanism is well established, but the new medical significance of the target is discovered by chance during clinical studies of the compound’s original indication. Repurposing efforts based upon the new medical potential of a known compound is a “known mechanism-new indication” approach.

One of the most significant and well known examples of the “known compound-new target” approach is the revitalization of thalidomide by Celgene in the US. Thalidomide was originally prescribed in the 1950s for nausea and insomnia in pregnant women However, as has been well documented, its use caused severe birth defects in children whose mothers took the drug in the first trimester of pregnancy. . In a surprising 1965 article, an Israeli doctor reported the remarkable effects thalidomide had had in alleviating complications of leprosy. It was later discovered, that in addition to its sedative effect, thalidomide had antiangiogenic and immunomodulatory effects, including the inhibition of TNF alpha… In 1998, Celgene received approval from the US Food and Drug Administration (FDA) to market Thalomid® (thalidomide) as a treatment for leprosy. Since its release, Thalomid has become the flagship product for Celgene, now with an additional indication for multiple myeloma, and through controlled clinical trials and FDA compassionate-use programs, the drug has been found to be effective in treating a myriad of disorders, including certain mycobacterial and autoimmune diseases, HIV and AIDS-related afflictions, cancer, and miscellaneous skin conditions.

Merck’s finasteride, originally prescribed to treat prostate enlargement and marketed in the UK under the name Proscar, presents a clear example of the “known mechanism-new indication” repurposing approach. In the early 1990s, finasteride, which blocks conversion of testosterone to dihydrotestosterone, was also discovered to prevent male pattern baldness. Commissioned clinical studies on the compound then revealed that finasteride,at much lower doses than used to treat prostate conditions (1 mg rather than 5 mg), could be used to treat male pattern baldness, reducing the chances of side effects. As a result, in December 1997 the FDA approved finasteride for the treatment of hair loss in men under the brand name Propecia.

Marketing challenges

Many people may have the incorrect perception that drugs that have found a new purpose are ‘me-too’ drugs, with all the negative associations linked to such molecules. However, that is not necessarily the case. Not least if they offer a solution to a previously untreated or untreatable condition, or where current treatments do not meet customers’ needs, such as with thalidomide and its use in the treatment of leprosy. Conversely, when they are perceived as ‘lifestyle’ drugs e.g. Propecia, then the challenge to make the medical profession consider them relevant can be significant

The essential issues that face repurposed drugs are market exclusivity (in the face of possible generic competition), differentiation (from the original indication) and the issue of what is known as a ‘dirty’ molecule.

Market exclusivity

However, although there can be exclusivity benefits to line extensions, US and EU regulatory reform has reduced effectiveness of indication expansion as a standalone generic protection strategy. An additional indication only extends exclusivity for one year in the EU. Indication expansion must therefore be paired with a method to differentiate the product in the new use, preventing off-label uptake of generics in the new indication (see figure 1).

Fig. 1

As a consequence, the challenge for the brand originator is to establish a sufficiently strong presence in the market to be able to withstand generic competition, if it comes. Even if direct competition does not occur, there is always the risk of off-label use of the generic. This requires sufficient time ahead of loss of exclusivity. Marketing alone may not provide the necessary brand protection, hence the need for formulation or other additional barriers e.g. new method of use patents. For example, Requip was first launched for use in Parkinson’s in 1996 and then for RLS in 2004 in the EU and 2005 in the US. Requip is not due to lose protection for the active ingredient until 2007 in the USA and 2008 in Europe, and GSK have filed a new application for Requip CR, which should help to maintain the brand’s position in the market.

Differentiation

A truly differentiated value proposition is the classic marketing challenge in our increasingly competitive markets, and is no less an issue for a repurposed drug as for the original molecule. Without demonstrable ‘value’ then as ever it will fall foul of NICE and or PCT prioritisation.

If there is a clear and recognised unmet medical need that the newly repurposed molecule can satisfy better than existing treatments, then differentiation is not an issue initially. In some cases it may even be easier for the repurposed drug than the original molecule as it may be first into an undeveloped market. Hence Propecia had limited competition when originally launched for male pattern baldness.

However, the challenge is often to overcome the cynicism that the pharmaceutical industry is ‘creating a disease’ what has become known in the press as disease mongering if the new indication is not well recognised Restless Leg Syndrome (RLS) had this problem initially, even though the condition was clearly described in 1944 by Professor Karl-Axel Ekbom, is common (in the US, up to 8% of the population may have RLS) and may be under-diagnosed. However it is now well recognised by such bodies as the National Institute of Neurological Disorders and Stroke in the US, has been reviewed by Bandolier in the UK and has a definitive guideline for treatment.

In many cases the real marketing challenge is to develop the market from a relatively low base, while also differentiating and positioning the brand effectively.

What about dirty molecules? – STEPS program for Thalomid

So how did Thalomid overcome the issue of tetragenocity?

When the FDA accepted the benefits of Thalomid® outweighed the risks, they alerted the manufacturer that the drug would be approved provided Celgene submitted plans for a controlled distribution system and agreeable labelling. Over the next few months, Celgene worked with FDA, the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention, the Canadian Thalidomide Victims Association and numerous professional health organizations to craft the most restrictive distribution and monitoring program in the history of FDA. With the System for Thalidomide Education and Prescribing Safety (S.T.E.P.S. ®) Program in place, on July 16, 1998, FDA approved Thalomid® for Erythema nodosum leprosum (ENL).

This innovative, restricted distribution system is included as part of the Thalomid® (thalidomide) prescribing information. Clearly, the S.T.E.P.S.® program was developed because of the toxicity associated with foetal exposure to Thalomid® (thalidomide) and to minimize the chance of foetal exposure to Thalomid® (thalidomide). Celgene Haematology Oncology Consultants and Customer Care representatives work with patients, prescribers and pharmacists in the S.T.E.P.S® program.

The S.T.E.P.S.™ Program consists of five general components: 1) Registration of patients, participating physicians and pharmacies; 2) Required pregnancy testing before and throughout thalidomide treatment; 3) Counselling in effective contraception; 4) Comprehensive physician, pharmacist, and patient education; and 5) Patient informed consent.

Since its inception, over 125,000 individuals have taken advantage of Celgene’s innovative S.T.E.P.S.® program in order to receive the potential therapeutic benefits of Thalomid® (thalidomide).

Summary

The key issues companies need to take into account when pursuing drug repurposing, are firstly to recognise that while they will be marketing the same molecule, it will be aimed at meeting very different needs and therefore represents a very different and distinct opportunity with its own unique challenges.

Therefore, companies need to undertake a thorough process of analysis, insight, and strategic thinking to ensure they thoroughly understand the unique challenges they face, rather than simply thinking this is an ‘add-on’ to the original business.

In many ways the repurposed drug needs to be separated and treated as a separate business opportunity, while ensuring the marketing in the new therapy area does not undermine that in the original.

Subsequently, the usual marketing challenges will be applicable to the repurposed drug, namely the need for differentiation and clear positioning and targeting to the relevant healthcare professionals, particularly since the molecule is likely to be known for treating another, potentially very different problem and possibly used by a different group of prescribers.

Finally, there is the additional challenge of market exclusivity if the molecule has lost its patent protection already, however few companies are likely to undertake repurposing without some degree of protection.

The Author

Dr Paul Stuart-Kregor is a Director at The MSI Consultancy.

Originally published in Pharmaceutical Marketing (PM), April 2007

Diagnosing Underperformance in a Brand


April 26th, 2007

One of the great truisms in life is that it is better to prevent than it is to treat. This is true for both our own approach to our health and also true for our customers in the way that they view many conditions. So when it comes to marketing brands why, once we have spent significant time and effort developing them do we often ignore the signs that all is not well?

In recent years the pharmaceutical industry has embraced the whole concept of “brands”. But increasingly, the need is not just for brands, but for healthy brands. Simply put, we need to remember why we have embraced brands – they add value. So it is essential that the brand remains fit and healthy in order to continue to add value to the business and ensure they continue to add value to out target customer.

As marketers, we spend many millions of euros/pounds/dollars in the development of our products, and then significant sums in developing our products into brands. But, how often do we take the time to ask whether our brand is still in a fit state for the purpose intended? In our experience, not often.

As an industry, we spend a fortune ensuring that our clinical trials programme is able to contribute towards continually updating our product claims in order to give us competitive advantage at a functional level. But, do we take a similar marketing approach to ensuring that our brand is still differentiated, still delivering the messages that we intended in the first place and still conveying the values and emotional benefits that we wanted to establish in the minds of our customers? Indeed are these still relevant, compelling, motivating and meaningful?

I have always been struck by the willingness of the pharmaceutical industry to change the direction a brand is taking as evidenced by the frequency with which brand messages and campaigns are changed. However, this is often not to because it is necessary for the brand, but because either the product manager or advertising agency has changed. The introduction of new marketing personnel or agency staff cannot be the driver of change if we are trying to build sustainable brands, at least not if we are going to be genuine guardians of our own brands! It is essential we remember that this is what we, the marketers are; guardians – responsible for looking after the brand for the short time that it is in our charge.

The brands we look after are assets that need to be nurtured to grow to their full potential. – and we need to be conscious of the fact that it takes many years to build healthy brands and only minutes to harm or even destroy them.

But before you lull yourself into the belief that what has been suggested is clearly not appropriate to your brands; let us remember a few basic themes that commonly occur, which at least raise the need for us to consider reviewing the health of our brand.

There are the obvious candidates for internal circumstances, when keeping a regular barometer on the health of the brand is critical:

* When the brand is crucial to the overall performance of the company
* When management have a viewpoint that greater performance is possible

In the first case, the need to ensure that the brand is continually meeting customer needs and is seen as differentiated from its competitors is of paramount importance. Regular business intelligence gathering where the brand’s attributes can be checked against a robust list of criteria is the cornerstone of diagnosing potential problems, even before they occur.

Secondly, we must establish a clear understanding of where potential growth can come from. For instance, do we really understand the drivers of prescribing that fuel growth and do the current positioning and messages really trigger or exploit these drivers? Unless we can demonstrate that we do and we are, then senior management will be perfectly entitled to their views. The worst thing that can happen is that they are right and the brand has the opportunity to grow, but we haven’t recognised and acted on it.

And so to the external circumstances:

* When you think you are doing everything correctly but something is not right
* When the market is changing

Let us examine the first, a common enough situation where actually nothing is apparently wrong. Growth need not be poor or below expectations and all the obvious marketing bases may well be covered, but something just doesn’t feel right. How do you know something doesn’t feel right? As experienced marketers, we should have a feel for our brand. It is often the minority responses in a qualitative market research debrief, an outlier view at a Dr meeting or even an unusual response from a member of the sales force, that can be the trigger that makes us recognise we need to find out more. In essence, you need to act early. Failure to act or even ignoring what is being said, by even a small minority of the target customer group, can often signal that something is not well.

But, without question, the most critical time for a brand health check is when something has changed or is about to change in a market. The environment has changed or is about to – be that political, economic, social or technological; A new competitor is about to launch or has launched; an existing competitor is taking share from you or even more fundamentally, Drs needs have moved on.

So what is a brand health check?

In the simplest terms, a brand health check is a tool designed to provide a simple and cost-effective way of assessing and improving the effectiveness of brands by clarifying purpose and assessing importance, identifying what is working and what is not and checking the links between the brand and the business objectives. It is NOT a laborious process of market research, albeit it should include market research.

The challenge is to remain objective and to make sure the research captures all aspects of the brand and all audiences who come into contact with the brand.

What is crucial, and the first stage must be to gather the evidence about how the brand is performing. This will involve both desk and more formal, but small-scale, qualitative market research amongst internal and external audiences.

The key aims are to find out:

* What audiences think about your brand and why
* What do audiences associate with your brand
* How well your communications are getting the right message across
* What influences audiences to behave the way they do
* What are the barriers (if any) preventing people from using your brand
* What is your offer and what are the product benefits
* Is the brand consistent across all communication channels
* Has anything changed, and to what extent, that affects our brand

We then need to think this through internally:

1. What did we establish as the vision for the brand? Is what we are doing with current materials, messages, campaign, tone of voice and resourcing loyal to the vision?
2. What has changed in the market since we last carried out a brand health check? Is what we have tried to say still pertinent to the needs of our customers? Have our customers changed? Have their needs changed?
3. Do we need to improve or change anything? If we do then, where do we believe we need to improve? On what aspects? In which areas?
4. Is what we intended to be communicated internally being delivered? Are we being consistent and are we addressing the key drivers of brand performance? Across the various departments and hierarchies involved in delivering the messages to the target customers?

Concurrently, look at the marketing challenge externally …

1. What are the levels of awareness of our brand? Do customers understand what our brand offers and does the brand communicate in a way that demonstrates to the target customer the understanding of the needs of that customer?
2. Is the brand still relevant? Does it provide significant differentiation over competitors and what are these in the minds and words of the target customers? Does it address the prioritised needs of target customers? How does the company capabilities required compare with identified competitor companies?
3. Are the messages being delivered motivating, compelling and differentiated? Are the messages consistent such that the brand has a clear identity for the target customers that is consistent with what is intended by the brand positioning and the brand vision?
4. Does the brand command respect or trust amongst target customers?
5. In what ways does the brand add value to the customer and how does this value come across?

This evaluation of the health of the brand will allow a common view to be established of how the brand is performing. We can then identify the key issues that must be put right NOW and the answers that are needed from a more long-term point-of-view (as may be addressed by changing structures, undertaking clinical studies etc).

Fundamentally, it allows the brand guardian the ability to check back against everything that went into the creation of the brand and to evaluate how, why, where and what has changed and think through why? The Brand Vision, The Brand Value Equation, The Brand Positioning Statement and the Core Proposition should still be intact.

Case Study

If there ever was a company that invented and then dominated a product category and a market, it was Xerox. Plain paper xerography transformed document duplication and eradicated competing categories. They not only invented the category, they innovated in the channel by perfecting one of the best personal selling skills training programs ever. (Their internal training was so good that they built a separate business around it.)

Also, their research centre developed the idea of windows-type software that they gladly showed to Steve Jobs. So, they were clearly smart people who developed great products and concepts, and they knew how to manage.

While Xerox is far from dead, the one-time hot glamour stock has dropped in value on a significant scale. The business press reports that while the category pie is getting smaller, competitors continue to slice into Xerox’s wedge.

Why? The problem seems to be rooted in their failure to maintain their once powerhouse brand position to look to the future, and anticipate the evolution of technology, as the convenience of true replication file transfers with software like Adobe Acrobat begin to shrink the need for paper copies. Without question, their advertising slogan “The Document Company” got to the point, but are they too late in releasing their grasp on their original technology to anticipate the next generation of customer needs?

So, what can we learn from Xerox that can apply to Pharma? Any business must have a set of critical issues, and a philosophy of brand management that answers these questions:

* Who is the customer?
* What market are we in?
* Is our brand still relevant?
* What will the future look like?

Perhaps Xerox, awash with its success, forgot to keep asking these questions of itself in a way that would have kept them in the forefront in meeting their customers’ needs.

Of course markets change and our customers change, in terms of structure, culture and needs. To remain relevant to customers the functional and emotional benefits of the brand need to be refreshed to meet these changes. But this does not mean “throwing the baby out with the bath-water”.

Orange has remained consistent in the drive to communicate that “The future is bright” despite having had four different brand owners since launch. Why? Because, this is the essence of its vision. But from the days of communicating the functional benefits of its services to today’s Dolphins, Racoons, Canaries and Panthers the ‘Orange’ brand has remained acutely aware of the changing needs of customers and the way to communicate effectively through a regular brand health check.

Great brands adapt and refresh to the changes around them within the confines of the defined brand vision to keep them modern and relevant and to prevent them from becoming marginalised. Poor products change based on the whims and perceptions of individuals seeking to leave their mark on the product.

Maybe that is why great brands have a regular brand health check built into their brand plan. Do yours?

The Author

Chris Marks is Managing Consultant at The MSI Consultancy.

Article originally published in Pharma Exec Europe, April 2007

Encouraging New Thinking in Strategic Planning


March 26th, 2007

How many pharma marketers, faced with the annual ‘chore’ of writing a strategic plan, have decided not to take the risk of injecting new thinking into next year’s plan, but have instead decided to stick with the tried and tested thinking which appears to have worked in the previous year?

If you are guilty of this, you are not alone – but you are taking a bigger risk than you realise.

Too often the process of strategic planning takes the ’safe’ route of doing more of the same. This can be for a number of reasons – including laziness – but the most common is sticking with what you know, playing safe and taking the route of apparently lowest risk.

But this approach is actually hazardous, because low-risk can mean low initiative, as it tends to excludes new thinking. And it is this which can often break a brand out from simply plodding along. Only when the market is not changing is there an excuse at all for such a ’same-old’ approach – and there is not one part of the healthcare world where the market is standing still. So why are so many strategic plans?

If it ain’t broke…

If you take a look at most pharma industry strategic plans, there is generally little real difference between current plans and those from three years ago. Yes there are some changes but it is very much tinkering at the margins. Indeed, I have actually come across so-called strategic planners who simply indulge in a little cutting and pasting to change some dates, and hey presto, this year’s plan is complete. Difficult to believe, but depressingly true.

Why is this? The answer is that too many marketers in our industry try to play it safe, taking the view that being risk-averse is the best way of surviving in a world where new thinking can sometimes be viewed with suspicion. If it ain’t broke, don’t fix it, runs the old saying, which translates into: last year’s plan worked, so let’s carry on with doing the same thing.

But the truth is that this approach is anything but safe. Can there really be anyone working in pharmaceutical marketing who really believes that the market is standing still? We are in an environment of constant change (and if we’re honest we always have been), but that change is moving at a faster pace than ever before.

Although this change might not match some of the volatility seen in some consumer markets, comparing the marketplace today with that of just a few years ago shows marked differences. The problem is that, in general, pharma marketers will only change what they are doing when they see a significant, sudden change in the market – for example the launch of a new competitor. Strategic thinking shouldn’t take this reactive approach; it should evolve with the market place and so should our plans.

Plan to Succeed

So why is getting the strategic plan so important? To some extent, if you need to ask this question you shouldn’t be in marketing at all, in this or any other industry. But even otherwise competent marketers don’t always realise just how important planning is in achieving success in the market.

There’s little doubt that some view the planning cycle as a chore, mainly designed to keep senior management happy. But a well-crafted plan actually makes the marketer’s job easier, clearly identifying objectives, breaking them down into manageable chunks, and giving a framework for measuring success.

Equally important, of course, is the role of the plan in making a case for the allocation of the necessary resources to achieve those objectives, in the face of conflicting bids from elsewhere within the company.

A well thought-out and written plan will enable the marketer to have a dialogue with management to help them understand the issues, the solutions, and the resources needed. Crucially, it will enable senior management to look at the risk-benefit balance, and decide if it warrants allocating the resources requested.

To do this, they need to know not just that the proposed strategy has worked in the past, but could it work better, and will it continue to work in the near to medium future.

Unfortunately, too many marketers don’t know what works and what doesn’t, and this stems from a lack of understanding of how customers make their prescribing decisions, and how we truly compete in the market. In other words, good strategic planning needs sound insight – and this means constantly looking afresh at the market, and ensuring new thinking is undertaken based on a true understanding of customers and why they do what they do. Obvious, really, but still relatively uncommon.

Insight

Perhaps one of the reasons that pharma marketers appear to be so risk-averse is that they don’t truly understand what drives prescribing behaviour. If a particular strategy appears to work, there is often a worry that changing it with a view to making it work better might cut out the bit which is delivering results.

This is in part understandable – but the key is not to be conservative and unchanging – it is to build a better understanding of why customers make the decisions they do. That way, new and creative thinking can be based on sound foundations, and any risk-taking becomes calculated and consequently less hazardous – and far more likely to yield results.

Too many people in our industry don’t really know what the steps to success looks like, so measuring it becomes nigh on impossible. In that case, how can they be sure that their plans are sound, other than by sticking with what they know, what has worked in the past to deliver (the best?) results?

Unless you understand how prescribing decisions are made, you can’t measure how successful you are being in influencing those decisions. In too many of the plans I see, the criteria for measurement are based on input and/or activity measures, rather than output or business gain measures.

New thinking in strategic planning needs to be driven by new behaviour from customers. The key is having the insight in what is driving customer change.

It’s no good simply looking at historic behaviour, based on simple data. That will only tell you what has happened, whereas planning is all about looking ahead to what is about to happen. To be able to do this as accurately as possible means looking at the drivers behind the figures, and understanding what trends will continue into the period being planned for.

That in turn means that the marketers needs to think about three things: where my business is currently coming from; how my customer is changing; where my business will come from in the future and therefore, what I need to do differently.

Risk-Averse

Because this whole process involves making judgements about the future, there is an element of risk involved. But it’s vital to emphasise that in this context, ‘risk’ and ‘hazards’ are two different things.

Risk is the basis of enterprise, but successful entrepreneurs understand that they must do everything to minimise uncertainty, so that any risk is taken on a calculated basis. That doesn’t mean always playing it safe and taking no risk at all.

Unfortunately in the pharma industry, there is too often a reluctance for individuals to stick their heads above the parapet, sometimes exacerbated by a corporate ‘blame’ culture. As we know, this can stifle creative thinking, and lead to stagnation and paralysis – which is why it’s so important that marketers are given both the skills and the encouragement to undertake new thinking.

That is very different to reckless risk-taking. There is a middle ground between stultifying risk-aversion and reckless, gung-ho chancing. It’s called calculated risk, and it’s based on true understanding of the market.

Take a look at any truly different and successful pharma marketing campaign. It’s likely that it will stand out precisely because it has dared to be different. However, if that daringly different approach is based on customer insight, and sound knowledge of the market, it’s not really a risk at all. It just looks so to the uninitiated.

In fact, it’s far more risky to do the same-old, tried and tested things based on no insight, even if at first glance this appears to be the safe option.

Do Different

So how can we encourage new thinking during the strategic planning process? How can we convince marketers that they need to ‘do things differently’, and break away from the cycle of simply repeating what has come before?

This change in mindset has to come from managers, who must challenge their teams to think in a different way. The way to do this is to give them the skills to gain real insight into the marketplace, so that they see for themselves the changes in customer behaviour and prescribing drivers – then the need to adapt plans and make them evolve will become self-evident.

It’s not about teaching them to write better plans. It’s about equipping them with the ability to gather the right data, to analyse that data to provide the right information, and then to translate that information into genuine insight.

We do have a tendency to over-complicate the process. Good marketing comes from talking to customers. New thinking doesn’t have to be blue sky thinking. It can be as simple as reflecting changing attitudes in the market.

Creative or Methodical?

It has been said that strategic planning is an oxymoron, because strategy is about creativity, and planning then grinds that creativity out of you. This is more false than true. Whilst there is a grain of truth there, the balance between creativity and process is possible to achieve – provided that we accept a relevant definition of creativity in this context.

It is a fairly commonly held view that the research that underpins the process of gaining market insight is the ‘uncreative’ end of marketing, and that its rather disciplined approach tends to stifle creative thought, which many marketers still view as the lifeblood of their profession.

But in fact a sound understanding of the market can create a structure in which that creative thought can be channelled, ensuring that it translate that understanding into winning strategies which will help achieve the objectives outlined in the plan.

If this sounds like an uncomfortable attempt to inject some science into what many view as the ‘art’ of marketing, then perhaps it is – and I don’t apologise for that. In all areas of marketing, and not just the traditional ‘creative’ areas of marketing communications, a balance of creativity underpinned by a methodical analytical approach is called for.

At the strategic planning stage, this combination is vital. Get the critical decisions wrong at this stage, and no matter how much creativity is injected at the tactical stage, you are doomed to failure.

New Thinking

If pharma strategic plans are to deliver the continuing success for the industry, then they require a massive injection of new thinking, based on a sound understanding of our changing marketplace.

Too often pharma marketers, on approaching the task of writing a strategic plan, take the view that there has to be a very good reason to change what has come before. I would argue that the opposite should be the case.

Change should be the default position; planning for the same again should only happen if there is a compelling reason for it. Playing safe, and/or a lack of understanding of the market, should play no part in the process.

Often, the marketers who are most admired by their peers are those who are prepared to go out on a limb, who are perceived as risk-takers, who are regarded as ‘thinking outside the box’.

Their success is certainly based on the willingness to embrace the new, to explore innovative ways of achieving their objectives. But the common denominator which binds them all is that their perceived risk-taking is firmly footed on an extensive knowledge and sound understanding of their customers. They recognise that their markets are constantly changing; they take the time and effort to understand what is driving those changes; and they incorporate this into their new thinking when they are planning.

It’s time for pharma marketers to follow their lead.

The Author

Dr Paul Stuart Kregor is a Director of The MSI Consultancy Ltd.

Article originally published in Pharmafocus, March 2007

Building Stakeholder Partnerships to Boost Patient Compliance


October 26th, 2006

As an industry, we spend millions and millions of pounds chasing new patients who might benefit from our products. From GP advertising to huge sales forces, expensive symposia to extensive medical education programmes, disease awareness campaigns to supporting patient action groups.

And yet here’s the strange thing: once we have them in the net, we let as many of half of them go again very quickly. Haven’t we heard of the expression ‘A bird in the hand…’? If we could just approach the effectiveness of our market-acquisition activity in our market-retention strategies, the returns could be huge.

I’m talking here about compliance; actually, I’m talking about adherence, and I’ll explain the difference in a minute.

Too often the industry wrings its hands and complains that the ‘healthcare system’ is not doing enough to ensure that patients prescribed drugs actually take them – and that that same system is ignoring pharma when it comes to initiatives to tackle the problem. I suggest that is substantially wrong. The problem is the total lack of proactivity (with a few honourable exceptions) within the industry to take a leading role in developing such partnerships.

There are many examples of stand-alone industry initiatives to improve compliance, but why does the industry seem to want to go it alone? Is this a case of pharma once again looking introspectively, regarding compliance as its own problem which it must solve alone. Does the industry truly believe that only it is concerned with the problem, and so it must press on alone to find a solution? If so, it is deluding itself.

The industry’s own self-interest actually coincides with everybody else’s here (including the patients’ and the funders’). Patient compliance is something which affects Government, doctors, pharmacists, funders, insurance companies, the industry, and not least the patient themselves.

So why is there so little collaboration between these stakeholders to combat ‘health illiteracy’, changing the way that patients view their therapy, to give long-term healthcare cost savings, brand retention and better consumer relationships – as well as boosting industry return on investment?

Why are we leaving it to the ’system’ to boost adherence? Why aren’t we doing more? And what should we be doing to build really effective partnerships to keep hold of those patients we spend so much trying to acquire?

Concord taking off?

Much has been written on the subject, especially with the emergence of the concept of concordance in recent years. But concordance is only part of the solution. We should get our terminology right first.

What I am addressing here is adherence. That, according to the World Health Organisation, is “the extent to which a person’s behaviour – taking medication, following a diet, and/or executing lifestyle changes, corresponds with agreed recommendations from a health care provider.”

That is very close to compliance, which is a measure of patient behaviour – the extent to which patients adhere to the agreed ‘treatment’ approach, which is larger than but also includes how they take the medicines they have been told to take, in other words, according to the prescribed instructions.

The concept of concordance is a different part of trying to at least solve the same problem (i.e. adherence). Concordance, according to the Medicines Partnership, is about “shared decision making about medicines – and other treatments – between a healthcare professional and a patient, based on a partnership where the patient’s expertise and beliefs are fully valued.” An important partnership, then, but one from which the industry appears to be excluded.

To realise just what is at stake for the industry here, let’s try to get a grip on just how big the problem is. Despite the cynical view about ‘lies, damn lies and statistics’, the figures are pretty clear.

At any one time, 70% of the UK population is taking medicines to treat or prevent ill-health or enhance well-being, with many long-term illnesses now tackled via prescription medicines. This incidentally has led to a growth in prescription drug spending in the UK from £3.4bn in 1994 to £6.1bn in 2001, over 10% of the total NHS spend. So it’s an important part of our country’s health care strategy.

Studies show that 28% of people are not adhering to the prescription within just ten days of taking a new medication – and that doesn’t count those who don’t fill the first prescription. This includes those who stopped of their own accord, those who intentionally missed a dose, and those who unintentionally missed a dose.

These distinctions are important, because different approaches are required for each category – we’ll look in more detail at the reasons for non-adherence in a moment.

When it comes to medicines prescribed for chronic conditions, the Medicines Partnership estimates that 50% are not taken as prescribed, with some conditions such as asthma experiencing a staggering 80% non-adherence rate.

What’s more, while patients simply forgetting to take their medicine or renew their prescription will always be a problem, a worrying 61% of all non-adherence is reckoned to be ‘intentional’ – mainly fears about side-effects, worries about costs, or simply not believing that they need the drug.

Mutual Gain

Clearly this is a worry for the pharmaceutical industry, because patients not taking their medicine, especially in chronic conditions, means fewer sales and the need to spend marketing resources finding new patients. On that basis, funders should be quite pleased!

But of course it’s not as simple as all that. The consequences of non-adherence are far-reaching, and end up being a concern to everyone. For the patient, it can lead to ill-health and reduced quality of life, and ultimately reduced life expectancy.

This in turn can lead to avoidable costs elsewhere in the NHS – much better to have a condition controlled via medication than treated in an expensive hospital bed. So ultimately the arguable short-term financial gain to the health care system ends up being a longer-term drain on resources.

And wider society also loses out if a healthy, economically-active person, managing their condition so that they can get on with their everyday life, suddenly becomes inactive through illness, constituting and economic ‘double-whammy’ of expensive treatment-seeker and ex-contributor to the wider economy.

In addition, the pharma company takes a hit in terms of lost revenues, especially for chronic conditions, and just as importantly, negative perceptions about their drug efficacy and tolerability.

The weakness of the go-it-alone option that many in the industry seem to be adopting is shown when you start to look at the reasons given by patients in research as to why they don’t use their medicines optimally.

The fact of the matter is many patients start from the point where they believe that the potential harm from any medicine outweighs any benefits. The balance between the belief in the necessity of the prescribed medication – especially long-term – and concerns about the long-term effects and possible dependence is tipped towards non-adherence.

It’s difficult to see what the industry can do to turn this perception around on its own. Only better communication between health care professionals and patients can allay these fears, so pharma has to be engaging with HCPs, as well as all those who influence them, to build real partnerships which give doctors the tools with which to tackle these real patient issues.

As long as communication directly with patients is forbidden – and realistically, even if it were not, given the poor reputation for self-interest our industry enjoys in the eyes of the general public – we need the collaboration of all health care professionals to drive up adherence. We should be pushing at an open door, given that their agenda, or at least its objectives, is pretty similar to ours.

And we should not forget the complexity of the problem; from not filling the initial prescription, through refusal to make behavioural changes, incorrect dosing, forgetting or skipping doses, to self-termination of the medication for whatever reason, each problem needs to be addressed separately. The widely hailed concordance concept is one good tool to tackle this, but how can this work if there is not similar concordance between all of the stakeholders involved in providing patient care?

The Industry’s Role

So what should our role be in these partnerships? Well. Let’s put aside for one moment the role of driving them (I’ll come back to that). The main role of the pharmaceutical industry in any society should be to develop safe and efficacious therapies. Full stop. Your shareholders might disagree, preferring instead to concentrate on profit alone, but in any stakeholder partnership, developing good therapies is the pharma industry’s primary role.

So developing drugs which work, have fewer side effects, and which are easy – or at least easier – to administer would go some way to playing a useful role in promoting adherence. But because medicines are for patients, and patients only benefit if they use them optimally, the industry’s role needs to go further than that, and needs to step into the area of information.

If we are agreed that concordance, where there is a real consultation process between a patient and their health care professional, is an effective way to go, or at least more effective than simply expecting the patient to do what they are told, then increased and broader patient knowledge is vital to make this process work. So the industry can play a role in ensuring that the dialogue which takes place between the patient and their doctor, nurse, pharmacist or other HCP achieves the best outcome for everybody involved.

All patients want to be more involved in decisions about treatment; even amongst the older generation who have traditionally accepted that ‘doctor knows best’ there is a majority demanding more involvement – and this proportion rises dramatically amongst younger age groups. Only a third of patients want no involvement in treatment decisions.

Pharma understands this well, but it is not getting the message across to HCPs. Studies have shown that doctors underestimate the degree to which they instruct patients, and consistently over-estimate the degree to which they consult and elicit their views.

Like it or not, doctors are listening less to the industry. So an industry-led compliance campaign will only ever have limited effect. Which is why the industry should be driving true stakeholder partnerships by demonstrating shared goals, shared concerns and a win-win mindset. HCPs participating in a true partnership involving them, patient groups, funders, Government and industry are more likely to listen to the message. – such as Roche’s Mellibase approach that provides doctors and patients with the support to drive better motivation and hence better adherence through driving motivation.

So why isn’t it happening? Perhaps post HSC, the industry is still reluctant to open itself to accusations of self-interest in promoting such partnerships. But are we really so unconfident that we can’t persuade other stakeholders that we have a confluence of interest?

Let’s leave the last word to Asta Moller of the International Council of Nurses, who addressed a recent conference on adherence, pleading with the industry to get more involved.

Seek out the guidance of nurses organisations and their leaders,” she said. “Work with these organisations, and with individual nurses. Bring training, useful tools for their patients, resources for their community initiatives. Get as close as you can to those whom you seek to help. Draw from the knowledge and experience of nursing to help shape your goals and strategies.”

Health care stakeholders are crying out for us to drive partnerships which will ultimately increase our return on investment. What are we waiting for?

The Author

Dr Paul Stuart-Kregor is a Director at The MSI Consultancy.

Originally published in Pharmaceutical Marketing, 2006

Ensuring Consultancy Delivers Rather Than Ending Up an Expensive Luxury


September 26th, 2006

Consultancy is widely used in the pharma industry. But are consultants adding real value? Steve Highley, MD of MSI, says that properly briefed, managed and measured consultants can reap big benefits to your marketing.

“A consultant is someone who borrows your watch to tell you the time” – a cynical view of the role of the consultant, a breed which is ubiquitous in many industries – including pharma. It’s easy to adopt such cynicism, especially given the amount that the industry spends on consultants.

According to the Management Consultancies Association, the worldwide market for management consultancy is now worth $100 billion. This represents a ten-fold growth over the past decade.

Whilst these figures cover all industries, pharma consultancy spending has also grown, although at a slightly slower rate. Management Consultancy magazine reports an increase in spending of 10% in the past two years.

Given the issues facing the industry (poorer product pipelines, increased cost of bringing products to market, need for peak sales earlier in the product life cycle, pressure from governments reducing costs resulting in increasing barriers within markets), coupled with a lack of the right kind of experience within some marketing teams, the case for using external consultants is stronger than ever – provided they are used wisely.

So what is the role of the consultant? Are they simply telling pharmaceutical companies what they already know, or do they add value? For example spotting opportunities which those close to a brand or a product cannot?

Having taken the decision to use the help of consultants, how do you choose which ones to work with? And how can you be sure that they are delivering real value – in other words, how do you measure their effectiveness?

All of these are common questions, often asked in a cynical tone – and who should be surprised at this? Over the years a number of books have been written talking about the ‘dark side’ of consultancy practice.

Common complaints include consultants who deliver pre-defined, ‘one-size-fits-all’ solutions to every client, with the only thing changing on the report being the company name and date; or alternatively, those who go in, spend lots of time on analysis, and then recommend solutions which are near impossible to implement, or, when implemented, take the company backwards rather than forwards.

This attitude is identified by Peter Block, author of Flawless Consulting, one of the seminal works about consultants. In an interview with US magazine Management Consulting News, Block states, “Consciousness about consulting has increased since it’s become such a big business. But clients are always going to be sensitive about bringing in consultants to tell them what they think they already know, or to implement what they don’t have the courage to do. Human beings just tend to be reluctant to accept help or admit their vulnerability.”

What this highlights is the importance of both consultant and client getting it right if there is going to be value added from the use of consultancy.

What is a Consultant?

Perhaps a good place to start a definition of what a consultant is – or should be – is to identify what they shouldn’t be. The tongue-in-cheek book Bluff Your Way In Consultancy implies that consultancy and bluffing are essentially the same thing – somebody who pretends to know how to do your job better than you.

With a string of companies downsizing over recent years, it’s true that many individuals and small bands of people have set themselves up as consultants almost overnight, with no consultancy training or experience. Many of these believe that because they have worked in a number of managerial roles, they are sufficiently qualified to be a consultant.

To be fair, there will be some who, over time, with a good contacts book, a professional attitude and experience, will start to provide a good service – but there are unfortunately others who provide fuel for books such as Bluff Your Way

The key point is this: consultancy is not just about passing on experience, even if this can be one aspect of assignments. Professionally trained consultants are aware of best practice thinking in terms of appropriate processes, methodologies and project approaches. Experienced consultants also have the added dimension of applying appropriate project approaches in varied situations so that know often the most effective and efficient approach to solve client problems.

Vitally, consultancy is about providing that extra sizzle, insight, nuance, that bright or innovative idea that can make a difference in driving competitive edge.

This can manifest itself in a number of ways – the development of innovative launch strategies based on creative segmentation models and understanding of prescribing levers, redefining structures, refining or adding processes and methodology to address real marketing problems, as well as giving confidence to marketing teams to implement plans in the best and most effective way.

So why does it sometimes go wrong? Usually, it’s down to one or more of the following factors: the problem or issue that needs to be addressed is inappropriate for the use of an external consultancy; choosing the wrong consultancy; an inexact brief which leads to unclear expectations of both parties; the way the consultants are managed internally; and lack of measurement leading to an inability to judge results – with the potential for disappointment.

The Right Job

The first step in using consultancy successfully is to identify those tasks which are best suited to bringing in outside expertise – and understanding which jobs are better handled in-house. There is a danger we see consultancy regarded as a panacea for intractable internal problems best suited to internal solutions.

But choose the right task, and consultancy shows its true value. Briefly, there are three main reasons fro bringing in outside help:

  • Where the expertise doesn’t exist in-house (capability)
  • Where it may exist in-house, but resources are stretched (capacity)
  • Where the client company needs an independent check on what they are doing (objectivity)

In a marketplace which is changing rapidly, consultants can bring a level of insight and experience borne out of working in many different situations, something which can be difficult to achieve internally for all – even the very biggest pharma companies. Without this level of insight internal teams are unsure what to do differently, with the inevitable tendency to ‘play safe’.

In this situation, a consultancy can provide ideas on new and/or improved ways of marketing the brand, bring experience of what might be a new market for the client, can sanity-check projected RoI, and crucially can bring understanding of the implications of what the client is planning – and advise on the things that need to be done to succeed.

This is especially useful in situations where there isn’t necessarily a problem to solve, but where the task is to use the benefits of current success to do even better in the future. One client we worked with was doing really well, but had no fixed idea about the implications of NHS changes. They used us to help them achieve innovative thinking in relation to how they should set up a organisational structure that aligned with the future marketplace based on NHS change, their future product portfolio and the competitive challenges they were facing.

They were able to do this knowing that it would be backed up with our expertise and experience. In this case, consultancy enabled them to support calculated risk-taking – the lifeblood of any enterprise.

In another situation a client wanted to move from what appeared to be an intractable number two position in the market against a strong competitor. This required a fundamental re-think of the market, resulting in a new segmentation approach. In turn this allowed the formulation of a new brand positioning, and series of messages allowing a link between the current brand identity and what was required in the future to drive share success.

This, combined with an innovative communication and promotional campaign, resulted in a shift in internal expectations on what was possible. Early testing showed that the new marketing approach would result in a significant share increase if executed effectively.

The client on their own would not have been able to generate this alternative approach. They needed outside expertise to develop an innovative project approach and manage all aspects of the assignment, from market research, to briefing of the ad agency, to sense checking progress during the new marketing campaign using appropriate quantitative, qualitative and interpretative techniques. They needed the challenge to think differently, as well as stimulus and fuel to allow alternative approaches to be explored.

But not all tasks are suited to consultancy, and understanding this can help avoid bad experiences. Trying to use consultants to back up internally a pre-defined view is rarely successful. Neither does bringing in outside help to act as a ‘referee’ in internal political disputes. And too often consultants are taken on to replicate the work of a perfectly capable management team – a waste of resources, and a sure-fire way of demotivating the internal team.

So the questions need to be asked: is this task appropriate for an external consultant? What type of consultancy is needed? What competence is required (branding, strategy, research, organisation, marketing execution, and so on)?

Brief Clearly

If you want to get the most out of your consultants, clarity of expectation and briefing is critical. If the client does not have a clear idea of what they want to achieve – then it won’t be a surprise if the consultant is unable to meet the objectives!

Be realistic Consultancy is seldom the ‘magic bullet’ (Just occasionally it is!), especially where it’s a question of introducing a me-too product. In addition make sure you are not asking the consultant to achieve results which are dependent on factors and decisions that are outside their control, they can strengthen the ability to succeed – rather than guarantee success.

We do come across clients who know that they need help, but are unclear exactly how the consultancy can aid them. Don’t be afraid to discuss the brief with potential consultancy partners. If they question the brief, don’t take it personally – more likely it is the sign of a group of people who are used to challenging thinking, and evolving it. That’s usually a good sign.

A below average brief doesn’t necessarily mean that the consultant will fail – a strong consultancy will still be able to deliver good work to a weak brief. But clear direction again maximises the chances of achieving the objectives.

A brief should contain the following elements:

  1. A thorough, thought-through background to the project
  2. An exact description of the challenge you are facing
  3. Specific objectives you are asking the consultancy to achieve
  4. Any constraints – internal or external – you are working under
  5. Who the consultant will need to work with internally
  6. Timescales
  7. Budget

But be prepared to listen! After all you are often asking a consultancy to help because they have experience; take advantage of that. This may result in modifications to the proposed objectives but that is not necessarily a bad thing. Just evolution.

Making the Right Choice

Selecting the right consultancy for the job is the single most important part of making sure that results are achieved – and the area where the process most often goes wrong. So how do you set about getting your carefully-crafted brief into the hands of the right potential consultancy partners?

Finding consultants is much like finding any other set of professional partners – a combination of research, word-of-mouth recommendation, networks and market knowledge.

You should consider the size of consultancy which is right for you. Big is not always beautiful; it’s too easy to fall into the ‘no-one ever got sacked using IBM’ syndrome. Bigger consultancies can mean (although not always) a bigger project approach, bigger teams – and bigger fees. You need to judge whether your project justifies that, or whether you be better off working with a smaller consultancy which will be more flexible in its decision-making, and where you will see more of the senior people and principals.

There are several routes you can take to draw up a longlist. Directories such as Pharmafile are a useful starting point, although they don’t tell you that much about an organisation. So talk to colleagues to get recommendations, harvest your networks. Also, read the trade press – those who are being published regularly are likely to be up to speed with the latest thinking, and if they’re getting into print, they generally know what they’re talking about.

Combine your written brief with a verbal brief, preferably to the consultancy principal. This will enable you to gauge the culture of the organisation, and the consultancy to really understand the brief. When reviewing the proposals, there will be several criteria to take into account: do they demonstrate a clear understanding of the project?; is their methodology and process clear?; can you see innovative thinking?; can they deliver on time and on budget? Are they convincing you that they have the experience and competence necessary to achieve the project objectives?

It is especially important to make sure that you are not paying for the consultants to go up the learning curve with you. This is probably the main source of the ‘borrow your watch to tell you the time’ sentiment. You need to make sure that the people you will deal with are actually bringing skills and experience which you don’t already have in-house.

Equally important is personal chemistry. You will be working closely with the team, so make sure you are going to get on.

Getting Results

If picking the right consultancy is vital, then so is managing the ongoing relationship to make sure that the process is working. Pitfalls generally happen when the brief changes after the selection – surprisingly common – or when there is an inconsistency of personnel on either side. The client should appoint a project champion, who needs to be available, and possess the right skills, not someone who will be floundering out of their depth.

Preventing the natural mistrust that can occur when a team of consultants arrives on the scene is a question of communication. If internal people understand what the consultants are adding – and crucially, that they are on the same side, working to the same objectives – then much of the resentment and insecurity will vanish.

Ultimately, achieving RoI on money spent on consultants requires you to measure their contribution. As we have seen, this is much easier when there are clear objectives against which to measure. You should build in milestones into the project plan, and review progress regularly.

The wrong consultants, badly briefed and managed, will simply be a cost, and will lead to resentment and frustration and end up being an expensive luxury. But used properly, consultancy can add huge value, bringing capabilities, capacity and above all objectivity difficult to find even in the very biggest and well-resourced companies. And even then, it is very rare that companies, especially big companies, genuinely have the structure and culture to encourage truly challenging thinking.

If the brief doesn’t add value, then neither will the consultants. But get it right, and consultancy has a invaluable contribution to make to driving competitive advantage.

The Author

Stephen Highley is Managing Director at The MSI Consultancy.

Originally publised in 2006

Triggers and Motivations for Prescribing (Part Three)


June 26th, 2006

In the first two articles we discussed the value and the issues in taking this approach. Now I want to address the ‘how’ from the marketers point of view.

Doctors, like all human beings, are rational and rationalising in even measure. That is, they will take a reasoned approach to their decision-making, at least when first evaluating their prescribing choice. However, they will also use a rationalised argument to defend their position.

One of the significant issues in the current and future healthcare environment is to demonstrate the ‘value’ to the doctor of intervening with your brand, given the ready availability of cost-effective alternatives.

So we need to address the different layers in the rational decision-making hierarchy; then we need to provide a rational ‘value based’ justification for that prescribing behaviour as and when the doctor has adopted our brand in his or her repertoire.

Clearly the foundation for that hierarchy is the brand’s performance against the traditional, functional criteria – efficacy, safety and tolerability. But this is unlikely to be a trigger or motivator to change prescribing behaviour, more an entry-level requirement. As such, it is the first layer we need to understand and address with our brand but only to ensure we establish our credibility to be able to ‘play’ in this market.

Sometimes, we may need first to establish the scientific foundation for our brand, and not just if we have a different mode-of-action, to ensure we have a firm basis for our functional arguments. Do not assume that general practioners always have a deep understanding of the scientific rationale on which your brand is based.

However, remember this is just entry level,: not, as demonstrated by much pharmaceutical messaging, the essence.

We need to dig deeper to provide clear, compelling reasons why our brand should be chosen. Increasingly, in our experience, this is going to require demonstrable patient populations where the (marginal) benefits of our brand are/could be of benefit.

Only when specific management situations are discussed do priority issues/needs, concerns and dissatisfactions emerge in a meaningful way that enable us to truly understand what makes the doctor do something different – i.e. the triggers and motivators.

We all know doctors intervene in different patient situations for medical reasons (e.g. relative risk), and these can be an important part in hitting the right buttons. Intervention can also be related to the particular patient’s situation – the ‘value’ that treating that patient represents. This is a sub-conscious judgement that GPs commonly make. Capturing the elements of this decision can potentially provide a compelling trigger to prescribing.

Assuming we do not have a significant medical reason and clear meaningful functional product advantage, the doctor is more likely to make the effort to change embedded prescribing practice if we can get them to buy in emotionally to our promise.

The performance of Seretide in the UK, when the more emotive ‘moments’ campaign kicked in, provides one of the best examples of this in recent years. It worked on the clinical level (i.e. an efficacy promise), and the emotional (i.e. satisfaction) level, based on the real ‘insight’ of what it feels like to be an asthma sufferer.

So as we look at each of the management situations we need to understand the more emotional framework we can tap into.

Digging deep is the answer. Only by using specific and meaningful management situations will the priority issues/needs, concerns and dissatisfactions emerge in a way in which we can identify them. Then we can understand true motivators to prescribe and the triggers we need to push, on clinical, personal and emotional levels, ensuring we satisfy them at each level.

If, as we suggested right at the beginning of this series of articles, getting the brand messages in chime with the prescriber’s own drivers is crucial to making the proposition truly compelling, then this kind of ‘digging deep’ is a key part to gaining that elusive competitive advantage.

The Author

Dr Paul Stuart-Kregor is a Director at The MSI Consultancy.

Scientific Approach to Marketing Intelligence


June 26th, 2006

Introducing some of the scientific rigour of the laboratory into using market intelligence can maximise the effectiveness of marketing decisions, and lend a structure to marketing creativity, argues Alex Blyth.

When it comes to developing their actual product, the pharmaceutical industry invests heavily in analytical tools to ensure that the fruits of their research meet critical clinical standards. Clearly, a pharma company would never rely on subjective opinion to gauge whether a product is safe or effective – that would be ethical, scientific and commercial suicide!

So why are so many marketing decisions, which will ultimately determine the success or failure of these products in the marketplace, taken with the reliance on underpowered research.

Gathering market intelligence is in itself an expensive business, so not using robust analytical processes to turn that raw data into the basis for sound decision-making is tantamount to tearing up pound notes and throwing them down the drain.

Even today, there are pharmaceutical marketers out there who undervalue research, regarding marketing as an ‘art’, reliant on flair to achieve success. But in all areas of marketing, from initial new product development through to tactical marketing communications, a balance of creativity and a methodical approach is needed.

And whilst at the tactical communications end this balance might sway more towards creativity, at the marketing planning stage the approach should definitely be more scientific.

Too many pharma marketers prefer to rely on selective data and assumptions to support critical decisions. But running with instinct and creativity without a sound scientific platform can be disastrous.

Panos Kontzalis, former President of EphMRA, described the ultimate goal of pharmaceutical market research as “to provide added value to the decision making process by delivering reliable and relevant information based on customer needs.” By adopting a scientific approach, this ‘added value’ can be maximised.

For most marketing strategy (and scientific) decision-making, it is not a case of proving one, single, correct solution. Rather, it’s about testing various hypotheses and deciding which one best fits the overall objectives and strategy of the company. The scientist will do just this, testing each hypothesis to see whether it stands up.

By contrast, marketers will too often start by making a decision, and then will undertake research to justify that decision. If the results of that research don’t support the initial course, the research can be sidelined or ignored. Alternatively research will be used purely to obtain information rather than as part of hypothesis testing.

A commonly held view is that market research is the ‘uncreative’ end of marketing, and that reliance (or as some would see it ‘over-reliance’) on its disciplines is somehow sterile and will stifle creativity, something which is (rightly) valued in the profession.

But in fact, the opposite is true. By analysing what has happened in the past and what drives current behaviour a scientific approach can identify what is needed for future success. However, just as in the laboratory, it takes a creative ‘stroke of genius’ to develop possible winning strategies to actually achieve it.

Creativity then needs to be tempered with scientific reality checks on whether a hypothesised strategy is viable and commercially worthwhile. In marketing planning, creativity is ‘the viscose sweet stuff’ you sandwich between slices of hard evidence-based direction and strategic validation. A sandwich that provides ‘structured creativity’.

There are many steps in the marketing planning process where ‘structured creativity’ can be applied to improve the competitive advantage and financial return that can be achieved from the resulting strategy.

Quantifying the critical success factors for winning in a market, and evaluating our relative capacity to fulfil them, will help us understand the expected commercial value of investing in a new product or a particular product strategy. To do this accurately requires a picture of the market to be built up segment by segment, and ’structured creativity’ has a big role to play in how those segments are divided and the competitive advantage that is gained from ‘cutting the cake a different way’.

Robust market research uncovers the different factors that could provide lines for segmenting the market. Creativity is required to see the market in a fresh light and to develop segmentation hypotheses. Scientific validation is then used to show that the new way of segmenting your market not only works but actually gives you enough of a competitive advantage and a return on investment to make it commercially worthwhile.

For example, if you are entering a market where the customer defines the patient segments by the severity of the disease, and you have entrenched competition in mild, moderate and severe… where do you go? The creative stroke is to turn the market on its head and get customers to see it another way that benefits you, them and the patient.

It may be that this comes in the form of a new may of segmenting patients by their aspirations (or those of their family and/or carer), life situation, quality of life etc. However, the creativity needs to balanced by the practicalities of proving that the segmentation model has clear ‘markers’ that can be used by customers and your sales teams to discriminate one segment from another and that your product is more likely to be prescribed when customers think of patients in this new way.

The next sandwich stage in the marketing planning process is identifying which segments you are actually playing for, and the strategy required to maximise your returns. A scientific approach is required to filter out non-winnable segments, and to prioritise where necessary. To win, your product and company profile will need to be able to outperform competitors and meet certain levels of performance in the Critical Success Factors (CSFs) for that specific segment (e.g. efficacy requirements, pricing levels, marketing budget requirements etc). However, to reach this stage we had to first start with a thorough understanding of what triggers customers to prescribe.

Understanding customer’s prescribing triggers is not just about what they are but how important each one is to achieving success in each segment. Robust quantitative research techniques, including the use of conjoint trade-off analysis, enables us to precisely understand how much impact each prescribing trigger can have and what levels of performance are required to not just meet customer needs but actually excel enough to win that type of customer..

The result is a Target Product Profile (TPP) for each segment that indicates the market potential for the ideal product to ‘win’ that segment and, by assessing your product’s profile against the TPP, the market potential for your product.

With the TPP telling us the likely returns from improving performance in any key areas, we are now in a position to make meaningful decisions about whether an investment is going to be worthwhile. Therefore, the TPP can helps us to more effectively direct the development of the product (e.g. clinical trial programmes), and develop more motivating combinations of messages to trigger prescribing change.

Once each segment is turned into a financial forecast using the TPP, patient flow dynamics and customers’ treatment behaviour can be modelled to help identify the possible levers of growth for each segment. The creative filling is in developing tactics that move on these levers of growth. Once again we sandwich this with hard market research to quantify how much the levers move, estimate the possible Return on Investment the proposed strategy could have and what the Critical Success Factors are.

As with many scientific approaches, all of this requires a level of knowledge and thinking which is not always immediately obvious. But whilst there is a place for instinct, flair, creativity – call it what you will – making decisions about new R&D initiatives towards commercial goals should only be made on the back of sound, robust information and analysis.

The adoption of a more scientific approach amongst those commissioning, carrying out and above all using market research will lead to better quality decision-making, and ultimately more commercial success. Marketing thinking on unsound foundations is doomed to failure, no matter how creative it might be; if we can create that structured creativity, we can ensure that we move forward with both flair and a sound basis for making commercial and marketing decisions.

The Author

Alex Blyth is a Consultant with The MSI Consultancy.

Marketing Excellence


June 26th, 2006

‘What is marketing excellence in pharmaceuticals and how do you know if you are truly excellent?

The drive for competitive advantage in an industry that has over the years needed to become more sophisticated in its marketing and sales approach is heating up. Now more than ever companies like GlaxoSmithKline, Novartis and Sanofi-Aventis are seeking to embed ‘Marketing Excellence’ throughout their companies to stay ahead.

This is hardly a surprise when companies are being squeezed by their customers both payers and clinicians to bring products to market that represent good ‘value’ propositions. This demand is where Marketing Excellence comes in; working both more efficiently but above all more effectively to add value to the brand, beyond the molecule– some of which can be passed to the customer while the rest is retained.

Accepting there are always industry leaders and followers, this article is for those individuals who not only don’t want to be left behind, but also ideally want to be trail blazers inside their companies to genuinely embed Marketing Excellence to achieve commercial success.

Questions the feature will tackle are:

  • What is “Marketing Excellence”?
  • How is “Marketing Excellence” defined?
  • How do you know if you are truly excellent?

What is Marketing Excellence?

Marketing: the president of the Chartered Institute of Marketing declared: “Isn’t a function. It is an attitude of mind.” Many will wonder how an attitude of mind can be researched, developed, protected and above all evaluated to drive excellence.

Add to this the many different definitions of marketing and marketing excellence to be found in books and papers on the subject – most of which involve doing things to customers – and the confusion mounts.

To reach a workable definition of ‘Marketing Excellence’ let’s start with the Marketing process which can best be described as a process for:

  • defining markets;
  • understanding and anticipating the needs of the customer groups;
  • monitoring competitor activity and understanding competitive advantage
  • putting together (superior) value propositions to meet those needs;
  • profitably and in a competitive environment
  • communicating these value propositions to those in the organisation responsible for delivering them and getting these people to buy into their role;
  • playing an appropriate part in delivering these value propositions
  • monitoring and reviewing the perceptions of customers and the value actually delivered.

So marketing might be defined as effective deployment of resources and competencies to satisfy target customers, by delivering superior value profitably and then going out and DOING IT, all in a sustainable way in a competitive market!

It is no surprise then that ‘Marketing Excellence’, judging by the many ‘awards’, is often seen as operational e.g. effectiveness of a marketing campaign.

While this is an end result of the marketing process and is part of what marketing is trying to achieve it is not all there is to ‘Marketing Excellence’ in my opinion. Not least as one marketing campaign is transient and/or short term– surely excellence is about sustaining that performance.

‘Marketing Excellence’ can and should be viewed from both an external and internal perspective. However, you must recognise that ‘Excellence’ by definition is subjective, and what is judged as excellent may change over time.

However, there are some core principles that I believe will underpin ‘Marketing Excellence’ event though viewpoints of what is excellent may change over time.

Externally, the only marker of true value is whether the customer perceives that you have excelled or not. Therefore the marketing process or function is not an end in itself its a process to enable this to happen.

Internally, it is reflected in the whole attitude, vision, culture, and approach to how marketing is practised – striving for the best result, both external (customer value) and internal (effectiveness plus brand value) at all levels. These are the ‘enablers’ that help drive excellence.

So ‘Marketing Excellence’ could be defined as:

Right brand, right benefits, right relationship
that continues to deliver value that meets or exceeds customer expectations
in their relationship with the brand and the company over time,
as judged by target customers,
and that maximises the value of the brand to the company
in a competitive market to achieve the commercial goals of the organisation

‘Marketing Excellence’ therefore demands a combination of high quality information, insightful analysis, creative interpretation and response in order to develop sustainable competitive advantage through differentiated offerings.

Understanding the market and the customer; true customer insight – the danger of seeing what everyone else sees.

Most pharmaceutical companies have access to a huge volume of information about their market place which has to be sorted and interpreted effectively.

The driver of marketing excellence is not the amount of information available, the real crux is whether that information REALLY tells the marketing strategy decision-maker what she or he needs to know to develop the value proposition for the target customers.

Marketing excellence has to be about asking the right questions of the right people in the first place, and sometimes having the eyes and ears to see something different.

Once the ‘excellent marketer’ has gained a better understanding of the market, they are better positioned to choose where to compete and where not to compete.


Segmentation – the final marketing frontier

The basis for segmentation is a key factor in the process of understanding customers and developing real insight. It is fundamental to the success of any resulting marketing or business strategy.

Effective segmentation is one of the most difficult challenges for any marketer in the pharmaceutical industry and the most critical success factor in any marketing or business strategy. Too often the supposed segmentation models developed are targeting with a different name. They are not customer needs and motivators based.

Marketing Excellence has to be about uncovering the best segmentation scheme for your business. Notice, also, that I used the word “uncover”. Segments exist out there in the market place; we do not create them in our office or ivory tower.

Developing the value proposition

The second most difficult and equally critical success factor in developing excellent marketing strategies (after segmentation, see above) is that of creating a winning value proposition. The value proposition is the expression of superior customer benefit that you offer, together with the value that you expect to gain in return for delivering those customer benefits better than your competitors.

It MUST address the key needs on which the customer bases their ‘buying’ decision AND connect with the customer.

Successful implementation

Having identified and understood the market place, chosen where and how to compete, you must make it happen. This may seem rather obvious, but many excellent strategies have failed due to poor implementation – hardly ‘excellence’!

Successful implementation is dependent upon excellent planning and communication.

In order to develop and implement winning marketing and business strategies it is essential to have a clearly defined, well thought-out, understood and accepted process.

This process must be comprehensive in its coverage and description of what needs to be done, by whom and in what sequence. The process must also be compatible with the other processes needed to run a corporation and interfaces must be clearly understood and seamless. The driving elements of these processes must be absorbed into the culture of the corporation, if they are to be truly effective.

Profitably

Increasingly competitive markets put pressure on the organisations resources and the financial returns. Marketing Excellence has to include delivering the desired results in the most profitable way, not merely matching competitors spend.

Monitoring the value delivered

By establishing and monitoring key performance indicators of customer value, the excellent marketer ensures that the implementation of their strategy stays on track and/or evolves as required. The starting point is to assess customer satisfaction in the context of the definition of ‘Marketing Excellence’ i.e. versus customer needs & expectations.

Innovation based on insight

True excellence does not stop there! The excellent marketer will be the one who can stay ahead of the competitor by anticipating the next standard and being the FIRST to create that offering as a differentiator.

Excellent marketers continuously learn, both from their own activities and performance and from that of others.

They capture and share the knowledge in order to maximise learning across and within the organisation. There is an openness to accept and use ideas from all stakeholders. Excellent marketers look beyond today and today’s capabilities, to constantly challenge the status quo and seek opportunities for continuous innovation and improvement that add value.

Does Pharma live up to ‘Marketing Excellence’ particularly with all the restrictions imposed?

To exemplify the ideal of Marketing Excellence to which pharma should aspire requires taking a broad view of what currently represents marketing right across the pharmaceutical industry and beyond, looking at highly respected marketing in other fields, such as FMCG, business to business and financial services.

Pharma is not different from other industries in needing to develop and maintain customer satisfaction. The challenge is even more acute now that the ‘value proposition’ needs to be far more than just the chemical entity.

I are sure that many companies think they are excellent at marketing, but do customers feel that the company delivers the “right brand, right benefits, right relationship that continues to deliver value that meets or exceeds customer expectations”? I doubt it.

Recent examples of Marketing Excellence include the original Orange telecoms proposition that evolved and stood the test of time for nearly 15 years, creating huge value for consumers and organisation alike.

Orange looked at the existing telecoms market with a new vision, that broke the mould – that the future was about wireless communication.

They worked hard to understand consumers, their needs and frustrations (customer insight).

Perceptive market research led to a proposition initially for business customers (segmentation) that was about satisfying needs and overcoming frustrations across the whole package rather than just competing on features of product (innovation) by being the first to introduce call packages for example (value proposition).

They were prepared to challenge established norms, including the marketing mix, not addressing the mix until they understood the benefits the consumer was looking for (successful implementation)!

The result was a paradigm shift in the telecoms market.

Moreover, the ethos never changed:

Step 1: Clearly developed value proposition that evolved with the customer.

Step 2: Execution that added to the core ethos across the whole mix.

Step 3: Consistency of brand values and relevancy of the value proposition (excellence over time)

Other examples of continued marketing excellence outside pure pharma include among others Durex, the ubiquitous Coke.

Unfortunately pharma examples of Marketing Excellence seem to be few and far between. However, Cipramil and Zyprexa seem to represent some of the best in recent times.

Managing Marketing Excellence – the “Marketing Excellence Dashboard”

The starting point for Marketing Excellence is to assess customer satisfaction in context with the definition of ‘Marketing Excellence’ i.e. versus customer needs & expectations.

Once you understand the gaps goals & targets can then be linked to those customer needs & expectations. In addition, loyalty issues can be researched – what do customers currently feel about the brand; how committed customers are to the brand, and how likely are they to switch,

The ultimate aim is to understand the business drivers of customer satisfaction needs & loyalty issues and then measure & action them.

Particularly when aiming to establish Marketing Excellence around specific brands or therapeutic categories, and to “standardise” the marketing approach across a number of markets (e.g. sales regions within a country; countries within the European operation) the “Marketing Excellence Dashboard” approach can be extremely useful.

Some of this data is likely to be readily available from internal or external sources; other information, particularly “softer” measures, may require the setting up of regular monitoring to generate the necessary data.

The advantage of the dashboard concept is that it standardises the data required from different markets and that having a common approach ensures that individual markets are focusing on the more important aspects of marketing.

Conclusions

“Marketing Excellence” and the customer are inseparable.

Marketing departments must be externally focussed on value generation that meets or exceeds customer expectations, as they change over time.

Perhaps marketing performance needs refocusing and to be monitored in a different way with the key performance indicators being external not internal.

Internal process and communication issues need to be managed as these are fundamental enablers of ‘Marketing Excellence’.

The Author

Dr Paul Stuart-Kregor is a Director at The MSI Consultancy.

Triggers and Motivations for Prescribing (Part Two)


May 26th, 2006

Getting your brand messages – both rational and emotional – to link with your target prescriber’s own drivers is perhaps the single most effective way of ensuring your overall brand proposition is compelling. And this is even more important in the current environment for products which have minor points of differentiation, where small incremental advantages need to be exploited not in isolation, but as an integrated whole.

Understanding what motivates each group of prescribers to choose particular treatments is crucial to enabling marketers to define compelling, differentiating positioning and – vitally – motivating brand messages.

The answer lies in insightful research – but too often the research conducted by the pharmaceutical industry fails to provide the fuel needed. This might seem strange given the amount of time and money we spend on market research, but if you approach the task in the wrong way then it is unlikely you will find the right answers.

One of the problems lies with the marketing teams that commission the research in the first place. Whilst they may recognise the problem (for example that they do have a relatively me-too product), and whilst they may appreciate that market research is going to help provide the answer, too often they go about it in the wrong way.

We see large and extensive research qualitative studies used to first scope the market landscape, then the product profile is used to understand the perceived positives and negatives or to flesh out prescribers needs. However, without truly probing as to the value of the product features in the context of the prescribers roles and responsibilities, the end result is a very traditional top-level analysis that focuses only on the obvious parameters of efficacy, safety and tolerability, in whatever guise. . When this is then validated through quantitative research there is the perception that the necessary depth of understanding has been achieved.

However, the resulting segmentation and/or positioning and messages are very similar if not the same as everyone else, and could have been identified with less time and money. No surprise then that the resulting strategy is very standard and offers only illusory competitive advantage.

In addition, the way the research is approached has its limitations. Researchers are researchers, they will ask and answer questions as defined. In many cases the research will be piloted, in line with accepted good practice, to test the discussion guide and make sure the information required is being gathered.

However, no one seems to check, at the pilot stage, whether that information is going to help address the challenges that the brand faces; whether the quality of the insight is going to provide the fuel needed to develop a competitive advantage. If not, then the methodology needs to change. Instead what happens is the research runs its course, valid the answers to the questions asked are provided but no real edge results.

Finally, there is a problem when it comes to global launches of new products. If you review the ‘ideal’ research plan leading up to a product launch, as proposed by EphMRA, the sheer volume of research is incredible, covering as it does market, customers, trademark, packaging, pricing, forecasting, detail aid testing etc. The insight market research task is handed over to Business Intelligence who are also trying to cover all the other bases.

The end result is that they follow a traditional ‘road map’ ticking all the boxes as they go. All the research is completed but we are no better off in understanding the true triggers and motivators of prescribing behaviour.

The Author

Dr Paul Stuart-Kregor is a Director at The MSI Consultancy.

Triggers and Motivations for Prescribing (Part One)


April 26th, 2006

Decreasing differentiation between products, a shorter time in which to achieve return on investment (with the consequent increased pressure to gain quicker peak sales), and a difficult environment in which competitive and portfolio pressures are greater than ever – all mean that gaining (product/brand) competitive advantage is ever-more difficult.

Understanding what motivates each group of prescribers to choose particular treatments is crucial to overcoming these challenges by enabling marketers to define compelling, differentiating positioning and – vitally – motivating brand messages.

What exactly do we mean by ‘Triggers and Motivations’ when it comes to prescribing? Many pharma marketers often look only at their brands’ performance versus the straight forward, entry level clinical needs of the clinician and the patient when trying to understand prescribing decisions.

The problem with this view is that the definition is too narrow, and results in each brand coming up with the same default answer: that the only triggers to prescribing are efficacy, safety and tolerability. Although these are of course important, this thinking results in everyone acting the same; just take a look at the brand advertising in GP journals to see what I mean.

What we need is real insight which requires the marketer to delve into the direct, indirect, current and latent triggers and motivations.

To do this we have to look at the different layers of doctor’s thinking which lead them to make a particular prescribing decision.

Clearly the base level clinical needs must to be taken into account, as this will be the starting point of any prescribing decision: efficacy, safety and tolerability. But these are areas in which achieving a competitively advantageous point of differentiation is increasingly difficult.

Finding other triggers and motivations means understanding on one level the prescriber’s priority issues and needs, and these may not be purely functional, on other the ‘nice to have’s’ in product performance Finally, it may be that even more personal, aspirational and emotional factors play a part.

The marketer has to decide in which layer they should anchor the brand positioning to create or maintain that change in prescribing behaviour (although it will always be important to address the ‘entry level’ criteria in some way).

Let’s take as an example the treatment of hypertension. At a macro level, each GP has a treatment path mindset, set in context with when and where they use existing treatments. The ‘step wise’ approach, based on habit and previous practice, is likely to be the most powerful influence in their mindset, followed by the expectation of polytherapy and making a choice based on guidelines and patient differentiators (reinforced by the current patient status).

The general view among prescribers is that their current treatment strategy works, and therefore a new brand will need to have a credible rationale to change that – routine, habit and inertia all work against such a new treatment, which will also generally be at a disadvantage on cost and lack of familiarity, as well as the depth and breadth of available data.

So the approach taken by, for example, Zanidip, based on efficacy and tolerability, is unlikely to work – because it doesn’t offer enough differentiation in meaningful or motivating clinical terms.

So ‘outer layer’ trigger areas need to be explored to help leverage the importance of certain choice criteria where your brand can and/or does perform better than your competitors. These potentially marginal differences can be made much more important when you can give the prescriber a suitable contextual reference or anchor.

Getting the messages – both rational and emotional – in chime with the prescriber’s own drivers is perhaps the single most effective way of amplifying how compelling the overall proposition is. And this is even more true for products which have minor points of differentiation, where small incremental advantages need to be exploited not in isolation, but as an integrated whole.

The Author

Dr Paul Stuart-Kregor is a Director at The MSI Consultancy

Product Portfolio Strategies


March 26th, 2006

Viewing a product portfolio as a group of independent entities means missing opportunities to maximise potential. A thought-through, interdependent approach to portfolio management is the way forward – but this requires a new way of thinking, argues Gerard Doherty of The MSI Consultancy.

Whilst the prospect of a single-product company might seem attractive – no in-fighting over resource allocation, no conflicts of interest, no trade-offs between products – the reality is that no pharma company is like that. And a good thing too, because such a company would be vulnerable, with all its eggs in one basket, and what’s more, a basket with built-in obsolescence.

So therefore the pharmaceutical company must necessarily manage a whole portfolio of products, with all that that entails. And yet many marketers think of each of their products individually, attempting to manage them to maximum effect, whilst in some cases only giving a cursory nod to the wider corporate strategy.

It is inevitable that such an approach will mean failure to maximise the overall potential of the pharmaco. So how do you reconcile the apparently conflicting needs of various elements of your portfolio, balancing the need to achieve corporate goals against the need to maximise the potential of each individual product?

Whose responsibility?

The need for managing the company’s entire portfolio may be recognised at Board level, but often the structures of pharmacos mean that the reality is somewhat different at the coalface. Individual marketers might understand the theory, but as they usually have responsibility for one product – or at best one therapeutic area. Few marketers have responsibility for an entire portfolio so few are in a position to practice, or gain experience of, true portfolio management.

In addition, the reality is that brand management structures are often set up to ‘compete’ for internal resources, with each brand manager fighting for the best resource mix and investment for their product, irrespective of the bigger picture. So individual brand managers may give little thought to maximising anything other than individual elements within it.

This is the traditional model, although we are at last starting to see a change. Some companies are now expecting to see strategies from individual brand managers, which at least take into account the context of the overall company situation.

For individual marketers, this means that they must gain a true understanding of how a portfolio develops, how individual products within it are interdependent, and how to approach resource allocation to ensure that the whole range of products – rather than just the one they have responsibility for – can maximise performance.

There is a competitive imperative at play here as well: with falling margins, fewer new products, and a closer focus on the value that marketing can add, portfolio management will become an increasingly important skill for the marketer who is striving to achieve ‘excellence’ (which of course is all of them, isn’t it?).

Because of their wider corporate responsibility, there is an important role for the Business Unit Manager, who may be able to take a wider overview than the product-focussed brand manager.

So marketers need to start thinking of their ’own’ products not as individual entities, but rather as pieces in a jigsaw puzzle. They need to accept rational assessments of each product’s strengths and weaknesses, allowing resources to be allocated not to those areas whose guardians are best at bidding for them, but to where they are genuinely needed to achieve the company’s strategic aims, whether those are maximum profit, sales growth, market share, or whatever.

The classic approach

Every marketer will be familiar with the Boston Consulting Group (BCG) matrix, which was developed to enable a company to start to think about setting an appropriate strategic objective for each element of its business: building, holding ‘harvesting’ or divesting. The main thrust was to identify the cash generators and the cash users.

However, much like a company balance sheet, the BCG matrix only represents a snapshot of the situation at any given time. And much like a lot of theory, it can be associated with prescriptive, textbook solutions to that situation. And we all know that real life does not pan out like the textbook says it should – at least not always.

The BCG matrix focuses only on market position versus opportunity growth – very limited criteria by which to assess opportunities and capabilities.

The model works on the assumption that being a market leader is what generates cash. Whilst this might be true, it’s also true that a strong number two in the marketplace can also be profitable, meaning it’s not a ‘Problem Child’ or ‘Question Mark’ at all.

The classic BCG model was designed to assist in decision-making at a global level, where the customers, the individual product markets and/or a variety of different scenarios are not considered. But clearly this is very limiting: how can any portfolio management strategy ignore the customer? What about the interaction of several product or therapy-based strategies? This particular approach is therefore not helpful in guiding and assessing the merits of individual product strategies that are developed within the portfolio.

In fact, the task is rather more complicated than can be approached with simplistic solutions – inevitably. So we must look elsewhere to find an effective solution.

Defining the portfolio

Perhaps a good starting point is to redefine exactly what a portfolio is. It isn’t simply a collection of different products, it represents far more than that. In essence, a portfolio, especially in the pharmaceutical context, is a mix of opportunities and risks. It is only by understanding this concept that we can develop a meaningful strategy for managing the portfolio.

Any portfolio of products and/or service presents a company with a range of different market-based opportunities. The concept of return on investment is (finally) well understood within our industry, and the portfolio manager needs to look at the revenue likely to be generated relative to the investment required, in order to establish which is the most likely strategy to meet, or exceed, business objectives.

But it’s not just about RoI, it’s also about managing risk. That risk comes from a number of directions, and it’s important to understand and quantify the various risks before such decision can be taken. The risk can come from the market environment, from competitiveness, and from the company’s own capability to meet market needs.

The aim of any portfolio management strategy should be to optimise the investment so that the balance is achieved on the following three scales:

  • Risk versus return
  • Maintenance versus growth
  • Short-term versus long-term

So how do you go about achieving that perfect balance? The key is to look at the total portfolio as a whole, rather than as its constituent parts separately. It’s no good planning to spend resources on one element of the portfolio without giving some thought as to when and where resources will be needed elsewhere, otherwise you run the risk that resources will all be needed at the same time.

Inevitably, then, there will be an element of prioritisation, and difficult decisions to be made about conflicting priorities. The traditional structure of pharmacos means that this process pits marketers against each other, whereas an approach which focuses on the portfolio as a whole means that marketers will subjugate their own individual product needs to the greater need of the corporate whole (in theory at least).

Looking at the bigger picture means that the portfolio manager can also review different options in a dispassionate way. Clearly it is important that this review is undertaken in the context of individual brands having developed good quality strategic options based on a sound and transparent analytical foundation, using key marketing principles.

Only then can the portfolio manager look at different permutations and combinations of options (by brand) to assess which ones represent the best balance of risk and return over the defined time period, recognising that there may need to be short-term investment for longer-term strength (another advantage of looking at the wider picture: the ability to let the ‘Cash Cows’ subsidise investment in other products for the longer term).

Things to Consider

In developing the portfolio strategy, there are some important considerations to take into account. Thinking through these points should help provide some clarity, and may make what at first sight seems a daunting task appear rather more manageable.

Consider how you can group the portfolio by ‘clumping’ – i.e. linking products together to achieve synergies in return on investment? This is classic Ansoff: Can we present new products to existing customers we are already calling on?

Should you follow the ‘halo’ strategy – allowing weaker parts of the portfolio to feed off the star performers, seeing them as a marginal cost in investment terms? Or does this weaken the return from a sure-fire profit-maker?

Consider what should be the criteria for forming these clumps – therapeutic area; a particular compound; different technologies, a developed competence? Or even, God forbid, particular unmet market needs!

Assessing the Portfolio Strategy

So how do you know that any potential portfolio management strategy is going to be effective? What are the criteria for assessing strategies before implementing them, in order to give the best possible chance that they will succeed?

Any such strategy begins with a set of strategic goals; then it is a case of developing potential scenarios to develop and test strategic options to make sure they are going to meet – or exceed – those goals. This approach will enable marketers to compare the business performance characteristics of any potential strategies.

Scenarios are compared using performance (key metrics, timing and magnitude of results), risk (probability of meeting goals), and portfolio composition (synergies and economies). Key elements of each are:

Performance:

  • Consistency with Vision/Mission/Goals
  • Sales value/growth
  • Profit value/growth
  • NPV
  • Market Share
  • Return on Investment

Level of risk – chance of success:

  • Competitive environmental fit
  • Market environment fit (political)
  • Capability fit (skills)
  • Capacity fit (resources)

Focus of company resources – synergies?

  • Synergistic Effects
  • Corporate Fit

The Successful Portfolio Strategy

Of course, every pharmaceutical company is different. The mix of products in any one portfolio will be unique, both in terms of the therapeutic areas in which those products operate, and the stage in their lifecycles. Most likely it will be a mixture of everything from pipeline through to patent-expired products. But there are certain fundamental truths which can be applied to every portfolio when it comes to planning and managing for success.

First, and most importantly, marketers need to view their individual products as interdependent – different pieces of the same jigsaw – not in an individual way. As we have seen, this will require new thinking.

Secondly, the strategy must have as its first priority the corporate strategic aims of the company: maximum profit, maximum sales growth, maximum market share, or whatever is the corporate priority. Not those of individual products and their specific teams. The key is to subjugate the individual product to the good of the corporate whole.

Of course, to achieve this, long-term thinking is required. Given the short-term nature of much of our industry’s reward mechanisms, and the rapid turnover of marketing staff, perhaps this will also require new structures and new methods of measuring success, other than immediate profit.

Grouping products within a portfolio makes the whole strategy manageable, and easier to implement. The first step towards this is a thorough portfolio review, understanding where each product fits, and looking ahead so that pipeline products can be included in the strategy.

Finally, any strategy has to be reactive to market changes, so a degree of flexibility has to be built in – including in planning the allocation of resources to meet the strategy.

We can’t be in a world where we can concentrate on one product, where life is simple and there are no conflicting demands on resources. But by viewing a company’s portfolio as a whole, we achieve the next best thing: a strategy where RoI is maximised, where each product gets the investment it needs within a secure and sustainable corporate environment.

The Author

Gerard Doherty is a Senior Consultant at The MSI Consultancy

Global Branding in the Real World


January 26th, 2006

Most pharmaceutical companies are multinational, operating across many different markets. But what are the practicalities of maintaining brand consistency while, at the same time, taking into account local cultural environments?

In the globalized pharmaceutical industry, standardized global branding is a fact of life.

In reality, however, marketing is a complex discipline influenced by culture, business environment and a host of other factors. So a standardized global approach may not always be best for a brand’s local competitiveness.

Fast moving consumer goods (FMCG) brands realized some time ago that the ‘one size fits all’ approach does not always work; it is often better to express the core values of a brand in an appropriate way for local markets. Sometimes this can even come down to changing brand names. Unilever’s Becel and Flora both promise lower cholesterol but use different brand names, and Proctor & Gamble call their decongestants Wicks in Germany but Vicks in the UK. The same principle applies throughout pharmaceuticals. What works well in one region may not fit with the culture, prescribers or markets in another. Identical brand attributes cannot simply be imposed in all markets.

Cultural branding, however, is more than just using a different brand name. As we know, a brand is the sum of the tangible and intangible characteristics that differentiate it and make the brand unique in the minds of the customer. Strong brands have a clear vision of what they stand for and satisfy a customer’s needs beyond the functional.

A brand is exemplified by its core values. The ‘brand value equation’ combines the functional/tangible benefits, the emotional/intangible benefits and the ‘value perception’ to create the overall ‘brand value’.

Emotion and motivation

How does a successful brand maintain its connection with the customer? The acid test is whether doctors are motivated to prescribe the brand. Motivation is based on emotions – the words emotion and motivation both originate from the same Latin verb meaning ‘to move’. In order to motivate someone we must move them emotionally.1

Aristotle was the first to recognize the power of emotion to persuade others. He stated that logical argument consists of logos (logic), ethos (character) and pathos (emotion). What applied in ancient Greece still applies today. The best way to get someone’s attention is to stimulate an emotional response.

This is why the most effective advertisements are not informational but emotional. The feelings evoked by an advertisement often have no ‘logical’ connection to the product. What is important is linking the desired emotion with the brand.2

Consequently, understanding how to tap into that emotion, and translate it into a compelling proposition is key, and unlikely to be achievable on a purely global basis.

Communicating the message

Crucial in communicating the brand is the customer frame of reference. We all internalize communications using our own experiences, so the meanings we impose on messages we receive from advertisements vary from culture to culture. Any communication that is developed outside that cultural frame of reference can be misunderstood or not understood at all.

Yet in marketing today, particularly pharmaceutical marketing, messages and communications tend to be developed by a small group, often distanced (both culturally and physically) from the markets in question. Consequently, the local target customer may not understand the message, resulting in little or no chance of us achieving our marketing objectives.

In an industry such as pharmaceuticals, dominated as it is by the US, the situation is often made worse by a lack of understanding of European culture and its variety. Clearly, audiences in Europe will react better emotionally to a Europe-centred marketing approach than a US centric one. It is therefore vital that European marketers work together to challenge the dominance of American imposed approaches that can be unsuitable. But any Europe-focused solution has to be flexible enough to take account of the wide range of cultures and markets within Europe.

The consistency dilemma

The world pharmaceuticals market is vast but 40% of global sales are in the US. This results in some global strategists, usually those in the US, believing that brand consistency is key without any consideration of cultures in other markets. Particularly if the domestic US marketing strategy is successful, it may simply be rolled out across the world.

The desire to retain consistency over the basic brand proposition is understandable, particularly in a climate demanding increasing return on investment.

But how then do we build truly global brands, with consistent propositions, values and brand messages, while ensuring effective emotive connection? We have what seems to be a contradiction: the internal need for a strong global brand versus the importance of local market, economic and cultural conditions.

Know your market

Central to successful implementation is the old adage: “think global, act local” (also known as the ‘glo-cal’ approach.) This does not necessarily mean adapting the brand itself, but rather knowing when to adjust the campaign to suit local cultural or marketing needs while still ensuring that the local core proposition remains consistent with the overall global brand vision.

It is vital to understand the stage of market development and consequent perception of issues. Take the issue of sexual health in men with benign prostatic hypertrophy (BPH). This aspect of BPH is well understood in France, but hardly considered by GPs in the UK. So a different approach is needed in these two markets.

What to change

What is needed is an agreed process for assessing the global brand proposition against local market conditions. Local marketers must be able to demonstrate objectively that their local situation necessitates departing from that proposition.

Generally the value/equity and core values of a brand should be consistent globally. The brand vision, the brand positioning and the core proposition (the added value the brand brings to customers, both functionally and emotionally) are unlikely to change.

In deciding how to use a global campaign local marketers should first consider whether the brand values would work in their local market. Are their customers different (if so, how?) and are their customers’ needs different? Looking at the brand, does it add value in the same way locally as it does in other markets? Can the brand’s core values be expressed and represented in the same way?

In pharma, other national and cultural questions are important. How do patients in the local market access healthcare? How is healthcare delivered to patients? What are the attitudes and behaviours of key stakeholders in the therapeutic area? How do decision makers make ‘value’ judgements (for example, which patients are important to treat)?

What may change then is the emphasis of the campaign, or particularly the emotive communication to reflect the needs and aspirations of each local market, not the core brand.

Meeting the challenge

Marketing success depends on understanding what drives a culture. Simply knowing the right handshake or how to eat in company is not enough. But if ‘commercial imperialism’ is to give way to a more collaborative approach it is equally important to address the attitude of European marketers. European marketers must learn not to simply accept the global edict from ‘the powers that be,’ nor should they be seen as always disagreeing. They should be objective in their assessment of whether or not there might be a better way of doing things at a local level.

The pharmaceutical industry is strong as an industry because it is global, but to survive and thrive marketers must not be afraid to stand up for the European point of view. Cultures remain dramatically different, and healthcare professionals respond to brand and product messages presented in a way that is appropriate to them.

1. Goleman D. Emotional Intelligence. Bantam Books, New York, 1995.
2. David Walsh and Douglas A Gentle ‘Slipping under the radar: Advertising and the mind’ (In press) In L. Riley & I. Obot (Eds.) Drinking it in: Alcohol Marketing and Young People. World Health Organization, Geneva, Switzerland.

The Author

Dr Paul Stuart-Kregor is a Director at The MSI Consultancy.

Originally published in European Pharma. Exec., January 2006

  • Recent Updates

    • Interactive Article – Building Brands Fit For The Future

      MSI Have published the first of a series of interactive articles – Building Read More…

    • Cello Group plc Partner Appointment

      Cello Group plc (AIM: CLL, “Cello” or “the Group”) is pleased to announce Read More…

  • Recent Articles

    • Building Brands Fit For The Future

      Over the years, many individuals and companies have extolled the virtues of building Read More…

    • Small Pharma: What does the future hold for the small, specialised Pharma Company?

      We are all aware that Big Pharma has been seeking to successfully re-invent Read More…